Arabic Simplified 200 Lessons With Key

PRINCIPAL
W. R. TAYLOR
COLLECTION
BY
MICROFO
P.
S. ......
"Arabic Simplified."
CONTENTS.
(Full Index will be found at
PART
I.
The Arabic Verb, Past
5.
Singular.
Interrogative and Negative,
Triliteralism (3 radicals).
7.
Vowels, Figures,
8.
Definite Article.
9.
Letters of Prolongation and
I.
4.
etc.
11.
etc.
Wasla,
II.
Type-form J*
Nouns of Agent and of Object.
Verb JK" Past Tense.
Omision of copula.
Personal Pronouns (for forming
sentences) Exam, paper.
Singular of
27.
28.
29.
30.
16.
Non-joining
Ta
18.
Verb, past du
19.
Construct-State.
20.
Transliteration
&
plural.
jUall
&
etc.
E. Various.
31.
E.V.
32.
cjj^l by J
|
and Negative by
of Prohibition. Comparative
33-
34.
Tableof
pj5=l^ ^j*d.\j
Pronominal affixes.
35.
Passive, Past
&
also
Present.
(Present Future).
Dual and Plural of the same.
Future Particles.
Introduction to 3 Moods.
36.
Verb TO BE
37.
Other Tenses.
38.
39.
Subjunctive
40.
Conversation Exercise
^JÂ^
&
E.
The
Six Forms.
Selections
Commandments.
from
III.
The Noun.
50.
51.
Examination Paper.
E. V. & E. God's Attributes.
Gender.
52.
Regular Plural, Masc.
54.
45.
Ditto in Construction, etc.
55.
46.
Regular Plural, Fern.
56.
Ancient Declension.
Demonstrative.
Relative Pronoun.
47.
Dual.
57.
Agreement of
48.
Dual
44.
-49.
50
.;
in Construction.
Broken Plural
Broken Plural JU!
and
Examination Paper.
PART
E. V.
^42.
Revision of
17.
Examination paper.
41.
letters.
characters, vowels, signs

Marbuta & Alif Maqsura.
Tenses, "Moods,"
Eye, Voice, and Ear Ex.
26.
Hamza, Madda, etc.

Pronominal Affixes
Examination paper.
22.
25.
14.
12.
all
21.
24.
Introductory.
,/
PART
23.
of Less >n 200).
|X"
Diphthongs, ix^
Solar and Lunar Letters. ^/^
10.
end
Case.
Adjs.
58. Assimilated Adjective.

59.
Noun
60.
Examination Paper.
of Superiority.
PART
Some Derived Nouns with Broken
IV.
61.
E. V.
&
E. Scripture.
62.
Noun
of
Time and
63.
Noun
of Instrument.
64.
Quadrisyllable Plural
65
Broken
Plural
J*U
J^*
E. V.
E.
68.
Masdar;
69.
HOW TO
etc.
70
Reading Exercise.
Examination Paper.
V.
Conj.
II.
Conj.
III.
Conj. VIII.
90.
91.
E. V.
92.
Conj. IX.
75-
Conj. IV.
J.I
78
79-
Paradigm of I IV.
Reading Exercise.
8o.
Exam. Paper.
Si.
E. V.
&
82
Coni
E.
"Lord's Prayer."
95.
>
99.
Conj. VI.
100.
PART
to" Weak" Verb.
102.
Doubled Verb.
103-
VI.
Hamzated.
105-
1 06.
Popular Story.
Exam. Paper.
Verbs.
IV. (Hollow).
117.
Conj.
JI8.
Conjs. VII.
&
VIII.
(Hollow,)
120.
Examination Paper.
121.
E. V.
&
E.
Salutations.
122.
Derived Conj. (Surd).

>
109.
Derived (Hamzated).
110.
Exam. Paper.
III.
E. V.
112.
Simile Verb
&
E.
"3. Simile Verb
116.
Reading Exercise.
"Weak"
123-
Hollow
124.
Defective (Subj. and Juss.)
126.
Weak
Doubly Weak
Ya.
127.
Derived Conjs. (Defective).
Wau.
128.
Nun
129.
Verbs
125-
Proverbs.
Derived Conjugations.
\
Defective Verb.
>
108.
US-
Quadriliteral Verbs.
119. Conj, X. (Hollow).
104.
114.
"Ten Commdts."
Newspaper Exercise.
96.
98.
E.
Conj. X,
83-
Intro,
&
77-
107.
Conj. VII.
}
Exam. Paper.
101.
use.
USE A LEXICON.
Proverbs.
74-
forms and
its
Derived Conjugations.
87.
72.
73-
&
Broken Plurals JfU and

Tri-syllabic Broken Plural.
etc.
PART
71-
67.
66.
Place.
Plurals.
Wau
Doubly
130.
(Hamza).
of Corroboration.
N^ma
and Ya.
(Lafif)
of
Wonder
and Jii'sa.
Examination Paper
PART
131.
E. V.
&
E.
All Broken Plurals.
VLI.
More Proverbs.
All the plural forms.
PART
V.
&
E. Suras.
141.
E.
All Derived Nouns.
143.
Diminutive.
144.
Relative Adjective.
Intensive Forms.
146.
PART
X.
etc.
147.
Numerals.
148.
Syntax of Numerals.
Preps. Conj.
Examination Paper.
Interjections,
150.
PART
Exercises
139.
140.
149.
200.
Lessons 151
and Irregulars.
Collectives.
Derived Nouns, Pen-tides,
VIII.
142.
138.
IX.
Syntax.
complete Syntax
in
Arab
style.
Reading Book.
50 (paged from other end, Arabic style).
NEW ARABIC TEXTBOOK
(Extracts from a Review by Professor R.S. MCCLENA.HAN M.A., LL.D., Principal of

College of Arts and Sciences, American University, Cairo).
This volume is one of the best, if not the best, published for
the use of missionaries, officials, and business men desiring a concise
but sufficiently elaborated text, and thoroughly reliable for acquiring
a knowledge of usable Arabic.
"The make-up of the book is such as to please the eye and

not to leave with the student the sense of weariness Avhich frequently
results from the use of poor paper unsuitable type, or a complicated
a rangement. The index is a valuable contribution.
"The author has been
Jj
<.
for over 20 years a resident in Cairo.
the
'
official,
He
Azhar University, and with that

the man on the street, and the fellah,' and is
familiar with the Arabic of the
recognized as an authority on the subject".
"ARABIC SIMPLIFIED"
A Review by
the Rev. Prof.
JAMES ROBERTSON,
D.D., LL.D.,
Emeritus Professor of
Semitic Languages in the University of Glasgow.
"Mr. Upson has undertaken a difficult bask, as anyone who has

attempted to teach Arabic can testify, and he has succeeded. The
task is to give the student not only a competent knowledge of the
laws of the language, but also tLe power to use the language as a
living tongue Avith a literature.
"ARABIC SIMPLIFIED
claims to be a 'practical'
grammar
makes good the claim. It is practicable, in the sense that it

leads the student on by a smooth path, step by step, in a course of
200 lessons, till the whole ground is covered. There are exercises at
The student is
every stage, with well selected vocabularies.
stimulated, by the question and answer form of the lessons, to solve
difficulties, and he is made to feel sure of himself by revision of
work, test questions, and periodical Examination Papers
and
it
" The lessons are

evidently drawn up by a practical educationist, keenly alive to the difficulties felt by the learner and skilful
overcoming them. They also show an accurate acquaintance with

the whole extensive and somewhat perplexing field of Arabic
The introduction, from the very first, and constant
Grammar.
explanation of the Syntax, and the presentation of the laws of the
language from the point of view of the native grammarian, are
in
features beyond
"And
all
praise
with confidence be said that, if the student will

patiently go through this course, following the prescribed conditions,
and submitting his work from time to time for examination by the
Teacher, he will be no mean Arabic scholar, and fit to acquit himself
successfully in any sphere in which he may be called to use the
language."
it
may
MiCROFORMED
>
PRESERVATION
SiERVICES
ARABIC SIMPLIFIED
A PRACTICAL
GRAMMAR
WRITTEN ARABIC
of
in
200
LESSONS
With Exercises, Test-Papers and Reading-Book,
BY
ARTHUR
<
A BDUL-F AD Y
UPSON
AL- Q AHIR ANY)
T.
Literary Superintendent Nile Mission Press,
Author of
"ARABIC AMPLIFIED,"
etc.,
Editor of
"AL-BAREED AL-MISRY,
and Publisher of over 350 Arabic Books and Pamphlets
upon the system of
THE REV.
J.
WILCOX,
C.
iM.A.,
Author of "Hebrew Simplified."
523168
REVISKD EDITION.
____rf"V
2 2>
_r
School of Simplified Study,

19-21
Ludgate
Hill,
BY
London, E.G.
4.
S-
First Edition
1916
Second Impression
Third Impression
Second
(of first nine lessons only)
(five lessons only)
Edition,, revised throughout
37 SHARIA MANAKH, CAIRO.
1917
1919
1921
Foreword to First Edition.

During the year 1908, the author had the good fortune to be
enrolled as a student of the Rev. John C. Wilcox's new and then
comparatively unknown course of "Hebrew Simplified," and the
thought passed through the minds of both that possibly sometime
system might be found suitable for the teaching
of Arabic. Nothing was, however, done at the time.
in the future this
Meantime the School of Simplified Study, Ltd., had produced

similar courses in other subjects, e.g., "Greek Simplified," "Logic
Simplified," "Latin Simplified," etc. For the Hebrew course alone
no
than a thousand students had been registered.
less
In
May
and was glad
to
was sent
England on medical advice,

occupy himself by writing a number of these
1915 the writer
to
lessons, at the suggestion of the author of the original system.
should be clearly understood that my collaborator, Mr. Wilcox

only responsible for the Interrogative Method employed, as I take
full responsibility for selecting the matter and writing the book.
It
is
Friendly critics of this new order of arrangement are invited

examine the Table of Contents, also the Index. A certain amount
of repetition will be found in the earlier lessons, for to a practical
to
educationist, as is the author, recapitulation is the chief of the

Some students may turn to the complete table of Alphabet,
virtues.
Vowels, Figures etc, Lesson 16; others should content themselves

with what is given out to them.
There are 200 Lessons in this course, which should cover the
ground required by students for both Elementary and Advanced
Exams, no other grammar being required.
It will be found that after the first few lessons the exercises
more interesting and longer, and the subjects more varied
while the Reader contains selections from books and newspapers.
are
Since this course

of our
study
differing
being
is
intended to be a practical one, the subject
"Modern Written Arabic,"
colloquials to
those
who have made
we
leave
the
a special study of
spoken dialects, but all words given in the text or in the exercises
will be found to be in practical use to-day
this is a strong point.
Our aim is to teach the Student, whether missionary, military,
educational, or commercial, to read, e.g., a daily newspaper.
:
for
This course is absolutely "COPYRIGHT," and may not be used

any person other th^n the original, duly registered student.
'ABDUL-FADY,
FOREWORD
2nd
to
to a combination of circumstances (partly political) over
Owing
had no control,
purpose,
edition
many
have
now
entirely re-written Lessons
of the illustrations and examples from
to that work,
"A
which should be studied
A," the present

(in
have
151-200 using, for the
my "ARABIC AMPLIFIED"
written in 1919-20 (in Arabic') but not yet published.
being similar to that followed in
which
The
order of Lessons 151-200
will
be a capital introduction
Arabic) after
"ARABIC SIMPLIFIED"
good many other improvements have been introduced.
May,
A, T, U.
1921.
ADVICE
To THE STUDENT
(1)
(2)
(3)
Answer
exercises in writing, even those intended for "self-correction".
Train "Eye, Voice and Ear" simultaneously

this can be done by reading
aloud in the open air. Get your pronunciation corrected by a native sheikh,
if possible.
Let him give DICTATION from the exercises.
:
Imitate, to a certain extent, the Oriental

easiest
(4)
all
way
to master Arabic
Syntax
Revise back work, and re-revise
is
custom of memorising aloud.
to learn
many
Most important.
illustrative sentences.
The
Lesson
1.
X Xx
What are these signs
They form the Arabic word
?
1.
2.
first
is
pronounced
The pronoun
syllable.
"he"
is
"understood," not written, in the Arabic verb.
How
is
this
Of
three
word
built
to
up
consonants and
different
corresponds
the letter
It
its consonant, which

here occurs three times.
What
is
name
the
Its
a.
above
3.
He-struck, which
dha-La-baJwith the accent on the
it
one vowel.
sign
is
.........
in
always follows
of this vowel
and
The vowel
is
written
pronunciation.
Fatha (to be pronounced with a roughly aspirated h, which

we have indicated by a dot under it, and which is somewhat
It is also somewhat like a deep
like hh or doubly strong h.
do
run
the / and h together, making
sure
not
Be
you
sigh.
is
first
and
ha the second.
note
the
Fat
th:
syllable
4.
What
It is
is
power of this Fat-ha ?

and is one of the three short vowels.
the
like a in bad,
some countries
India more like u in
In
5.
How many
it
is
little
What
It is
word
in thts
in
Three.
power
J0
Dad
Ra
L^
Ba
the approximate sound of the
is
cut.
consonants are there
Name
6.
heavier, like a in father
Dad
d in hand and good, only it is stronger, and this

indicated bya dot under the d. It is an aspirated d, a
like the th in thee, but more strongly pronounced
like the'
we have
little
by roiling the tongue against the palate.

affects the Fat-ha after
AW or O.
7-
Do
(In India
given
NO.
it,
giving to
a hard
z,
it
so hard that
it
almost the sound of
as in "Ramazan").
consonants always preserve the forms here

Arabic letters change their form with their
these three
?
it is
It is
6
position in a word, because even printed books are, so to
speak, in "script" character, and most of the letters joined
and "running on". But
&
*
Pad
is
Ra
"
always
when it begins a word;

whgn k g an /Bflfa/ etter
when
it
(^
When Ba
letter
previous
such a shape that

it,
8.
it
takes
the
L.-^ The ra
form
final
cannot ever join the
because Arabic,
read from right to
i.e.,
to the
is
of
which follows
letter
Why
What
that
it
like other Semitic
languages
^>j**
have we put the
To show
vO~^
left.
He-struck Da-ra ba
10.
when
i.e.,
end of a word can be joined
the order of the consonants in
is
Dad, Ra, Ba
9.
so that letter does not have a special final form.
What
is
at the
it
with in aword
Medial letter.
is
it
is
when it is separated from others;

when it is an Isolated letter.
N,B.
is,
Ba
that
first
vowel
in Italic
has the accent, which
are the dots used for, one over
is
but very slight.
Dad and one under Ba
They are the distinguishing marks of these consonants, which

Arabic
letter-
haste, often obscures the
shapes
be
cannot, therefore, be read without them.

writing, the scribe,
of the
when
in
these
individual letters;
identified
by means of the
can,
In
however,
always
dots.
Vowels are hardly ever written, except in the two books,

Qur'an and Bible, but the dots are indispensable.
There are no
Self -Test Paper
1.
2.
What
What
is
capitals in Arabic.
1.
a Fat-ha
is its
power
(l
?
(l
Where
3)
:
exercises for
placed
(l
the section in which the correct answer
is
and, if necessary, learn more thoroughly. Do not send

correction except the replies to Test Papers, which we have
Revise
it
marked "To be returned for correction". So in all future lessons.)

Students must vowel their exercises for the first year.
N.B.
2),
4).
(Compare your written reply with

to be found.
is it
Lesson
1.
"He-struck"
the verb-form for
If
changed
into "She-struck"
By placing
the letter
ta (t) after
da-ra-ba
^s*
She-struck
(Ja-ra-bat
vl^^-*
Because
and
-i is
The
3.
It is
4.
is-fhe
when
60
ba in
What
and
new
final
sign
is
But
6.
We
is
_>
form.
forms are usually elongated ones.

over the ta
....?.
very occasionally written
letter
....v.....
its initial
i.e.,
with
over which
sign
form
have seen
>
is
placed has no vowel

adjacent letters
represents our letter K, as in keep.
it
item 2 above) that the separate form for
(in
Can
as an initial letter.
be shortened to
it is
Two sukuns on
be allowed to occur in Arabic.
Kaf and
becomes
ba
ta
is this
name
to
closes that syllable.
I would not ordinarily
Its
? )
denotes that the
What
the use of su-kun (pronounced su-koon,
is
and therefore
5.
isolated
its initial
the Sukun, and
the Italian
It
is
isolated
What
it.
the ba been shortened form
why has
how can U be
He-struck
But
vp
is
2.
2.
->
as an initial
the isolated form for
Yes, certainly, and several others act similarly.
wrote
She wrote
{He
In (b)
7.
The
we have Ta
Ka-ta-ba
^-^
(a)
Ka-ta-bat ll/xljf
(b)
as a Final,
short connecting link
and also
as a Medial.
which unites
a Medial
predecessor should be noticed.
We
may
represent
it
thus
tH^
x,
form
to its
8.
But are not medial ta and ba confusing

dots over
9.
No
since ta has
two
it.
any English word or name which
there
Is
and ba has one under
it
will give us the
pronunciation of Ka-ta-ba?
Yes
take the word Canada.

syllable, but not
first
not say Ca-nada,

10.
Are other
Yes
pronounced
is
one point about the

strong consonant
when
fat-ha,
as
dad
the
is
it
that
like a short o (though
pronounced
is
same way
Ca-na-da
like
we
there
that
is,
write
it
Read aloud from
Exercise
Translate to Arabic (from memory)
(l)
He-struck.
Self Test
She-struck.
(3)
is,
however,
the
fat-ha
is
d).
and turn into English
He-wrote.
(4)
She-wrote.
2.
And what
2.
What
What
3.
Write the names of these
4.
What
1.
til
N.B.
(2)
the right,
and thus V^r^
a)
Exercise 2a.
2b.
do
sounded with such a
(Do not mix d with
like doraba.
We
a long vowel.
Simply Canada.
Canada.
less
still
make H
to
enough
upon the
a slight stress
is
three-letter verbs stressed in the
da-ra-ba
sounded
There
is
Sukun
sign represents a
Sukun
C-vT
^s
(2
letters
combinations are these
^/*
does
it
denote
(2
4).
3).
<^J C-U
*
After doing Exercise 2a from memory, do 2b from memory
and
then,
by comparing the
corrects the other.

text of the
Exam, paper
The
lesson, in
is
to
results,
it
will
be seen that one
answers to Self -Test papers are in the

the section
whose number
be sent up for correction.
is
given.
There
will be
similar exam, papers at the end of Lessons 13, 20, 25, 30, 40, etc.
Lesson
PAST SING
1.
How
VERB.
of
turn the form for he-struck into one
we
did
she-struck
3.
meaning
2,
By adding the letter ta (2 :l)

How can we readily turn he-struck into
Thou (m) didst strike ) By adding the same letter ta
each case and by changing
Thou (f)
>
I
&
(m
f)
struck)
da-rab-tu
I
Read from
N.B.
the
strikedst. (fern.)
right to
Thou
left.
He
She struck.
strikedst.
This
da-raba
da-ra-bat
da-rab-ta
da-rab-ti
Thou
struck.
vowels.
in
the
is
struck.
Note that
essential.
Past Tense of the Arabic verb may often be represented in
English by either the Past or the Perfect Tense. (Details in L.
What
Accent.
is
the Rule for Arabic
Accent
153).
The following rules must be memorised just here

(a) The Arabic accent falls principally upon the long vowel
:
of the word,
viz.,
the letter of prolongation (which will be ex-
plained later) thus v-Al; kitab has
by
....",...
thus,
receives the
If
ta.
accented
the
more than one long vowel,
greatest accent.
shown
ta
the last one
The ^wo_Diphthongs
(Q
5)
are
accented like long vowels.

(b)
The
vowel
is
fact of the
causes
pronounced
that
(c)
(d)
when
and
be accented
to
student
the
the final vowel
is
must
e.g.,
^\j~*
necer
say
omitted he will say
newspaper reader-aloud) darabt.
The Shadda
If
consonant
darafrtu,
darab-f// because,
(like a
consonant under the sukun having no
all
the
is
also accented (8
4, 5).
vowels are short, as
in
I:
at aba, the first
one
is
slightly accented.
4.
If
we examine forms
presented.
What
3,
4 and
are they
we
shall find
two new features
10
We
We
1st.
2nd.
5.
What
is
see
..
below the
a fat-ha in shape)
(almost a
comma
line.
shape) above the
in
Fat-ha shaped sign written below the line
this
the short vowel
is
It
see a
like
in tin.
name
Its
is
line.
Kasra. Since
always placed below the line it cannot be confused

with Fat-ha (the short a) which always stands above the line.
is
it
6.
What
the sign
is
placed above the line
...-.....
the short vowel u (oo) called
It is
Damma, and pronounced
as
in bush.
7.
After reminding ourselves that the Sukun
has no sound,
read the whole of the verb-forms which con-
we can now
Past Tense. Singular Number of the

(See item 2 above for the forms).
stitute the Active
Regular Verb.
As the vowels of each verb remain constant
of
persons (singular),
its
This
Take care
is a
to
item 2 above.
What
It is
9.
Voice,
N.B.
heart.
8.
But
verb
the
Learn
FROM THE RIGHT
is this
rakiba,
last vowel,
all
Some
II.
rode
In
damma
as the centre
first
the (singular) persons of
thou didst
t,^
then
rakiba
rakibat
rakib-ta
r
of the K, then
in Exercise
b,
he-rode
she-rode
after
the vowe/-marks from right to
3a
that go
stroke the headpiece of the k, (downwards),

all
He-struck,
in
etc.
Because this verb takes two
verbs take a
what order are the signs written
then add
it
anyhow.
thou (fem.) didst
The body
noting
Every past verb takes fat-ha as
rakib-ti
rakib-tu
by
syllable
and means "he rode, or mounted."
the kasra in the centre
Write out
proper
w5j
vowel for the past tense.
and
learn these five forms by
accent
pronounced
why
we must
for each
very important as well as a very easy matter.
fathas and a kasra.
10
left,
back and
then the dots,
II
Exercise Sa. Read aloud, transliterate* and translate, covering
w -x
Exercise
'
'..'
(l)
He
(4)
Thou
(6)
(Second
wrote.
(2)
line)
She wrote.
hast
(fern.)
Thou (m)
(3)
hast
written.
have written (wrote).

hast ridden. (7) I rode, (or have
written.
Thou
(fern),
(5)
He
didst strike.
(12)
He
didst strike.
(15)
She
struck.
(13)
struck.
(14)
Thou
(masr).
struck.
3.
1.
What
2.
Write out the rules for Accent
3.
What
concludes
letter
all
but one of the forms of the Past
Tense, Singular of the Active Voice

is
nounced
the sign for a

?
(3
is
it
(3
2).
3).
What
is
it ?
How
is
it
pro-
6).
(i.e.,
writing Arabic in
transliterate
Roman
for
cha-
a short
But in translating from English to

essential that he write in the proper Arabic
really
Arabic
The student should only
racters).
if
(3
Damma
Note on Transliteration,
time
"
rode (has ridden). (9) Thou hast ridden (didst

(10) She rode (has ridden). (li) (Third line) Thou (fern).
ridden). (8)
Self Test
'
"
'
Translate to Arabic (covering 3a.) Then correct.
3b.
ride).
^*'
(3b).
needed.
A "Relief Nib" is the best for this purpose in

England, but an "Arabic nib" (not the native reed) should
be used in the Orient. After a few more lessons he should
try to abstain from transliteration altogether, as it is a
character.
weak reed
to
lean upon.
He
will
very
soon
become
ac-
Arabic character, and should use nothing else.

It is difficult, in Egypt, where these lessons are printed, to
obtain sufficient specially marked types with which to trans-
customed
literate
to the
the only reason for attempting
it
at all is to partially
supply the place of the teacher of pronunciation.

get a sheikh with whom to practise reading (and
never use anything but the Arabic character.
you can
DICTATION)
If
12
Lesson 4.
INTERROGATIVE,
1.
What
the
is
The Mif.
2.
What
This
3.
it
What
it
form
With
of a word
the
hamza
is
is
(see
linked to a
is
it
In that
below).
a.
hamza and fat-ha

and it then always
be explained fully
will
thus
alif,
'
he struck
da-ra-ba
may
it
be the
initial
letter
(see 10 below).
be negatived
past tense
she -did -not -write
the negative particle
this negative particle
How
is
ma
before
it
always placed before
the Past Tense injvriting.
Give the Arabic

Ma-ka-ta-bat
She did not write /
its
verb form
it is
with the Present
(In coll.
for she-wrote
can
composed of a new letter, Mim (meem) joined

(without hamza) written from below (see 2 above).
negative
6.
3).
(not otherwise)
wrote become
alif,
With
^J*
a verb in the
can
What
It
is
written over the
is
It
13.
By putting
5.
form
The hamza
the sentence.
a-da-ra-ba
she
its
special use has this Alif
Lesson
How
lengthens the preceding fat-ha to a long vowel,
did he strike
4.
cases save where
all
when
letter,
commences
in
in
one of the signs for Interrogation
is
form
its
preceding
case
of the Arabic Alphabet
first letter
(This generality will be modified in 12
is its
is
etc.
to
an
This
used with
also).
and she -did -not -write.

Ka-ta-bat
She wrote
*\-'f)^
"^"
v
5.
7.
We
have seen that the Interrogative
a positive
Can
it
can be placed
before
sentence without disturbing the order of its words.

be placed before a negative sentence without
also
causing any alteration

I
Yes.
have not written
Ma
ka-tab-tu
Have
Ama
Did
1
I not
written
ka-tab-tu
/
not-i-kte
'-?
^-
'-V*'
*"^
Ox:
13
What
8.
letter looks
The Lam,
How
9.
or L.
do they
very
differ
preceding one
an Alif
Initial letter, is
joined to
its
an
whereas
like
form when an
Its
The lam can be
much
following letter as well as
its
can only be joined
its
alif
to
The lam is always written downwards with

preceding.
thick stroke; also, when a final letter, it lengthens its form.
Thus
combination
this
in
of a lam
initial/medial and
we
J|)
three
get
possible forms
But this combination does
final.
not occur in any actual word.

10.
Give a word containing an alif-hamza and a lam.

i
He
11.
Now
word containing
This
not.
ate (a-ka-la)
is
etc.
(The lam,
which
i.e.
is
is
Read aloud and
4a.
translate
written
is
"
-^
w'
'
cJVlU
"
Turn
4b.
(6) I
(4)
(2)
(2)
(3)
x-
cx^CJ
cxS'C.V
(f)
did not ride.

(9)
not eaten
(/)
Did she
(5)
(f)
not eat?
(12)
(3)
Hast thou
Didst thou
strike
Did she not write?
not write, (il) Didst thou
(1)
*Z
- f t
O->7 ^N Ul
*<
f
C**0 J
*
by â.
Has she not eaten?
Hast thou
didst not strike.
Self Test Paper
into Arabic, correcting
Has he eaten?
(m) eaten
4b.
J<!l
"
>
O'.^r^'\
V ciViCl
ride
Qur'an
then the
first,
x-
(l)
in the
then correct by
> **
cJS'll
Exercise
or
generally used with the
sometimes so used
the down-stroke,
= No,
* la
alif.
written athwart).
alif is
Exercise
lam before the
the Negative
Present Tense though
jfl
(10)
No;
(f)
not
Thou (m)
No; she did
(8)
did not eat.
4.
Give an Arabic Interrogative sign. What is its position?(4:I-3)

What particles negative Arabic sentences? (4:4 6,11 ).
How does an alif differ from a lain ? (4: 8,9).
14
Lesson
5.
TRILITERALISM.
What
one of the chief characteristics of the Semitic group

(Hebrew, Arabic, etc.) ?
Tri -literalism. This signifies that the words are built up around
I.
is
of languages
Root
three*
letters
by prefixing, affixing and

and by changing the vowels so as
or Radicals,
inserting other letters,
to express variations of
meaning all arising out of the idea

conveyed by the Root letters. This we have seen in the Past
Tense of a verb of Active Voice. (3 2).
'
What
2.
Past Tense
verb form
in
the
Active Voice always
contains these three Root letters and no other letters
form for the 3rd Person, Singular, Masculine.

Ka-ta-ba
He
wrote, or, has written
Aka-la
He
3.
And
has eaten
ate, or,
Nouns
Thus
The
-^
^""
^
ur
up from these three Root letters?

Yes: by vowels alone, or by vowels and additional letters (of
which Alifis a frequent one). This is why we teach the verb
are the
also built
before the noun.
Food
uk-lun
Battle, or fighting
qita-lun
a book, a writing
A
kita-bun
4.
a writer
kati-bun
We see
first
letter
new
iiuj
,
'*\
Heate
He
L?
wrote
^jfcf
here some
Root
*K\
(For the i engt hening of this a see Lesson
signs and letters.
What
is
this
6).
new
Qdf and represents our Q. This guttural consopronounced with a vowel by contracting the throat.
Say Kaf first naturally, then with a short a sound and contracted throat, like the cawing of a crow. Qaf is pronounced
Qof or Qawf because the letter Q is one of those strong letters
which alter the sound of the fat-ha (Compare 2 10).
It is
nant
the letter
is
Occasionally there are four
a Quadriliteral one.
See later.
root
letters
and the root-verb
is
then
called
15
*>
What
5.
It is
\1
new
the
is
sign
or
Pamma
the short vowel
which can only
written double,
occur at the end of a noun.
How
6.
pronounced
is it
Like u
Un, shorter than Oon.
But where does the
7.
in
push.
sound come from
This practice of adding an N sound when the last vowel is

thus doubled is called ftun-ation (noon-ation) from the Arabic
name
Nun. Nun ation
for N,
and poetry.
or in
What
8.
It is
confined to reading the Qur'an
is
never pronounced
conversation.
The Tanwin damma (meaning

It
which has
it is
in the
word without un*
<:
A Damma
with nun sound").
Nominative Case (as also those having
damma). (See 6 6
:
Qara'a he read. (Here
two cases with
for the other
Give another verb containing

I
the
never used with the Definite Aiticle, and every word
is
the single
9.
reading the newspaper
naming
(Practise
double-u sign called
is this
in
alif
tanwiii).
with hamza.
third radical).
it is
10.
Write out the
five
person forms of
Read aloud and
Exercise da.
>
translate to English
'
Exercise
To Arabic
5b.
(afterwards correcting by
(I)
Hast thou (f) read?
(4)
Has
(7)
Self Test
she
book.
Paper
(1)
What
(2)
How
(3)
What
is
not killed
(8)
She
(5)
a).
(have eaten).
ate
Did
kill
(3)
Tanwin
Pamma
(5
8).
pronounced (5 6),
nftu-ation and when is it employed
is it
(5
Food.
Fighting.
(6)
read.
5.
the
and when
is
(2)
7).
16
Lesson 6.
TANWIN.
i_TrasljieraJLe_ the Arabic for "book". _JKi-Ja-ûnj! _
2. Why have we put a mark over the a here
?
3.
To show
it is
How
we
are
the long
and not the short one
a,
know when
to
fat-ha in each case
it
is
in kataba.
long and not short, since
it is
"
when followed by a "prolonging" alif is always long ;

Ex gate = bd-bun ^\ but distinguish this from
(j> j ra'sun,
>\The
head, in which alif carries

4.
What
It
is
Damma
is
hamzajukun, and
Tanwin Damma, once more ?
vowel
(or short
is
not Ihng
alif.
u) written twice, placed over
the last letter of a
5-
word (as in this word gate), and in book

The
name means "A Damma with a nun sound." (5:3).
l).
Are there any other tanwins ?
Yes the two other short vowels can be used in the same way,
i.e., doubled over the last letter.
Thus we get
:
Tanwin
Damma VU-)
Tanwin Fat-ha
Ki-td-bun
Ki-fc?-ban (Note the
^*-T
added
alif here).
Tanwin Kasra
6.
Have
these three tanwins any practical use
Yes.
The presence
noun
is indefinite
clinable noun,
(1)
Ki-td-bin.
V^-f
The
i.e.
of either of the tanwins denotes that the

e.g., a
Also that
man, a book.
it [is
capable of taking all three cases.
denotes
that
noun
is
the Subject of the
sentence=The Nominative
(2)
The
"
(
over an
Object of a
Case.
The
Case.
for a Masculine noun)
denotes that a noun
(3)
a de-
the Direct
is
verb = The
Accusative
(See 9 below).
denotes the Indirect
Object
(governed
by
Preposition, for example).
N.B.
single
damma,
fat-ha or kasra indicates the
Nomi-
native, Accusative, or Genitive, case of the Definite Noun, as

the tanwin vowel does of the Indefinite Noun.
17
7.
What
English
of
8.
J,
will a
is
it
"A man
When
it
It is
the letter Jim (jeem), which
in
man, ra-ju-lun
in
^]J>-
noun take the tanwin
Egypt.
j and
wrote a
will a
letter".
is
Man
is
in the
man
as, for
Nominative Case.
wrote a book"
lll-J
may be placed
Singular
when
Exercise 6a.
(i)
6b.
usually that of the Verb
first,
it
precedes
To
its
^j?& U
She did not read a book
Self Test
3.
Î_j
ra-ju-lun (2)
first,
kataba (1)
but the
is
put
Noun
in the
correct by 6b.
li
Ii5
^-^-5
Arabic, afterwards correcting by 6a.

(2) She wrote a book.
(/)
2.
in the
wrote a book.
(5)
1.
is,
subject).
translate
Has he written a book ?

Did a man write a book
(3)
When
> ^
(The verb
for emphasis.
Read aloud and
-j
Exercise
is
alif)
J>-j
ki-ta-ban (3)
The order
Its
example, "a book" in the following

#*^
N.B.
ft.
^j>-j
"A man
sentence,
is
in the sentence
the Direct Object of the action of a verb, that
is
form
initial
form
the
is
noun take the tanwin fatha (over an
Accusative Case,
10.
The
its final
damma
the subject of a sentence, as
form therefore
9.
but pronounced hard
found
it >- is
When
When
7T
this sign
is
(6)
He has
A man
(8)
Didst thou not strike a
(4)
?
not struck a man.
read a book.
man
6.
How
can the Fat-ha become a long vowel ? (6 3).

is a Tanwin Fat-ha, and what letter always accompanies it with the Masculine noun ? (6: 6).
In what case is a noun which has a Tanwin Fat-ha ? (6
6),
:
What
18
Lesson
I,
7.
Let us classify the characters met with, and a few others.

Power
Final
Name
Initial
Medial
Separate
111!
Alif
19
s*
Tanwin Fat-ha
the an sound (Note the alif here).
.....
TanwinKasra
;"" the in
sound.
The Arabic numerals (from
4.
u u v
Observe that the "tens"

figure, as in English
Vocabulary
to eat (he-ate)
a-ka-la
food
(4)
uk-lun
(5)
qa-ta-la
ma-li-kun
'
man
man
(8)
ka-ta-ba~to write (he wrote)
(9)
ra-ki-ba
(accus:)
^>-j
to strike (he struck) <-Jj^*
to ride (he rode)
l^:.-5
L5j
to read (he read)
\'j
Test Paper to be returned.
struck a camel.
Did she read a book ?

Hast thou (m) written a book
5.
A man
a book.
^
I
8.
Didst thou (m) ride
9.
10.
kill
"*
J..J
v-r *
k.l
xe
?
?
Thou (f) hast struck a man.

Have I not eaten ?
Have you ridden a camel?
12. I
>
*M
man
Did she
II.
read a book.
Translate
7.
have not ridden a camel.
Practise writing, transliterate, and then translate:

x^X
^
J> x
*' "
*>
V.
J*V
' '
^J>-;
6.
B.
At
^1* ja-ma-luncamel
Thou (f hast not written

Have I not written ?
4.
^--w
3.
king
pen
qa-la-mun
^\
da-ra-ba
7 A.
lll
(/)
(10) qa-ra-a
2.
>
to kill (he killed)
(6) ra-ju-lun
He
tK*?
book t-Al-J book (accus:)
1.
battle, or fighting
ki-ta-bun
Exercise
figure is placed to the left of the unit
(3)
be easily learnt
7.
(1) qi-ta-lun
(2)
\ A
may
to 12)
l*
5Uj ol:
>j
^t
x <x^
Jfl
20
Lesson 8.
DEFINITE ARTICLE.
1.
Has Arabic an
Yes
because
itself,
It is
prefixed.
a particle
Give an example
noun
a part of the
composed of an
which
to
and a lam
alif
man
it is
Jl
man
ar-ra-ju-lu, the
What
the Article has introduced three changes.
are they
The Tanwin Damma
1st.
for
has disappeared. It always does,

cannot exist with the Article prefixed, since the tanwin
it
marks the
indefinite.
The lam has dropped its sound, but

It has introduced a new sign M~"....
2nd.
3rd.
written obliquely.
What
is
Tashdid
not
its
form.
like a small
W only
the sign of Tashdid called Shadda-
It is
?
the act of doubling the pronunciation of the letter over
It is
which
act of
is
it is
which has no number, gender
ra-ju-lun, a
But
the Definite Article only,
or case in
2.
Article
this sign is placed,
The
wheUu^Jji^jyî^
doubling (or intensifying)
is
called tashdid, but the sign
called a shadda.
How
does this happen
In this
way
sukun of the
the shadda
first
of the
two
a sukun
letters
-j-
a vowel, that
is,
the
and the vowel of the second
coalesce together.
>
^ ^
In
'W'J
ra,
and
^j
the lam of Jl
then, secondly
jl
finally the
assimilates
we
two
think of
r's
itself, first
it
of
all,
and pronounce
coalesce and
we
write
it
to the
it
as
Ji^J
leaving the lam standing in writing, but marking the pronunciation
Do
by
.-...?....
(Be sure to grasp this point).

take place
these 3 changes always
when
prefixed, viz.,
The dropping
1st.
The dropping of the sound
of the tanwin
2nd.
of the lam,
3rd.
Writing of the shadda
the Article
;
and
is
21
No
only the
always takes place, whilst the 2nd and 3rd
1st
only occur before one-half of the Arabic

7.
How many
has
It
28,
letters
has the Arabic Alphabet
su&Kft
upon the
What
are the 14,
What
will
thus LAlSsJ
be given
we
already
u*
Dad
What new word
is
It is
the Arabic for sun,
new
forms.
gives
reason that the
What
are the
and
Sh,
Power
S, of
and
12.
(^)
What
is
Ra
Ta
of
shams happens
forms are
the middle letter in this
Initial
Name
**v
.**>
Sin
-**
***
Shin
**
(Jf*
be of that class.
to
^^ sun
Medial
13.
>
and three
to the solar letters for the curious
last letters in
full
letters
word sun?
Recapitulate the various forms of the * (Lesson
Their
^V^
Final
Sh
name
its
which the
Separate
^.
7).
Mim
/e
Give examples of words containing the Mim.

*
Jj
know?
and contains two new
first letter
first
letters.
this?
sham-sun
It
Lunar
later).
Solar letters do
Lam
11.
al-kitdb, the book.
which receive a shadda but no sukun, called
10.
other 14 have a
(The remaining 14 are called
letters.
names
la??*,.
The
Article.
Solar
so that the doubling shadda will be required over 14
them when prefixing the
of
letters,
Qa-la-mun, a pen.
2$^*
*>
an
office,
study
camel.
22
14.
Learn the word for "head,"m'sww
by sukun but
that does not
make
Also learn the verb "to break*'
Read aloud and
Exercise 8a.
Exercise
(l)
Translate to Arabic
8b.
(2) the sun
sun
(fern.) struck a man.

it
Did
ate food, (or
the pen?
man
(ll)
(14)
No
"silenced"
the vowel long as in
\j
ra.
^S he broke.
(v)
head
it
US
up the English
c;
(4)
the head
(fern.) strike a
(5)
head?
the sun
(7)
No
(8)
No; thou hast
struck a head.
office
is
Hast thou broken a pen ? (9) A

an eating, /. e. much) do) Have 1 broken
did not strike a head.
man
j The hamza
(3) a
(6)
translate, covering
o> C V
US
(A)
not broken the pen.
Did the man break a pen
(13)
he did not break the pen
(15)
(12)
The
at (in) the
A man
struck
a camel.
Self Tests.
(1)
(2)
What is a Shadda ? (8:4).

What change invariably accompanies
any noun
Article to
(3)
How
is
letter
(4)
(8
3).
the Article prefixed to a
(8
Where
is
word begining with
the tens figure in N* In

?
(/
what language
4).
N.B.-^Please observe the following rules:
Answer
(2)
Constantly
all
a Solar
6-8).
a similar practice
(1)
the prefixing of the
home
revise.
exercises in writing.
is
there
23
Lesson
1.
2.
How many
How many
9.
Arabic Alphabet
letters are there in the
of them are Consonants (that
is letters
28.
which must
be accompanied by a vowel in order to be pronounced ?

All of them three of them, however, are sometimes used as
"Letters of Prolongation".
:
3.
Which
are the three "Letters of Prolongation" (that
prolong vowels, making a short vowel into a long one

first one and the last two of the Alphabet.
III)
The
Medial
Final
Separate
is,
which
Mame
Initial
Wau
4.
Why
and
are these
Because
the
like a large
5.
wau has
Ya, easy ones to
damma
practically
whilst the ya
diacritic points written
wau
like
remember
below
one form
only j
it
is
the only letter with
is
Pronounce the name
it.
ou in house.
Are there only 3 vowels in Arabic?

There are also two diphthongs, one being ay, formed by
fat-ha and ya, and the other au, formed by fat-ha and wau.
ay like ai
in
diphthong requires
paid
and jl
an, like on in house.
a sukiin over the "letter of prolongation."
Give examples of these Diphthongs.

*>
*'
^ju*>
*>*
j
sai-fun
\ since
f
9>
follows the
sword
thau-run
/
<
...
a bull
SP
since
heterogeneous
follows the
:T....
heterogeneous
are the only three short vowel sounds
I
7.
Wau and
letters
two
Thus
6.
two
to distinguish
Which
possible
in
What letters may they accompany ?

may accompany alif to make long a Damma (u)
may accompany wau to make long u and Kasra (i) may
accompany ya to make long (=ee). Then there are the two
Arabic
Fat-ha
(a)
diphthongs mentioned.
24
8.
Why
are these
three
sometimes
letters
called
letters
of
Because they are used to prolong the sound
prolongation?
of the vowel attached to the immediately preceding consonant.
9.
Examples
ba
Ls
^>
bi
ba
bu; while
y =
bu
while
j =
bi
while
T>
**
and the two diphthongs
'ij
10.
Do
bay
and
No
each prolongs (only) the vowel that
geneous (akin) to
homogeneous
(is
Learn
mursa-lun missionary.
Exercise 9a.
(l)
bi,
To
Cl':_<r
Exercise
words: Jy'j rasu-lun,
these
bi by, fj
ii,
*r "
to)
.....'. .....
^>
^)-*j
homo-
is
it.
only lengthens
->
bau
these three letters of prolongation lengthen any preceding
vowel
II.
^j
English
To Arabic
A man
(i)
(4)
to
(joined to the next word)
me.
ti;-',
i)^>^"j
(r)
I'-
(o)
J/>',
'^ (0
'J>'/ ^3*1 (0
(2)
An
apostle rode.
(3)
missionary
Did the apostle (messenger) ride?
apostle (messenger) did not ride.
the book with a pen
to,
wrote to me.
wrote a book.
//,
li
^jV; '^:jr (r)
;A:sfcu_<
"
9b.
by me,
apostle or messenggr,
(6)
Didst thou
(5)
(fern.)
The
write
25
Leseon 10.
SOLAR & LUNAR LETTERS.
1.
what two equal classes are Arabic

Solars and the Lunars. (Revise 8
Into
The
2.
Why
are they so
named
Only because the

solar
for
3.
In
first letter in
Qamar-un
what way
is
a Solar letter
The sound
to be
^j^^> sun happens
first
letter
5).
sun
**M
r*
do we prefix the
The moon
>' '-M
al-qa-ma-ru
***
there any
the
falls
of the al coalesces into the sound of
^>
-r
sham-sun
article
Lunar letter? By giving the

lam takes a sukun).
5.
10).
j+9
Lam
>
ash-sham-su
Is
10).
of the
The sun
How
the Article prefixed to words beginning with
the solar letter (see 8
4.
whilst in the other class
letter
moon
(see 8
divided
letters
to
words beginning with
article
its
moon
full
qa-ma-run
reason for this different
Lunar letter ?
Lunar letters are of such
'&
*
way
value
(i.e.
the
'<*
**
of prefixing the
article to the
Yes
the
a nature, that
is to
say they
such a shaping of the channel of utterance, that the
enunciation of the Lam in the article is helpful in re-adjusting
:
require
the organs of utterance in preparation for the lunar letters.

C* I
rw%i
Thus
is
TV
is
is
is
it
easy
never found
easier to
pronounce
the other reason for this difference in prefixing the
Article to Solars
The Lam
111 cL * I
ash-stem-su
While
What
ci
al-s/ic??72-su
But
6.
~ Cl
is
and Lunars
i.e.
what about the (lingual)
Lingual, and therefore
fellow tongue-formed letters
it
solars?
easily coalesces with
dad <jf
and with
its
sad <j*
26
shin
sin <jr
<J*
etc.,
allied Dental (or teeth-formed) letters
C>
tha
ta
th)
(t,
etc.
(Note that this /// is the sharp th of the word "think", or "thousand", which is
sometimes lisped making it more like s. The sad is a very strong s almost like
ss
it gives a broad sound to its vowel, as d&d does).
;
On
Lam
hand the lingual
the other
cannot coalesce with
Lunars, for they consist of Gutturals, Labials and Palatals, and

the shaping of the channel
of utterance
by
throat, lips
and
palate forbids such coalescence.

7.
What
It is
8.
is
the
What
new
the
letter in
L-JL.^
Fa and corresponds
letter is the
Somewhat
Fa
to our F.
like in
like the Qaf,
= sword
saif
form
which however,
is
more curved.
Fa
In
how many ways can
1st.
As
when
<j
bi
Diphthong
To form
the
What
3rd.
is
byme
li
<J
its
homogeneous
= to me.
a
after
heterogeneous
another
way
saif-un
in
a sword
which a Ya
At the end of a word,
is
if it is
used
preceded by a fatha,
without dots and, being pronounced exactly like an Alif,
Alifmaqsura which means "shortened

Lesson
17,
vowel
takes a Suktin
'iju**
19.
_o.
be used
<
Letter of Prolongation following
vowel kasra
2nd.
the letter
Ha
to,
alif."
wiUq
is
it is
called
To be explained
II.
Learn the verb Jl
Exercise lOa.
27
he-killed
and conjugate
like daraba.
it
and read aloud
Transliterate, translate
The sun
(I)
The
apostle
The man
The
gate
The pen
The paper
The
fighting
The missionary
The
trader,
merchant
The sword
Note
The accent
Exercise lOb.
Self Test 10.
falls
upon the long vowel,
if
one
is
present.
Translate the English of Exercise lOa to Arabic.
(On papers 9 and
10).
1.
Which
2.
Why
3.
What vowels
4.
Place the Article before a word beginning
and
are the letters of prolongation
are they so
(b)
named
letter.
(9: 7, 8).
Give examples.
are homogeneous to
with a Lunar
'
to
(10 3,4).
(9
j and to
8).
(a)
(9
10).
with a Solar
28
Lesson
1.
What
2.
What
the Arabic for a youth
is
is
As
new
this
is
allied
to
diacritic point),
we
is
it
C-
awkward
5t
5*
IX.
3*
form and
in
pronunciation.
same form (without
the
them
will give
by gh
its
together.
Ain
*
-
What
in
another of
3.
letter transliterated
a letter
Ghain,
WASLA.
S$f-
ghu-la-mun
It
11.
Ghain
gh, or ghr
Ghain ?
It represents a gargling sound from the throat similar to that
made by an r roughly and well down in the throat. It must
the sound of the
is
not be connected with the English
g, being just a "gargle."

be
learnt
from
a Jew or Arab, but you
The ain can really only
may try to emit a guttural a from the bottom of the throat,
c
while lightly holding the "apple" of the throat by the fingers.
Students within reach of the Orient must diligently practise

phonetics, with the assistance of an educated native friend.
4.
Write
Arabic "A
in
man
struck a youth."
ghu-la-man,
$.
Why
has
Because
^Û
it
is
ra-ju-lun
^'
- >
become
UÛ
before
we can
we prefix
that j
is
Before
a Solar
write
the Arabic
and
9-
Why
has
and become
UÛ-
and so
(See Lesson 6
its
Article to a word,
a Lunar.
We
sign
is
5, 6).
"The man struck the youth,"
darab
7.
the Direct Object of the verb,

a tanwin fat-ha.
6.
da-ra-ba
>
that
we must
is,
note
then write the sentence
ar-raj-ul ul-ghu-lama.
(youth) in 4 above lost
its
tanwin fatha,
2Q
Because the tanwin cannot exist with the Definite

it
denotes the indefinite.
What
the sign.. ...'.. ..over the alif (in 6 above)
is
Wasla
the
It is
that
a sign written
is
word only)
the alif
commences
the alif
has no vowel of
tion
above an
show
to
own, and that for
its
then
What
(when
its
pronuncia-
takes the last vowel of the preceding word, as in the
it
cing al begins a sentence,

it,
alif
that in that place
transliteration of the following Exercise lla.
9.
Article, sine
it
is
If
the
commen-
obvious that nothing precedes
has no wasla, but a simple fat-ha only.
it
does the word wasla mean
A>^0
Wasla
the vowel preceding
(We
the exercise.
ghu-la-man
word meaning a
to the letter following.
it
avoided
To English
Exercise lla.
k
AX^j
colloquial for
is
it
link, for
it
This
seen
is
links
in
in Ex.Qa).
ra-ju-lun
J>-j
^>j*
da-ra-ba
(i)
(2)
ul-ghu-lama
da-ra-b
ar-rajul
*'
>
0*
->^
"
'
J :JI
>-V
-r-*i
Jp'
3^1
Exercise lib.
(l)
A man
To Arabic
man
killed
man
>'
(4)
J :j
(5)
3 :; ^
<
6)
struck a youth.
the bull kill a
(3)
The man struck the youth. (3) Did

Did the bull kill the man ? (5) The
(6) The man did not kill the camel.
(2)
(4)
a camel.
Self Test 11.

(1)
What
(2)
Give
is
all
a wasla
(ll
8).
the four forms of the letters
Am
and Ghain.
(l/
30
Lesson
I.
What
2.
But what
3.
What
is
the Arabic for earth
new
the
is
sign
first
Ardun
..... : .....
Hamza
the use of the
really the
is
It
is
HAMZA.
12,
The Hamza
letter of the
we say
Alphabet, for when
that Alif is the first letter we mean an alif bearing a hamza.

Needless to say, it is a consonant, for Arabic vowel-marks
are not reckoned as letters.
4.
When
When
have we seen that the
5.
Thus:
without a hamza.
alif
Letter
simply a
is
it
can be used as a vowel

of
Prolongation
show
alif
And
hamza
not the
is
hamza
that the
is
superfluous
v^v
book, ki-tabun
But does not the very fact that a vowel

letter
attached to the
is
used as a Consonant
alif there is
superfluous in that case
if its
object
is
and stands
merely
to
Yes
show
the
that the
alif is a
consonant.
Thus
the Article
'
is
same
the
and the hamza, though not written, is to be understood

customary not to write it, when beginning a sentence.
6.
What
does this signify
as
:
'
it is
>
That every
7.
is
an alif-hamza whether the hamza
Is
the
No
viz., Alif,
But these
letters
letters
alif,
In
Wau, Ya.
or
"""^""
given or no.
the
Arabs
call
that the
Hamza
supports these three weak
it is
better to say that the three
support the strong

Q.
..>....
must be usually within a word, except in the

which can receive it when beginning a word.
Can we then say

:
is
or
hamza found only with an alif?

can accompany the three letters which
"Weak",
No
,....r.....
it
case of an
8.
with a vowel (with
what way
is
the
Hamza
hamza
weak
letters are
used to
consonant
can take a vowel, and can play the part of a consonant in

shaping, by a movement within the throat, the channel of
It
utterance for the flow of the vowel sound,
10.
We may
have
Where
the
is
31
..........
hamza placed
Usually between the vowel-sign and
when used with
How can we
11.
a kasra,
it
its
but sometimes
letter:
can stand over the
understand the use of the hamza
letter.
?
writing "a nice house" phonetically as "a-nais-haus" and
By
then "an ice house" as "an'ais-haus" noticing the hiatus (or

breathing) between an and
ice.
This "breath"
"hamza." C.F. the bad pronunciation of "Mr.

cated
make
Owen" by unedu-
people; they say Miste-rowen, whereas the educated

"
and say
a breathing pause
Since the verb generally precedes
12.
the consonant
is
Mister its
Owen"
subject,
ana the feminine
singular ends in sukun, what happens before the sukun of the
noun, seeing that two sukuns cannot occur together?
The sukun
is
Thus "she
replaced by kasra in most cases.

"
e<*
struck the book" <-AlSJl
^^
"
0<*
not v-Alfl' C*\j*# This
*\j*'0
"
tinguishable from 2nd
fern., sing.,
The preposition ^*
in
is
such a case replaces
exceptional.
Exercise 12a.
To English
Exercise 12b,
To Arabic
(1)
(2)
The sun
(3)
(fern.)
struck the man.
wrote from the house.
(6)
The sun struck the book (verb first).

Did the sun strike the youth ?
Did she (it) not strike the youth ?
()
She did not write
(4)
(5)
tlê
book,
Thus J>jJ!
She struck the man.
is
dis-
by the sukun s**l&)l vl*>y*

>
fat-ha but this
*'
its
sukun by
<j*
(from the man).
Lesson
1.
Commence by
2.
Where
is it,
32
13.
HAMZA.
revising Lesson 12 on the
and where only
is
it,
Hamza.
that the
Hamza sometimes
stands quite alone without any support from a vowel-letter
When
it is
of letters.
advent
word, and then
last in the
Examples
it
is
written in the line
5.
33
Give other examples of the use of the hamza.

*
ba-'u-sa
ba-'i-sa
sa-'a-la
akha-dha (he took)
ra'-sun (head)
bi'-sa
Pronounce these aloud, learning the meanings of two only.

6.
But
why has
Because
the
the medial ya in
always drops
it
hamza
to sit
dots
its
when
it
no points?
becomes
a prop for
Arabic grammarians
in fact, the
upon;
and
4 (2nd)
call
it
the "seat" (kursy) for the hamza.

7.
May
hamza and
the
longation
(a) After
Certainly
It
After
hamza with
letter of pro-
hamza with damma, take wau
mas-'ul (responsible)
(b)
vowel be followed by a
here are two examples
its
A>\
"
A>t
Jj*~*
or
'
Jj^~*
kasra, take ya, la'im, base, (adj.)
be noted here that adjectives are reckoned as nouns
may
and given tanwin.

8.
Why did we omit hamza with fat-ha?

We will show this separately. Hamza
written over an
letter of
But can
prolongation
I
may
such
write
Then what
alif.
two
be found
It
alifs
will
be
is
of course
be the homogeneous
Alif.
together
in special
with fat-ha
will
words
Yes
very
occasionally
but the only thing
we
are
concerned with just now is that we usually write one alif over
the other without the hamza sign, or, in a few cases, with the
hamza
9.
How
after this
is it
double
alif.
written and what
is it
called
word which means "prolongation".
It is
called a "Madda", a
It is
written with a slightly curved slope; thus,
"
> -* >* ^
Examples al-Qur'an (Koran)

:
10.
it
thus
Is
the
(Be careful to pronounce
al-Qur-an); he believed, a-ma-na
hamza ever marked
Yes: sometimes
words
j'y'
in
in
Great Britain by a short hyphen, as
re-in force, re-appear,
the diaeresis
English books
*1
and
in
in the
America by the use of
thus, reinforce, reappear.
To English
Exercise 13a.
34
.P
ul
(o)
5ti
^^"
^MW
^ pjj^TJU
j**
"
\)
Note that
-i
means
Faith in (by)
by or
God
iman
we say
In English
i/i.
'*'
"believe in".
?r
'\
vJU
billahi
Faith in Christ (the Messiah) bii-Masih
To Arabic
Exercise 13b,
He
I.
believed in the Qur'an.
Advent
of Cbrist.
(3)
Coming of Christ.
From the beginning.
in the
(6)
Christ.
(juz')
I
(9)
Hast thou
of the Qur'an.
(2)
He
(5)
did not believe in the

(4)
believed in
believe
did not believe in a thing).
She believed
Hast thou not believed
(7) In the beginning.
(fern.)
(li)
He
believed in God.
(12)
God ?
the
(8)
(10)
(believed) in
From
in Christ
Faith in
A section
nothing
beginning,
(lit.
she
believed in Christ. *(Note that Maji' (here) equals the-coming-0/,

the absence of the article will be explained in Lesson
EXAM. PAPER
(Send for correction, with
A. To English
19.)
13.
full address).
>o w
(0
(r)
B. To Arabic
I.
3.
5.
The sun
struck the man.
did not believe in anything.

Did you not kill the camel ?
I
2.
4.
6.
She did not write the book. [man.

She took the sword from the
Faith in God.
Lesson
1.
How
14. -
35
PEON. AFFIXES.
does Arabic differ from English in the use of forms for
some Personal Pronouns
(You, me, us, etc.) ?

Arabic has Pronominal Affixes, to affix to words to which the
such as Prepositions, Nouns,
pronouns may be united
and Verbs.
2.
Give the
five singular
i=ee
(m.
1st
person
N.B.
thee
f.)
(f.)
ka
ha
hu
her
him
2nd person
3rd person.
These Affixes must be read from
What new
thee (m.)
ki
&
me
Affixes, for Obj. case, etc.
tf
3.
Pronominal
letter is this
The Ha, which has
right to
left.
sound
the
the
of
ordinary English
aspirate H.
4.
Separate
Final
Medial
vA
^4
Give examples of the Affixes when joined
la-ka
la-ki
li
to
me
What
to thee (f)
strikes
That the
to thee
from right
How
la-ha
one as curious here

only once keeps
to left,
examples
There being no verb,

(a).
La-hu'akh-un
To him [there
= He has
it
its
(in
(N.B.
Read
the forms in
J used
as
3rd. masc.)
a brother
in
Arabic.
permanent
signifies
cannot govern
a brother
to-me) and in the
kasra
To Have,
\
is]
him
the lack of the verb
the following
la-hu
to
commencing with
are these forms used
To supply
in
to the preposition
to her
(m)
other four forms takes a fatha.
6.
ha
to:
5.
Initial
in
Accus
^-1
<!
!!
possession.
(b).
La-hd ukht-un
To
Li umm-un
(c).
To me
=
(d).
[there
is]
a mother
have a mother
A-li-shay-'un
Have 1 a thing ?
=
Have I anything
The
N.B.
square
Can
the
but the
8.
So
9.
alif is lost.
What
case
Nom
What
\ty The prince has
ma din a
Why
not Accus.
is this
or
J*
wvj
form
Lesson 4
case
Exercise 14a.
4).
^
II
A.s-X^X'
What
(c. f.
l^
TTTI
j* What
is
case
shay-unf
To English
*>
TT7-7
is
u^V;
,\
-^11
Why?
Why?
-?/
(r)
(t)
Exercise
14b.
(hal).
**.
not
Yes:
a mother.
Mention one particle for making sentences negative
U ma
are
Jl
will turn these sentences into an interrogative
11.
them
Either of the Interrogative Particles

10.
words within
the
in other lessons.
of possession be prefixed to nouns with
-#O^L
*'*l^*
It is
(i)
?
brackets denote that
expressed in English.
7.
her [there is] a sister

She has a sister
Translate your English back to Arabic.
37
Lesson
AFFIXES
1.
Its
2.
word
Transliterate the Arabic
meaning
is
(contd.)
Sultan,
Emperor, or King.
is
What two new

The Ta,
15.
letters are here
introduced
T; and Nun which has an
a strong
N sound. The
ta
allied to za-k, a strong Z.
k
k
J,
(hard)
Ji
z (strong)
ta
?a
nun
-t
N.B.
is
an
makes the
Will not two of the forms of the
No
the diacritic point
beneath
in the
We
now
will
like
aw
in
tawny and
zhd.
It
^
is
the simple z (zain).
Medial) be confused with the
4.
sound
sound sometimes transliterated
explosive
much heavier than

3.
fat-ha
Initial
Nun
(the Initial
and Medial Ba
and the
above in the case of the Nun, and
is
case of the Ba) -*- and
->
give the plural forms of the Pronominal Affixes
beneath the corresponding singular forms.

IstPerson
Sing
Plural
5.
N.B.
Read from
What
letter is
right to left
always found
Affixes, both in the singular
The Ha
(See 14
2) hu,
and learn by
in
and
heart.
the 3rd Person Pronominal
in the plural f
hum, hun-na.
~ 386.
And what
letter is
inseparable from the second person Prono-
minal Affixes, both Singular and Plural
The Kaf
7.
What
is
kum, kunna.
the case of these affixes
are accusative
They
to a
ka, ki
if
Exs. of accus.
joined to a verb and genitive
'
how
is
*>
with you
if
genitive in
>
j+S
'**
Exs. of gen.
affixed
1,1)
sultan
broke
it
ILL* our sultan
The
^ o
Our
if
'>"
>' 3
*Z
j+& she struck her
lf%i
>
But
noun or preposition.
*-' '
8.
'
>
\
sultan of us;
the apostle of
^*J
c. f.
God = God's
his apostle,
apostle. ciUjI
and
~*\
the
of
him
name
of the king
= his father.
9.
king's name.
(Explained in detail
in
are, in
sentences,
we,
N.B.
tol
I,
the father
'
Lesson
But where are the nominative pronouns
These
10.
= the
19).
Arabic, the real pronouns, being subjects of
etc.,
etc.
they are given detached, separate words, as
j^
Details in Lesson 25.
The following words
take alif-kasra at the commence-
ment of a sentence, but wasla when linked on to a preceding

word. That wasla indicates that the preceding vowel is to be
linked in pronunciation.
daughter
<CJ
name
or.w.te,
--
twa<fem.)
^-
son
two
'/:x,J
J> J
(m.)
N.B. In our vocabularies and in many places (but not in full reading exercises)
shall also, as soon as
we may drop the grammatical tanwin un.
possible, dispense with transliteration.
We
II.
Note
that
^1
father has not a was. la.

>*
before the pron-affix.
v.*jj
A
'
missing
is
supplied
**
her father. ^^\
'
thy father.
12.
when accurring
j/
in
39
of
Omar, omits
its
alif,
To English
Exercise 15a.
Ahmad
genealogies, as
o
thus
t
>
^j ^
son of Zaid, son

>
(v)
j
(A)
(r)
(r)
(t)
v^
(n)
>
^.remse
To Arabic
15b.
(1)
Have they not
(2)
We
have a son.
son (whether not to them a son

(To-us [there
(4)
Have you (f.) a sister ?

Have I a sister ? (To me
(5)
She has (To-her
(6)
Have you
(7)
They
(8)
We
(9)
The King's name.
(3)
(10)
She
(IT)
He
(12) Is
(m.)
have
ate
(m.)
[there
[is
is]
king
is]
? )
a son).
there] a sister)
a father
and mother.
have a king and a prince.

an
emperor.
with her mother.
took her with him.
your son with you
(f.) ?
&?// T
(1)
(2)
15.
Write out the Singular and Plural Pronominal
What
is
the difference between the
Affixes. (15 14)
first letters
of v' and
J-l
Lesson
I.
16.
40
REVISION OF CHARACTERS.
Let us learn the whole Alphabet in order. Also vowels, signs, etc,
Translit:
Detached Final
Medial Initial Name
Alif-
4.
The Figures
vr ->>
5.
Note the curious fact that numbers run from
6.
as in
S V
> iYN.
English : c.f. 1917,
1921,
The numerical order and values of the alphabet (i.e. the use of
the Arabic consonants as figures) will be found at the end of
our course.
is
It
withheld from the student at
avoid distracting attention.

the
Hebrew names
the
119
th
Which
^*
But those
this
stage to
who wish may compare
of the letters forming the sub-headings of
Psalm (English
characters
7-
left to right
Bible) with
J )
* *
this order
of
Arabic
T*_^
are the six letters which cannot be joined to the letters
following them?
To
these
has the
8.
Medial,
Initial,
Medial,
Initial,
Final.
Separate.
Final.
Separate.
we may add
alif
Vocabulary
the double letter lam-alif, which always
written athwart the lam.

16.
Memorise
A^
Day
fyaumj
abode
(ddr)
religion
or,
judgment
(din)
Islam
(al- Islam) *
gold
(dha-hab)
carefully.
la
43
Lesson 17.
TA MARBUTA & ALIF MAQSURA.
1.
Does
No
in
conclude
this
all
forms of the
there are special forms of
its
form
final
the sign
many
of the
is
written
two
One
letters.
Now
this
of the masculine
nouns (not quite
the
is
letter
Feminine Gender and can be
'
is
which
generally
affixed to very
because while
all,
*^ e
man, a separate word
is
J>- j
2.
letters
How
is it
shown
that this
<
is
\j>\
used for woman).
is
the Feminine ending
A>^
It
takes the two dots of the
taO. Thus C> Ibna-tun
(daughter).
But, in speaking or in newspaper reading this tanwin
dropped as
/ibna.
it is
only a case-ending, and the word
^
Similarly
is
always
pronounced
is
'
4o-X*
madina
al-medina
e. g.
(a city)
(city
A>-^
where
tribe).
Mohammed was
Note
Compare
buried).
The common word
a corruption
3.
But
is
then the
is
is
4IiJ
?
the antecedent of the Construct State
sounded (Explained
The daughter
of the judge
prophet's city
in 19: 10).
,3^!
Madinat-
TVT
The
tribe of Coreish
Qabilatu-
The
prophet's word
Quraish
Kalimat-un-
(epistle,
The chapter
4.
letter
message)
of
"The Cow"
'* *
Ibnat-ul-Qadi
un-Nabiyi
The prophet's
Qabila (a
above
not the t-sound sometimes heard
Yes, when. the word
The
of the
4^5
for "girl" (also, daughter) is
A>
bint sî)
also
'
J;*J
''
C"*'
'
tg
t*'***-\
"-
Risalat-
un-Nabiyi
Surat-ul-Baqara
How do we distinguish this use of the from the ordinary

We call this o ta marbuta (which means tied-up ta).
t
ta
5.
44
What
is
special
name ?
The^
which when written without
the long
the other letter that has a distinct form
(in other
words
is
but, to our surprise, acts as

6.
But
is
is
make
dots does not
its
not homogeneous to the kasra)
"prolongation" to the fat-ha.
not that the work of Alif
Exactly, so this
under a
a second
alif.
The
can be called
first alif
Alif mamduda = extended alif (this comes from a root meaning

"to stretch out"
compare "madda" from the same
The ya without
dots
and
alif),
W.-^"
Give
is
is
then called "Alif
(shortened
Guidance
hudan
the guidance
al-huda
fever
al-humma
a youth, lad,
fatan
when
mata
to,
(interrog)
towards
What
*>-
u>
ila
upon, on
âla
characteristic
Both are used
9.
maqura"
ll),
only used at the end of nouns.
examples of Alif maqura.
7-
8.
root, 15
common
is
at the
to a
and
ends of words and both are invariably
preceded by a fat-ha.
the fat-ha sometimes written "upright" ?
Yes this is the mark which shows that an
Is
is
to
be pronounced, though
Al-Qur'an which had

the pronunciation.
the "upright fat-ha"
pronounced
not, originally, the
alif of
It is
prolongation
quite
common
vowels written,
The vowel-marks were added

showed where the long
in the absence of the
The following are

The Compassionate One
used.
not written.
its
alif
chief examples
ar-Rah-man
fat-ha
It is
not
in
to fix
and
later,
was
be
to
now much
:
4
*>
the heavens
as-sama-wat
- I'
*~>\
tl
**J
'
45
that, those
this,
but
(demonst
these (demonst
dha-lika, ulaika
hadha ha-ulai
but he
lakinnahu
lakin,
life
(Quran spelling)
hayatun
life
(modern spelling)
hayatun
prayer (Quran spelling)
salatun
prayer (modern spelling)
salatun
Exercise 17 a.
A*J
.0
.*
^
v
Exercise 17 b.
I.
Did you see the lad on the mountain
3.
Did he take
4.
Yes, he took
5.
What
6.
His name
/.
Has
8.
Yes, he has a father, mother, brother and
is
this
his
it
book with him
is
name
a camel.
Zaid the son of
young man
2 Yes,
and rode (mounted)
that lad's
Mohammed Ahmed.
a father
and mother?
sister.
saw him.
Lesson 18.
& PLURAL.
DUAL
I.
Return to the verb forms of the Past Tense, and learn the
Dual and Plural.
Dual
Plural
-^?
Singular
f*.
Ul
2.
r-^
What have we
here in these Plural and Dual forms
new Person-forms,
that
included in the verb
is,
Eight
to distinguish the persons
endings
viz,
lr
ij{
they
they (m)
(f)
(J
you
they
two
you
two
r
you
(f)
I'
we
3.
&
f.)
observe here that Arabic has three numbers Singular for

Note that
One, Dual for Two, and Plural for More than Two.
:
there
4.
(m.
We
no dual for the
is
first
person, the plural being used,
Write (and memorise) yfcS
to break.
fVJf
Is
the Alif at the end of 'jj^r^ pronounced
No,
it is
not pronounced;
its
only function seems_tol>etO-show
E. g., when the pronoun

the absence of any affixed pronoun
"her" is affixed, as in "they struck her", the alif is omitted
:
Exercise
47
/.sv/.
M'V
v*
>'"
>
V.
*'"
*j{j~0 yo
'
"
".
X,
M:
TI
Jl
^
'""
1)
"
^'^^'-^ xî T r *
db] J*^
ÂJ>
(r)
^^^ J]
(i)
.-J f
Jl
f /
JU^l
^1
f*\
"
/\
-U-1
l"
(o)
ô
oJU-1
"
^)
*^
'"
I-T
J**^-' 'Jij-^l
JiA^
>
0)
".
^^
t'l
\<
f^ J*
tf
c-a**J
^^
"
'"'
>'*>>.* <**~*
-:
aliAi-l
Exercise 18b.
1.
Did you
2.
Did they
strike the
and
it.
it
And
3.
to
take your sword with you
(pi.)
killed
camel with the sword
did your son go with them
my
Yes;
we took
it.
Yes they struck

;
Yes; he went with them
town.
5.
To your town
Yes to my town.
What is his name
My son's name
6.
Did they take bread with them
4.
is
Ahmad.
They took
it,
and
ate
it.
TO STUDENTS.
(I.)
It
has
come
instructions
to
my
knowledge that one or two students have misunderstood the
and are translating
very serious error,
most important
answered
(2.)
N.B.
ht fv.ll,
i.
half.
both
e.
"From Arabic
to discard
Please
Ex
let it
only.
be understood that every
and Ex
Thoroughly master Lesson 19 as
idiom, of fundamental importance.
to English"
This
is
one-half of every exercise and that the
Ewvlw
mu*t If
B.
it
deals with a characteristic Arabic
A.T
48
Lesson
NOUNS
1.
What
IN
19.
CONSTRUCTION.
one of the chief peculiarities of Arabic
is
with other Semitic languages
The way
which
in
places two nouns side by side in order to
it
Give an example of
How
possession.
to the
is
will the single idea of possession in reference
two nouns, sword and man, be formed
"The sword of the man"

*)
here
The man's sword,

Sword
Let us examine carefully.
Arabic
;
l|
the-sword-of the man,
How
_ _
Arabic
in
written, for instance, in

tf
saif-ur-ra-ju-li
What have we
effect, etc.
this simple juxta-position so as to express
3.
common
express such ideas as possession, material, cause,

2.
in
(alone)
is
cJu-* saif-un; but the first
therefore, here
4.
What
It is
is
it is
word has
not ^definite,
said to have
happened
called
is
independently
it
it is
alone
sword
stand
cannot
It
expresses nothing completely.
it
joined to the second noun,
"One-annexed-to."
the
tanwindamma;
has become defined.
to this first noun,
said to be "annexed", since
which
i. e.
lost its
It
can
only be explained as generally requiring, as in this case, our
English word "of".
first
we do
not write the
"the-sword-of".
But
Because the
noun
defined by
first
its
What
first of
term
<*-*?*
is
noun can be translated by
is
by
employed
which
word "of"
first
noun
is
sufficiently
then put in the
to express the dependent state of the
to
a state
which requires
be supplied to convey the sense of
incompleteness entailed by the form of the
The
is
not
"of."
two nouns thus linked together,
the English
Why
article.
considered to be
juxtaposition to ^>-J\
genitive as governed
5.
So the
first
noun
said to be in the "Construct State (form)" or
in a State of Construction, as
it is
"built into" its
second noun.
Why
not
tanwin
a tanwin kasra (ra-julin)
J^J*^^
has J>-j in
*
a
>
>
6.
49
damma
Because
7.
8.
"A
may be
it
Case
Genitive
said to be in
"a man's sword".
^J&f* L\
name"
book's
the
in
is
it
(governed by "of" understood) Or

Possessive Case
and
if
Some Arabic Grammarians
"Everything"
name
give the
*l*JT'
Oblique Case to every
noun not directly Nominative or Accusative.
So
Genitive Case
that
they call
Q.
the
*>^ Dative
^
Case
^..^^
the Ablative Case
Oblique Cases.
{the
Then how many cases
shall
we say
there are in Arabic
Nominative = Subject of the Verb

Accusative = Direct Object of Transitive Verb
Genitive or Oblique = Governed by "of", or
other Preposition, etc,
10.
How
The
N.B.
do we speak of the two nouns

first
one
is
The Antecedent,
Definite Article
11.
the Antecedent
See
in
in construction
Article
and the second the Consequent.
ordinary cases, does not need the
4.
Does the Consequent more often than
It
or "Possessive"
not,
have the Definite
may do
so,
but only if
it
is
already definite before being put
into
the Construct State.
people-of-the-Book, al-kitdb
its
In the
was
by
Oblique Case, as
is
that
shewn by
it
replaces
The-people-of-the-house.
^^
>
The man's
family.
The
king's children.
The
origin of the universe.
Nom-
the kasra.
>
Exs.
the,
therefore
12.
J*l
originally definite,
only change, as a consequent,
inative Case
phrase ^-ll5ol
'
^'
jo
J*'
>"
*
'
13.
Suppose the consequent

It
the
possessing
^^
**>' Real Arabic
as
article
-^
are often nunated as
>
>
-jO<^\)
\
&-
(then
be one of those few names
it
>
Noun
a Proper
is
take no article unless
will
already
50
names
names not
foreign
>
so
'f*j}
(Lesson 52
8)
For a Celtic example see Bedd Gelert

14.
The people
'
^<a* ^)*
upon
They broke
its
case,
upon
i.e.
its
vowel depends,
Its
place in the sentence.
the man's pen.
J^J
>
The sun
struck the man's head
**
'
(jf
'
>
strike his
head
**
'
1
'
J-.>-
^j^
>
i-Jj
***
May
noun be
the consequent of one
antecedent of another?
Certainly
>
W^V
King-of-the-kings, and Lord-of-the-lords."
One
^{
wrote with your pen.
Did the sun
15.
..
.^..-
J /r**-''
rc~J!
have seen Mt. Hermon.
We
A* JJ"
\, >
J^j"
Egypt
Gelert's grave.
Does the Antecedent always take damma

of course,
of
the
(at
same
time) the
here are four examples.
of the king's children.
*?>
-'
struck one of the king's children.
wrote to one of the king's children.
dJlLj!
^V J
^0
We went to the house of the tribe's chie<?

16.
What common
error
article to the antecedent of a
name
of a
man"
Noun
-^?-
C^X^T
J u*O
I
in the prefixing
name"
of the
Think not
in Construction.
but of "a man's
'
<J
7-c-^J^X.)
must the student avoid

;
> ^\ s*
'
,/
<U....Ji)i
That of "thinking English" resulting
of "the
^^ J
^-**-*-''
I/.
Note the names of mts
y=
Jl
c.f.
19a.
51
Wales, Pennines,
etc. in
In
etc.
Bettws-y-Coed, Bwlch-y-Deufan, Pen-y-Gant;
To English
(A)
!el*i
Exercise
o *^
t
The-day-of-judgment
The-abode-of-peace
3.
The Emperor's
4.
The-Sultan-of-Egypt.
5.
The-gold-of-the-Vizier (the Vizier's gold).
6.
The-religion-of-Islam (Mohammedanism).
7.
Hast thou (m) taken the
8.
Hast thou (m) eaten the king's bread?
9.
No
The King's
n.
Did you go
12.
bl.B.
went
Dar-es-Salam
vizier's
(r)
(E. Africa).
pen
it.
letter.
to the
to
Dar-es-Salam
Sbeikh's mountain (Hermon).
Memorise the examples found

to
son.
have not eaten
10.
(r)
1.
IS
r)
2.
(0
Lr*i
(u)
To Arabic
19b.
etc.
>*rrS
^r J]
Welsh
in this lesson if possible.
Arabic what the pons asinorum (Euclid
1:5) is to
It is
Geometry.
52
Lesson 20.
EXERCISE IN TRANSLITERATION.
A. Arabic to
B.
Roman
Roman
(Transliterate Ex. 18. A.)
characters.
characters back to Arabic.
Correct by
EXAMINATION PAPER
To
A.
A.
20.
be answered without assistance, and sent up for correction.

(Give student's name, address and number.)
Translate to English
\)
(v)
ij
(T)
(r)
00
dlLJJ
B.
Translate to Arabic
(1)
He
(2)
The-people-of-the-scripture [are] in Dar-es-Salam.
believed in the Quran.
(3)
Has
(4)
Didst thou write the book with the man's pen
(5)
The sun
(6)
Did she not
(7)
Did she believe
(8)
Have you
(9)
Did she
the prince a city
struck a youth.
ride
(PI.)
book
[any] food
in a
write the letter
(10)
The-day-of-[the]-judgment.
(11)
believed in God's book from the beginning.
(12)
struck
C.
What
is
[off]
the youth's
a rnadda
and what
head with the swora.

is
a wasla
(t)
53
Lesson
EAR EXERCISE.
EYE, VOICE &

1.
How
is
word
the
î
21.
pronounced
It lias
deity.
2.
a plural form \$\
How
\\^l
al-ila-hu, but in
"^
'
How
Allah
speaking, omit the final vowel
English word ah
written
is
After the
which
<u)l
it
correctly
is
alif the
and
u,
the
fat-ha
a contraction of
mean
it
It
has a
begins a sentence.
word
is
upon
the
practise saying Ol-lawh though

the
it
4^1
ahh.
Only Deity.
very broad and
is
awful, and this re-acts
when
what does
i.e.,
two lams coalesce, as shown by the shadda
Allah pronounced
The middle
is
pronounced
takes a simple fatha when
The word means GOD,
How
when
do Moslems write the word Allah
wasla here, but
But
"
the god, or the deity
pronounce the h by aspirating after the upright fatha,
like the
4.
god or
'a-li-hatun (deities),
^^
"
do we write
still
3.
means
ildhun in reading otjldh in speaking, and
It is
like
still
transliterate
preceded by a kasra,
as, for
aw
in
we must
fatha also, so
first
we
pronounced
is
it
allah.
example,
from a prefixed preposition, then (and only then) the word

is
much
lighter,
and
J J-
is
sounded almost
al-Hamdu
Example:
4Ji>
preposition
meaning "to"
is
like the short fatha.
lillahi (Praise to
prefixed
and joined on
place of the alif-wasla, but not separately

for the Arabic never writes three
falls
upon
Ink but lightly so.
the sentence, to
Exercise 21 A.
(a)
make
the
"Eye, Voice and
The Arabic Order
is,
shown
The J
in the
in writing,
lams together. The accent
N. B.
PAUSE
God),
We
omit the
last vowel
of
(like Quran-readers).
Ear" Exercise:
usually,
"Verb before
the Subject,"
but occasionally the subject precedes, for EMPHASIS.

(b)
Prepositions govern nouns in the oblique case (with kasra).
(c)
Now
read aloud (with careful enunciation) and memorise.
(e)
54
Keep on day
after day for 15 minutes at a time, long after

have
you
passed on to lessons 22-30. Memorise, memorise
The secret is RE AD ALOUD. You must do that.
!
o e
wal-hamdu
&
I.
Bismillahi
2.
'Abd-ullahi
3.
Kataba
rasul-ullahi risala.
4.
Kataba
rasul-ullahi risalatan ila 'abd-il-malik.
wa
lillah.
Jui^
<&f
ra-sul-ullah.
>j
P
d^ J L^-J
LS' Ll^ -
A';* jl 4)Lj if
diuf
X
*
^^fi
^
5.
Jj'-/>J Al*
4lll*j4l
-*
&\
-^
x-
Ba'atha rasul-ullahi risalatan ila-1-maliki wa wazirih.

"
X
6.
Kataba
^ j
il-wazir.
risalatan
rasul-ullahi
-
^3^' J ^.^
1
^*"
ila-bn-il-maliki
bi-qalam^
J' ^^->
t>J ^
> '*i*' ^>"J
x
r
c
Ba atha rasul-ullahi kitaban ila-bn^l-malika.
^-^
"
'
V^ ""^
7.
îJI
X
1
8.
/>
*^
X
Jl Ibj*
^^fc
3 -^L.J* Il)
^
Ba-'a-that il-malikatu kitaban ila rasul-illah.
if J J-3 jt
"
4Jftl
*r
9.
Qata'al-waziru ra*sa rasul-il-malik.
10.
Yadullahi
ma
al-Jama
a.
Ulf Sojf XoT.; -A
ft- ^
C
"
^'
Exercise 21B. Re-translate to the Arabic of 21 A.
name of God and Praise to God

2. The servant
(slave) of God (Abdallah) and God's Apostle. 3. The Apostle
of God (i.e. Mohammed) wrote a letter. 4. God's Apostle wrote
a letter to the king's servant (slave).
5. The Apostle of God
sent a letter to the king and his vizier (minister). 6. The Apostle
of God wrote a letter to the king's son with the Vizier's pen,
7. The Apostle of God sent a book (or a writing) to the queen's
8. The queen sent a book to the Apostle of God.
son.
9. The
I.
In the
wazir cut off the head of the king's messenger. 10, God's hand
is with the company. (A tradition commending unity of action).
55
Lesson 22.
THE MODEL FORM.

1.
For what technical purpose

This root
names
the form
is
in the order of its letters
for the 1st, 2nd,
and 3rd
used
Ji
supplies "model"
letter of
any root so that we
can speak of them technically.
2.
Thus the
1st root letter of
And
2nd
And
3rd
This root in
any verb
is
named
its
^
^
Past Tense, Singular and Plural,
memorised perfectly before the student proceeds

Dual
Plural
(Ain)
J (Lam)
must now be
,,
its
(Fa)
farther.
Singular
* r*
3.
Give the Transliteration.

Sing
Dual
Plur
4.
faâl-ti
fa-'a-la
fa-'a-lat
fa-'al-ta
fa'a-la
fa-'a-la-ta
fa-'al-tuma
fa-'a-lu
fa-'al-na
fa-'al-tum
fa-'al-tu
fa-'al-tunna
fa-'al-na
Explain the constructive use made of the three radicals
They form a basal
We may
"
add some of the
get a ''form" (which
upon
we add an
(or
servile letters (49
we should
call in
this
form.
We
2) to
it,
and thus
Algebra a formula) and
because each one inserts an

of
its
verb.
can then make hundreds of
(See Lesson
a murderer are both said to be
etc.
Alif to the fa of the root and get a form 'At li
"one doing" (doer).
words on
radical
Model)
J*i
form we build our derived words. Thus, for example,
this
which
Type-root"
for all verbs,
23).
^^
upon the form

alif after
a clerk,
(or
the -i
and
measure)
(
or
first
- 565.
Is the
It
"
"
Model form
can be used for
all
to think is Conj.VIII
some,
is
used for verbs,
etc.
parts of speech, thus
on form
we say
and we say that
J:il
that
J-
on the form
Vocabulary 22.
The man
"man"
what
(masc.) ar-rajulu
(the race), al-insdnu
jl
why
,5
JLJ
the girls, al-bandtu
Exercise 22a.
limddhd
there
the lesson, ad-darsu
mddhd
is
not
u-V
but (rather), bal
To English
(0
(r)
T-oi
(r)
'^
-'^
x**
L>U!
oi; cê^
î
sl^jf j,
'.".
:s
.-Vt
<
11
>
".
J*
(t)
(o)
,'
^9 J*
W >
jl
(v)
(A)
To Arabic
Exercise 22b.
57
1.
Has
2.
Yes, he has a daughter.
3.
Has he
4.
Did the Prince's daughter open the door
5.
No, but the
6.
Did they open
7.
Did the Sheikh's children
8.
Why
9.
Where
the Prince a daughter
a son
woman opened
son.
Yes; they opened
it ?
[is]
it.
kill
it.
the Prince's son
the prince's daughter
His daughter
10.
No; he has no
did they do that

[is]
with her mother.
SOME USEFUL ADVERBS, ETC.

here
when
there
when
where
where
how
(interr:)
LJ
(conj:)
then (conj:)
(interrog:)
A
(relative)
(interr
very, (much)
:)
also,
again
Self Test Paper 22.

1.
What
to
do
special use
(22
is
made
of the
radicals of the root
Ji
4).
x *>
2.
Write
3.
Similarly
out,
from memory
^ji Singular and
L/^
(18
l)
Plural.
(22:3)
Lesson 23.
NOUNS OF AGENT AND OBJECT.

I.
How many
Parts of Speech are there in Arabic
The Verb
2.
What
Three.
al-fi'l
The Noun
al-ism
The
al-harf
Particle
can
(ism) the Arabic Noun, include
It
includes
the
Substantive, Adjective, Numeral, Personal,

Demonstrative and Relative Pronoun, and Participle.
3.
How many
1st.
2n.
Classes of Participles are there
Two.
The Noun
of Agent, or Active Participle,)

/
pronounced is-mul-fa'il
The Noun
uuf^f
of Object, or PassivePartiririleJ
]
Give examples of
one-whc-strikes
i.e.
this
Active Participle or
f">
>
\\
-**'
pronounced is-mul-maf'iil
4.
>^
>
f*-
Noun
of Agent.
da-rib
a striker
one-who-does
a doer, labourer
one-who-kills
a murderer
one-who-writes
a writer, clerk
one-who-d wells
an inhabitant
one-who-is present
"Present! "(roll-call)
one-silent
silent (Adj.)
5.
What do we
Let us analyse the above words.
We observe
Noun
that each
of
Agent
is
formed from the three
Radicals of the simple verb (Past Tense,
an
alif after the fa
3 s.m.)
and placing a kasra under the
J> we
word. Using the form

Participle
observe?
say
The verb forms
(Noun of Agent) upon the formJ&U. This
word used above
in Ism-ul-fa'il.
by adding
'ain
its
of the
Active
last is the
6.
59
Give examples of the Passive Participle or Noun of Object.

one-killed
a victim
)
j
Exercise 23a.
bo
"
"
'
"'
'
(0
J
UA U
'^li
C-
-^>- *A
(r)
"
tf
C.
(A)
Exercise
1.
Have
2.
Yes; the lesson
3.
Is
4.
Yes; he
5.
Is the
6.
Not
is
9.
very well understood.
at all (or, No).
His book
life is
is
very
We know
6).
(have known) nothing about
unknown (=He's a mystery).

fine.
What is its name ? Its name
is
the Universe".
What did he write about

He wrote about everything.
?
Is
writer of that book famous
His
present with us here. (See 24
"The Origin of
8.
is
the judge's clerk present here
him.
7.
the girls understood their lesson
(lit.
the book printed on paper
What
10.
Of
he wrote about
course.
it ?)
61
Lesson 24.
"VERB TO BE".
1.
Is
there a "Verb to Be" in Arabic
Yes;
it is
called
2.
by
Does the
It
their
alif of
The
of
3.
sing
he was, (since
permutations or changes.
wau
jo
in
is
the place
disappears, in others a
Now
scientists call
for the Past
Tense of
\)
are
it
of
Remember
wau!
In
this
some
damma shows where
re-appears, an example
"Reversion to Type."
j
Dual
Plural
verbs
past tense and classified thus).
has been, while in the present tense
what
all
prolongation cause any difficulty
alif of
"persons" the
it
masc
causes certain
point:
jO
called the verb
Singular
5-
But
the Arabic
is
62
Verb jo
used as in the English
Not exactly; we do not generally use
What
6.
In
often takes
its
place
its
present tense.
Semitic languages the Subject and Predicate are written
but the Copula "is"
is
This makes no
not written.
Example:
"I" (see
"I
[am] writing v-J^T
Lesson
25),
and katib
lJ
is
I- U
is
difficulty,
form of speech.
for the student very quickly

uses^theôriental
the separate pronoun
the-one-who-is-writing, but
it
can also be read simply "writing" or "writer", while the copula
"am"
I
is
not written at
[am] killing
or, I
all.
J UU
[am] a murderer
..s>/,
Thou
dwelling
[art]
The man
nice
[is]
The Pasha
[is]
or,
(i.e.,
thou
[art]
a dweller
"bonhomme")
a good (pious)
man
(Words not expressed in Arabic are put into square brackets; those in round
brackets are explanatory words.)
7.
What
The
of the adjective in the last example
its
Substantive
case, being defined
tanwin
The Adjective
same gender, number and
rule of Syntax concerning Adjectives is
follows
8.
if it
and
by
J'
is
of the
when
No;
(in Arabic) to the
Present only.
IMPORTANT RULE OF SYNTAX:

used
a sentence,
in
it
we
In the past
When any
causes the predicate
The man was honourable
Examples:
The woman was honourable
Thou wast near

was
r"
one
(if
J^~s
N.B. "Bread"
is
Subject here, not Predicate.
them)
JO
a'^Ji
&* Vij* ^*-^
0>
to
is
(Jamma
far (off)
They had bread = there was bread
jO
use
its
**i^**
**L/**
to the village
part of the verb
expressed) to take fat-ha, while the subject retains
or receiving
is,
does.
this
is
substantive
its
omission of the Copula apply to the Past Tense
Does
ju
*>.
>
-63 The word
10.
when
<Uo
it
means
literally
feminine form of the verb, but when
WORD") which
as in
Home
Masculine, then
is
Exercise 25
on page
c,
it
"a word," takes
means LOGOS ("THE
it
may
take the Masculine,
65.
Self Test 24.

1.
Write out (from memory) the Past Tense of
2.
What happens
Vocabulary
to the
copula "is"
(24
(24
:
3).
6).
24.
Jesus, Yasu*u
generous
owner, sahib
O men,
To English
Exercise 24a.
J j-j
<y
JL>-
l>
glory,
majd
thanks, shukr
>
>
<>
jSl
Arabic
in
<jo
(v)
A- liJ-
(r)
(t)
To Arabic
Exercise 24b.
(
The queen
[is]
God
The
lesson
[is]
(4)
The
writer
is
good
(or, a
good
one).
generous.
[is]
understood.
[well]
known.
The-owner-of-the-book famous
[Is]
Jesus
Where have you
the
is
(9)
We were
(9)
Glory
(10)
Thanks
Son
(or,
[be] to
of
God.
been,
O men
have-been) with God's Apostle (messenger).
God.
to the prince.
64
Lesson 25. PERSONAL PRONOUNS.

1.
What
is
word
the Arabic
for a Personal
Pamir which forms
;><i
its
plural
Pronoun
Remember
j\c*
Pronouns and Adjectives are treated as Nouns

2.
What
is
the case of the Personal Pronouns
that all
in Arabic.
are generally called "Separate" or "separable" Pronouns,
They
because they stand alone
as
These
words.
separate
are
Nominative Case, being Subject of the sentence.

3.
Give the Separate Pronouns.
r
'
ofc
>
r'
til
4.
Memorise, reading the
Roman
transliteration
from
to
left
pronounced ana, not ana).

huwa, hiya anta, anti ana.
Dual Pronouns
huma, antuma.
Plural Pronouns
hum, hunna antum, antunna nahnu.
How do we express the Accusative and Genitive Cases ?
By the use of the Pronominal affix (See Lesson 14 and 18
(Ana
right
is
Singular Pronouns
5.
6.
Two
Interrogative
^^ and
l.
Pronouns may well be learned here these are

:
Each
is
of suitable number.
Exs:
Who
Who
is
What
is
What
is
What
is
art
thou
the writer
thy
name
5)
usually followed by a personal pronoun
(Revise here 24
6)
0*
or )
^j
the chief purpose of
man
the origin of the universe

A> - >
J ' 7>
rJ
fj-
7.
The word j^>
(fern.
45to)
is
used as the equivalent of our
^
"j% may
>
expression "so-and-so".
As an
Adj.
be used,
65
EXAM. PAPER
25.
(To be sent up for correction).
A. To English
*T
*
\
J^-o J
4)Jl
'-tt ;
4
ÂJI
^,
^s*)
"
-^ \ î
**f
'*
J^j*
Jr-r
Mr
if
*l
To Arabic.
1.
C.
She
is
good (pious) woman.
was near my
2.
3.
My
4.
You
5.
Did you know the murderer and the victim
6.
Where
village
is
village.
near the town.
are a nice ("hail-fellow-well-met")
is
my
book
man.
?
"
>
'
>
-a
Explain the difference between
Why
Exercize
..'tc.
the difference in the case of
(Correct at home).
'
f -*
4dl
^
x
"tT
JÂJifel^
Exercise 25d.
Translate to Arabic
St.
John
I, 2.
i^t"-
"-
jlS lAA .4*
66
Lesson 26,
1.
What
two chief divisions of tense-forms
are the
The Past and
And
the Present-future.
Arabic
in
whilst Past tense-
forms can be used for any past action, whether represented in

English by Simple Past (Preterite) Tense or by "Perfect" Tense,
the Future ten&e-forms can be used both for an action still
be performed
to
and
in the future
And
is
our English Future Tense)
progress and continuing into the
for an action already in
future (that
(i.e.,
English Present Tense).
to say our
so the Arabic Future forms
we
will designate as "Present-
Future." As a rule the Arabic ''Present- Future" form expresses

a
Present Tense, and
prefix will be
call this the
for
2.
it is its
we
shall see,
to represent a
employed
that an additional
later,
Future Tense.
But the absolutely sure
Imperfect Tense.
Al-MuAdri'u 9 jl*kj
> ^
original Arabic one,
Some
name
Give the Present- Future Forms (Singular) of the Model-form.

^0^
He
do
will
She
will
yaf-'a-lu
do
J*i*
taf-'a-lu
m.
3 f
'
S*'
Thou
(m.) wilt
do
taf-'a-lu
Ji
-
Thou
(f.)
will
do
wilt
do
taf-'a-li-na
m.
f.
'/>Lir
*^ ^
>'**
I
3.
What do we
af-'a-lu
notice here
J*i
That whilst the person-forms follow the verb root

Tense, they come before
is
to
say,
the action
it
in the
which
formative person-mark after

that
is
an
affix
verb form
ist
That
places the
whilst the action
its
person-mark before the
full
verb
Past Tense person-marks
atives"; Future (and
atives."
and p
Past
not in the past but in the future (or continuing from
present into future) places

form.
its
Present-Future forms.
finished
is
in
(It
may thus be called "AfformPresent-Future) may be called "Preform-
should be noted, however, that
as well as a prefix}.
in taf*alina there is
4.
67
We
He
follow the Model-form J.i, J** precisely.

(does or) will prohibit
She
yam-na-u
3m.
tam-na-u
f.
Thou
(m.) dost or wilt prohibit
tam-na-*u
m.
Thou
(f.)
tam-na-'ina
f.
5.
hinder or prohibit.
to
Give the Singular of fjlill of
Mention a few verbs for conjugating on

s-
>'*
to gather
'"
>
to
ai^
^t ^
to
to praise
r-J^f
rOu
6.
Why
the past
ss
>7t**
o ^
to raise
"
?Ob
open
model.
this exact
s
*+>-
^+
*!
am-na-'u
(do) or will prohibit
go
^*-X>^*.3
to appoint
J*ii J*>.
and present-future side by side
That
plan followed in the dictionary, and the student
is
is
the
from now
henceforth to take a separate page in his vocabulary note-
^^
book for every variation of the type-root J*ij Ui that we give

as a new "form", and every new root must be entered thus
:
Meaning
<J^
'
J**l
J*
68
SOME ADVERBIAL PREPOSITIONS.

These are really (Antecedent) Construct Nouns
N.B.
consequent
is,
Ji>
after...
in Accusative Case.
The
of course, in the Genitive.
behind...
above...
behind--,
beneath...
before...
in front of..
between...
with,
\>
JJL*
at...
But when they are used as Adverbs, not Prepositions, and stand alone, then
the final vowel of most of them is damma
where
(rel.
below
adv.)
To English
Exercise 26a.
X
'.
(adv.)
*\
above
(r)
JJ
X
Ox-
dbo J] ÂAT
(r)
(A)
*e
To Arabic
Exercise 26b.
1.
He opens
2.
The queen
3.
Entrance
[is]
5.
What
What
the hindrance
The boy
4.
am
the door (gate) in front of the house.

raises the sword.
forbidden.
hinders you?
[is]
(youth)
going
7.
8.
Thou
(f.)
9.
Why
do you
10.
Under
(adv.)
(or,
[is]
(f.s.)
the earth.
praised (commended).
go) to
goest to
my
house.
thy house.
not open the door
(o)
69
Lesson 27.
DUAL AND PLURAL.

I.
Give the
rest of
c.
of
Dual
Ôx
Plural
2.
Singular
x-
xC x
Give the transliteration of the Dual

S.m.
yaf-'a-ldny
S.f.
2.m.
taf-'a-ldny
/.
Note
taf-'a-ldny.
The
the resemblance between 3rd Feminine, and 2nd person.
2nd Dual
like 1st Singular
and Plural
is
Common
to both
Masc. and Fern.

3.
Transliterate the Plural

2.m. taf-'a-Wna
4.
af-'a-lu
6.
1.
taf-'al-na
2.f.
Note
If
yaf-'al-na
he will do.
naf-'a-lu
shall do.
we
shall do.
(l) the third person uses.) (with two exceptions),

(2)
the second person uses j throughout,
(3)
the difference between m.
the verb precedes
No
S.f.
naf-'a-lu.
Note the similarity of the three following

yaf-'a-lu
5.
S.m. yaf-'a-luna
in
Arabic there
verb preceding
subject
is
its
&
its
subject does
is
an important
subject
quite near to
may
it)
it
f.
pi.
(both in 3rd
take the plural,
be inflected for gender
pupils study
The
girl-pupils study
(if
the
"*
*LJJI J^>-^>
\
The
etc.
RULE OF SYNTAX: A
out
2nd).
but takes Singular number only.
Learn these examples by heart
The women went
&
CA
- f
70
The
Do
girls
they
attend (go to) the school
(f)
understand the meaning
of their lessons
They do not understand

meaning.
7.
Write out *+>
their (its)
to collect, in full
'-
'"
(1)
Write out the Plural of
(2)
Write some examples of the Rule of Syntax (27
(27
7).
6).
Exercise 27a.
'
-'*->'->.
pjJ'sV*
,o
j^
^ e^^ x
ss**^
- ^X-
dU^VcdllLi
,x-
fl
fj'
(A)
tf^'.
,,,.
Mi^j^
>
(i)
Exercise 27b.
of
(3).
When they see us, we will go to them.

They (f.) write a book and are ignorant
Then they (f.) praise their work
(4).
We
that.
(5).
How
(6).
will collect their books, all of them.
(7).
know
(8).
We
(9).
Do
(l).
(2).
meaning.
will prevent
them
(f.)
wilt thou prevent
all
my
from [doing]
them
(f.)
about thy lessons.
the girls understand their
The
(f.)
lessons.
will ask thee
(Sing. Fern,
(lO).
its
(its)
meaning?
pronoun to represent the Broken Plural of inanimate object)

girls [do]
understand their meaning.
71
Lesson 28.FVTUKE.
I.
How may we
To
distinguish Future
a prefix only
<J*
word
What do
either the letter
and forms
<j*
al-mudari'
we
prefix
with fatha, which
a part of the verb
is
or the separate
saufa.
(j*
and Lij*
mean
may
be paraphrased as "soon."
probably abbreviated from the old word ^j+* which
is
now denotes
3.
denotes "in the future," and
^/It
the ordinary Present-Future Tense
one of two prefixes
2.
Time
"in the distant future."
Give the tense with future meaning, "He
will
swim."
>
o^?~v
'.
>
'*
^C*
"
Cr
P
7CA-**U
4.
Give similarly, the Quranic phrase
who
concerning unbelievers
now ("They shall know

seldom met with outside the Qu'ran.
stop their ears
word
is
later," etc.)
This
r
'
>-
5.
What
are
AA or fatha
fatha verbs
?
x 8
These are verbs on the form
damma
or kasra
*-*'
Give a few.
-
J-i
in
/-
Ji
which do not take
your vocabulary-book under those
sow
to fascinate,
<A;
with the âin of the Present-Future tense.
Enter up the following

given in Lesson 26:
to
c.
charm, bewitch
to transcribe (a Ms.)
or, to abrogate (supersede a law)
>
fr
to
make (manufacture)
to
pardon (forgive)
to
overcome
72
*i*a>
-:
*!.,*
xx v
7tJ*
to intercede
be useful to
to
*JU>
6.
Apply the Forms of Lesson 23

This
is
quite
therefore,
"artificial,"
propose
expressions in quite
meaning
to
and not heard
some words thus
in actual use
common
we
it
use.
several
We
most
useful
actual
give the etymological
was derived, but also the technical
the word.
Noun
Modern meaning
a victor
indicate
to
show how
modern use of
to these verbs.
feasible to the student, but
formed may be
Etymologically
of
A. or Obj.
Verb
73
Vocabulary 28.
>
to hear
an hour
PL
Jut
of
Exercise 28a.
*x
at 2bb. for
(Look
ears," will
come
cJLJI
r
rr
H
oU
5^
J!
Lesson
in
-*tti**.*
4*U JUi
coming
"
^^.û
;
*T^"^
4jol
*^
(fern.)
any unknown word, but
thy two
48.)
e;
ti*^^H\/^^
^)
(r)
j^-ui^
"TTi
o>
(i)
j^H J]
t-
"
^r
r >^
^^
>^\>"~
<u)l
(tri j -j 2
^Ml
(o)
b^'u.
(v)
tbii j>Cai
C*
>
'
"
i^Ju
(r)
til;
(\)
'^
1
"
'
'
i VI Î'T
(A)
Exercise 28b.
1.
Their gods (deities) will not benefit them
2.
3.
God
forbids (prevents) their prayer to their gods.
4.
God
listens to the prayer of
5.
Thy
ears hear a
6.
They
/.
The manufactures (manuf
will
come
will
to
you
after
[later on].
an hour.
His servants.
word behind
thee.
ask thee about the gods (deities, or

:
articles)
idols).
of Cairo are few,
but
they are useful.

(
Put
"
few "
in fern. sing,
i.e.,
Gender) are thought of &s>fem.

8.
9.
10.
The
verse
sing,
because inanimate things
and thus the predicate
is
Neuter
fern, sing.)
was abrogated.
The judge resided here in front of the prophet's

The crops (sown) in Egypt are very good,
house,
74
Lesson 29. "MOODS."

I
what "Mood"
In
The verb
the
studied in Lessons 26-28
"Mood
What
is
in the Indicative
of Simple Assertion" (as in English).
been conditioned
2.
the verb already studied
is
other
Moods
a simple direct assertion
are there
(a)
Subjunctive, ex.
(b)
Jussive
"In-order-to go"
it
3.
the last-mentioned
What
are these
"States."
a
Each
of
Moods
in
importance
go."
(i.e.
to us at this stage,
after the
Weak
and Jussive has
which may be compared with the
its
The kasra
place being taken by the sukun
the fatha, however, are used in both
the very Arabic
Verb).
each of the three cases of the Noun.
damma and
Noun, and
may
"Go."
of the Indicative, Subjunctive
not used with the Verb,
the
he
"that
"Verily he will (surely) go."
little
called in Arabic
distinctive vowel-mark,
vowel used
is
is
be postponed until Lesson 128
will
has been made.
(Command) "Let him go!"
Energetic (or Emphatic).
As
Nothing has
(Imperative formed from the Jussive).

(c)
Mood, or
word for Nominative Case
Indicative Mood, similarly, the term for Objective Case
Verb and
is that
for
is that
for
Subjunctive Mood.
4.
Learn the following table

English
Name
Indicative
Vowel
Arabic
Name
English
Name
Vowel
Arabic
Name
75
6.
How
By
can
f-j
UtJ
Tense be negated
ever upon the case-vowel,

*
"He
Ex.
-
which has no
>
the simple negative particle
"
effect
what-
will (does) not ask."

*
- "
"
.
. *a
DUVDLS'V
V ij L V
L'i
DbS/
/.
uv
What
is
the Past
which
is
an Active Participle meaning "that-which-passes".
Tense called
It is
called
(al-Madi)
Î'JI
Self -Test 29.

(l)
Give a
(i)
Explain and
list
of Arabic Moods, or States (29
Tense resembles the noun
to
inform (Conj. IV)
I, 2).
statement that "The imperfect
illustrate the
in its
to
declension" (29
5).
reap
Exercise 29a.
^ Oj
*'j*
*>^
\2lljAi5LoJ
(r)
(r)
(o)
Exercise 29b.
(1)
(2)
(3)
Why
do they not ask him?

They do not look at me.
They (two) do not know
[the teacher,
(4)
(5)
[prayer.
The pious woman offers

Where hast thou (f)been
(6)1 was dwelling (f) in Cairo.

Is the man pious (good) ?
7
8
The man was good.
(9) They (two) hear and do
(
nothing (not a thing).

?
do)
sow an d
(but) do not reap.
- 76Lesson 30.
SUBJUNCTIVE.
I.
Revise the Introduction
we know when
to the
Moods
in
Lesson
How may
28.
verb as "Mansub" (Subjunctive) ?

There are certain particles which affect the verb in this particular manner. A very full list of particles with their governing
to write the
The following nine Sub-
actions will be studied later on.
memorised now.
junctive particles are to be

Action
Meaning
Present-Future, takes subjunctive after
it
to (that)
in
order to
>
not
Subjunctive but with negative force
in
Subjunctive
Answers the
2.
(in future)
order not
lest
"
o%
particle
*,
? -
Subjunctive
'$
Subjunctive but distinctly future negative
Particle
l'
(.
What
if
in that case
>
t
= O^>-
^.>
until
Give particular examples of their use.

<ji is
(a)
the
has the meaning of desire to do
"to".
It
Learn
this
may
^1
\J
phrase ^*-* 6'
go) L**i!
to visit
(b)
word which can be paraphrased "that"
you" (= that
means
doing) an action.
(he wishes to go,
wish to go"; ^jjj\
"I
U\ *>'
(or,
or simply
i.e.
J^J>'
that he
"I
wish
Note the paraphrase.
visit you).
"not," but in the future.
The
present "not"
is
which has no influence upon the Present Future.
*.
jl? T''*-*!
He
>(
j'
>
does
>
not,
-
ji O^Ss
and he
will not
go
in the future".
>
it
will
not
happen
that...
77
Another example Jt^v' 3j-
J and
(c)
are both parts of

)\
(Palmer gives
'
'
and
jJ^-J
will never be liberal.

affect the verb alike.
* -'
<*
dJI
<^l
The miser
^luJ "that
God may pardon
thee": but this
must be distinguished from lam-ul-amr, the lam of command

'
"
*
'
Let
<^ ill
which apocopates the verb thus
See Less: 32 4
God pardon theejjjjji
^^
O^.^.*- or -^JJJ^
j4iJ
came
in
order to visit you.
When
these particlesare used
<j
not used.
is
(d)
!W
(lest) is
compounded
Vj J
of
and so the jl places
the verb in the Subjunctive, while the

(e)
The
six or seven only
first
>
negates
are important (at this stage).

'
3,
that he
Conjugate
'
ji C V
>
may
ft^
O ^
it.
eat (as in
.
t^
<
V,
5-
i,
J> 5 ji
4.
Compare the Indicative in Lesson 26. What do we observe ?

(a) Change of (Jamma case-vowel to fatha, in all the singulars
but one and in the first person plural, (b) The rejection of the
;
U and j
in
2nd Sing. Fern, and
and 3rd Masc.

genders
(c)
The
etc.
Plural.
are
It
will
sufficiently
retention of the
in all the duals,
be found that
and the 2nd
the
numbers,
indicated without the nun.
in 3rd
and 2nd
Fern.
PI.,
absolutely necessary to distinguish the gender.

5.
For further
practice, he wishes that he
may do
,0.01
M
1
1
as being
6.
Examples of
It
is
for
good
\
the paraphrase of
is
^^
<J
^J*J> jl
you that we go (= Our going
good
for you).
^*i j J *j\>- It
go = my going).
I
<j
me
for
good
is
to go.
This word ^v.^
is
(for
the
me
to
go
word used
that
in the
"
equivalent for "thank you"
iMay [God] increase
jv>*'J$
thy good").
}
""
7.
Always use J
order to"
*ar
J:
"j>
^SJ
"for the purpose of
What
(j)
as in
[^Q
(eat), or
Self Test 30.

i
or
is
**
J-A>-
"
to
express
"
(See
(eating).
the difference between
in
2.c.)
L^ jl
and
(30
6j
7 ).
Exercise 30a.
(0
"
~>
v/l
IjJb*^) VI
(r)
(A)
(o)
Exercise 30b.
I.
wish to
have food
3.
5.
Jesus
"
6.
/.
"
9.
10.
came
2.
to eat.
"
4.
[in order] to
Lest ye enter into temptation".
To
fast
is
do not wish
to (that
good
we)
visit
That they should not worship
(Proverb).
you to-day.
(lit.
bow down
They have gone
to (in-order-to) visit her.
He
that he
B.
wishes to
(=
may)
visit
Before answering Exam. Paper 30

of page 8l.
for you".
save man.
Tiie miser will neêr be generous".
We
8.
"
eat.
to} God."
you always.
learn
the
phrases
at
the
head
79
EXAMINATION PAPER
A To
~x
English
*"
"
^1"^
"*
x-
30.
^1
^'
îSuif^^V
(r)
\;\
f
B.
jpji^.-liC,
(A)
ju
(o)
(v)
7o
the writer
(1)
[In order] that
(2)
The charmer (magician)
(f)
may
write her name.
will fascinate
(charm) the queen
of Egypt.
wish
to
know
(3)
(4)
The "People
(5)
Do
(6)
(7)
This
(8)
The miser
(9)
(10)
your
wish
is
the
name
of a hook, please.
of the Scripture" are in Egypt.
children go to school
(fern, pi.)
to visit
you
(sing:) continually.
from the favour of
my
Lord.
will never be liberal.
They have gone to (in order to) eat.

Thou art from Egypt, we are from
and they are from Al-Hind
C.
Answer
these questions
the tribe of Quraish,
(India).
Noun
(1)
State the rule for
(2)
Form both Active and Passive
forming
the
of Object (Pass. Part).
__3C
Participles (giving) their
meaning) from the verbs
8o
Lesson
31.
"Eye, Voice, Ear" Exercise.

Rules as before (see Lesson
2l).
Memorise one or two sentences
a time, day by day

then keep up the whole. Sentences
the opening ones of the Quran, 5 and 6 the ''Creed".
;
Jui^
4A)
' '
'
4 are
^
T
O^
4JO
at
**
\
II |
'V r^
Jlfcl
4\)
Exercise Sib.
1.
2.
In the
To Arabic
name of God,
:
the Compassionate, the Merciful
Praise [be] to God, the Lord of the Worlds
4.
The Compassionate, the Merciful

The Owner (Ruler) of the Day of Judgment.
5.
6.
And Mohammed
3.
bear witness that [there

[is]
is]
no Deity but God.
the Apostle of God.
7.
believe (have believed) in
8.
believe (have believed) in
God alone.
God and His
Apostles, and His
Scriptures.
9.
10.
Hast thou read Chapter "The Opening One" ? Yes, I have.

there found in Chapter "The Cowman abrogater and an
Is
abrogated [verse]?
God knows
(lit.
God
is
more-knowing).
81
ADVERBIAL PHRASES.
*
"
Had
Of thy favour (please) <^JUuai
been
it
Of
Except for (had not)

For ever (after neg. never)
J>
his favour
Instead
of...
Continually
In spite of
Immediately
For example
Sometimes
Ol5 *N
4l^J /
...
UU"
Exactly
Lesson 32.
1.
Revise the Introduction to Moods in Lesson

"
Mood
It is
let
of
that
Command
"
or Jussive
It
.''
is
the
"
which expresses the idea
them go
What
29.
Let him go
her go
let
generally has the particle J of the Jussive
prefixed to
it.
This lam takes kasra, and the verb
apocopated,
(i.e.
the
nun rejected)
in the
2nd Sing.
is
then
Fern., all the
Duals, and the 2nd and 3rd Masc. Plural.

2.
Why
Plural also
Because
3.
retention
What happens
is
off
from the 3rd and 2nd Feminine
its
The vowel
4.
nun not cut
the
is
there
is
no nun, as
in 3rd
masc. sing.
majzum
or
marked by jazma
(29
4).
Give the 3rd Person Sing, Dual and Plural of
Mood
of
Let them
this Jussive or
Command.
(f)
go
let
them go
N.B.
"let," in this case,
they
must go
(f)
then replaced by sukun, or jazma, and the verb
is
said to be
if
necessary to show the gender.
is
let
them
(2)
go
let
her go
let
him go
has almost the meaning of "must".
they must go
they
(2)
must go
she must go
he must go
5-
82
This lam, called in Arabic "lam-ul-amr"
mand, usually takes kasra (we

But suppose
it is
the lam of
i.e.
com-
and apocopates the veib.
said)
preceded by ^J (then or therefore)
? ?
^
It
may then be marked by
Note:
Carefully distinguish
"in order to",

6.
sukun, thus
then
in
May
the Jussive take all persons
Yes,
all.
Lesson 30 ^ and
î
JL.)li
2c.
word "Jussive"
the
him go
let
from the other lam, meaning
it
which we learned
(We have used
accustom the
to
student to this old-fashioned Latinised word in case he should

ever be asked to define
When we
Better to call
it.
use a conditional sentence, (especially in condensed
epigrammatic wisdom
for
we
"Knock, and-it-shall-be-opened to-you"
write this form.
which Arabic proverbs are famous)

>
+*>
\**
I
(second verb
is
seek, ye shall find.
Are there any other
particles causing the verb to be {5'j^;
Give
193.
common
really
the persons of
all
r^\
o
every-day one
o ^>
fi*
U.*
^
'f'~
*'\
jj
it
**
c ^-
^-
jj
t
J
r
^
'.1
it
l^4>
e
But
"-
Surely
"e
'
J (not)
is
J (he did not open
--t
***
SYNTAX,
but they will receive detailed attention in
many;
Lesson
9.
0>
passive).
Yes,
8.
^
JW
takes three words in Arabic
7.
f Jj?0.
it
^
cannot mean "he did not open"
does
^l
mean
that
Learn
this curious rule
The
particle
not only negates the action of the verb but also converts
the present to past time.
(In
Hebrew
Jt*î J they did not go

<j j!
c.f.
vav conversive).
o -
l*J
ye did not ask
me =
j**->
(J ***)
^^
(c./
34
6).
83
o
B
Give
10.
II.
all
>",'(
the persons of ZTj**?
him go out"
"let
Can
the Imperative be formed from the 2nd Person Jussive
Certainly, that
is
how
it is
also the preformative
Remove any
derived.
an
and supply
alif
particle
vowelled
and
as
needed (but with a wasla when preceded by other words in a

sentence).
We
then get the Imperative thus
>.
12.
Why
the
damma
over the alif in
Because verbs having a

for the alif of
Exercise 32
damma
the Imperative.
rj>
in
9-
*.
'
J .
;liJI
take a
damma
All others take kasra.
i^^
LI
For the sequence of tenses
in (2) see
>
a.
^.X
N.B.
next page.
n^
<"
Jl ISU
-84
Exercise 32b.
Why
1.
2.
did the vizier (minister) not go out to visit the Sultan ?

Because (see Lesson 34, page 89) they did not inform
him that the Sultan was wishing it (that).

Did he not ask them ? No he did not ask them anything
because he did not know that the Sultan was there
(present).
4.
What
5.
He
6.
always
Did the two princes understand
did the Sultan say
did not come to
him
visit
am
that his minister
me and you
said "Seek
'I
when he found
me"
find
his
meaning was
here'.
never understood
it.
(or,
his
meaning? No; they
they did not understand
at
it
all).
A SIMPLE STORY
Exercise 32c.
Translate to English, then back to Arabic.
0> I|,^>Y-
*\ >' f
>
(I)
^ ^
he wished
(3) for /aisa
see
equence of Tenses.
did not
One
know
'
el
"
ê^^^,
^ _>^V
i
^
(r)
^!i .v3& iî
|'
'
"^
/^..^
<'
(2) who.
Lesson 36).
Carefully note the Sequence here.

^
He
'
i|
Sr
i?f
'"*' o *v
x
..
G.
A;;
^
C 36
^ N
that the Sultan
was wishing
-^J^
for the double past.
(or,
>
it
'
^
>
*-"
A*-"|.
conveys the idea of

past imperfect), and there is no need
past verb followed by a present
"past continuous"
^ e
Ufci*JI
<jfc*
Lesson 33
THE PROHIBITIVE V
What
is
which forbids the action
the negative form
The
prohibitive
verb,
which
particle
la
"
do
must precede the
not,"
Thus: "He
then put in the jussive, ormajzum.

*
is
'
must not go"
not
(f.)"
^*
the "la of prohibition".
called
is
^ "Go
1-^-ij,
from the
V.
-*>
Distinguish
of simple Negation, which, as
la
This particle
carefully
it
we have shown,
does not affect the case-vowel of the verb.

2.
Give the prohibitive of
they
"to knock".
_/
they must not knock
(f.)
ox-
f'
e -
x-
let
not knock
let
not knock
.-
i-V
do not knock
do not knock
(f.Pl)
o
let us
3.
knock not
(PI.)
(f.)
not knock
t,
(hardly necessary)
second persons, and the
The most frequently used
are the
plural of the
Let no-one
"^
4.
Is
first
person.
there any other Id yet to be learned
Yes, one more

its
a particle
which
is
know
>
\)
JU
>
used with a noun to deny
There
is
no deity but God.
There
is
no
<^
In
what case
(a)
Always
is
<
dJJi
noun negated by
the
in the
Accusative
will
now show
moods by means
three side
by
(b)
a solitary exception to the rule
We
Id
we have
at the
beginning.
and contrast of the three

(In
order to get the
to alter the usual native
of tabulating the tense; so read
l>
SJ
generally without tanwin,
we learned
the similarity
<j*
of a comparative table.
side
*J 4J
and no power \.\ t\\ '**' vj" '1'

U)v.)>
d4Jjl5(J
J*>
*
i
;
There's no harm to you.
6.
-*>
existence in totality.
strength
i^'/î
but in God.
5.
knock (m).
don't
"
down the column).
method
Jussive (he did not eat) Subjunctive (that he eat)
Indicative (he eats)

>
e t
(
'-
ir
>
I-
f
i
art
Exercise S3a.
.*
JT
>
^
l5
if vi i j
iLkcA V
LX V
(r)
!>>"V
(r)
(A)
Exercise 33b.
-I.
Let them
^TTZ^
to the city.
go
Let only one go
3.
Let not go except one only

Do not knock on the door
4.
Do
5.
They do
not
6.
There
is
7.
There
is
no power and no strength except

no deity but God.
8.
No harm
2.
not open the door,
to
know
you
O my
mother!
everything.
Cheer up
).
in
God.
Lesson 34.
1.
Revise the Pronominal Affixes already studied (Lessons
2.
To
what are these Pronoun-marks affixed
(1)
To
(2)
To'vSrbs; then they are genitive (construct) "of him"
(3)
To
prepositions; then they are "governed by the Prep."

i.e.
his.
verbs; then they are in the direct Accusative case,
i.e.
the object to the verb, as

3.
14-15).
Show how
y^^
he struck her.
from
the preposition ^
(or,
some
united to
of) is
these affixed Pronoun forms.

* >*
>
from them
from them (m.)
(f.)
from them two
from him
from her
dL
from thee
from thee (m.)
(f.)
from you two
from thee
(f.)
from thee(m.)
b,
from us
4.
What
is
The
preposition
and
the
first
me
from
noticeable here
requires, like the verb, a
nun between
it
person sing, affixed pronoun, thus, he struck me,
This nun, which in this case is rep^1 S& and, from me L^.
resented by the shadda, is called the "nun of precaution."
5.
Is this true
Yes
they end in
if
or before,
6.
Does
of any other prepositions
and
<j
as for
example
(away from,
the 2nd per.
damma:
7.
or, off
in the presence of,
j-ll
from).
either of the verb-forms alter its vowelling on
united to an annexed pronoun
Yes
pi.
thus <J
Prefix the preposition
arfcfe
t*.
wan and
homogeneous
ye struck me).
to the affixed
Dual
Plural
O.
past
becoming
pronouns.
Singular
4)
'
1[
d,-r
S
L,
J.
--.'
8.
In
which person
is
88
made
a change
In the third person; for a prefixed kasra or ya causes the hu,

hum etc. to take a kasra, so we get bihi, bihim, etc., but it does
kum
not change the

9-
etc,
Prefix <J (in or within) in the
<J
lu.
Where does
It
same way.
dU
U<1
the shadda
come from
represents the pronoun
dL
^
(in the 1st Sing.)
which coalesces with the
and takes fatha, being a consonant and not merely

Another example; the word
prolongation.
mu allim (teacher)
When we wish to
c
of
Accusative
the
nun of
we
in the
say
"
Nom. and j>x**
my
teachers
or
Jjl*
rf
How
(s)
>
means
in the Accusative.
whether Nom.
or
removal of
denote the coalescence
to
Mifallimiya.
the.
(o>
pronoun
-^
written as
but (accus. or obi.)
sns
me
do we prefix
ala
the plural
^dJU
two hands
beside
12.
**
Give other examples of
my
a letter of
and the vowelling of the second
ya with fatha after placing shadda
II.
"
is
find the construct state causes the
<jy^**
of the two ya's
jî*
of <J
on, or
and
upon and
means
to,
unto, or "in the
Both stand as separate words before nouns

but both may be prefixed to the Annexed Pronouns which are
then of course in the oblique case (Indirect Object). The ya
direction of".
is
then dotted, making the diphthong
at.
2JLI
Ul
-89
EXAMPLES OF AKHA WAT

N.B. Certain particles (called
INJSlA.
"Sisters of Inna") have,
upon the
Subject and Predicate, an effect exactly the opposite of kana

(tnd its sisters;
yô^ and
in
i.e.
they place the Subject in the Accusative
leave the Predicate (jpj*
which the mansub (accus
:)
is
Learn these examples,
the affixed pronoun.
'
o
As though
But
I,
thou
s"*?\<*4
'"''if
w
u !<
he, you... J
Verily he, thou
>
That
...
she
he,
tiljl
...
<>
...
*
JjJ
Perhaps he, I ... )

In hope that
.the, /
Because
he, they... *
*,
After studying Lessons on Syntax 151200 (and " thinking orientally ")
the above will become clearer.
The words that, because etc. are useful
for our exercises now.
Exercise 34a.
(v)
o
x'
"<..
>
*'
IS"
(r)
Exercise 34b1.
My
sins were
heavy upon me.
3.
Have you got nothing ? (/#. Is-there-not with

As though I were (am) about to go with you
4.
Why
5-
Because you did not see
2.
did you prevent
come
me from
6.
They
did not
/.
They
(f.)
8.
9.
They took her from me.
10.
took
it
to
my
me.
went-away from me.
from them (m.)
Truly she
is
a pious
woman.
entering
hands.
thee a thing.)
go
Lesson 35.
1.
What
THE PASSIVE.
verbs use the Passive
The Passive can only be formed from

" >
can only form the Passive C^XlJ
^
sitive
2.
we
l-î
e.g.,
if
He
are sure that Jli
tran-
is
>
J^Lp she was
killed her,
We
Transitive verbs,
"
killed.
How is the Passive formed from the usual Triliteral Verb ?

For the Passive of the Past Tense (or Preterite) give to the
radical a
damma
of the four radicals takes
damma
"
radical before the last a kasra, and to the
first
instead of fatha
3.
How
thus
he was killed.
^jlJ
from the Quadriliteral Verb
The same way,
The
first
''
. '.
instead of fat-ha, and the penultimate takes kasra.

-
he translated
if
the earth
verbs,
the
it.
is
shaken.
distinction
reader can generally

not so
translated",
J^î\
In both the triliteral
and
the Passive from
the
(In
tell
much used
was
of
the vowelling only.
in
is
>
"it
'**j
'}
quadriliteral
Active
unvowelled newspapers,
etc.,
lies
the
by the context. The Passive, however,
as in English, for
it
is
more usual
employ one of the derived conjugations (Lesson
72)
to
with a
passive signification).
4.
Give the Sing, Dual and Plural of
&
5.
Form
We
the Passive of the Present-Future.
give to the Servile letter
etc.
->
damma and
to
)'>
the penultimate radical a fat-ha, thus
*-+*^l
it
will
be
or, is
written.
*i>
he will be killed;
Of course many verbs
already have a fat-ha over the penultimate radical, then no
Change,
In
any gase, the distinguishing feature
is
the
damma
over the
Native printers, when printing an unvowelled
ya.
book, can sometimes insert just this
sentence
is really
Give the
full
7.
Can
Yes;
formed
>
let
him be killed
*
t
Also with
if
the
ambiguous.
>
J*y
damma
Pres-Future Passive.
a Passive Jussive be
'*
initial
?
-
OJ
'j**AJ etc.
This
he was not
killed.
is
quite usual
r *
we say J*^
Self -Test 35.

(1)
Give the Past Passive of îJi
to write (35
(2)
The Present Passive
(35
Exercise 35 a.
&
of the
same
4).
6).
b.
CACT
:i
(v)
b" -i;
5*
(r)
(A)
(1)
They
(2)
In order that
(3)
Was
(4)
The book was
(5)
The door
(6)
His blood will be shed.
(7)
Was
(8)
will
the
be-shown-mercy
I
may
owner of
is
forgiven).
serve, not be-served
the house murdered
written in Arabic.
open.
owner ( f) of
Yes, she was killed.
the
(i.e.
the house killed
(ministered to;
Lesson 36.
NEGATIVE OF
1.
"TO BE".
verb meaning "he-is-not"
Is there a
Yes, the verb
means
laisa,
(j-jJ
"it-is-not," or "he-is-not," or
"there-is-not," or even simply "not," according to the context.

2.
Can
it
be declined
Past Tense only, though strange to say, it is used for

the Present! Its formation would be better understood after
Yes, in
learning the changes of the Hollow verb, but we introduce it

here because its meaning is akin to the verb negatived by a
particle
'
<
3.
which we learned
I
Lesson
32.
Write
it
in full.
(j~j
--
Note that while
û
may mean
the other persons the

are not.
How
By
"it-is-not" or "there-is-not," in
meaning
more personal
limited to a
is
Lasta, thou art not; laisu, they are not; lasnd
negative.
4.
in
(Note disappearance of the ya before
could
we express
prefixing
"he-was-not,"
suktiri).
etc.
J to the pres-fut. of the verb
To
Remember
Be.
this strange fact, already leaint, that the particle
gives a negative past
to the
meaning
5.
Example
any other verb.

-
always
Imperfect Tense of this
u J
he did not
Give the ordinary Pres-Fut. of "To Be,"

>
>
or
we
>
i.e.,
<
he
>
is
.
eat.
or will be, etc.
>
*.*
>
Before memorising this verb, compare what we have said in
Lesson 24
Notice the
4,
as to the past tense
wau and
the
damma
J^-5
in the
and the
above
letter
wau.
pres-fut. tense.
93
6.
Give the same apocopated by

^
be
will
this
Hollow Verb (Lesson

the sukun of
(
7.
nun
If
'f
Suffice
115).
then
when we come
studied
fully
wau
the
it
falls
jazm (apocopation)
this case
in
to say, here, that
upon the
disappears,
write out
But
is it
Jy^ Ju
What
is
leaving
its
Why
is
Because
(to
say) exactly like (jj^l
Yes, that
is
md and
an alternative way.
the special effect of laisa upon the Predicate
The Predicate
10.
when
final radical
not possible to express the same idea with
the Past Tense

9.
to the
homogeneous representative (damma) to mark its place.

Students more advanced, or with more time to spare, may
"
>
'^
)
8.
not, etc.)
,C 'f
Note that
was
J (he
of laisa
always manub.
is
the Predicate mansiib

laisa
and not the Subject
one of several verbs called akhawdt kdna
is
Verb To Be) which have the same action
(Sisters of
Here revise 24
(Lesson 34
as kdna.
9 very carefully and contrast akhawdt inna
page 86). Examples:

Akhawdt kdna
Thy brother
is
not sick
Akhawdt inna
Truly thy brother
is
sick
Akhawdt inna
But he
sick
is
^f
Akhawdt inna
As though she
[were] sick
Akhawdt kana
She is not sick
Akhawdt inna + akhawdt
But he
is
not sick
*- J
94
Self Test 36.
2.
I.
Write out the verb
laisa in full (36
Write out the verb kana apocopated by
English meanings (36
3).
and give the
6).
(after learning phrases
Exercise 36a.
on
p. 97).
'
(0
**
'
l)
J"
f ^J
(r)
(r)
.>
<u!
"X
.
>X
LJ'
^>R
'*
^* J*
'
jV
(t)
1?
Jl
(o)
'.'.'
t>
'
(.
Exercise 36b.
1.
2.
--Was, your boy at the mosque-school *to-day ?

No, he did not go to-day to the mosque-school.
3.
Why
4.
Because his mother was
5.
Was
6.
was he not
she not
8.
No, his brother
10.
ill.
yesterday ?
the
boy did not attend (or, was not present)
Yes, and
yesterday, and will not attend tomorrow.
Where
9.
ill
7.
there to-day
is
his brother
is
Is
he sick also
not sick, but has gone with
some
of the
children (boys) to the city.

To distinguish this word kuttab from the word kitab, note the shadda.
They have
And
not been in the kuttab this afternoon.
they will not be there tomorrow.
95
Lesson 37.
OTHER TENSES.
I.
Are there any other tenses

in
combining
(a)
+*3
tenses, similarly to English.
Thus we say
he went.
he has gone.
(b)
he had gone (before ..... )
(c)
'
>
*-*
(d)
\S
he was going, he used
<1A'
"
to go.
'
''>
*-**^ -^ JjSsi
(e)
2.
Yes; Arabic gives facility
(or states)?
he will have gone.
Let us tackle the second of these.
The
particle
placed before the past
tense
gives
it
English "perfect" meaning, though in the older Arabic

O
IÎO
3.
How
is
They have gone
Ox-
jJ
is
(Do not attempt
the pluperfect formed

"
prefixing
JO
to translate
by
itself).
?
e
>^
By
it
She has gone ^+*> -^
often not found.

^
the
to the verb plus
J&
and the meaning
is
the action had taken place (before something happened).

the principal verb
and the auxiliary jo
that
Both
are fully declined in
the Past Tense.
They had gone
He
They
She had gone
had gone
"?
(f.)
You
(m.)
You
(f.)
Thou hadst gone
We
4.
"-./. .^
Thou(f.),,
had gone
*~
sT^
Could we say "He was in the habit of going " ?

Yes this is one of the meanings covered by (d) above.
In the Moslem Ahadith (Table-talk of Mohammed) there
large section of the traditions devoted to
of
God used
to
do".
"What
is a
the Apostle
>\
96
'.-
ju
he used to say
J*
jw
he used
to do.
Let us learn the last-mentioned, conjugating the Past Tense

of the auxiliary kana, but the Mudarf of the Principal Verb.
They used
to
do
(J ji.i> 'j> IS
97
Vocabulary 37.
USEFUL ADVERBIAL PHRASES.

yesterday
**
Vi
*
from to-day
since the beginning
from the
first
fore-noon
after-noon
Exercise 37a.
v)
or ij~*
%
\
i
--
98
Lesson 38.
THE SIX FORMS
I.
Is
al-Mudari' of the verb always vowelled with fat-ha like
No:
neither does the past always take three fat-has.
early as Lesson 3
(See also 23
some
2.
of
What
There are
6).
w^J
we introduced
six actual
with a middle kasra,
forms
are the six actual
middle vowel (the
its
the present-future
it
sible.
Three of
six actual are
may
first
and
last not
may
take either one
being changed), while
take any one of the three for
these, however,
3x3=9
middle
its
theoretically pos-
do not actually occur.
shown below, with examples
The
open
to succour
D4
to serve
>J
to
learn
will
would seem that there are
vowel,
to
we
them now.
Since there are three vowels and the past

for
As
'&
>
be generous
Non-existent
;
i
'>
5*.
3-
&
y>
Non-existent
to
understand
rf
to consider
3.
How
can one
This
is
this
little
tell
[Hs
which of the
perplexing at
six
first,
o^
>
forms will be taken
but the dictionaries supply
information about every verb.
Some
lexicons print
it
in
99
xOx
to
open
(Others, this way)
to
open
(Others, again)
to
full,
thus
jcli
** **
The
point
open
whether Al-Mudari*
is,
lexicons, or a fatha, or an
s
viz.,
that the verb
shown
A>x
formed from
the Past
4.
is
exactly the same,

is
always
Take another
also a fat-ha in al-Mudari'.
^^
triliteral
root of jamila
find
is
a verb
it
marked J^J+'T which shows
Damma Damma verbs, damma
Damma Damma
kind of verbs take
None
but those expressing qualities!
(Learn this important
quite possible there
is
It
may be
a verb
with same radicals (but with fatha) meaning something

but
J>-
(with
damma) must
take
damma
pretty".
one form, recording

:
now
be easy
>
to be difficult
5.
What
will
verbs
More examples
be generous
to
be rough
?
and analyse those examples given.

is,
in
each case, a
In other words, such a throaty consonant
Enter up all your examples and

and the present with the English meaning.
almost always takes fat-ha.

learn the past
clear
to "forms", can
to
be seen that the second or third radical
of
in
>*
to lesson 26
guttural or ha
shown
as
The importance
kinds of verbs take Fat-ha Fat-ha
Turn back
It
new
new words, according
of all
hardly be over-emphasized).
to
all
6 for Fat-ha Fat-ha.
classification
and
case "to be
in this
enter up a page or two pages of your vocabulary
(Now
Lesson 26
else,
in the Pres.-Fut.
therefore, necessarily, expresses a quality
for this
in
in the Present.
What
distinction at once).
see at a
>^^x^x
to the class of
and damma
You can
(the girl is pretty).
You
J-.>-
belongs
it
meaning
some
as in
full,
takes fat-ha in the Past, (that
glance that the probable
that
given in
4^>-
example.
the
is
X-
c**
and
in full),
a,
tli
100
6.
o * and
Note on
with the Past to
mean
of doubt).
is
is
'S'^
~*
in
not an
is
if in the Present-Future (but with a
used
shade
used similarly but implies probability, and so
often best translated by "when."
Continue revision
Recapitulation.
Lesson
42,
of
From
previous lessons.
with more grammar rules, the student will feel the
need of constant revision of vocabularies.

Self -Test 38.
1.
What vowel
the Imperfect
in
expressing qualities
2.
What
(38
verbs take fat-ha
(Muddri)
is
taken by verbs
4).
(26
and 38
5).
Exercise 38a.
yi\
;.
(Y)
(r)
(A)
*
JU>
(i)
J
Exercise 38.
matter
difficult for
you (hard on you)
1.
Is this
2.
The matter
3.
[It is]
4.
And
5.
The student did not succeed
6.
The
is
easy for him (upon him).
on the pupil
to attend before the lesson.
to gather [up] his
price of
books
after the lesson,
yesterday.
books has been (was) raised
8.
Man was created weak (Qui'an).

When the earth is shaken (Qur'an)
9.
God
7.
10.
We
is
i.e.
not an oppressor (Qur'an).
will gather our disciples
bv night.
good
deal.
by earthquake.
(o)
101
Lesson 39.
THE SIX CLASSES (Contd).
-*
>'*;
I.
What
verbs take
J*i J*
*'
Verbs
y*^ S A}
like
are a very
ar S e class.
':
^-**J,
partly of (a) transitive verbs such as
"
y*
>
They
to succour, or
*-
>
and
aid (with victory),

Examples of
(b)
"verbs of motion"
Examples of
(a) Transitive
>
J^
'^
Jso to enter.
(b) Verbs of Motion
>*'
to create
to enter,
to kill
to
go out
to
run
to
bow down
V-
'<-
-.>0 w^-.-J
to write
consist
'
go
in
to see
(in
2.
worship)
to serve (as a slave)
to sit
Give
verbs
of
examples
present).
down
(fatha in past, kasra in
These are not quite so easily
classified,
student can learn them as he comes across them.

"
..
to serve (as a servant)
to
sit,
or
sit
down
A^
in
2,
learn
>'
shew mercy
verbs (fat-ha in the present).
the past and present-future together,
have ascertained both.

to
to
Examples
to
understand
know
when you
'
& 'j *> j

r
r
>..
'
to
know
to
to take captive
Give examples of
As
to bear, carry
to strike
Examples
'
^.
but the
r**-
-.
to
hear
to bear witness,
r/
testify
>\*' -i-
f*
to
keep
-V
102
.....
4.
Are there 7
Only a few.
verbs
;r
The
mentioned
first
To
sound verbs.
The student
consider, or estimate
will gather
'
Ji
***>
^-*~^;
of this
examples
example from
the only
is
form when he studies
"Assimilated Verbs" (Lesson TI3) the wau of which disappears

in the present tense.
5.
To
inherit
Does the vowel taken by the Mudari' influence the Imperative ?

Yes, in one case. Four out of these six forms have fat-ha or
kasra,
and
the
The Imperative should be written

wasla when preceded by other words, but when standing
'
alone, a kasra
is
The
is
fifth
case
open
written,
the existence of inherent qualities there

(
pronounce
'
.
from
course,
tlj
listen
is
**-*J
expresses
it
no imperative needed.
"
derived
its
and as
to be generous,
j**m f j*
There are, of
to
kasra.
is
Imperative
with a
vowel supplied
in all these cases the
e.g.
act
that in
every
forms,
generously").
>
The
one
last
'*
and
The vowel used
damma.
6.
'
>
j**+i j~&
worship
come
in
it
will be seen
Present-Future or the Jussive the middle vowel
part of the
get out
is
to
pronounce the Imperative
>^
thou wilt enter
'
thou wilt go out
Are there any Prepositional Verbs

Yes,
them
"to
to
certain
Arabic verbs
take special
to represent certain significations.
bow down"
worship
is
thou wilt serve (worship)
(serve)
is
but
thus 5^
he went out from
...
Ja**
to
Thus,
bow down
He worshipped God.
-X>***
i.e.,
"
he
left.
after
prepositions
to
means
J?***
"
anyone,
Similarly Jj*
W* he heard
him
(ty
*JI
"
^>
he listened to him.
(J
he brought
(lit.
came with)
her.
i.e.,
103
7.
NOTE
also
Vocab.
to
become
The verb made
39
Passive by
He
decided
>
He arrested
the thieves
Vocabulary
to
W'
SWh^}
upon a matter
^Lfc
//
jfr
by
was brought
^'jl
was deci
Decided u P n
01"
were arrested
SOME PREPOSITIONAL VERBS.

J J
to bring (a thing)
come
to prohibit a thing
to bring
to listen to
to fulfil (duties, etc.)
to grant to
to
doubt concerning
to trust in
to
be able
(i.e.,
with)
to attack
upon
Exercise 39 a.
"'l>
4jol
l/
bJUftl
v)
'^T
j-4tl
(A)
--
X-
Exercise 39b.
1.
We testify
2.
Who
3.
He
4.
is
to you.
the sorceress
did not listen to their

speech.
"The world knew him
7.
Serve
God
8.
"God
is
9.
to.
The camel was brought
6.
10.
to
alone
him.
Get out
God
at
and
Him...."
once!
preserve you
(salutation).
not".
a spirit,
who worship
Their speech was not

listened
5.
..
wa*5
^^*Vfr
worship
to decide
may
preposition
preposition.
>
39.
transitive
"
means of the same" retained
they-
104
Lesson 40.
Conversation
04)
Follow these rules with the following short

Study the literal meanings of words and phrases, with
Exercise.
colloquial dialogue.
I.
the helps given, reading from right to
(2)
left.
Gradually learn by heart the
idiomatic meaning of single phrases, rather than single words and then, as soon
as possible, drop the use of transliteration and also of the literal word-by-word
rendering (which
The
is
really neither English nor Arabic).
last line gives the
proper idiomatic English.
(3)
Read
aloud.
(4)
N.B, Sounding the final
case-vowels, this becomes a written exercise; dropping them, a colloquial one.
>.*'
Q"
-JjU,
mubarak,
happy [be], Thy -day

Good morning,
blessed,
Well
bni ya
0- my -son
thy state ? Bow [is]

How are you ?
Well, thank God.

,
haluk? Kaifa
al-hamdu-lillah. Taiyib,
praise -be -to- God.
ya shaikh, sa'id, Naharuk

sheikh, happy [be], Thy-day
Good morning Sheikh
Naharuk
sa'id,
boy.
J*
'alaik
abadan
al-haqq
against thee. The right
You
are wrong.
la
No. never
|
v L^v
baqaratak li tabl'a an turid Hal
thy
No, never.
cow
to
Do you
me, that thou
wish to
sell,
sell
Dost thou wish
me
your cow
C,
W"
as-salima ma'
with safety
'alaina
ma
Nothing against us
Al-Haqq
against me
'1-an 'alaiya
The
right's
now
I'm wrong
Never mind
Goodbye
Revision of the Six Classes, Lessons 38, 39.
!
Passive Pres.
Passive Past
Imperative
this
time
Imperfect
Sahih
True,
True,
Perfect
EXAMINATION PAPER
(B).
40.
the questions, number your answers, write clearly, and

send up for correction, with full name and address.
N.B.
I.
IDS
Copy
I.
Give examples of
2.
What
is
..'. ...... ^.
verbs.
the Imperative Masc. Sing, of "to
come
in"
Give
other examples of similar vowelling.

3.
Write three or four lines telling what you know about

either (a) ta
Translate
II.
(b) alif
maqsnra.
Arabic:
to
1.
Why
did you not prevent them from entering
2.
They
will
3.
Why
wast thou
have
left
(f)
before the teacher comes.

not present yesterday
5.
The Apostle of God used to say

"Praise be to GOD."
In the name of God, the Compassionate, the Merciful.
6.
Good morning, sheikh
/.
8.
There
4.
III.
marbuta or
am wrong
is
good morning, boy (my
son).
this time (now).
nothing
in
my
Translate to English
hands.
(r)
'
(0
OJT
'>
jTIlf 'jrlill
jj
(v)
(A)
N.B.
Please space out your lesson hours to as to allow for Revision of earlier lessons.
io6
Lesson
41.
"Eye, Voice and Ear."

.
...
J CC. s^'* V} lTp^Vfc
i^ V
<
jYf
e>"
,Qf
dlj *;^r
C3 'c^
"
-^
Vf J C*
tf
'r
if r.
:i"
v/
tf
1 C /^
'
"
The Rules
tf '
."
for this exercise are given in Exs. 21 and 31.
1.
Ana-rrabbu ilahuka... La yakun laka alihatun ukhra amami.
2.
La tana'
laka timthalan manhutan
wa
uratan-ma (pron.
la
tamma) mimma fissamai min fauqu wa ma fil-'ardi min tahtu wa

ma fil-mai' min tahti-l-'ardi.
La tasjud lahunna wa la
ta'bud-hunna lianni ana-rrabba ilahaka ilahun ghaiyur...
3.
6.
La tantiq bismirrabbi ilahika

man nataqa bismihi batilan.
La taqtul. 7. La tazni. 8. La
The English of above, very

1.
tasriq.
literally translated.
[am] the Lord thy God... there shall not be to thee other gods
in front of
2.
batilan liannarrabba la yubri-u
Do
not
of
what
Me.
make
to thee
[is] in the
any carved image nor any picture whatever

sky from above and what [is] in the earth
from below and what
[is]
in the water
Bow not down to them Serve them

thy God am a jealous God-.!
3.
not
from under the earth.

!
because
Pronounce not the name of the Lord thy God, vainly!
the
Lord
for the
Lord does not acquit whomsoever has pronounced His Name

vainly.
6-
Kill not
7.
Commit not
adultery
8.
Steal not
Lesson 42.
1.
2.
GENDER.
The Gender, Number and Case of the Arabic Noun
4260.
Remember
Substantive, (b) Pronoun,
that the
How many
noun includes
Genders are there
Really only two
(a)
there
(c)
etc.
no Neuter Gender
is
Adjective,
in
Arabic,
being practically taken by the Feminine (Ex. 28b
its
place
7 note). There
are,
however, a few words (including certain Dual Pronouns
and
1st
Person Singular and Plural) which

either Masculine or Feminine,
upon as
4.
Rel.
Pron. and Adj.) will occupy Lessons
(Personal, Rel., Demonst., Interrog, etc.)

3.
(incl.
How
i.e.,
are the genders specially denoted
may be looked
Common
Gender.
'
The Masculine
is
called
<
Mudhakkar
^*
the Feminine
is
Mu'annath, occasionally marked in the dictionary by

separate
this
5.
form
mim
the
word following
it
the Feminine form, but
is
not always shown.
is
What words
are
Feminine
The Arab grammarians
divide the Feminine into
(i)
&
Jai>
by form or sound) and
(i.e.
Let us take the
meaning).
Fern,
(ii)
latter first.
signification are of four classes
by
Fern,
by
(i.e.
by
<_->
Words feminine by
>
(a)
Names of women
Exs.
oU
'A'isha
(or
M's
Ayesha,
- t ^
favourite
(b)
UJ*U
(his
Words which can only

*
sister,
(c)
wife)
mother,
Names
JU*
daughter)
r'Ji
'il*
etc.
^
be
female appellatives
>-
daughter,
of countries and towns
pregnant;
Exs.
'
^>-
*
'
etc.
'$'''**'
*''**>
oJxyJi j-e* (Dear)
Tunis;
LJo j
Egypt
J^'^
<U^J1
Algiers;
lil
4$^
Mecca
(the honoured).
(Damascus, or Syria).
io8
^
A> o
Double members of the body
(d)
Exs.
eye
(or,
spring of
A>
water);
foot)
(or,
6.
^3
shoulder
arm
pjji
oil or
<ji
Ji
ear;
hand;
leg
j-j
*iJ foot.
Are any other words regarded as feminines
Yes, three classes
"Broken Plurals" being treated as feminine singular
(a)
neuter),
we speak
of
<&jl>-
immortal
<j*y
souls,
(i.e.
and give the
adjective a feminine singular termination to agree with "souls".
The names
(b)
etc
(c)
of the letters of the Alphabet (such as fa, 'ain,
are treated as feminine.
There
also a
is
words said
of about thirty
list
"Feminine by common usage." The most useful of these are

0^ V.
*>
soul
_A> well
house (or residence)
sy ,> war
war S-Mi^l
sun (but j+* moon

7.
Which
(a)
UO
is
o''
* .<*
c-> .i^M ,p>j
earth
word;
by Termination"
o
<>
vowel
j>-
a picture;
titles,
i.e.,
*U
Those ending in a servile
grandeur;
J+*
desert;
Those ending in
Khalif (Caliph).
^^
as
red;
^'j->-
*'j-X^ a virgin
*Mi|
(adj.) white.
^X
>
_$^>-
most
beautiful
(female)
jj^
remembrance;
^>
Salma
*^^-}
(^.
x8x
Exs.
to
must, in that case, be masculine.
(c)
i*^
men happen
of
x* "
(b)
Talha *A^>- successor,
as <>*U*
The word
o^
But just one or two proper names, or

in
4>jl^ a (female) striker; t**~* a (female) sheikh.
garden;
end
wine
A>^
/V>^
(c./.
fire.
jl
Exs.
a chapter;
Sjj-*
j wind;
words ending in
all
*>
Masculine)
are "Feminine
Almost
.'>
I-
the present
"jU
^^
be
to
fever;
Jj'
(adj.) first
c5
($ i
J,
Jo
greater
(f).
8.
What
It
the feminine of ^>-' (some one).
is
needs no feminine, as
-
but
of
it
stands, for
a vague expression
it is
<.
?-\
(in
J>lj
Construction) one
of... (c.f.
ig
which cannot be used
(one, adj.)
15) takes the place
The
in construction.
>'
-X>
feminine of
is
"
L-^
thus:
*
,-
One
of the girls
One
of
OUJI ^>>\* One
them (masc.)
>-*>-
(About Damascus
Exercise 42a.
One
t^~J\
of the ladies,
s*
J-.~
'
s*
them
of
sf
(r)
A
o
3*
I'
>iiM
(0
(.)
J*
(-)
^^ 5^
(v)
(Lf L (j>>, y.ii
Vj)
cisr
r A)
Exercise 42b.
1.
My
2.
Where
3.
Is
4.
It is
daughter wishes
has seen its picture.
little
it
is
Damascus
like Cairo
5.
But the sun

Is
7.
The Khalifa
8.
It is
in
Syria
Damascus, because she
(lit.
Country of Syria).
a garden in the desert.
6.
in
to visit
intense there.
is
the desert red or white
The
desert
is
yellow.
(Prince of Believers) was dwelling there,
i.e.
Damascus.
How was
that
That [was] because Damascus was
his city,
no
Lesson 43.
1.
Given the Masculine, how do we form a Feminine from
The commonest way

remember our
add
is to
to
but of course
it,
(given in Lesson 17) that the
rule
"^
So from
each preceded by fatha.
from
we
doctor)
loquially,
2.
Can
this rule
Certainly
as
lj^
able
(f.);
be applied to (what we
<-*^
big(f.);
4**lj*
sick
3.
there
:
it is
>
^JL*L
ilyuu
?
noble, or, honour-
'*s*
o*
So ylUNl
(f.)
(or, col-
^rO Vl the greatest
greater,
on the form ^-i thus
the greatest
few examples, such
^s 1
jy
Feminine of
X
Yes
wise
and from
Si^Jt
are
(f.)
>
Is
(f.)
and
'^x
Adjectives
call)
we must
*-[* queen
^^
from
learnt
good
get
<UjU and
Note also
4JL-.U
we have already
lady-doctor;
4*:^*"
physician, doctor
we
vilL.
4+J prophetess
get
**
it ?
(j&
greater and
the smallest, (m)
c^
makes
the smallest
first
4.
(f.)and
What
is
(f.)
j'
that
!Jj>Sfl
the
the
to the
examples given
Masculines
are
(Comparison of Adjectives, Lesson

radical
is
preceded by
once be recognized.
the form
^y.**
first
(m,)
another (m.) tj>-\ another
common
Firstly,
and
that
alif,
all
59)
in
makes jjSfl
(f.)
See Lesson
59.
upon the form

that
the
is
J*i
to say, the first
even though the form
may
Secondly, the Feminines are
all
not at
upon
that the first radical takes cjamma,
is,
and, after the final radical, alif
maqura
is
affixed.
a I
5.
Is
there not another
'
J*
with a quite different meaning
Yes, this word always represents one of two things, a colour

or a physical defect.
Thus
>^
.*>
'
>-"
red,
<5jj'
ô^
blue,
'
-- III
^
The feminine
blind.
we
& j***
Are there any
that
is,
after the last
affixed the servile termination
is
get the feminities
o^
^>
on the form
of the three radicals
red;
The madda
(Lesson 58 :4b.)
6.
is
is
Common Gender
blue:
*Ujj
*^*
*\
Thus
blind etc.
not always shown.
nouns
There are over a score of words with masculine or feminine

adjectives,
we say they
so that
way (Quranic word)

heaven
are "either Mas. or Fern."
condition
state,
C->
r-
finger
a.>
"E.G
*>
peace (after war)
way
road,
Exercise 43 a.
Tf*>
-*
JU.
Exercise 43b.
1.
Do you
2.
Yes her name
3.
Fatima
4.
The owners
(f.)
know
is
is
the blind virgin
Mariam and she
is
little girl
of the largest
Mohammed Aly and

5.
6.
but 'A'isha
the most beautiful
the smallest
is
girl.
girl.
(grands magasins) are
stores
Son.
Write [down] the major premise and the minor premise.

Will there be peace after this war ? If God will.
>
better,
L)J^
stores
more beautiful
owners
introduction (to a book)
premise
(in logic)
112
Lesson 44.
1.
How many
Three:
How
numbers has the Arabic noun
Singular, used for one only; Dual, for two,
for things
2.
NUMBER.
which are
in pairs
the Plural formed
is
usually
Plural for three or more.
There are two principal ways; either
by adding a special
by breaking up the word and
more servile (i.e. weak or "servant") letters
(a)
suffix to the singular, or (b)
introducing one or
among
its
radicals.
in English, (a)
(Compare,
adding
s to
boy,
making boys and (b) changing man to men).

The first is called the Regular Plural and is mostly used
;
animate beings
the second
is
called the Broken Plural
for
and
is
generally (though not always) used for inanimate things.

The Regular Plural is extremely simple because so invariable
the Broken Plural
and
is
one of the
may be "broken"
in
many
We
Arabic study.
difficult sections of
different ways,
shall
'give a few examples and illustrate the use of servile letters in
Lesson
3.
Nouns
Plurals of Derived
49.
in
Lessons 62
6/.
State the rule for Regular Masculine Plural.
THE RULE.
From
endings, tanwin,
etc.
noun remove special case-
the singular
and add j^ una,
for
Nominative
the
Case, or
Example
<j* ina,
for either of the (Accusative or Oblique Cases.
peasant
-> and
is
3 '
0^^
accusative
>
plural
*1
'
peasants (nom)
(evangelist) forms
j~*
Similarly
ijjj~* and
i/
4.
^-t_5 many, takes jj
and
(jr
^^*
jj}*->
and
and
also
./
+>(
its
nom.
*>
j^j* (mis-
jfOU^
&
j&5
cases always observed in the formation
Is this distinction of
of the Plural
the other cases
sionary, or 'one-sent") gives \Jji**'j
Similarly
O^
is
In the written language
cusative for all cases,

'
it
is,
but the colloquial uses the Ac-
and drops the fat-ha of the nun, so we
*
*
'{'**.
*"'*
-~ A *
\->
-*
H3
5.
But
thought there were three cases
There are three cases
in
"Fully Declined Nouns", but only
two special forms for those "Imperfectly Declined" (see 52

The Regular Masc. Plural is an example of the latter.
6.
What
It
is this
we
"Plural"; just as in English
by PL, so
to
In
change
to the
single-?-
accusative
when
is
word "Plural"
(Note that when the
quoted;
it
is
word preceding
quite easy
the sentence requires
Arabic dictionaries the word following the
all
plural of the
7.
which here means
represent the
given, only the nominative
is
plural
Arabic we use
in
7).
r-
abbreviation of the word
an
is
sign
is
it).
the
it.
Enter these additional examples in the Note Book.
Use two
or
three pages for "Regular Masculine Plural", and give the three
columns.
Meaning
Plural
^
An
Singular
&'
aviator
peddlar
A pickpocket
A
An
teacher
inspector
worker
Absent
Entering
Leaving
Defeated
'.
Useful
winner
>
by
\*
114
Exercise 44a.
pV'l-i
<j
*j
(r)
L.j
Exercise 44b.
J.
Aviators are very useful in the present war.
2.
But
3.
Yes, sometimes one of them
4.
Some
many
of
them were
killed.
is killed.
of the workers are absent in spite of the presence of
the inspectors.
5.
Not
all
the fellaheen are entering the war.
("Entering"
is
governed
in
Accusative Case by
but,
laisa,
Participle, itself governs liarb in the Accusative Case)

6.
7.
Many
One of
of
them are
the ladies
and came there
is
quiet
and doing
living
as
their work.
among them
for she
in order to visit the sick
is
a doctor^
woman.
heard that she was a princess, or an "honourable.'*
8.
g.
Her work
Condition),
is
honourable, in
any case
(lit.
upon every
us
Lesson 45.
1.
How
MASC. PL.
do we place the Regular Masc. Plural
To do
we
this,
first
in
of course,
is,
Examples
affix.
in
wau
or ya, while
This applies
in the Genitive.
A^jJUi >4**
with the town inspectors
*+
your teachers are good [fellows] (nice men)

they took their victims
in the case of
3.
accusative of the antecedent
When
is
"
always used
(for
(c.f.
carefully 34:10-12).
For proper names of men. This only applies to

Arabic names such as Muhammad, Aly, etc. and
ending
be used
Mohammeds.
(as
c.f.
4'
few
Examples
and
in
if
These words are
is
used when
namesakes)
(Not often found).

title,
ends
in
the feminine
then the Reg. Masc. Plu. cannot
from
the verbs, -
if
\ lil>* (br. pi.)
they can
make
their
they denote rational beings.
from
j^L~,
n't.
real, original
(i.e.
Khalifa (Caliph), which takes
*J\& an oppressor;
*
do),
Participles derived
feminine
*>
more persons thus named
however, the proper name, or
(b)
euphony);
placed over,
is
should the student use Regular Masculine Plural
<jj.U>*j! the
'
and a shadda
and ^f- and we get ^*^*
speaking of three or
,",
(a)
If,
''\.\*
>\'>
*
OJT9 * o^+i**
"my teachers
the two ya's accordingly coalesce

(J^
*pjJj**A ijJ>-
our teachers are going inside (entering)
as in
J^.i*
<J^.*t^
O
The
J^f** j**i
the school teachers
What happens
t.
the prince's murderers
2.
a pro-
be a substantive or
equally whether the consequent
nominal
apocopate the Plural of the antecedent by
removing the nun, leaving the word ending

the consequent
Construction
<
>.
,.L~.
*a Moslem;
*>
'
O^**^*
participles of the
believers;
>
iJjJtk from
-\
Oj+>^* *smners.
Fourth Conjugation, to come
in
Lesson
76-
116
Relative Adjectives ending in
(c)
in detail in L: 144, sufficient to
(this will be explained
say here that from J~A* Egypt
we form (j**f Misriy an Egyptian, by adding

shadda, which ya
is
-~i -A***
Other examples
preceded by a kasra).
Syrians
Syrian
Chinese
Chinese
Ja panese
Jap
Christians
Christian
last
word
|"
is
'
>
The
a ya and a
directly derived from 7*-*~+'
the Messiah. In
'
writing the Accusative Case of the above four examples note
and two
that 3 ya's are pronounced,
Some Comparatives and
(d)
Certain Intensive
(e)
These are used
to
Forms
"
denote
Superlatives
7-
more excellent
-r
the
J^-*
(L: 146), such as
Jl5
a pickpocket.
These take
A>
is
very similar.
^>l
is
and
their Plural in
i.e.
professional
one whoisalways-snatching,
saint, takes
Are there any special instances
See 44:7 for the
always-hawking-for-sale,
<-K*i
always-flying
is
a peddlar, and similarly
Ljij
4.
who
who
i.e.
&U
>
\j j~*\
<j
and
<j\^
and
(j\~
rule. (But,
J^
Yes; the following special
words take the regular masculine plural apparently subject
no
'
very-much-so" of any quality or
for one
aviator, then
i.e.
used of one
!*
greatest
"always-at-it" of a person's occupation.
word
with one shadda.
written,
to
as a matter of fact, everyone of them has another
plural form sometimes used with a different meaning, so that

this use of the regular plural is to
show
special meaning).
worlds
(in
universe
Quran)
sons, children
son
T-
J^*
year
years
N.B.
The word
<~*
noun
a feminine
is
form), so
(in
often
^ \"^
j--*
->..
takes the fern.
pi.
(46:3).
Exercise 45a.
T J>-
(r)
/
(r)
'
'
>
jV
/,/
*L~*
-x^
^* J
1
r
b
;
'
<rr
*.rr\f
l^'J V
'cjjjO
x
i,f
4ft!
>.
>
JjU J 'j^^^
i
J^-
".
4
i/L
"
Jj
>
if
)!
(n)
'
V)
.'
2
cr
*!
Exercise 45b.
1.
The Prince (or Commander)

Khalifa) has gone
2.
The
of
the Believers
(true) believers in
4.
$.
The Japs dwell near
to the Chinese.
6.
Do
fellaheen
of
not
insult the
Egypt
8.
Go out in
Some of
Q.
The children
7.
are
my
the
Egypt are many.
Praise be to God, the Lord of the worlds (Sura

Are all Christians saints ?
3.
ft.e.
out.
(peasants)
for
I).
the
fellahin
teachers.
the path of God,

Muslims (viz., "Holy War").
the Syrians are Muslims, and some of them
Christians.
[command of Moses.
!
of Israel dwelt in Egypt,then
went out of it
at the
nS
Lesson 46.
I.
How
The
is
the Regular
Feminine Plural formed
feminine
regular
C>'
crrfote
if
no
ex.
Fern.
OOj*-
pi.
nouns defined (by the

"*
course lose the tanwin. vlAiJ'
Which words
Almost
(a)
at for the
a vowel,
^j*"
C>^
^^
for
but
it
is
the other
cases, the Accusative and the Oblique.
two
2.
Ol
*>^
Nominative Case and
CJ\ atun for the
substitutes
plural
fj
or
FEM. PL.
Note
II
all
words ending
-l
fern:
r-
4..U*
by adding
o^X*
takes
Fern. PI.
1^.
*-
'^\''^
'^ .,
*,
:/).
wiU take the Reg.
fern
(Revise 42
its
OUl**
Teachers
by construction) of
OuJi
o
in
a masculine, forming
the Reg. Masc. PL, then
'
Regular Feminine Plural
will take this
its
article or
Ol^\
Many
<-
Believers
^-
Other examples from Fern. Nouns
Ou>.
Garden (Paradise)
'*
Verse
(of
~-
r-
Oui
Language
Some words
The
(c)
(d)
alif
ending in
maqsura
Proper names
is
women
(if
*^*>k
<
written as a
of
iij
5i!
7IS
A>
(b)
A;^
^x^
OM
Quran)
//a,
fever.
c*-*-*"
forming yat-un.
real Arabic)
Zeinab
OuLj r î
Fatima
C*LJli
/ew;
7-
foreign Masculine words
but the Reg. Fern.
PI. is
gentleman; Mr.
i*
stable
i.L>U
^
This appears strange,

available for miscellaneous words)
!
CA>lj>-
*>-\
7-
O^îC
j>-
pasha (Turkish)
7-
LiC
H9 ~
A few
(e)
names
3.
other items, not yet studied
of the letters, the
names
of the
Are there any special exceptions
Yes
make
the following
months
etc.
in
sister
the second radical bears a sukun,
Words ending
adding
mother
year
,.
If
verbaljiouns, the
e. g.
slight alterations before
heaven
4.
altered
is it
and having a sukun over the middle
radical replace this sukun by a suitable vowel
when taking
the^reg. plural ending.
5.
Can
when
it
chamber
blow
UU
darkness
a village
noun be placed
a fern. plu.
Yes
in construction
the antecedent the only change
is
made
Thus the Prophet's wives were
remove the tanwin.
is
to
called
"Mothers of the Faithful"

with
the
in
or,
J>l%
6.
of
company
or
the
king's
sisters,"
is
dUuifCil^'lg
Give an example of a feminine plural as Consequent.

'
,' *
(OliJl) C^ j>-Nl %
Vocabulary
*
^
1 he
mother of the
Enter up and learn
46.
words given
in this
and
Note that the Singular, Plural and English
previous lessons.
meaning must
all
sisters, of the
be learned together
with verbs, the Past, Present
and English must be learned together.
"
Note the Masc. numeral
in
Self-Test 45.
'
>
Principal
Oll>
<-xjj ^^-i-O
>
*>
^j
director
*
I
(Explanation
A>
Sj'^ f Jt^
State the rule for placing a reg. mas.
(l)
the antecedent of the construct state (45

(2)
Write
out,
masc.
pi.
later).
pi.
noun as
l).
from memory, the classes of nouns using the
(45
3)
Also the exceptions
(45
4).
120
Self -Test 46.
If
construction)
fern.
noun become the antecedent (in
plu.
what happens
Exercise 46a.
"
'*
to
it ?
(46
-
.*
OUJ ^ jAT jl
!U!
"
rîf
OuJl
~"
'''
4~jJi
5).
'
>
^
/
" -
r.
jJiSr <>
x*
? /
c*Uyj ^-jur
^^-^
(Y)
(v
'
of>&!$
^
iû. /jl
-'d
^^3^1^'^-^'^^
(v)
**^
4A) l
J^<JI5
SO^P
u^w^jp" d>LjL^JI cîiJl
j j^\
CJW^-AI ^JJ>a*
(A)
Jix
Exercise 46b.
1.
2.
Where can my daughter study

are studied
at
the languages of the world
the
Languages
"
(The verb taught", being Conj.
II,
is
avoided here).
The
4.
mistress (teacher) of .the school has four

And all of them are pupils in her school.
5.
All the mistresses are present to day,
6.
The
3.
7.
8.
9.
10.
girls' school.
little girls.
[absent.
and the clerks
(f.)
are
pupils know ( lit. are-keeping-in-memory ) well the

verses of the chapter.
(Word used for Chapter of Qur'an).
The pupils (f) entered the school four years ago.

The Muslim girls are believers in God.
[the Believers ".
"
The wives of the Prophet Muhammad are the Mothers of
The wicked servant (slave) will be beaten with many blows
and the
faithful servant with
few blows,
121
Lesson 47.
1.
What
It is
is
the Dual
a special form used to represent two of a kind, such as a
pair, or a couple.
and
2.
Number
DUAL.
How
to
is
The Dual
is
common
to all Semitic
the Dual formed in Arabic
General Rule
add
J" to the Singular for the
Since most feminine nouns end in
it
is
Nominative Case.
easy to see that the

J'
Dual of the Fern,
will
end
dropped, as there
What happens
Rule for
if
is
For example
no tanwin whatever
the noun
is in
the other two cases
the Dual of either of
4.
in jll
oj
a daughter,
Needless to say, the tanwin must be
two daughters.
3.
languages
Greek.
in the
Dual.
the other cases
to the Singular to
add^jv
form
the Accusative or the Oblique Cases.
Note the diphthong ai of aini.

Give examples of all these in tabular form.
M. Nominative
F,
Nominative
two men
one
man
two women
one
woman
one
man
one
woman
>
M. Accusative
F,
Accusative
wo men
->
two women
M. Oblique
with two
men
with one
man
'->
F.
5.
Oblique
with two
women
Memorise the following

two ears
two eyes
with one
^short vocabulary
woman
"
two nations
two languages
<j
(.
XX
two masters
two mistresses (teachers)
two days
two nights
(jl
two months
two years
<j\
jll.
122
6.
any similarity between the Dual of the Noun and Verb
Is there
Yes
compare the Past with the separate and affixed Pronouns

and Al-Mudari c with the Nominative (see Lesson 29).
:
Affixed Pronoun
Separate Pronoun
&
e*
e*
(Al-Madi)
e*
Uli
Nom
Al-Mudari' of Verb.
''
Verb
Noun
of
of Agent.
good deal of similarity will be found between the dual

verb (Past) and the dual separable (Personal) pronoun
Notice the special use of
especially in the second person.
alif
throughout,
and also
that the
between
difference
Dual and the Plural Masc. Prons. consists
the
in the extra alif
possessed by the former: this interesting point applies equally
pronouns and to the pronominal affixes. Revise

Lessons giving the Dual of the Pronoun and Verb.
to the separate
7.
What
This
the use of the particle
is
is
lated.
means "then,
frequently preceded by
matter
Example
of..."
V*
in our exeicise
him hear"
let
8.
It is
is
the
word
word which
used
in the
titles.
of
(See 32:4). ^J
<J*Vlj'
iUi
fi^>J
-
him
y&>
literally
|f*'
for the sick child, [well] he died yesterday
Whaf
transis
which means "as for" or "in the
--
"As
and sometimes cannot be
a conjunctive particle
jk^Jxli
J^
".
prefixed to a noun in construction
means "Presence"; but
it is
always
East as a polite prefix to people's names and
Thus we say (abruptly)
iv
we say
politely
but
pc-JL!l
if
Similarly
we wish
to
speak
we never say
to a
-.x
gentleman
to
J^>
thou, but dJ)"^,^ thy
English we had
pronunciation of
it)
better
render
presence. In translation
"
Hadratak
by "thou" or "you".
"
(colloquial
123
6.
Why
is
shaikh in the Oblique Case
Because such Arabic

while the
name
titles
as
l^>- are vowelled
(or office) is the
consequent of the Construct
His Greatness the Sultan of Egypt
State.
X-
greatness-of the-Sultan-of
/xx>
A more
rendered
is
)
"The-
Egypt â* olLu*<Ja.The-Majesty-
of-the-King cUJlJI AJÛ- means,

10.
as antecedents
formal style of address
in construction with 4jM>- etc.
Majesty the King.
J/z's
formed by placing
is
and releasing vilUI as:
Exercise 47 a.
.
l'^
^>
"
.
l
li
(t)
;,x
>
;i
21JS [jjj
x.
"
(r)
X. * X
I.*I>1
olo
A!
B '
/\
0<
(t)
()
,4
(-\)
(v)
Exercise 47 b-
$.
Did you leave your town [on] two nights ?

Yes and previous to that I had not been out of it for
two years.
Whoever has two eyes, let him see.
Whoever has two ears, let him hear.
The mother of the two children is very ill, as for the two
6.
The language
I.
I.
3.
4.
/.
8.
children [they are] well.

of the two nations, Egyptian and Syrian,
one (i.e., the same).
Sheikh So-and-so has two pretty daughters. (See 25 7).

His Highness (or Greatness) the Sultan received (i.e.,
is
audience) the two great
(i.e.
high) Ministers.
in
124
Lesson 48. DUAL.

1.
How
To
is
noun
in the
place a Dual
the nun.
Dual placed
Noun
Example
in construction
as
is
$j)lj
we remove
"two parents",
o
is
in construction as antecedent
"the child's two parents";
QN)
>
v-^T
<J
!j!l}
jTÎI
is
write to
>
your parents.
2.
What are the two alifs in the first example ?

The first one is all that is left of the mark
removing the nun, while the second one
marking the
of the
Dual
after
part of the
<j'
This needs careful pronunciation:
definite.
The
walida-1-walad.
is
or
accusative
would
oblique
be
walidai-1-walad.
3.
Give an example of the Dual Feminine Construct

o
*.*
L~ s
f"
"The governess went
out of the
Harm
"
(women's quarter) with
H. H. the Sultan's two daughters." (Caution the nun at the end

of "Sultan" is part of the normal word and not to be confused
with the dual)
3a.
Why
there a kasra at the end of
in this sentence ?
îil
Because before wasla the sukun has to be replaced by a vowel
is
(here kasra) to
4.
possible.
(Revise 12:
But suppose the singular noun has a difficult ending like

In
and similar cases
that
Two
Thus:
virgins
Two
5.
make pronunciation
What
alif
The
is
done
(nom.)
deserts
o*yj***0 and
in the case of
thus
î
Similarly
writes
writes
radical must
is
rhangecl
$**&
alifmaqsura, or in the case of long

?
be restored
in
forming the dual;
()\+&*
its
dual
stick, or staff, restores its original
two
staffs.
two fevers
jjê-
into wau.
^y
a youth, restores the ya, and forms
Ua& a
*-
and (Ace. or Oblique)
j!jTjJ
which was originally wau

original
hamza
e
the
\\
12).
(c.f.
.*>.
a fever, restores
Jul*
wau, and
its
ya and
the Reg. Fem. Plural 46
2 b.)
125
*>
6.
What happens
to ^L*
and
a father,
These two words are actually
a brother
r-\
having originally had
defective,
*"
>
/*"
wau,
a final
Two
fathers
jp*- )
<jiy
u^J
used like
to
which has
to be restored,
abawani (which can be sometimes be

"
mean
two parents"), and
7.
Is
c.f.
46
3 for plural
of "sister".
Pronoun
there a Dual Personal
"They two"
Certainly; since pronouns are^nouns in Arabic.

is
and "you two"
f**
l*Z
is
At
Lesson 25:3 and revise the table

Plural.
8.
What
point turn back to
this
in full:
Singular, Dual,
Common
Note that the dual pronouns are
are the affixed dual pronoun-terminations
These are
I'*.*
and UST
Common
both
Gender.
Gender.
Exercise 48a.
>
oV;^
/j*^" jif
*"*f*
j9
*"*
^
-
6
'.'
A)
*r
^ /
--
>*
.*
it
'
^ r>
It I*
>
II
(jlkLJl
(0
^ '*"$.
**
t.
AjaJ
^ jujT^'uLli U
Exerciser.
**
3.
\J
^.J
x-
2.
'^f (j^*.^ j* O^' j*
'
-<
0)
st,
1.
two
o\'j>-
brothers,
54:2).
(c.f.
You two [are] good men.

The two women are very
As for the two princesses,
sick
**
(\)
(y)
their disease is fever.
one of them
is
virtuous,
and
the other wicked.

4.
About
two sons of the queen,

and the other ignorant.
know everything about
because
5.
6.
two ministers.
Has His Highness the Sultan a son
The two sons of the Sultan are big.
7.
one of them
the
ligent
that,
is
intel-
sat with the king's
He
has two sons.
126
BROKEN PLURAL.
Lesson 49.
Nouns not taking
1.
Regular Masc. or Regular Fern. Plural are
said to have a "Broken Plural

,
2.
"Broken Plural" means a
by "breaking into it"
Why
".
plural
this
name
foimed out of the singular
and inserting one or more
What
are servile letters
They
are those that serve a root
servile letters.
by forming derived words

*
and are collected together
one Arabic word
in
"
>-
ll**dC*
x
"you asked me for her"; jj^s, being the 2nd Person Plur.
Past with the nun of precaution and the ya showing the object
me. Not all these letters will be used in Broken Plurals, others
will be
used
to
form Derived Nouns (Lessons
Derived Conjugations (Lessons

3.
How many
Over
thirty,
for this
4.
May
different forms of
More
and also
72-95).
Broken Plural are there
but we shall do a few
double lesson.
62, 63)
will
any Singular take any Plural
Two
at a time.
come
in
will suffice
Lessons
6467.
No; most forms of singular are restricted to one or two plurals

and note that it often happens that the existence of a second
form indicates an additional meaning.

*
*'.*
~^. j r | <iNote the forms
<i*il
<jLi
Ju&l
J*il
plural
5.
These four are called
"
Plurals of Paucity
"
i.e.,
used of persons and things not exceeding ten
in
they
number
may
be
(3-10).
(of "a few") only holds provided the
This special meaning

word has two or more plural -forms, one for many, one for few.
6.
How
does
The word
on
its
first
^j^
/jS being
middle
two
(a lesson) take (j*jj^
letter takes a
letters
wdu
and having
in the plural
Approximate Rule
this
sukun
and vowels the
with the homogeneous damma.
formula we lay down
"Nouns
a triliteral noun
for Plural
Using the
form their plural

of the singular form
J*J generally
I
>
either on the form tJ/*
else
on the form
j(*>
This
approximate, not absolute; but some hundreds of words follow
is
it.
7.
127
Give examples on the Form J^*9

Plural
Meaning
Plural
Meaning
Singular
Singular
sins
lessons
Ui
hearts
plates
houses
stars
money
letters
months
wars
; >
souls
kings
breasts
robbers
To
N. B.
get this table into the vocabulary

N>t >*'
Large-Hand Form
8.
may go
What do we
learn from
J,
all
may go
Jj*i
any remarks
That not
o-)
at the top of the
at the foot or
be omitted.
words with plural
the
and conversely
is
it
jji have
in
L|
singular in
true that not all singulars in
l*i
take a plural in
page while
vilU
7-
iJjL*
note-book the
Many
take
JUi
Lesson 50.
(In continuation of the subject).
1.
Of what nouns
The
Jlii
the plural-form
singular three-letter form
before
its
is
its first letter
second
letter.
and
Give examples of
J*>
an
takes an alif-hamza
alif of
prolongation after
This produces a word on the form

o
2.
inserts
)Ui
l[JU*
thoughts
rivers
works
verses of poetry
J-
tribes (Israel)
forms, diagrams
burdens,
times
loads
verbs,
flowers
deeds
papers,
pens
leaves (of tree)
children
wealth
acts
gates
conditions
states
friends
nobles
3.
days
Why
two separate columns
Because the words

A^
in the first
"
one (right-hand) forming
their
>V^
ft
**
Jfo have their singular actually on the model J*i

"
the second column (left-side) has words such as
thought s"
plural in
etc.,
which duly form
their plural
singulars are of various forms.
on the same form, but whose
Keep
the two separate, but
boldly label each with the model form.
The memorising
the student must expect

others.
Why
are four words
Because they are a

A^
little
to require longer
at
grammar
was
originally a wau.
difficult
asterisk
to
follow at
first
glance.
alif
which
show
a curious ten-
scientists call "reversion to type",
and the wau
re-appears, followed
the singular
rules,
words quickly.
words Jl* t^ti and JlV have each an
what
than
A>
three
to
of
list
marked with an
The
dency
some lessons
take time, and
will
some students are stronger
Also,
while others memorise a

4.
words given
of all the
_j
In the plural they
by
takes
To
new servile alif.

recapitulate,
one after
and
mini
before
new
alif
a
wau, and thus we get

In the
case of
J^J amwdL
wau
the
^y
129
Similarly the others.
reverts to ya
Thus we have
Put the new first alif and the new intermediate alif and you
**\
v *'\
have *L_> I. But the two ya's coalesce and so we get A> days.
1
5.
will interest
It
considerable
to
supposed
be one of the most
now made
that he has
"
towards grasping
progress
"
f*
know
the student to
broken
jio }UI <jO
difficult parts of
Learn a few words
The-tongue-of-the-angels."
,e
plurals,"
e
-*
at
a time
x-
i^li
shay'an fashay'an (bit by
llv.-i
Plural and Meaning together.
')**>'
Exercise 50a.
\' >
J^LM j ^
fJjLJI
is
but always Singular,
most important.
'*
^NV
f ClO
o^.* j, j r
(Royal Children).
-
This
bit)
j j^ j j,
^j
ttl>ti>Vf*\
^v j j*
ê'
~j *
iyii
"
(\
/
(r
/L.V JlXil
ff
j,*
'
'
ui;V
d/ji î v
ti-j u jiki 3
ji<_i
>
.(t)
Exercise 50.
1.
Do
royal children study in their houses, or do they go to
their teachers
2.
3.
They
live (dwell) in castles (palaces), not in houses.
And
the castles [have] gardens in
their
two banks
(sides) are
many
which are
rivers,
trees; their leaves
and on
(i.e.
the
leaves of which) and their blossoms are of pretty forms.

4.
thoughts and their

They are just (exactly) like our
Are kings' children's thoughts

actions like our actions
like our
children.
5.
Who
are their friends
the nobles.
Their friends are
all
from [among]
130
EXAMINATION PAPER
50.
Carefully copy the questions, answer

external help, write clearly
I.
fully, allowing sufficient time, but without

then send up with name and address.
Give the Plurals of aviator, more excellent, a month, a
(l)
plate, a year, a language,
"
this one,"
darkness,
work, a star.
"that one", a burden, a thought,

Give the third Commandment.
Write out the Alphabet in its regular order.
(2)
(3)
II.
a pupil,
To English
lul
^
Jb
jl
^h\
'
irlÎ
oUS
(r)
(t)
(v)
^
III.
(A)
(6)
Our teachers were going out.

The two evangelists are not very intelligent.
The believers (m) and believing-women shall enter the
Garden (Paradise).
They did not strike her with many blows.
That Moslem gentleman has two wives (women).
Many Moslem women are ignorant but the two mentioned
(7)
Your two brothers have come
(8)
The two sons
(l)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(f)
are not ignorant.

to see
you
they are with
your parents.
N. B.
to
A.
Papers
of our prince are well-known.
good percentage of marks should be obtained,

51,
etc.
The
translation
" to Arabic"
most important part and must never be omitted.
is,
in
before going on
every Exercise, the
Write
clearly.
131
Lesson
51.
"Eye, Voice and Ear.
A*
4*
Tj>
4) UP!
\> M-
J|
jt!^ L
3
'i^'i
jjb
>
4jo
>
^'l
3.
Name is King of kings and Lord of lords.

And all His works (actions) are noble and generous.
God begat not and was not begotten.
4.
As
5.
And
6.
Heaven and
T.
2.
His
His children, they are those-who-believe in Him.

as for His days (age) [there is] no limit to them.
for
earth pass away, as for His
word
it
shall not
pass away.
7.
His great throne
is in
8.
And
the-footstool-of-His-feet.
NOTES
2.
the earth
is
heaven.
The
adjs. are fern, (neuter)
because of the "broken plural."
5.
The verb walada loses its wau, but not in passive(Lesson

"
Had-dun means a limit " (See 33 4).
6.
Zdla
3.
"
8.
is
"
Footstool
hollow verb
"
is
"His two feet"
RULES
"
is
"
Noun
like
kani (Lesson 36
of Place
"
(Lesson
dual in construction (Lesson
of this Exercise
See
21, 31
and
41.
5).
62).
48).
113).
132
Lesson 52 and 53.

CASE.
1.
How many
Three
Nominative
object
),
however,
2.
etc.
the subject
Accusative
),
Some
object).
the direct
authorities,
call the third case Oblique, to cover Dative, etc.

"
"
are
declined
originally, almost all declinable except
are,
pronouns
in verbs, the Present is inflected, the Past is not. (See 29
Particles are indeclinable.
3,4).
What nouns
(a)
and Genitive (the indirect
What words
Nouns
3.
cases are there in Arabic
are /^declinable
Pronouns, although a sub-section of Nouns, are not dec-
linable
(b) all
words ending in
(alif
maqura)
are quite
indeclinable.
4.
What happens
It
He
is
an indeclinable noun
same case-form throughout, being, so
retains the
immutable.
to
notable example
a well-behaved youth
to speak,
(Nom
:)
<
5.
We
saw
We
went with a well-behaved youth
Then how can you

By
Lo
a well-behaved youth (Ace:)
the context
the case
tell
<
l>
(Oblq.)
there are often declinable
adjectives
accom-
in any case, the meaning is usually clear.

words
Are there any
partly declined ?
"
Some gramYes and we call these Imperfectly Declined."
marians (fond of Latin terms) call them "Diptotes" (2-case-
panying, and,
6.
7.
them from the "Triptotes" (3-case-words).

them "Nouns of the 2nd. Declension".
words)
to distinguish
Others
call
Mention some nouns "imperfectly declined," or 2nd Declension.

>'\*
(a)
Those on the form
Ji
Note that
(1)
Nouns
of colour, as
ij&*\
(2)
Nouns
of physical defect, as
'
>'
(3)
Comparatives
etc.,
as
>".^
Jail
comprises
white
-r
'
lame;
".*
\
Jjai
more
excellent.
8.
(b)
133
Mention some other "two case nouns"
Noun
Feminine of the
of Colour
Also there are two broken plurals
etc.
(58
Oi
r-
"Llli
7-
Do
Then
There
is
Khalifas,
not trouble to
prophet, plural 4 C*xJ
form
also an adjective of the
anbiya'u.
angry.
jl-Jase
All the above have but two case-forms fjij
0^
Most foreign Proper Names.

8
x"
."*
"
Mary
Examples P-^4
rx>l ^ Abraham
^
'
^*> Joseph
Four -syllable Broken Plurals on the forms

while
These
indefinite.
mosques;
will
~a
Egypt.
ft
'j*
- 6.
_>l/^ P rizes
fr
rf'-^
offices
;i>lT*
But
capitals (of countries).
/M% declined.''
The Regular Masculine and Fern. Plurals (c.f. 44 5 etc.)

Wherein consists the imperfect declension of these diptotes ?
Examine them and observe the complete absence of tanwin
:
(except in the Regular Feminine Plural),

first
point
the second
shown by
single fatha
a
,
written alike.
single
in other
is
RULE:
that
damma,
words
learn this as the
while
both the
the
Nominative
if
is
other cases use the
the Accusative
and
the Genitive are
But note that this would be altered
prefixed to these nouns, or

10.
^r^j
be studied in Lessons 64
note that "ê/i defined, they are
9.
J esus
J^
Jî*j
x
Meanwhile we give one or two examples l^lSC
(e)
and
'
(d)
for Norn.,
for the other cases.
lL>j*<aI/
ÂC-
vJSi poor.
>
Paul
white.
canon law.
divines, or doctors of
* liU-
intelligent ones.
(c)
Dul:).
* Cja*>
%
4)
I I.
in
2nd
them, as plurals, today, but note examples of each.
learn
\
(diptotes, or
if
Jl
were
they were placed in construction.
"
Nouns imperfectly declined" have only two cases

shown by damma and fatha respectively, and they take
no tanwin; but they are fully declined when made definite,
written,
whether by the Article or by being placed in construction with

nouns already defined.
Giye examples,
II.
(to
134
be copied, and memorised),
We
went
to
many mosques
(Gen.)
We
entered
many mosques
(Ace.)
ju-Sj^LT*
Divines-of-mosques(constr.) are intelligent
llii
<J
}U*
We
saw a lame man
We passed
That
it
More
fruit
may
(Ace.)
by a lame man (Obi.)

bring ##.
come
with)
more
fruit.
1>% /V"*
was brought (was-come-with. 39
^jCJr
7).
S*
12.
But suppose we
to
prefix Jl
these nouns
r%*>
'
^J
*
not to foreign
names, of course)?
In that case a great change happens.
Nouns defined by Jl
"
or by
construct state" are no longer diptotes but become
fully declined three-case nouns.
We
above
to the
with additional examples showing broken plurals
diptotes,
made
Let us prefix Jl
definite
by being placed
in construction to defined nouns.

^
entered the mosques (Ace.)
"^
Jb-LTJI l;l>o
s
We
went
to the
mosques (Gen.)
The doctors
We
are intelligent
of Cairo mosques are intelligent
saw the lame man
(Ace.)
ÂZ
^^
'la.*
passed by the lame
In the
man
Exercise 53.
Y>-
>i
LJ
>
3*
x^
'
**
^\^
<J
'
'*'**'
***,;&
Translate above sentences from memory.
memorise them.
(Gen.)
synagogues of the Jews.
did not go to their schools
>t,
I^JL.1
**
'?r'j
We
f^>
**
"
J^llTJl <J
' - >
The doctors-of-the-mosques
<J
If
Lî
possible,
135
Lesson 54.
ANCIENT DELENSION.
1.
What was
2.
j and
of declension
(Vowel-points are of more recent date).
&
Do any nouns
do
five
Yes;
f*\
method
supposed to have been expressed by the three lony vowels
It is
I
the ancient
still
so,
when
this ancient
form
us deal with the
etc,
(c.f.
These are
"in construction".
first
four of these.
-.
^\
r-\
^1 father;
48
We
6).
now
will
fully decline
With
With pronouns.
In construct,
and
Let
are
.>
which re-appears
defective, the missing letter is wau,
Dual
father-in-law, ji possessor ;*J mouth.
*'*>
brother;
keep
all
in the
and
*-
article. Indefinite.
Nom.
Ace.
otj
ol
Gen
3.
<iL
Nom.
Ate.
U-i
Gen.
How
It is
is
jS declined
a word complete in
The meaning
is orc/7/
&sed
is
iUI
itself,
the
wau
is
JujS Wealthy
Its
plural
is
man.
IS
jji and
doers of favours.
.x
Ju
present, not missing.
"the possessor-of, or owner-of," and therefore
m construction.
tf J
4.
What
about the word
mouth
'
If
136
?
^
'
used, there
is
is
nothing to remark, for
":
Ace.
and Gen. J
<J
which
Thus
it
is
is
usual, with the affixed
But, as a matter
etc.
>
pronouns
etc.,
to
With pronouns
With a noun
Nom.
With
employ
an older form, and this follows the ancient rule
>
'
î
*x
A
of fact,
is
'
>'"
also
Nom.
its
article
in
2.
Indef.
y*
Ace.
Gen.
5.
But
may
not <j ciLi be confused with "in me, in thee"

*
**
Yes
*>
Arabic
but the student can distinguish by the context.
has a few cases of identity of spelling with distinction of
meaning, but English has many more!

6.
Give further concrete illustrations of Lessons 53 and
54.
They
sat with the
poor people
il
n ^^
"
i
Another
polite
man came
^Ô U P-J'
Jl V.>-!
^^ji
to the castle of the Sultan of
Egypt.
The "owners
of
Some people
studied in schools
Some people
studied in the schools
Some people
studied in the schools of the missionaries.

*
o
' '* - * *
*
*
*s I ft
-*
do not
*.
strike
work"
my
(i.e.
business-men) studied in
father or
my
-O 5
brother because
wish that anyone strike his father or his brother.
\"
t;V
'
offices.
(JT
God
does not
137
Exercise 43a.
to
Arabic
2.
The people of this city are very poor.

The whole of the people of this poor city
3.
She dwelt
1.
in a
white house with a lame
are intelligent.
girl,
and they had
a black slave.
4.
5.
6.
Istruck
AbuZaid on his mouth. (Abu Zaid was a famous scamp.
Abu Zaid was not a virtuous man.

One of them came to the palace (castle)
the fellaheen" (a playful
7.
The Chancellor
8.
was
visiting
title
of Al-Azhar
Mosque
His Reverence
of the "Father of
of the late Sultan of Egypt).
(lit.
is
named Abul-Fadl.
Virtue) Prof.
Mohammed
Abul-Fadl, Chancellor of the sacred Al-Azhar.

9.
10.
What I hear from my father I say (tell) to my brother.

He has shewn me a favour (lit. He is an owner of favour,
or
merit, against me),
Exercise 54b.
x-
j^
i\'j&
"
jb
fl
JtJ I
U* J*l
(Y)
"
>
j.^
jiilf Cl
^^
x
l
Lui ilLvf >L^lf

^
-V
CÛ j^jl c3" (A)

>t
Vljil
jl
"
>
Jy.'-ui.l
-
..
(\)
138
Lesson 55.
I.
Apply
What
The
the rules of
is
real
Plural
"Case"
to the
Demonstrative and Relative.
the Demonstrative Pronoun
Demonstr: Pronoun
is IS
(Sjli
"that",
Ml ~\ )
and
is
declined thus:-
~
7.
How
can we
Partly
(a)
tell
139
the Demonstrative Pronouns
by observing the absence
and the presence of the tanwin

book
"
*Li
[is]
(b)
Since we
"
iilj"
people
in Arabic,
to
may
this sentence
article
J* "this (thing)
'
women ".
[are]
"Those
say
we may
the definite
of
thus *LJ&J>
Those
may need
U*UII.Nj*>; and as
"
Vj
the
[are]
people"
read (simply) "These
(and do usually) insert a suitable
detached personal pronoun, which makes the meaning
Thus we
These
say,
[are] the people,
clear.
** *Nj*
(j*^\
Jt
lit.,
Uij\
8.
N B.
These ones, they are the people.
y> la* "This,
it [is]
But which detached pronoun do
One which
book"
the
we
use
i.e.
'.
jlJujJI
>'
This
the honourable visitor
is
Exercise ooa.
2.
I.
These-two
3.
He
4.
These
5.
That lady
6.
This
(or, this
U* JU
**'*,*,
!
Si)^!
is
&j>
\\
* &j
(chapters).
two chapters mentioned
gentleman)
(f).
These two suras

[are] the
"this is the book."
agrees in number and gender.
These two persons are the guests
people (indef.)
ylj
in the book.
the famous writer.
[are] nice people.
[is]
is
merciful and generous.
the noble lady.
That youth (boy) does not obey

his parents do not love* him.
/.
Exercise odb.
and mother, so
his father
^
>
'
>
>
.' \l
>
.l^'ll
j^J< Âxn
V J jl i>
and
^.>.l
>
jUU
jlj'j/JI
.^
*>^>.
(r)
(c).^^^!^
(0
'
i^ iC
Jji
are Conj. IV. Verbs.
'îl
(Lesson
76).
"ills
( v)
140
Lesson 56.
How
We
Pronoun formed
the Relative
is
have already (Lesson
Demonstrative Pronoun
Relative Pronoun
to
and then add
it
Plural
Fem.
that Demonstrative Pronoun,
prefix
the article
to
Thus we get
also.
and
or "which,"
Mas.
Fern.
as.
^ J!
thus declined
is
Singular
Fem.
Mas.
form Masc
of the
Now,
Dual
that the feminine of the

:
means "who"
alladhi which
shown
55)
is
we take
Norn.
Other Cases.
2.
What
is to
The
(a)
be noted here
fact that three of the
but the other
above have a lam with shadda,
including the four dual forms,
five,
Sound
written lams beside the shadda.
Egyptian Colloquial Arabic
for in
to
Jkl\ illy,
carefully,
these forms are reduced
all
(who, or which, Masc,, Fem., Sing., PL,
etc.).
That, except in the Dual, there
(b)
shadda
the
have two
is
no difference marked
between the Nominative and the other cases.

3.
If (_Jil
means who
By saying "who,
"the
Similarly,
Thus, "the
his."
man who,
"
how do we
or which,
Write:
"The gentleman whose

"
Transpose
write
it
"
with whose son
thus:
4t>!
/^
*.*
to
A^jjji
'
^
(___
Note
this long example,
(>
J/-21 ) are
account of
Ua>-
^JJl
"
son
"
hid
was
my
Jf Jr X 3::/JI
lost"
J^"-/'^
interested
old-fashioned
in
school with/>
at
who, ^withjiis son
<J
*r
Cl~O
/cill
then
their
"And
",
JlJlll
Sr-'
which "who...
in
is
for "John's book."
widely separated.
all their sin, I
(Those
etc.
may compare,
English, the usage "John his book

4.
horse
his-horse etc.
languages
man whose
the lady who, her-horse"
in the history of
write whose
wickedness
those who, on
face from this city." (Jer.33:5).
6*
oAVj> ^;
"
5.
Whom
Whom = who,
serve."
serve him."
A/^>-
"The lady whom

"Behold, he
6.
/.
who,
know"
lî j*
thou lovest
>
sick"
is
^Jl
JJ
(J*\f
t^ \J^ '*J*
'
How
do you explain C{ILJ ^.H jf^j^H

"The lessons which, them I Iearnt"=The lessons which
But you have Written her, northern
Yes;
not only so,
rational
is
is
1.11
Feminine Singular
The broken
means who,
the
meaning of
learnt.
treated as Feminine Singular,
Do you remember
but
RULE
Recapitulate the
8.
"
^yl
whom
Thus we get
him.
or whosoever, while
Neuter. C.f. /2
i.e.
a non-
of
plural
6.
and
also.
that which, or, what.
Both are sometimes interrogative, sometimes
relative.
Exercise 56a.
wish
1.
2.
Whom
3.
4.
to take
one of your children who are
do you wish
to take
at school.
5.
will take the child who was ill yesterday.

know a man [who] does not believe in God. (Ex: 57d-Notei).
Have you been-into one of the Egyptian houses, which are
6.
7.
These two men are the famous
8.
"The path
in the small
hamlets
went-in with those two ladies
Exercise 56b.
of those to
'
'\
\\
whom
\\\
whom
you
saw.
(s.)
writers.
'A
thou hast-been gracious."
Jt
*T** \
>
\
(\\
J*
(o)
*
I
^
,,
'
juJl dl:J
Ci
^
L^
'
j^li^S
j^î
/\
oti*
("i)
(v)
142
Read aloud and
Exercise 56c.
x
t
\^
Jli
bl
study.
*"
*V-
^x-
IS]
i
"
r.
> v
*
i
I'
>
'
e ^
'
Vf> f
"
tx
r
\ /r
***l *^^
.
^*
''ui
-ii
i.
juWl
^
\".
u"
sv>
**
js
J >u
i;
Translation.
my father, mother, and brothers say to me and I

obey them. If my father says 'Give me [some] bread,' I give him
If my brother says to me 'Give me
(i.e. pass to him) bread at once.
All my brothers obey my father and
water,' I give him at once.
mother.
My brothers and I love obedience, and (so) we obey
I
hear what
We
Father and Mother.
from tbemft.e. any wish of
we hear
(listen to) their
Parents
never disobey
theirs).
They
(lit.
contravene) any word
love us very
much because
words and act upon them.
love children
who obey
but the one
them,
disobeys the wish (wishes) of his parents
is
who
beloved by no-one.
People much dislike the boy whose parents do not know what his
actions are (what he
only
my
father
is
doing).
So
far as
and mother but also
my
concerns myself,
teachers.
obey not
143
Lesson 57.
RULES for AGREEMENT

I.
RULE A
attached, in
RULE
ADJECTIVES.
The Adjective agrees with

Number, Gender and Case.
When
of
Noun
is
the
Noun
defined in any way,
Adjective must be defined by the
to
which
its
attached
article.
Her great house
it is
>t
j**^
f*i$
''
The
great house of the king
The mighty Book
The house
of Moses
of the great king
Servants of their gracious Lord

f
people
<?**
of the poor \
a hard one (f.) /
[is]
(In this 6th sentence

a predicate.
2.
"
The condition
But
its
"
hard "
is
r*.if
I^-MI'
-jr
l
'>' U*f
not an attached adjective but
gender agrees with that of the
subject).
Suppose the antecedent of a construct noun has an ordinary

adjective attached to
RULE C
it,
as in the second sentence
above
The Antecedent and Consequent nouns
struct state
must not be separated by any adjective;
desired
qualify
to
the
antecedent
by an
adjective must be placed after the consequent
con-
in
if
it
that
adjective,
it
is
can generally
be distinguished by the vowelling.
The
child's noble
The noble
countenance
*
countenance
child's
cJu *-til *jTJI

*
**
He
dwelt in the peasant's small house
N.B.
This particular sentence might also be construed
house of the small peasant

3-
j&&\
",
but the sense
x 'j
is
"
in the
against that.
Supposing there are two antecedents connected by '"and"

In that case,
mark
"pood" Arabic
this
'
A^
7-îll vlAj (J
Supplementary Rule for old-fashioned
(often disregarded
nowadays)
144
RULE D
Place the
first
antecedent in construction in the
ordinary way, and the second in construction with the pronoun

"it" or
"her",
The mercy and
etc.,
as consequent.
blessing of God.
(The mercy of God and His
the wisdom of God.

God = and His wisdom).
The power and

of
(The power
pupil's books and pens.

(The books of the pupils and their pens).
the child's
"^
book and pen.
>J^
j^^yf
'"^
Jj'
'"*
if
$C>-
(By the book of the child and his pen).

4.
The
By
*4z^
'
blessing)
^j
j-jf
Suppose a Demonstrative Adjective intervenes ?

That is not a barrier, since the Demonstrative is adjudged
to
be in apposition to its Noun; in any case, it retains its place.

Its case-vowel cannot be written, so it is "understood."
He
the son of this king.
is
The business
May one
s^
'*
\\
is
'
great.
of these people are great.
<f
is
no
>.\
j'
^*
difficulty.
He
Ex-:
"*
N^vjjf
.if
*1
^r
antecedent have more than one consequent
that
Yes;
,
of these people
The works
//'/ :
5.
this one, the king).
(lit:
is
the owner of
"
stores
"
and houses.
6.
What
the use of the
is
was
words
*>*
and
originally a substantive,
meaning
"ijood,"
and
jZ>
similarly meant "evil".

They are now very much used as
antecedents of nouns in construction, to mean, respectively,
"
"
"
the-best-of
and the-woist-of." Ex.: The best of creation
"
"
'
j^
ijvl
"*?
*
>
"
The-best-of-speech
kings' speech"
f^xjl
>
*'
j^>-
,\
>*
'
'
>
*y& "The worst Muslim
ilAJI
.*>'++*'.,
pU-1
j ^
Muslim."
7.
'
'jS*
is
How
is
JLCstate,
is
/%-V^^j
similarly placed
but
its
prefix
"un"
from
its
his brother
^>.
as the antecedent of the construct
etymological meaning
"and others") and
he-who leaves
A.^ 4 ^.t
to be distinguished
J\c-
is
is
"other-than,"
(c.f.
local usage corresponds to the
or the prefix used in Logic
j^Ji*J
English
"not-" or "non-."
Is
the
Quran created
'
145
or uncreated
?
A/
7
JA;^
I
<
>^>
_ _
^
X
'*_->
_
The
voice of
my
conscience was unheard.

'
>o <4*.t*
(^
8.
But
why
is
marked with
JV.P-
Because the predicate of
mansub (24:9)
in
*".
<-
the sisters of
found that he
found him non-useful
jfc'
is
(for this
all
is
always
/4
non-useful
(useless).
falls,
j\fr
(IjJu)
'
Uili j*te[~<*
l
ti^s
t%
^ti
3.
Rivers of living water will flow from him.
-*
in L. 66).
5.
God is un-create, but man is a created

The student was non-industrious (was
6.
The
7.
Upon you be peace and the mercy and blessing of God.
king's speech
is
o\
(jui
The Lord is King (Emperor) of land and sea.

Wine is the mother of vices (Broken PI. explained
4.
always Genitive of
2.
1.
(V
JO
4^
other words the action of kdna
was useful
is
^_->
Construct State) but upon the antecedent

assistant
'
>-
a fat-ha in the last sentence
jl$" (or
not upon the consequent at
My
*n
J^-4vy^
JJ*'
I/
"
"
T?
the king of
[all]
[being].
not industrious).
speech.
576.
00
>"
\
>
(0
/. \
;j'ij3if2)V (o
if
'
Xvy, f iji
'cii'Ji
(v)
146
READING EXERCISE.
Ex. 57 c.
o.
^ S '*
.->
^^
(x
L:*^
jti'y
^'
5i'jf diir
i5-îî"i
jj
J^1
'
"
^ ^
*CVI A^t
jLiil Jl 4*33 -L>-^*:j
*
*
^
Ai.SJi^
*"
"'
Lis:)f
XL 1^.51 jf j f^
^ %^33 v^
^
<
^**
dlL"
j ^jjf
V*2s
JU.I dJUi
LKlf Js fJi.ijf
"""
;.
*"
**
jJil
57c/.
ve.ry literal translation :
There was with Halim (He had) a nice faithful dog [whicV] (I) the son-ofAnd he used-to-send him
his-brother (his nephew) had given to him.
constantly to the market to buy (2) bread so the dog goes (3) and comes;
Then in one of the days (One day)

with (brings) the bread in a basket.
Halim wrote a paper to the baker and put it in the basket. So the dog took
that basket in his mouth and went to the baker, who took the basket from
his
mouth and put the new bread
to
the
him.
in
it.
And
while the dog was returning
(4)
house of his master, another dog saw (5) him and walked with
Then that dog smelt the bread, so he took from the basket one loaf.
So the
first dog sprang upon him, and all the dogs that were in the street
heard him, and attacked him, and ate all the bread that [was] in that basket.
When the dog saw (6) that, he took his empty basket and returned to the
house of his angry master.
Grammatical Notes
(I)
N.B.
The
Relative of an INDEFINITE noun
alladhi contains the article

.e.
continuous action.
see"
is
a weak verb.
yowels from
this
'
Ex. 560.
is
not written,
probably because
Suhjunct:
(3)
(4) Pres. partic, predicate of kdtm.
(5)
(I
f.
(3).
(2)
In the Present,
and
(6)
"To
have purposely omitted a few of the unimportant
School Reader." Story).
147
Lesson 58.
1.
iu*)l
Adjective Assimilated to the Participle.

It
means
that,
so long as the verb
is
What
quite logical to say that the Active Participle
one-doiny, and
is,
therefore,
verb
is
"to-be so
and
so,"
mean
li
Jc-
it
is
represents
quite rightly called the Active,
rather than "Present," Participle; but

it
does this
a transitive one,
is
Active Participle for "one-doing".
little
if
the
meaning of the
far-fetched to use the
We
therefore, use
other form for the adjective from such verbs,
but the
some
Arab
Grammarians fee) that there is some similarity between

One-who-is and One-who-does, hence "Assimilated" Adj.
2.
Give some examples from the Intransitive Verb

Meaning.
one-generous, generous
Adjective.
Meaning.
Ui
Verb.
148
(b) *Cil
*%*
taking
entirely used for
and
for its Feminine,
words representing colour or
Plural,
J*i
is
defect.
lame
>.
.,
dumb
E,
one-eyed
cross-eyed
deaf
blind
Taking the form
(c)
Its
Feminine takes
thirsty
hungry
Do
not spend
and not very

^ ^
*}
much time upon j^\i

The
important now.
as
it
fact
rather intricate,
is,
it
is
sometimes
j}Ut with tan win damma, and,
in
that case (only), takes
o-^^
feminine with
5.
is
4J^J
(But in
coll:
Are there any miscellaneous examples

Yes; any adjective, from a
'i""
iJ^.J
is
usual).
triliteral verb,
which happens
to
take a form other than that of the regular Active or Passive

Participle (but with similar meaning)
^
elderly
good
dead
wounded
victim
is
classified here.
--
6.
It is
149
not possible to form a

Jfr
IA!
^\
ii -*
J>U means
Yes and
;
Ou
from
o -s
for
&
^^
"dying," but J^ : and
example
mean "dead".
'
IM
Similarly Jf\><?
means "pressing closely" but
In other words, the participle (N. of
*& "narrow".
Agent) describes temporary
action, but the assimilated adjective denotes
permanent
state.
Exercise 58a.
When we
went out of our house, we saw two blind men
in the
us, shouting and saying,

The merciful shall be shewn mercy."
road, and they immediately followed

"
'Have mercy on us for

We said to them ( told them
(
great city, which

(
that
5/:8) the whole of the blind, deaf,
starving
them
and the
is
full
(grievous) to
them
[whyl there
thirsty,
as
no number
is
in
for the
this
hungry
33:4
ah well
(in
any
"
you are
Sir,
case),
'God
"
Exercise 58b.
J* ^jcil f;>
juf
^m
"
>
X9
&- j ;>
^*
p>
*'
\/
j ^^D J ^
\'*
(G:J)
Gl
'&,
&,.>
lU
V JT Af JL Yj^ u ^ V3 f
,
>))
The
'
f.
usual phrase to dismiss a beggar.
"
to
But the matter was great
eyes) and they said,
(in their
neither generous nor noble
generous*
impossible to assist
is
lame and others
of them; while
they are innumerable).
(i. e.
it
I'j
is
150
Lesson 59.
NOUN OF SUPERIORITY.
How
1.
The
a
the Comparative denoted
is
adjective being a noun,
noun;
it
is
called the
its
"Noun
comparative form
is
naturally
Uk'd
of Superiority"
For the Superlative see 8
Does the Noun
2.
Yes;
derived from
are alike they coalesce,

is
etc.
that
to say,
is
before the
the rest as above, discarding

If
the second
and
and we use a shadda;
thrown back on to the
first
in that
great
mightier, greater
mighty, great
more
distinguished, virtuous
7C
ugly
more
glorious
glorious
more
intense
intense
sweeter
sweet
In the last
reverting to
Can we
case
good, beautiful
beautiful
uglier
any
radical.
greater
virtuous, distinguished
first
third radicals
learned
more
from adjectives which have been
more learned
(better)
3.
and vowel
letters of prolongation,
the fatha
Jv
triliteral verbs,
radical, prefix
below.
of Superiority take any special form
formed upon
it is
II
L\
r
example the w;aw undergoes a

(^
which can carry no vowel
say, in Arabic, "sweeter
"
permutation,"
itself.
than"
"
Yes; we translate "than" by ^^j*

"
sweeter than honey.
The
and say
?
"
l^c-
.>
L>
*
|
'
preposition min governs the following
noun
or a single kasra
4.
with tanwin kasra
in the oblique case,
How
J~ Jl
if
has the definite
if
has tanwin,
J~
article.
"
than
would you say "redder, or whiter,
X
^
'
we have
Since
learned a form J*5
physical defect,
it
qualities are already on the
Take some such word
so
as
we must adopt
J^Z*
"
and then say
a dif-
or intense
strony,
"*
jji
comparative
its
two
""*
Ui
form
>**
and form
of colour or
clear that adjectives denoting these
is
ferent plan.
as a form
more intense
in the matter of- redness.

-
5.
how can we condense that long phrase ?

Into one word. The mas. dar (verbal noun, or noun
But
used with tanwin fatha
is
[6.
adverbially) to express this.
(i.e.
redder
stronger as-to-redness
whiter
more as-to-whiteness
deafer
intenser as-to-deafness
Can
of action L:68)
>'
li'l
from Derived Verbs
the comparative be formed
*"*
Theoretically, no
We
useful."
from
this
For example SU1
learn
word
is
is
the 4th Conj.
"
to
Lesson 77 that the V.N. of Conj
in
Then
5>lil
the phrase
"
He
l^JL*
(&*
or) ioU\
As
this
rule
completely disregarded
matter of
fact,
modern Arabic, and one
is
>
This
Also
"
is
more useful than
Then they
^9
"
that
(the hearts)
^
>^ ^
in-hardness." S^-J i^
^^
15*
di'S
[are]
<f;Ui-
^y
It is
"
t
interesting to note that in English
than her," because her

6
is
^JM
less
"\
U*
juil
"
^^
69).
^
I
].
say "than she [is]" but, in Arabic
Oblique case governed by the preposition min.

important, and may be passed over for the, present, if desired,
is
in
is
Al-Qur'an 2
similarly to
we
/*
like stones, or stronger
x-^'
To-day, people would say
^->
commonest phrases
of the
IV
more useful
is
than she*,"-becomes
a
be
7.
the form
Is
invariable
^*i
Yes; when
e
Thus even
'
""
(j-
J*>
'.
-XI*
?>-' ;
f j*
'
How, otherwise
^Jk*
may be made by
"Mohammed
^J+'g-
might vary
to
according
placing the form
Noun"
in Plural, as
the-best-of-men
[is]
gender,
A.JJ
thus,
and
is
way
this
9.
my
greatest of
"The Prime
"
10.
He
.,>
what
In a word,
prefix the definite article to
11.
Can
(a)
this
It
It
is
jVjaJ^H
Jl>-
French);
^
Ji ViN
Jtij-î
we
e.g.
Ex:
<!,
J^^l'
-^
^y^ll
the gentlest, or kindest.

*
Ex
give
(Revise 45
*
Broken Plural
j\S ^â>-
>
.-SJ
*
I

JlJ
the
3, 4.
a regular plural,
it
3 d
>'
33).
Revise carefully Lesson 43
quite possible to
JÔ'J..-
j-^^
feminine in ,iA!
the smallest school."
(b)
-
(Qur'an),
^^
major (greatest) premise" (see Ex.

"
(c.f.
">-
its
the
is
vary according to gender and number
forms
* she
and get
J*^l
Ji!
'
the best, or most distinguished
Ijîl
j;*
m construction.
^Ji^î
^.
the best of eatables.
The comparative denned
it is
^JJ>^^^
the superlative
is
\'
'iÔ ^Q
them did it"
Minister attended"
But, in general,
L>-
the use of j\-jTfor ^vjT
is
the chief of the Muslims."
is
>"
>~^
>s>*-s-
oN^
wives.
curious variation
"The
^^
more usual now.
is
prettiest of
JJL*
îi
but this
women. "But we may a/so say ^~i!
the best of
\*%
example
"
tU
"Hind
Hind.
prettier than
as the antecedent to a "Construct

\
than Fatima."
(a girl) is better
Mariam(Marv) was
J^**$
sort of superlative
J^j
we
for the Fern,
iJ&'^JidilXji "Bind
say
can be used,
""
8.
152
it
thus
sometimes takes a
The most distinguished men,"
153
12.
are the main things to remember from this lesson ?

'
x^
means "greater than' and is invariable;
(a) that ^* _A^
What
(b) that the superlative
absolute by defining
it
J!J*
with
V'
is
and
al,
the
this
comparative made
superlative varies
as to gender, etc.
To English
Exercise 59 a.
(r)
(t)
(o)
To Arabic
E'.rem'se o9b.
1.
Honey
2.
What
3.
4.
wf
iui
i
S-
sweeter than sugar.

the best of eatables ?
is
is
In any case (anyhow,

than she.
And Fatima
is
lit.
on every condition)
am
stronger
the-strongest-of-us-all.
7-
stronger than Hind, and gentler (nicer) also.

This is the greatest of the matters mentioned.
[kings.
Alexander (Iskander) the Great was the most glorious of
8.
God
5.
6.
9.
10.
She
is
is
greater.
am more
pleased (glad) now.

This child is more industrious (stronger as-to-industry)
than that one.
I
154
EXAMINATION PAPER
A.
(><>.
Translate to English.
.u
Uft.
uu
fu
1
JU.
(\)
(t)
(o)
(V)
(A)
(^
B.
Translate to Arabic.
1.
When
2.
Who
3.
4.
be peace after
the Caliph
war ?
(or "The Prince
this
(Khalifa)
5.
Salma
We
is
my
first
have been
to
and most beautiful
wife.
many mosques.
8.
The girl went back to ask her brother.

Her brother was. with Abu Zaid.
Q.
Fatima
10.
is
Yes, she
prettier than
is
Mary.
the prettiest of
all
the girls.
Questions.
1.
2.
of the
Believers,") now ?
"He whom thou lovest is sick."
The two princesses, whose abode (mansion) we saw, have
come home.
6.
7.
C.
will there
is
What words are Feminine ?

What is the Rule for Agreement
of Adjectives
155
Lesson
EYE, VOICE
81.
AND EAR.
Memorise the following Scripture verses, one

on, Arabic proverbs and other useful sentences
GJ
j
r
J* J
jut
'k, ^fjf j"i
Later
at a time.
be
will
set.
y o/Jt, y r^j
**
,
dJl^^l'd^C
dU^
4^.3 L'jf
wj
Literal Translation
And
1.
If
as ye wish that
ye remain
my
(c.f.
(or,
the
it is
abide,
yours
(c.f.
UZQ Past Tense after <j[) in Me, and

in you,
4.
The LORD shine *whh His
bless
As
6.
lift
for
24).
face upon thee and be-merciful-
up His face upon
me and my house
:
and grant thee
thee,
we
will
serve
15).
As thy days, thy
(26),
(Joshua 24
/.
you and guard you (Numb. 6
(v.25).
The LORD
peace
ye shall (may) ask what ye
John 15:7).
The LORD
5.
people do with you, do ye also
3.
unto-thee
LI
lil
(o)
Luke 6:31).
speech (word) abide
wish and
Uy
(r)
(To be compared with the references given).
with them thus

2.
(\
rest [shall be].
"hollow" verb having middle radical ya.
(Deut. 33
(L. 115).
25).
the
LORD
Lesson 62,
PRIMITIVE AND DERIVED NOUN
'8.
1.
What
One
is
a Primitive
that
is
A>
One which
verbal root.
triliteral
number, the commonest examples are
in
^l~
--
*>.
^>
derived from the usual verbal root;
is
0-
^x-
(j*j>2 to study,
3-
usual
sword (j*^ horse L-*W heart J>; camel J-^ neck.

What is a Derived Noun ?
<
2.
not derived from the
These are but few

A>.^
Noun
How many
we
4-*>X* a place for study,
get
from
a school.
i.e.
kinds of such nouns are derived from the root
There are eleven given below; but not

one root.
e.g.
The first
all
come from
of these
eight are practically in order of importance.
(1)
Noun
of Agent, or Active Participle J^li (Lesson 23).
(2)
Noun
of Object or Passive Participle J^*A* (Lesson
23).
A>^^0^
Noun
(3)
of Place
and Time,
Ul
of "Abundance").
etc. (also
(4)
Noun
of Instrument, on forms
(5)
Noun
of Quality, or Assimilated Adjective (Lesson 58).
(6)
Noun
of Superiority, or Comparative (Lesson 59).
(7)
Noun
of Colour or Defect (Lesson 58
(8)
Noun
of Excess, or Intensive
(9) (10)
and
(li)
Nouns
JUi*
etc.
(Lesson
4b).
Agent (Lesson
of Unity (139
;),
146).
of Species (142
and of Action formed with Mini (See Lesson 68

4.
What
Its
is
the purpose of the
purpose
>
is
to
Noun
show where,
iv
-7
^-^
place
where writing
The
result is generally where, not so often when.
may be
derived from
is
done,
v^JL-3
i.e.
an
(lit.
to write
Farthest West)
is
the
name
Give examples using the form
6)
9).
?
was done;
and shows the
office,
either the place or time of sunsetting,
or Sunset. (But ^>j** for "sunset" is
5.
and Time
e.g.
is
or when, the action

"
''^-'
of Place
63).
more
i.e.
But
either
colloquial)
West,
â^\^J^
of Morocco.
g
"^*A*
vO*
the place ofdoiiir/.
office
store
altar
synagogue, j
conference J
exit
place of killing,
assassination
157
'V'
158
SOME N ON -SOUND VERBS.

(to
be learned now, but studied later in their proper section).

to
to corns
come
to
walk
to will,
to
throw
to
it
(he)
there
was found
is
wish
say
it
was
it
was related
(is)
said
Exercise 62a.
1.
2.
3.
Are you able
With
you) print books
to (can
all ease.
Do you wish books
Some
of
store,
and some are
them are
at
your press
for the school
and some of them for the
for the office
for another place.
me some
them before sunset.
4.
Well; send
5.
Those two books are not with us
6.
The king and queen
7.
When
of
(in stock)
rule in their
will the Presbyterial
Language "Academy?"
now.
kingdom.
Conference gather
(Verb
+*>-*
Conj.
And
VIII
means,
to assemble).
8.
They
sat
down behind
the entrance of the cemetery.
Exercise 62b.
"-^
>
;J 1
JJ
te
.
CJ
J
G
(N)
(*)
ij-i
G<j
(t)
(o)
JU^L'J
the
V> V'il
(A)
159
Lesson 63.
NOUN OF INSTRUMENT
I.
This denotes the instrument or

action
e>5^
is
done.
Now
the most
tool,
by means of which the
common word
which takes the plural i>6 I5s^
primitive noun, not a derived noun.
for knife
but that word
When
it
is
is
is
desired to
derive a noun of instrument from a verb, that can only be done
upon certain forms, which are
UA JUi an
160
5-
What becomes
It
PERMUTATION
essential to the
this
:-
Where
*
7.
to
this rule
will help us to
JL* which forms
etc.)
which
is
In
understand the Hollow Verb
its
Passive in J-J
thrown back one radical and a ya
What
RULE OF
harmonise with the strong vowel."
"\\-
Jjiji
is
great
we again meet with
shall
the
form of the word, and change the other."

amounts to the same as saying
This important rule

-M
with
"Retain that (vowel,
''Change the weak consonant

6.
j jj
of the verb
accordance
in
disappears
most cases
wau
of the
was
(it
said); the kasra
supplied to suit
is
it.
are the three vowels taken by a prefixed mini, to form a
Derived Noun, and how are they distinguished
>
marks
Noun of Agent
Nounof Place or Time, h'omthePrim\tive(Tri\\tera\)*
Noun of Instrument.
To Arabic
,,
Excercise 63a.
1.
Patience
2.
This saw
3.
4.
(or Object) of a Derived Verb, only.
is
is
the key of relief.

useless, haven't
will ask the carpenter for
The
you another with you
another saw.
place (site)of the Vizier's assassination was near the city.
5.
Bring the bellows,
6.
She
left
girl,
and blow the
fire.
her books in the press at the school, but she took
her ruler with her.
Exercise 63b.
To English
r-j^\
^
(Y)
>TfjClLi
^
'
*>
^ri^
J.'^
"x^ "^
'
'
>0-,0
j
*
Â)
Ij
^ L&k
J^ ?*J*
d O^
^0--
cJ^.
-^
But as the Noun of Place from a Derived verb has no separate form,
as the Passive Participle (88
(0
^^^-00-.^^
C rU:J Ij li
>
* on the same form
(>)
jlk;!!
10).
(o)
it
takes
I6i
Lesson 64.
Quadrisyllable Plural
1.
How
in
of
of Place.
"Break the word
quite simple
then the consonant before the
alif,
2.
Noun
do we form the Plural of the Derived Noun learned
Lesson 62
It is
for
JpU*
sukun and the
first
in halves
alif
consonant after the
Give some examples of
takes a fatha instead

alif
this rule.
>
>
"S"
lSv.4
offices
-i"^'
>
libraries
takes kasra.
^Â
7-
v_^>
by inserting an
assemblies
law-courts
sermons
3.
What becomes
-r-
JaPi^*
of the final
in
the second example
dropped, because this plural contains four syllables only,
It is
Ma-ka-ti-bu;
Makatib.
colloquially
additions are dropped out.
name
of Quadrisyllabic
infer that
it is
Thus
all
This plural thus gets
plural,
unnecessary
European
its
from which we can
at
once
used for words which, in the Singular, possess
four (or more) consonants
otherwise we should not have the
material to form four syllables.

4.
But where
is
the tan win
This form of plural takes no tanwin

to
5.
it is
therefore analogous
Proper Names, which are called Imperfectly Declined.
Has
Yes
it
it
anything else
in
common
with Proper
and Oblique both end

defined (either
by
in
affixed
fatha
(c f.
Lesson 52:8)
What form
**
is
is
But when
Pronoun, or by Definite Article)
fully declined.
6.
Names
has only two cases (when Indefinite), so the Accusative
the type for similar examples
the form for such plurals.
it
is
162
7.
How
do we form plurals of Nouns of Instrument
three forms in Lesson 63, the
first
and third form
>
J^;"**
just as the
The one
8.
in
Noun
of Place; exs
will be treated in
"x-
^jL* and
Lesson
65.
Give examples of odd words which take the four-syllable

because they contain four consonants
>G;
the
their plural
>
on form
Of
plural,
163
Exercise
1.
If I
all
had) much money

the schools of the world
had (Had
would
visit
(have visited)
3.
And see all the mosques and lawcourts and libraries.

Do you not wish to visit the printing-presses also
4.
Yes,
2.
5.
wish to
visit the largest presses also.
[Will] you not visit the Alexandria lighthouse

the chief dwellings of that city ?
in
will look into the matter [the day]-after-tomorrow.
6.
7.
Is
more useful than the
the scissors
useful than the scissors

8.
and stay
It is
more
knife, or the knife
said that one of the hotel guests (dwellers in hotels)
some years ago
(since years) used to
throw some jewels and
and they
have now been found under the arches of the old temples.
coins in the Nile [for the children to dive tor]
Exercise 64b.
(<)
M
'
Ci
Ul
-
.-
dll; Jjtli
x
" "
>
1 ; Sf
>
tc.
liiji'i (t)
0^
^ ^^
^0
J j^r j i jj^
j_
"**
-
j,^-
^.^
jU* j 3 jl
u;
JJ
Sunday
64.
**
\
> o
Thursday
Monday
<
>
Friday
Saturday
(o)
* (v)
l^
Vocabulary
"i
Tuesday
ClxLJ
'
*^
Wednesday
(A)
164
Lesson 65.
QUADRISYLLABIC PLURAL.
Form
I.
What happens
to the
A*
etc.
form
if
there
is
a long vowel in
word CAj-
the Sing., as in the
See our Rule of Permut:

tion to a
2.
How
As
do we show the form

except that
in 64,
to suit the vowel,
<_
5).
plough
Change
which
is
?-
the letter of prolonga-
kasra
thus
C^ }\-
we now add
a ya
to
lengthen the 3rd
J^^
Thus
syllable.
3.
(63
But j'Jrv^ has a kasra with
its
mini,
what happens?
Here fatha
See our Rule again
and our plural form has
a fatha;
has to be written, thus
for
wau
We
has no longer any "raison
part of the form, so fatha
is
then observe that the ya
d'etre", since
it
was only substituted
which has now disappeared we,

wau, which also takes fatha
to suit the kasra,
therefore, return to the original

here.
The
changed
ain has a kasra in the type-form, therefore the alif
to
ya
to
be homogeneous to
becomes mawazin
4.
<jo'j>*
it,
is
and the plural of mizan
balances.
Give examples of tabulation of
this
form
in the
Note-Book.
Form
Plural
Singular
^-U.^
a key
a
5.
a balance
Can other words beside
Certainly,
have
plough
the
such as contain
weak
Noun
of Instrument take a plural in
four (or more)
letter after the third
consonant,
consonants and
Examples
165
Exercise 6 da.
1.
(Construe thus
What was
(The word yaum

2.
The
66
"
The
the subject of your sermon last

is
subject
was what
Sunday
my
"
)
Adverbial (Time) Accusative here, therefore takes
subjects of
fatlja).
sermons are always taken from the
Injil (Gospel).
3.
4.
5.
Yes (Quite <=o); but what

which you preached about
are the doctrines
(lit.
in (during) the past
teachings)
weeks
Sometimes, "Christ in the Psalms", for example; and

"
sometimes "Christian Evidences"; and at other times, The
Life and Death of Christ."
But for (Had it not been for) my poverty, 1 would have had
(lit.
there
was
me) many commentaries,
to
for they are very
useful to the preacher.

6.
(Perhaps) Let-us-hope-you will be able to buy them yet

(later) in spite of
7.
your poverty.
On Wednesday morning
shall take
the subject of the
devils, then, in-evening, the subject of the poor-fellows
8-
who
were brought to Jesus and trusted in and worshipped Him.

Then, on Saturday morning, "Ye are more-valuable (better
than
many sparrows."
Exercise 05 b.
jl
jbJJi
Ub
C,l J
Lî
'*y
cUi^p
iy^ jlT" LiU
(\)
>
(r)
L^'Vl'v Si^C
i^j JJ 'JU
I
C.
C<J j
^ê^
o
((
b)
?"
<~?kUii
"j*j*
-i>-
C- U-U"^
*
i
'
Û jVl "A^
?
otr
(y)
I6 7
Lesson 66.
Plural
1.
and
Forms
Are there any nouns of the form

take Quadrisyllabic Plural
Yes, and they act upon

letter of a
plural.
2.
word, change
to
if alif
occurs as the second
wau and form
the four-syllable
(Not geneially used for rational beings).
Some examples
fc#
the Rule:
it
(Active Participle) that
of
Wy
68
^-
4.
How
does the plural form J>
RULE
(weak
the
Feminine Nouns having
letter)
weak
after
letter
in the singular a
immediately after the
Give some examples of
ttU
the second radical, substitute
5-
W originate
'
"^
\o*Ui
alif;
thus
long vowel
hamza
for
we getJ*Ui
169
Lesson 67.
1.
What words
take their plural on the form
This being a tri-syllabic plural,
it
is
used by singulars con-
taining three consonants, which are usually
Note the tanwin

2.
plural
nouns on
Give some tabulated examples.
3<w
this
form are
strong
letters.
fully declined.
5.
Is
170
there a plural form ending in alif with
hamza
Yes, there are two, but both of them end in the long
hamza
written after
it.
L. 13:4).
The
first
Note that the three radicals take no weak

but
*u>
add a long
alif after the three.
is
-OLi
letter
(Used for
alif
(with
c
fu ala,u.
between them
active Qualities).
To English
Exercise 67a.
'
'
'*
t I
Wil
I
<->
V|
(ou>i)
To Arabic
Exercise 67 b.
1.
Let us hope that the Allies will win this war.
2.
Intelligent
men
incline to the Allies; as for the ignorant
ones, they are less inclined to them than the wiseîen.

3.
and newspaper-proprietors incline
Poets, savants,
to
our
Allies.
4.
But for the English ships, the Germans had succeeded
in
the present war.

5.
The poor and
the small are generous
as for the rich
and
great, [they are] miserly.

6.
There-are-found (there are)
in the
land of Egypt very
many
they attend the churches, shops (bars) and other

assemblies (meeting-places).
spies
7.
Christians say that apostles are not always prophets.
Vocabulary
67.
f.
miserly
to incline
Germans (Allemagne) j
person
!A : *
J-j;
^-
JU
Lesson 68.
THE MASDAR
I.
What,
strike"
The
Arabic, corresponds to the English Infinitive "To
in
?
indexes
the third
in
the
past and present tenses, and shows, in English, the words
"To
dictionary
strike." Strictly speaking,
person
singular
however, the English
a transla-
is
not of the past or present tenses, but of a third word
tion
which
always given next, and the meaning of which
is
To
The-act-of-doing (Verbal Noun).
strike
".
Now
word V^r^ takes the tanwin
the
means
verbal noun and
fact, a
and
as a noun,
&
But
why have you given^j**
That
always quoted
is
Arabic
very like
is
Lord"; Arabic
in the
**
Accusative \\j*0
"I
lexicons in the
the
in
Hebrew here
the
Also Luke
"Then they feared
a great fear",
verbal noun called
is this
means
jA*2^ Masdar, which
upon as the "source" of the

are derived from verbs,
4.
Have we
the
Almost so
(look
it
up
the
is
erring
(l)
is
"To
Cognate Object).
it is
looked
and as most Arabic mouns
the "source
is
>
<-
9 UJac- \3j>- ly Uti
verb,
Grammar
'
of everything.
?
called the "Gerundial Infinitive"
"gerund" partakes of the nature
parsed like a noun, and the Gerundial Infinitive
in infinitive form.
king"=To
II
origin or source, for
English
in Meiklejohn).
gerund
wrong.
in
we have what
of a verb but
is
same
it is
(c.f.
Accusative.
word "waiting" being

" "
#
^
^
3.
waited patiently for the
:cf. "I
waited a waiting",
placed in the Accusative.
What
in
the "absolute," or the adverbial form, and the verbal
is
noun
is,
"the-act-of-striking."
i
I.
is
strike the
err is
king
human,
Exs.
is
in
wrong
to strike
wrong=Striking the king
to forgive
human, the-act-of-forgiving
Masdar would be used
"It is
(l)
is
divine" = The
divine.
each of these cases.
is
act-of-
In Arabic, the
173
--
5.
But
is
the form of the
Masdar always J*i
No, there are over thirty forms,
most important.
6.
What
rnasdar
is
Some
we
will
like <-?>j^
learn a few of the
of the others are quite rare,
used for transitive verbs
0--
I.
U* and this happens to be the most
to strike
common
of
all
masdars.
V.
Jji Verbs denoting movement
or
the lack of
it.
to fall
to enter
to
go out
to
ascend
to
descend
to
be tranquil
to
be silent
to sit
to set (sun)
VI.
3ji comes from J* which
denotes qualities,
-
> >
A
.'***?
'
to
be rough
to
be easy
to
be
>*
to be
to
VII.
be
û*
Jr*
difficult
sweet (water)
cool,
damp
usually denoting qualities,
to
be safe
to
be charming
to
be eloquent
to intercede
7C*a3
175
often used for office, trade, etc.
VIII.
to write (as clerk)
to trade
to
worship (serve)
to
show mercy
to
be plentiful
IX.
X.
to shine
to dissolve
to get excited
8-
Which
I
9.
Is
are the most important
"V* IV
3*i
there a
There
is
J/i VI
masdar
like the
one which
in
Alî VII
Noun
form
of Place
is
"t^
coming but the
coming,
XL W\*JL
w\*AA
it,
but the meaning
is
is
called
"Masdar Mimi."
with
K
u
to
come
to
know
to will,
*>
wish
Note that one or two
These
It
i.e.
'.
to see
10.
like
(Advent) means not the place of
different; for'example
act of
Weak Verbs
will be studied after the
have been introduced above.
Sound verb (Lessons 101130).
II.
1/6
Give examples of the use of the madar, governing
The madar may be used

(a) In
I
an Active sense
was surprised
There
either actively or passively,
l"~
".
at his killing Zeid.
>
^ ^^c-
<L3
lA; j
however an alternative construction,

-
is,
noun!
to place
i.e.,
>
Zeid
with
in genitive
Here
-^
thus:
*3 (his killing) does
"killing
someone"
*^l5
*J
j^
..>
mean
not
"being killed" but
used actively).
(i.e. it is
That he would not order them
-3
vVA-wu
go
to
That he would give them leave

(b) In a
Passive sense
to enter
was surprised
"
>"
Jy>-3Jl;
^>
"
j^
l>
*
I
1-
** ^
at Zeid's
being-beaten
"
^0
>
"
being-eaten is not law- \
except to the priests" /
"Its
ful
12.
DISJUNCTIVE. What does
When
there
any
is
<^\\
^P^
^"
mean
<ll3
fttJ
fil
jvith
"a
'
;
use a Disjunctive
thus llvl
">
his killing /ie?\"
i!
i!
^ Ui
US
o^
$
I*
may
for the latter.
may be used
and
of confusing the pronoun of
possibility
the agent with that of the object, one
Pronoun
Nil
^
*\>}
&3
-^
means
"his killing him;
UG1
Note the Accusative Case.
This disjunctive pronoun
may sometimes be
as in the verse of Sura
~*> ^JG
worship
Jfe,
used for emphasis
"Mee do we serve
"
;
also in
Myself.
Exercise 68a.
Write out and learn the nouns of action given above

are carefully chosen as being in frequent use.
much
time,
If this
they
takes too
learn one-half Qi the examples given on each form.
(Perhaps the most notable feature of

every illustrative
this
Arabic Course
is
the uxabl<>nrxx of
word, which has been deliberately planned by the author.
177
E.wrci&e 68b-
Harun el-Rashid.
T>; Cu ^J^Vj
&*
oil
X
((
di's
"
;LJ j
jiD
^^
^^3;^^-^^
jlS^ 4lJj
j^
""*
-*
iijj
iJll
Jtjp>l
^
-JCkil
îj^j i^tUil
I
^J
-O
^
X
X"
^^
1)
0^
'
^'^jl
=;
^"
x*
Ji^ ^Jl^
^
X-
"*^
UjjL-**Xj
J
X
'
' X-
(The above are "known" words
Exercise 68c.
To Arabic
<>'
revise them).
-*x^
jl5Ci
.^
**
"
AUi
JLC-
e"
o5^'
^ o
jUJL*
>
'J*
-^
""
}>
4>
j*&
**
^rv->-
"
-"
4j
sJl
y\j
**^
U_;<^
\-
Harun al-Rashid was one
of the greatest and most cultured of
greatest in scientific and ordinary knowledge). Also

Baghdad, was the handsomest of the cities of the
East at that time. Al-Rashid himself, who is the one so often
referred to in "Arabian Nights" (lit. 1001 Nights) had a great
share of eloquence and of knowledge of philology; probably he
was the best sultan the Moslems had, for he prohibited vice
and inculcated virtue.
kings
(lit.
his city,
Now
it is
related of this "Prince of Believers" that he took from
poor, and that he bestowed

great blessings upon great and small alike.
the rich to give to the
many
Although there were no schools, presses or daily papers in

those days, as at the present time, yet poets and learned men
(professors) had no difficulty in committing their poetry to
memory, without writing
it
down,
Lesson 89.
USE OF LEXICON.
I.
Which
are the servile letters
The whole
which
What
2.
for
it",
used
are
J^*J L# the meaning of

servile.
weak)
combination
in
l^,
may be
the use of the servile (or
is
They
word
of the letters in the
"Ye asked me
is
letters
with
the
radicals
(strong
which we shall study
letters) of a root to form derived verbs,
from Lesson 72 onwards, and also nouns derived from verbs.

3.
How
can the derived verb be reduced
Take
the
word ^- A ^
'
preliminary alif-hamza, which
Conjugation
5.
IV.,
take
(b)
and what we have
left
is
Take
the Dictionary
and look up the
j and
having found
below
and we ultimately
it,
trace
find
mark of
the
II
IV * JS
and
III
'
I
under Chapter
ii
root > j
to
the
->
do we find the meaning of the derived verb
the
away
the distinguishing
is
How
it
Remove
(he honoured me), (a)
pronoun, with the linking nun.
affixed
4.
to its original radicals
Conjugations
show honour.
Give further examples.

(a)
j***il~)
remove the
root left
"
(b)
a] if
(c)
is
"
Take
servile letters I~> (see
^^ '~~
oy jLlL
from the
rj*-$
to
Here jj comes
centre,
77-
^^j from which
above) and the original
understand.
off,
leaving
j>-$
which
is
then
-j
and
finally the
long
^j ^
"It-was-rolled-away"
away, leaving
and get
off the plural una,
Here only the

quadriliteral
root
comes
meaning
^^0^
"to roll
away", upon the form
bi
(to
be studied
in 96.97)-
*^
>
*>
179-
>j-Ui" Removing the pronoun and the plural sign, but
(d)
keeping the
for this also
ta,
we have
a quadriliteral verb,
is
x-â^
M*
left
which we
disciples" (from
6.
from the lexicon
find
Yes, and then of course (for the time being)
example, the word
removing the j j
which
see
7.
a strong
is
"to
make
a pupil, or disciple).
***;
a servile letter act at other times as a radical
May
for
mean
to
-IV
^y
u-v
and
first
Take
strong.
Here,
they-are-asking-me.
we have
<_
left
C?
to ask,
For another example,
verb.
tri-literal
it is
5 (d).
What
The
(a)
words
the order of the
is
triliteral
root
in the lexicon
placed
is
first,
lexicons
and, in good
such as Hava's or Wortabet's, either of which we recommend,

it
marked by an
is
To
asterisk on the right side.
its left is
always shown the vowelling of the Mudari* and, farther on, the
madar.
to a
(Hava uses two
word being
sorts of asterisks,
specially Syrian).
(b) Possibly there
may be
but different vowelling
another verb with the same radicals
that
would be shown
**
(c)
Then
the
(d) After
II
the
one of which refers
Conjugation
Ji
Noun
of
any); the
(if
I0th Conjugation
participles, or rather,
next.
jj -*
if
any
III,
IV
etc., if
look out
Agent and Noun
used.
for
the
of Object
if
they form specially useful words or phrases.

(e)
Lower down,
the Derived
Nouns may be shown,
for
example
^slSs^ at the foot of ,^1-j

8.
full
fairly
student
from
is
the
dictionary
recommended
for the
elementary
Wortabet's Arabic-English, which can be piocured
American
Mission
Press,
Beirut,
Syria,
American, C.M.S., or Nile Mission Press Book-shops
fuller
and more excellent one
Press, Beirut.
is
Hava's
Most scholars use the
latter.
(S.J.)
It
or
the
at Cairo.
of Catholic
has not been
i8o
New
obtainable (except secondhand) for some years.

I
9.
now obtainable
of Nile Mission Press, Cairo.
the student has no expensive
Please note that
edition,
grammars
to
buy, for the present course, bound up, comprises a complete
Arabic Grammar, including
new and
original Syntax, in
addition to Reader, Exercises, and Examination Papers.
Lane's eight-volume lexicon,
10.
(Williams and Norgate),
or
five
formerly
six
guineas
useful for very old Arabic, such as
is
the Qur'an and Traditions, but quite unnecessary for practical
Some
work.
later
will,
need an
on,
"* "
The
Arabic.
plus carriage)
11.
one
Jesuit
is
For English
'
j'>J
summary
Arabic Dictionary
in
^V"
>
V j*
'
vo
(3
10
of all others.
Arabic Dictionaries, the best
"The Modern'*
is
by Elias Anton, 80 piastre?, and the next best Ab-
Get an Arabic Gospel from Bible Society.
carius (Beirut).
12
from now, assumed that the student can search his own
It i?,
dictionary for
new words.
Exercise 60.
The
may
dictionary
be consulted for help in reading the following exercise,
which may then be re-translated
fuj
->
K$
'
A.'
tl
x*
*",
..
to Arabic.
->
S' <<>>'
'.
O^-
'
^J
V^
*U.*d
^>
I*
U)
'j
'i^~
(JJ\.*A}
"-H^
V'
^ JlJ j
O LJ
i'^
|"|
(J,
i'b
<j
'
^,
'
'l
/V 61
'
LS
V'
^^T-l)
VI
jlff'*S/'
^'\
^
(i**t\
o
\:A
Lijl)
*U
t:
i
r"
Sf
**
^J
.
lUu j^xJI^j
I
^"
.1
o
'
y^jU
Reading Lesson 70,

'ukJI jU'3
if 'ale
usjf
jir Uflfj
jlf ,jjf
J
**
-r*
^"
UA
Û.
oL^JL!
'
IJi
>
u^
*f '
4^-1
C^l>-
(jl
"r*
viJI
Jj
4d^*)
ks
4)
x^
JU1
*^J
>
o.
ju.^
cr TJ^
;'A#
"
^-
Jj
^ Sv
îj 30 ^^: j\; ^ /if
S]
C^
'
'
S>
jCrT jCJi5r^.^rjy
"
J / ^
/r . ;,
^^
4jol
-Y e > "Y
Ji- j jiyj
40)1
IV^
>~+*
^JI
^-'
<-***JI
Ul
**
x*
St.
John
"*
18.
t^J
jl-
tf /it
182
EXAMINATION PAPER
70.
A. To English:
(N)
0)
(r)
J^lll
"
"
?y
-P
jLa
Si
J>.
Sf
Al
"Jii
'Jl Si
(A)
'
(^)
B. To Arabic:
1.
She put the psalm-books
2.
This prize
3.
4.
Another man came
6.
(l)
(2)
*4
my mother
to enter.
following,
&
.
brother, or
Write out the Alphabet in the usual dictionary order.

Give the Singular or Plural and meaning of the
where possible.
my
before him, but one of them only
That he would give them leave
8.
father,
to the castle of the Sultans.
Every man has two ways

is the way of life.
/.
>
my
(can) not strike
These people are poorer than those.

Are poor people better than rich ones
5.
C.
may
one of her boxes.
in
the greatest of all the prizes.
is
'*,*>
.%
<6U^
>>
^
"
AC-
<4
>
If
a Derived Noun, give
/.
^-
^1
'.
(J^
>
>'.
its
root also.
183
Lesson
71.
SOME ORIENTAL PROVERBS.
^.yjji
x o
Jito*J
x ^
o- j.
jUMl
X ^
-.
(\)
105L
(Y)
(r)
(0
()
(v)
(A)
Translation
1.
Patience
3.
The
The
4.
Patience
2.
5.
6.
is
beautiful
man
God is
(/. e.
a virtue).
safety of
[lies,
fear of
the beginning of wisdom.
is
or
is]
in the
keeping of the tongue.
the key of relief.
The intelligent
One thing by
eats to live, the ignorant lives to eat.

[
another] thing
is
remembered
"That
re-
minds me of
7.
8.
9-
Whoso
a story").
findeth.
Note the two Past Tenses after
striveth,
Writing (correspondence) îs half seeing (i, e. half a visit).

Information is not like eye-witness (= "See for one-self")
*
Notes
N.B.
(3) \jr\j is
often used for beginning, or source :î
jb
is
Hollow verb
(JlA^
(7)
Note the past tense with continuous meaning.
(8)
The two masdars
(9)
The word
Masdar
Mirai.
to live.
(5)
is
are those of Conjugation III (Lesson 74).
used for "news".
Learn one proverb a day, but keep up the back ones.
84 r-
Lesson 72,
DERIVED CONJUGATIONS
1.
How many
are there
Derived
There are fourteen

used,
them
2.
Write
Conjugations
found
all
marking
Verb
but the last five of these are infrequenly
in fact, the solitary

is
of the Triliteral
in the
word, or two, illustrating some of
grammar-book but not met with again
the conjugations in
off the
full,
unimportant ones.
Meaning of Example
with one example of each,
185
>
Reckoning
the ordinary simple JjCJ
jugations take consecutive numbers.
study those up to X, but the
All our tables are read Arabic fashion
(.Vote
3.
What
last five
is
making two consonants

""
becomes
in II
the
We
shall systematically
may be
omitted.
right to left).
II. ?
emphasising
of
place
and reaHy
it
Exs.
one.
*
^ ^"^
j~~$
to
break
^~S
"
\
(o
bits
>ual
^
to
cut,
This shadda must be carefully
were written
it
15^
* Hi of
Write
in
Note
to cut to pieces.
enunciated as though
radical,
the Derived Con-
I,
the distinguishing feature of Class
shadda over the middle
to break,
as
r
5
What
difference
is
observable between the Past Tenses of
Comparing with Lesson

ference
6.
is
18, it will
be noticed that the only dif
the presence of the carefully enunciated shadda.
Give (Al-Mudari c ).
>
wS^j
'*)
Here again the shadda makes the only difference, except that
the kaf takes a fatha, and the servile letter a damma.
7.
Write the Jussive
(f jj^l)
and from that deduce the Imperative.
86
Imperative.
X
8.
For further practice,
AC.
teach"'
"/
Past.
Present.
>**
"
Prohibitive.
Do
i;Ju-'
not teach
"
!
Si
Imperative.
Q.
Are the Derived Conjugations much used

Very much so; especially
in Colloquial
Arabic
Exercise 72a.
Yi
r
.X.JX^jl U
A)
"
: ^*
.>,
x,
IjkA^ jl AÂc"
"Go ye
them
and make disciples of
then,
in the
name
nations,
and baptize
of the Father, and of the Son, and of the
Holy Ghost and teach them

:
manded you and
lo,
of the age.
all
Amen".
am
to
observe
with you
all
all
that
have com-
the days unto the
end
Lesson 73.
How
I.
The
do we form
Jpull
.*J
from Conj.
original formula for the Ismul-Fa
cannot apply here
RULE:
(for
il
II. ?
from the
verb
triliteral
where should we place the
alif
?).
any derived conjugation, take the 3rd.
In the case of
Muse. Sing, of al-Mudari c ( Active) and exchange the pronomi.

nal
damma, and
prefix for mini with
in
since
tan win,
*LM
jUiM
Is
^J
revise
,-
is
formed
Lesson 35
quadriliteral since
which
written
a teacher
<UX**
fern.
A<o
).
it
Remember
2,3.
J*
equals
* y
U*
'
that really
Then
the passive
is
J**i
>
Pronounce
of the Imperfect
Pronounce
is
J*i
it
uwi
like
>
the fatha).
OLl**
J*i
UU
The Passive
get
This takes
and
like the triliteral
3.
we
one-bringing-forward, or presenting.
the passive of J**
First
noun. Thus, from
is a
and the regular plurals U>***4
&*
Similarly
one-who-teaches
a dual
JPUJl
replace the end vowel by

M
Tense pjUall
c.
/,
35
noting,
vi
Uui
>t
this
C^
Li
AJ
4.
How
RULE
is
is
v*^ formed from Conj.
II
The Noun of Object of any derived conjugation

formed from the 3rd Masc. Sing, of the Present Passive by
:
188
replacing the
from
that
is
by
we
we do not always wsetheN.
we have
partly because
AI* (=one
N. of O. from
Noun
get
of O.,
i** (one-taught),
e.g.,
formed from Conj. V.
and also
JU*
of agent
put-forward, or
^-U*
a N. A.
learning, or taught)
its
distinguish the
to
"teacher",tt;/ze/i
N.B. For the Plural of such participles, see 45

5.
Is
unvowelled.
3 (b).
Masdar (Noun of Action) of the derived conjugations
the
different
from that of the simple
The Masdar
Quite different.
with
Thus
and the case-vowel by tanwin.
he-is-put-forward,
pJ&
ahea*d. If
-j
the
to
fath:i
first
A^
masdarof
is
the
Â*J
verb
formed by prefixing
is
II.
and inserting
radical
ation before the final radical,
triliteral
of
which gives us
ta
ya of prolong-
V^"
act-of-teaching, or (as
"-'
Thus
the
con-
it is
o^
ventionally used) teaching or doctrine. Similarly
fJS
is
the
act-of-putting-forward, or presentation.
*
A>-
There
is
in
having
to
clarify
js
second form in
As can be
or,
seen,
differs
it
Thus from
instead of ya of prolongation.
<U-*A>
conventionally, to clear up, liquidate
we
î^r
the
clearing,
of
act
or liquidation.
naming.
From
Occasionally
^^
a
to
strong
get
name,
^**-
verb
may
>-
take the second form as in
i>c-î
act of praising
^
it is
6.
much more
generally used for
weak verbs ending
What is specially denoted by Conjugation

(a) An Intensive meaning is often given to
(b)
II
in
ya.
the primitive verb
At other times the factitive meaning (causing to do the
action); (c)
(d)
God, but
Denominative,
i.e.
the verb
Declarative, or Estimative, eg.

lie'',
i. e.
"to speak
to''
to
deny
<JA^>
is
formed from a noun
^Jo
"to declare to
to believe (a statement).
Study the following table before working Exercise
be
*1>
hardly comes under either of the above73-
89
*>
x
\
J
-rt.
TO
T3
o
c
io,
73
-s
Ô
T3
*o
'
T5
O
4-1
S
O
2
"^
TV
- O
T3
M3- \i
v
-?-
>
Ti-M.
c
43
CJ
*-
'.'
+1
00
c
'-^
"^
CD
*-
IQO
Exercise 73a.
(
=il
Sign
UÛ
4 'jj-tfj 'jy&
<j^
'j
(N)
(t)
(r)
U
f
o\a^
(t)
V4
(')
xrf
>..M
Jilt
>*
^
I
*2
U.J
<
Exercise
li>
^c-
<-Li
A)
u^.*,j u^Ssj*
-*
y*
j-X>^>
(A)
(\
73b.
1.
And
2.
And God spoke
3.
That-which
to
those
who
disbelieved, and denied our signs.

to
is in
Moses
speaking
(i.e.
earnestly, or, much).
the heavens and the earth offered praise
God.
4.
That
5-
It
that
is
God sent-down
the scripture in truth.
(He) came with (by) truth and confirmed the sent-ones
(i.e.,
God's messengers).
6.
God
sent
7.
He
8.
It is
GOD,
9.
We
were not able
10.
The
it is
down
the best of conversation, (^the Traditions).
that forms you.
the Creator, the Originator, the

to believe that
Former
(painter).
good-news.
Ministry (Cabinet) issued an official denial of the
rumour
Note
oj' j^l
that the king
Students able
Arabic"
first.
to
had been murdered.
do so should now translate "English
to
But both portions must be done in every case.
Official (adj.)
to issue
Lesson 74.
Conjugation
I,
How
2.
If
It
3.
the
is
III
III.
Conjugation indexed
in the
v^l^ means "he wrote," what
is
the
meaning
of
s^Jo
means "he corresponded with" (someone).
Al-Madi:
\'~"\<^
U> O
5
..
i-j
4.
Lexicon
*~'C-\<^
^Ju O
;o ^ -
^xT b
IT
Al-Mudari of the same
juiJ 15
'
9
1
5.
's'>
>
Al-Amr:
There
verds:
usually no need to write out "the Jussive of "Sound"
is
the
it is
"Verb weak
in its final character"
whose Jussive
will receive special attention).

6.
How
There
do we form J&UH
a
is
the tenses
the sukun
Noun
of
good deal of
J\
from
III ?
similarity
between
the difference being that in
(in the shaclda)
Agent
is
and
in
II
and
III
in all
the stress falls
upon
II
HI upon the long
J^^-* (compare with J*A.
thus
alif.
The
^Jl^*
>
^t
~>.
i"
a correspondent, J^l^- a controversialist,
\">
C-^-,-4
>
-Xc-L^.
7.
What
an assistant.
i$
the
masdar
For the
of
plural,
see 45
3 (b).
debater,
192
There are twojsom? verbs make

o
to
J*U*
but others in
fighting;
ally
we
thus
and
one verb
get
J*^
^'^*
take
<-M
vÛ- takes
may
examples given
madar by
adding
oversight, watching (See also 71:8)
thus
&&*
J^'
to
ht with
fi
contention
>
(p. 194).
takes
JtS
Occasion-
use both masdars, as will be seen from the

-
in
Lesson
75. In the case of
has a conventional meaning of

inter-related,
their
students
its
JU
each masdar
own. Lessons 74 and 75 being
study Lesson 75
before Exercise 74.
JS'.terase 74 B.
(Y)
(o)
(A)
(v)
*
Ou"l5Cj
liP
~
(A)
Exercise 74 A.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
Everyone who contravenes the law is (will be) punished.

Fight (war) a severe fighting (war).
Accompany (f) thy sister to the house.
Bless me. O my father.
Purify me. then I shall be pure.
Assist him, you
(fern, sing.).
No, rather assist him yourself.

I do not understand why you (f.)
correspond wiih this
wicked man. Explain to me.
Why do you associate with him yourself, then ?
193
Lesson 75.
I.
Give the passive of J^li (Refer
Lesson 73
and
c./.
63
5).
>
>
>
to
^
>
2.
Give the passive of xj UaJ

Ub
3.
From
the above, form the
As with
II
so here
Noun
-j
replace
the Noun. This N.O,
is
of Object
by
^l
<jj*iil
and add the tanwin of
not used much, for VI
is
reflexive to
III.
and the same end can be served by using the noun agent of VI.
Ex. of the N.O.
4.
The
a
^ÛcJI
The person addressed.
significations of Conj.
table,
which
will
are best expressed by
Ill
show,
at
the
Sc
me
time,
means
how
of
far the
derived verb differs from the primary verb, and also which of
the
two masdars
ulary
is
used by any individual verb.
has been carefully selected, and
the
The vocab-
derived
verbs
should, therefore, not only be ledgered up, but actually learnt

5.
The grammarians
(a)
Attempt or
tion
give three chief significations:
EffortWe
upon someone;
(b) Prepositional
attempt to perform the primary ac-
this often involves reciprocity.
See exs.
(a).
indirect
object,
by
converting
to
direct
absorbing the preposition, so to speak. See exs.

(c)
Qualitative
showing
(b).
the quality in acting towards some-
one. (This use of III only occurs when the primary verb
denotes a quality. See exs. (c).
6.
In the following table carefully learn the
verb, as
it is
more important than
meaning of
the derived
that of the primary verb.
194
,0
An
interesting case
is
195
"
to bless,
iJjb
^ j.
from
kneel (camel)
to
Exercise 75 A.
1.
Every contravention
2.
They fought
3.
The
will be punished.
a great fight
(Holy War).
was seen coming from the house.
thief
wish to discuss with you the subject of the present war.
4.
5.
Disputing
6.
They watched
is
the source of quarrelling (fighting).
the
army
O mother!
intensely
Assist me,
an intense watching),
7.
Bless me,
8.
The student was punished on-account-of
father!
contra-
a simple
vention.
9
10.
Then he went
This tribe
is
to his father's
house
to ask assistance.
notorious for the quantity
(amount) of
ences and contention (litigation) between
its
differ-
followers.
Exercise 75 B.
jJjj^C*
(Y)
(r)
o^-,
I
o^-j
^-Ai-
'
--
-i
f-J^V* (J ^^>-l>
-^
ij
ô^^ô
jtkj
jJ^â^
a
'
(j
î J
(0
'
^-.-ô^
ibUcJ
(o)
(v)
(A)
\
/
<.,!
-*
^
-
>=, /
'*
^0
-,
lJcl
>^
(
^
f N
IQ6
Lesson 76.
Conjugation IV.
1.
What
The
the distinctive feature of IV.
is
factitive
we
2.
in
prefixed, alif
meaning
the past tense,
to the
which generally gives
verb, though,
example which
in the
shall use, this signification is not so easily perceived.

'
Trace the derivation of

JL*
be
to
I.
means
originally
"Isldm."
may
It
II..
JU*
to
III.
also
"
to
become
mean
and also
to deliver,
make peace
"to "surrender oneself"
modern meaning
local,
*-i
and
safe,
with "peace," while
3.
to salute
JiL
with.
God) hence the
(to
a Muslim."
i. e-,
to
profess
"to surrender up".
Write Al-Madi of Aslama.

1
.%4JU
>
LuLl
4.
Al-Mudari c
o >
>AJ
5-
Al-Amr
o
-f.
LL
6.
What
is
The Rule
noticeable about the vowelling

for
prefix takes
IV Present-Future
damma
while the
is
"The
servile
Ain of the root
pronominal
(in
this
case,
lam) takes kasra".
Rule for IV Imperative
''The
prefixed alif takes
hamza-
fatha (which must be actually written) and the middle radical
has kasra, as
in
the Present-Future.
A~ s
>
8.
As
is
the
before,
Noun
by
/*
and
of course writing tanwin
V
>
l>
A>
possible
Study Lesson 77 before working Exercise

English
^ dU^l ^jTl
,
dlîl
Si
CJ dL, Ij
>
o,
o^3U
> > ~
1.
Evil
2.
Lead
3 (b).
A. and B.
o >*'
^X
{t^^-J
l;Uj;
L^ll
X<1
(Y)
lii
(r)
lf\
^y
ilfi
-. ^
^.^Jll^î
To Arabic
company corrupts good manners
Exercise 76 A.
76,
to 45
r- )
J*i\
>
benefactor
thrown back upon
to be
For the Plural of Derived Participles, refer again
To
,A~.A
*'>
ample a shadda causes the kasra
Exercise 76 B.
thus
a believer; ^^^- a lover. (In the last ex-
tfj*
<j-~^
x
o'
*?
J*-^ an informant, reporter

1
.Xôj
^tS*-.*.*
the 3rd Person, Singular, Present,
*>
u*
IV formed
of
of
>
*>
Muslim
^-.
Agent
we mould it upon
>
-^
replacing
a
Imp
its
learnt now.
may be
How
be studied in Lesson 108 but
will
"to believe",
*1
7.
(A)
,
(V)
(character).
us not into temptation.
am JEHOVAH,
thy God,
who
brought-thee-out from the
land of Egypt.
4.
5.
6.
And
For
His
do good
to
thousands of them-that-love-me.
JEHOVAH will
Name vainly.
Honour thy
father
not acquit him
and thy
who has spoken
mother that thy days may
be long on the earth.

7.
They expelled
with
the informant, but did not punish him.
198
Lesson 77.
I.
To form
the Passive of
IV
what must we remember
Past,
i.
That
formed as
quadriliteral verb, therefore
s r eally a
in 35
its
passive
3.
f>
,4'*
is
Write the Passive of the Present-Future of
IV,
O
3.
Form
the Passive Participle (N.O.) from the Pres. Future Passive.
Replace the
by -
servile ya
honoured; from J^J'
How
is
Masdar formed
the
fj^J
comes
to send,
^*a* reformed;
missionary;
4.
thus from
*U
J-*
we
one
get
sent,
rJ^
^.e.,
raised.
IX andX
forming the Masdar

from the 3rd Masc. Past by inserting a long alif between
Conj, IV. agrees with VII, VIII,
its
ain
and
with kasra
lam, and vowelling the preliminary alif-hamza

<>'-<>
^ "o
^ -.
^ -S^
thusJUsi fÛ
jlw^-l
its
A5
5.
How
By
can
in
this
this rule
fr
be easily remembered
^4//
forms
(VII,
**
etc.)
which
in
the Preterite
begin with a supplied hamza form their Noun of Action by

inserting a long alif before the last radical.
6.
What must
It
a harnzat-qaf'a,
is
write
7.
But
be remembered about the hamza of IV.
if
uL>.!
^^
NOT
wasla.
but always Ul~>-|
Therefore we can never

*'
c"
the verb already has an alif as in
he raised up"?
199
In that case,
A>^
<
lit
raising
as "compensation" for the second alif -JExs

*- V
add
,
dwelling:
i>-ljl
(This will be studied under the
What
This
giving of rest:
Hollow Verb
are the chief significations of this
is,
form
tfU|
in
'
killing.
Lesson
117).
"par excellence", the factitive or causative conjugation
(making-to-do,
causing-to-be, etc.)
but those under (b) are
from Nouns and have various significations: the
commonly used
leaving plenty of
Meaning
of
IV
to
mean
room
"to
become".
for fresh examples.
Copy
last
and
two are
learn,
200
EXERCISE
"
77.
>
rfj'{ i-l
evc'ry day,
was
in the habit of
my
(used to send)
> "
"
Jb"
Said one of the
sending
servant,
polite-ones,
<u*
And on one
he brought
with him,
of the
to the native stores
which are
in the market.
days
had reformed some
that one of the
of the sinners,
beneficent,
And
the two
[informed
another per-
me
son.
for fighting.
[those]
who had been punished,
in
;
our city,
x O
>0
c>J-iJlr
They-said:
And
"Possible"
is
the reform of
sinners
By taking them out

the evil company,
They
of
possible
said,
said,
said
to
them.
''How
is
that"?.
0,0
And by sending-them- And which
f ar
from
Where they
be
will
Which corrupted
will
them.
destroy them
their friends,
And by
o-
putting
them
And
into
their lovers,
the "Reformatory"
iJI^
"May God
bless the benefactor".
said
under observation.
2or
Lesson 78.
TABLE OF CONJS I- IV.
I.
There
amount
a certain
is
and IV marking these

notice, later, that V.
features of similarity,
We
of similarity
between Conjs.
We
by themselves.
off as a class
II., III.,
shall
and VI. form another class having many

and
VII., VIII.,
and X. form another.
Forms
give the table (or Paradigm) of
To be
IV.
I.
copied and studied.
PAKHCIPLES
Masdar
PRESENT-PUT.
PAST
Passive Active.
Passive Act.
No.
Imper.
Passive Active
>
.
A>,
etc.
^
JA 3-
A>
i
UA>
\JU
'u
w
iJV
II.
III.
-
l.il
2.
Ul 'Ul
>AJM
Here are examples worked
IV.
To be memorised.
out.
3.
These
details are
all
that are needed
numbers are easily formed
in
the other persons and
accordance with the usual rules
(already learnt).
This table
is
Exercise 78
B.
one
To Arabic:
to
be really well learnt, not merely "noted".
A. Translate
to
English
One-honouring; writing; praise; separate!;
he-was-honoured
one-praising
honour
honoured honour.
;
-202
Lesson 79.
READING EXERCISE
(from
II.)
0*
-^
x*
came-to-the-door-of-a-man
of-the-rich-of-Isfohan
and said to
Vol.
"Magani-1-Adab"
his servant
that a beggar
And-asked some-thing
And-the-man-heard-him
It is said
'
for God.''
JU rb
t"
\>
and Jewel,
say to Ruby,
to say to Jewel
Amber,
tell
j
el
> o .-
O Mubarak
and Diamond
and Turquoise,
tell
e
,.
"God open upon
thee.'
'
".1
and Ruby say to Diamond,
urquoise,
j;
J
J*L
y,
IJÎ
and Coral say
>'
**
Jî jC>
tell
to this beggar,
Coral,
I.TJ
So he raised
And
MikaiJ
his
two hands
to Mikail
to
heaven
he says
And heard him
the asker,
Say
"*l
*t
J^^ Jj
Say
to IsrfifTl
And
this miser.
tc-the-state-of-his-way.
Kikail
that he
And
to Gabrfiil
-K
1
;>
Dirdail say to Kikail
visit,
and the beggar went
Lord,
And
say to Dirdail
Israfil tell 'Israil,
The merchant was ashamed,
THE BEGGAR AND THE
MISER.
Translation of Lesson 79.

I.
It is
rich
said that a beggar 'came to the door of a man, one of the
men
of Isfahan,
and asked something, "For God's sake."
The man heard him, and
Amber
tell
Jewel to
to tell
Turquoise to
tell
Ruby
to tell
"May God bestow
Coral to say to this beggar:
tell
"O Mubarak,
Diamond to tell
said to his servant,
(goods) upon thee."
But the beggar heard him, so he raised his hands to heaven
and said
"O
Kikail to
tell
Lord,
Gabriel to
tell
Israfil to tell
tell
merchant was thus put
Mikail to
tell
tell
Dirdail to
lzrail to visit this miser".
The
shame and the beggar went on
to
his way.
2.
NOTES.
-*
(1)
After jJ>
is
used the particle
these particles causes the subject to be

5
<
but
either
of
JÂ!*
'
a diptote (Lesson 52:6-8),
(2)
"Isfahan
(3)
The phrase
(4)
"Mubarak" has no tanwin
(5)
The
is
"for God's sake"

;
is
common
it is
in the East.
defined because "vocative"
made up the names of imaginary

.These useful names of precious stones may, or
miser, of course,
servants.
may
o[ not
not,
be learnt just now.

\
(6)
"Turquoise"
a corruption of the
is
word
fairuz, possibly
through the Turkish.

(7)
"May God bestow upon

j
(8)
(9)
(10)
thee," means, "I myself cannot".
>
^>j
ij
is
Quranic abbreviation of
Gabriel, Mikail
etc.,
The beggar quoted
^.j
my
Lord.
are diptotes.
the two intermediate
names
to
rhyme
with "miser", but the last two are the actual names of the
Moslem "Angels
3.
MB.
All
of Death".
The
curse
was thus
Reading Exercises must be pronounced
memorise short (complete) exercises
if
bad one.
aloud.
possible.
Also,
204
EXAMINATION PAPER
A.
To English
80.
*'
.
jj^cî
(N)
,-0
(Y)
(r)
"*
I-*
>US
x^
^.
To Arabic
-^!y
-\
(o)
>
(A)
1.
Lead me not
2.
We
3.
"I
4.
(Write out) the Third
5.
Ask, from the carpenter, the keys of the trunks.
6.
7.
The
8.
9.
"And teach them
10.
^*
into temptation.
can do this deed, but with
do good
to
difficulty.
thousands of them that love me."
Commandment
in full.
put the commentary-books in one of
my
boxes.
very strong now.
allies are
wish to see some dictionaries.
"And
those
who
C. Discuss ten of these
0>
.*
>^-
observe
to
all
that
have commanded
you''
disbelieved, and denied our signs".
words
^^
>
A>^
-
^ o
>
jK^l*
<U.**J
-'
AJ^S^P-
x o
^
x-
^ re
.x
i
A\jj
x
205
Lesson
81.
AND EAR" EXERCISE.
"EYE, VOICE,
"The Lord's Prayer".
>
>
"
^-^
>
e"
""
US".
yV:
*
'
>
'
Urf-
^JLlI
>i j
C5". uj;s Gi
-
-,
^0
y<J >.>"J
.
->
'
-9
'
^0-
>
UUtxT
ô
VJ1 u
VS
^ ^>s *
- o>
UJI OvJJ
^>
--
^
(J ^
JVOT ^^
7
(1)
cJ
from
is
thrown upon the
when
alif (see
54
in
2).
only when in construction,

:: /o" r
'Vx
^-^-b This will
Accusative^' -^-^ v not
if >
u^**J
(3)
OCJ
Lesson
(5)
^-iUJS
70
(6)
Imp. of
^ ^)0
Jb^Jl j
^>
Sî!
(j>ej
Conj.
0*0
j dllj
Jl
(Lesson
not used elsewhere.
is
^0
(7)
jo
Jussive of
is
"
come
in Less.
180.
to
come" (Weak Final
"
^-
is
placed in the
124),
>
-^_J
the Jussive of the verb
Radical
(4)
is
the Jussive of Conj. V. (Lesson 82).
is
is
it
construction, the accent
vocative,
(2)
to distinguish
(Heavenly) Father,"
(without madda) but
<*-->'
The
"
used, alone, for
is
11.
116).
See Diet.
Lesson 127
3.
For case of these nouns, see page
89.
Lesson 82.
Conjugation V.
of
I.
to talk, to speak".
of 'l<2;j
2.
"he talks".
3.
4.
What
is
specially noticeable iu 2 and 3
Previously
marked by
we have found
5.
^. \
thus
4
What
The
fatha except, of
is
Conjugation VI.
usual, take the 3rd Sing, of the

yy
6.
(c.f.
vowel
the verb maksur, or
in
Lesson
84).
from
Form
As
the *ain of
kasra, but here each
course, the case-vowel,
is
^-O U^
noticeable here
fact that the
radical
*''1'}
a speaker.;
a learner;
(c.f.
Noun
Mudari c tense and substitute
a polite person; J>,
remembering.
of
Conjugation
/Jj& one-advancing(leader)
Agent takes
VI.),
a kasra
under
its
middle
even though both Pres.-Fut. and
Imperative take fatha.

7.
Is
the Passive of V. used
Not very often
e.g.
we do
not say
because we use J** it-was-said
'-li^'XSs*_j
Jvi
it is
"
it
said.
was spoken",
20/
We
can, however, find an
whence J*^y
He
example:
in
example
to
^Jy
cause to die,
i*"
tuwuffi,
he died (the usual written word). Another
studied medicine
'
The Passive
t**
3**-
of
is
gli*)
Note the vo welling.
**
science of
The
^*>
-^*'*
medicine was studied s-JJ

thus written
JtaM
Self -Test 82.

(l)
What
is
the point in the vowelling of the Present
of Conjugation V. that students usually mistake (82

.
(2)
Conjugate
f&^
"he advances" (82
Exercise 82 B.
^
"
^?)
Of,
""
t
'"> s^
^ d } ^,
*'-*'*
C
&-\
^'- L^-V^
S
^^^.o^
^ /-"^""
a
'
*X
( N )
/^\
(Y)
^-
^ ^ÎxAd
4).
2).
"^
Tense
tf
y*
(r)
Sl
rx
^\
'UiM
^
v
(t)
/
'
s'
-^^^^
..^
10
1
"
^4
(0)
Exercise 82 A.
(1)
"Then,
when thou
causedst-me-to-die,
watcher against them".

(2)
"And, whosoever
whosoever
is
(3)
is
is
just,
sanctified let
the
filthy, let
him be
let
him be
him
defile himself still,
justified
sanctified
still".
still,
and
and whosoever
(Rev. 22
ll).
"The Lord Jehovah (GOD) hath given me the tongue of

"The favour
"the
(5)
wast
(Quran "Table Chapter").
the learners" (Isaiah 50

(4)
thou
Whoso
first
is
to the
4).
one who precedes" (Arabic Proverb
one gets the
credit").
learns while-small advances when-big. (Lesson 194
will explain
that
apocopating two verbs).
may
act
as
jazmating
particle,
208
Lesson 83.
1.
What
remarkable about Conjugation V.
is
The
fact that the
fixed
ta.
This
type-form
and
is
VIII.,
Also,
II.
usually
There
translated
but with a pre-
many
cases, V. acts
this servile ta of
Conjugations
the French "se" in "se laver" to
to
is
II.
primarily, the sign of theReflexive,
itself
and may be compared

wash one -self.
like that of
very important, for in
is
as the Reflexive of
V., VI.,
is
in
Greek a ''Middle Voice" which
by the Reflexive
Meiklejohn and others point out that
"to
do
it
we have
is
oneself ") and

this idea
even
we say "The door opened" = "opened itself".

"it defiled me" we get V.
"I defiled myself";
in English, for
Thus from
and from
self"
2.
=I
II.
II.
"he reminded me", comes V.
remembered.
Give examples of
Meaning
of V.
this
(V.
:
is
said to be
"I
reminded my-
jlU* to
II.)
209
3.
few exawitlcx
Denominative force,
<>f
(c. f.
^*
^ ^
embrace Christianity^*,)"
to
Coiij.
II.)
Christians (Nazarenes)
X"
"
be Arabicized
to
to call oneself prophet,
to
prophesy
to be
4.
vG*
\t'..
named
to take a body,
become incarnate
How
Arabs
is
the
Madar
P r P het
name
_.
Flesh,
of V. formed
we form
As
>>
J~^
body
from the Singular Past, but in this case

usual,
we simply substitute damma for the fatha of the middle radical.
it
'
1T
Thus from
.,
,,
(./&
,,
V^
,,
plr^
Exercise
1.
2.
3.
4.
8-3 a.
we
act of learning
Ji*T
get
^r'-^"
sanctification
"
*iiT
advancement
"
'pS~J
rashness
(For missionaries).
A man came
(forward) to me and informed me that he had

been converted viz, become a Christian.
His conversion took place after the coming of the English
to Egypt.
And after that he made

He says that his wife
great progress in religion.

now suffering from the effect of
is
sickness.
5
God
willing
we
will visit her
and she
shall learn to write, in
one of the schools.

Exercise 83
b.
>.*
>"
"o"
^ o^"i tj U v
,>> ju
S-'
A)
(r)
l:So 'Juri^j
I
( t)
V;.'
^'""
U j/>'
AM
Û j|
(o)
210
Lesson 84.
Conjugation VI.
I.
What do we
That
notice on comparing VI. with
Tense
the Past
III
declined very similarly, the only dif-
is
erence being the prefixed
ta.
a garment,
to
(backwards and forwards).
^^"
y
".
*JL>
^
o
'-
ilk"
US&?
2.
Is
there any distinction between
Present and Imperative
Yes
VI, observable in the
exactly like that between H. and V.
under the middle radical

3.
and
III.
in
III.
becomes
viz.,
that the kasra
a fatha in VI.
Give Al-Mudari*.
f V "
jWU-aJj
I
;rc>
>
c
U(
4.
Al-Amr.
"
"
"
"
If'-
'
"r
5.
Toformlam-ul'fa'iL
Compare
Sr'
*"
lessons 74 and 82, then add

'
the
mim with damma
They two
6.
The
V*
to the 3rd Sing, past as usual.
->
jUdU^.1*
\"*
U*
are being reconciled.
Passive,
(a)
The Past Passive
rule for the Quadriliteral passive
becomes necessarily changed
etc.
etc.
The Present Passive

by substituting
to
_>
for
is
is
on the form
followed (35
3)
J^jiT
but the
The
alif
wau.
etc.
Active
changed from the Present
^ - ">
*
>
thus from l?Ub we get
is
JTUJ3:
From
(c)
".
>
this the substitution of
gives us Jîll
pulled from side to side, reciprocal
Let us continue the table of Lesson

ity
^1
->
c.-oUtl*
7.
ill
between
II., III.
and
IV.
(conversation).
Observe the similar-
78.
PRKSENT-FUT.
PAST
Passive Active
Passive Active
No.
Imper.
Passive Active
thus
and now between V. and VI.
PARTICIPLES
Masdar
V.
VI.
Examples
V.
IT AJU
ir
-7
8.
How
is
rated into the
Examine
meaning of the verb
the sentence
4JO
jj
:>
Lk*> Luk^j -iÎj
^y>
^
literally translated,
take one (some)."

of the
first
It is
"one
not incorpo-
"That we
the other) instead of God."
"That some (one) of us not
reads.
specially to be observed that the case
and second ^JOM
place in the sentence.

other," or,
it
VI.
take not one another (one of us
Very
when
the phrase "one another" written,
Ur
upon
depends
their
respective
But always translate "one

another" by Ja.*
we helped one another

They helped one another
Ja
~-
Thus,
Ua.> tUa*j luc-C*

&
the
or
j>s\^.
**
Uaj
*&*
i-p****.
Note two things
(a)
then
When
(jo*
the reciprocal
meaning
expressed by Conj, VI.
/s
need not be repeated, thus
"They forgot one another"
ss
U^M
l-Ûr
(b) Also, after prepositions, the
word ^k^need not be repeated
"They two went out together"
Hf*j ^
"The men went together"
W*^>
'**
J^-
^>-j>-
Lesson 85.
1.
Give some examples, showing the growth of Conj. VI. from
(We
give the vocabulary in 3rd Sing., but
the subject of the verb must be Dual,
Meaning of VI.
if
the action
is
III.
mutual,
Plu., or Collective).
(b) In
There
How
^JI^Z* *U
do we form the
damma
Substitute
Past),
c.f.
83
77.
idea
of pretending the
to
pretend ignorance.
J*l^
"the leaves
fell
one
days following (successive).

of VI
for fatha of the
middle radical (Singular
4 closely.
' "
the
is
sentence Ex.
C.f. last
of tsequence;
madar
j>
Thus from JMIai we

M
one
also the idea
is
form for the OPTATIVE,
be exalted"!
A still more common
after the other".

3.
this
The example given conveys
action.
(d)
God, we use
May God
153 :'4(c) thus"

(c)
of
speaking
ÛaT
"
"
get j*Ua> demonstrating (or pretending).

M z\*at>
,,
a mutual collision
"
"r
"f
in
sequence
chain of authority
(tradition).
Ur
>lir
4.
(j*
,,
UT mutual deceit(
^tir
,,
Title of
Sura
64).
mutual understanding.
Give examples of the use of VI.

I
kept him
off,
so he kept himself aloof
At the coming of the thief, the

watchman pretended to be blind.
They feigned ignorance

The two mutually
'
>
^V ir^ ^
of the matter
forgot their difference

$.
God, Most High, sent
^.^7 J J
down His book
^ u^
Seven successive days

This
is
J*^
the result of misunderstanding
The Co-operative Society

has opened stores
;^
'
^-^
<J^
1
214
Exercise 85B.
- -^
.*
UJa-JJ (jiJUb\.lJ
>
-A
~
>U3
CiUi
Ja>.
(r)
olVj/l
(r)
4j*
(0
'
-Ull
JJCJJ
sU
&V(Air>.y^
'"
"'
"
".'
Exercise 85 A.
1.
to
English
The two contracting

contract
2.
Arabic
(lit.
(v)
IÛ
(A)
,*-,**
lj^>
first).
parties
came
(attended)
to sign the
conditions of the contract).
Some mutual misunderstanding
occurred between the two
sides (parties).
3.
The two
4.
The
5.
"That
6.
"Be ye reconciled with God"
/.
"And
"Then
sides did not understand one another.
leaves of the tree

is
the
one
after another.
day of mutual deceit" (Qur'an Chap.
64).
the stars of heaven shall fall (successively)".

Peter
sequence"
Q.
fell
(i.e.,
began relating
in order.)
The consecutiveness
(Acts
them
in
information
is
explaining
II
to
4).
(authority) of this
respected (accepted) by the narrators [of traditions].
215
Lesson 86.
I,
What
is
remarkable about Conjugation
formed from
(a)
That
alif
by which
to
(b)
That
the form
it is
it is
by prefixing a nun, also an
Ji
pronounce
it;
which
commonly used
is
the passive, especially in Colloquial.
Write out Al-Madi
2.
VII.
(This
is
instead of
important).
of the Type-form.
UiLu)
UU;
3.
Also
VII. of
's~^->} (Conj.
o
'^}-
"
"^
*^>
4.
Suppose the
first letter
In that case the radical
and
of the primary verb
nun and the
a s//acfc?abe written, (
found
j&\
is
servile
<
(^^.^JNJ
nun?
is
nun would coalesce,

example, but not
a possible
in the classics), just as the ta
JSJ
j~*
C> of
J^SC*
coalesces
'
with the pronominal
with
I)
U^s- and
thus
^
Conjugate
suffix thus;
<j[
i^C- and
with
the
^ thus
6[
of
(
Verily we.
JaSj
to
be cut
(off), in
Al-Mudari c
JBUJ
6.
Can
there be any Imperative to this form
Yes, because in
some
of the verbs the passive
meaning shades
<^
Thus from
off into the active.
spend) we get
216
O^^
to
"
dismiss
to
"
to
(or,
^ ^^
go away, depart. From
$*
"to re-
^--
lease",
we
get
J^>[
From u^-a^ we
to
be
let go, to
depart.
"Go away".
get as Imperative:
^2.)
7-
How
does VII assimilate to IV
In the vowelling of
8.
Q.
Jc-Uil
Take
-.4*1
etc.,
and
V and
from
Al-Mudari (second radical)
pjvJail
and prefix
Give a few examples of the j-Ua* of

In
differ
c.f.
Lesson
Pray without ceasing

It is
78.
UiJ
in
77
5,
insert a long
O
before the final radical, thus
as usual
* -
accordance with the Rule mentioned
alif
VI
Jt*w
--
(cutting-off)
necessary for you to visit

after the pupils leave
me
o
"
The boy was

1
grieved at being
from his father
*j
>-
.r
^
<^
..NJ
/'
Exercise 86a.
juÛc; Ci'Jl^v i^';
(\)
J
tyi
Exercise 86b.
I.
î
(Y)
(Consult Lesson 87.)
The Assembly-of-the Nation (National Parliament) has been
completely divided on account of the split-up of the Cabinet

(Council of Ministers)
and the Party of the "Right" has
become separated from
the
of the Opposition,
and there resulted from
(overturning, revolution).
(immersed)
Government and joined
in the sea at the
2.
the Party
that a great upset
The passenger was plunged
breaking-up of the ship.
217
Lesson 87.
I.
Give a vocabulary of VU. showing the derivation from

Meaning of VII.
I.
4.
The following may be added

Are there any
Yes,
in
We may
Lesson 36 that
now add ^J^
"hoping that"; similar

the
only
'
<0*
to this lesson
really Defective verbs
we learned
Tense.
218
Preterite.
^S*\ " K
j^So j ^c. U
meaning
"*',
'
Have any
"What
the Imperative only
Yes, three
verbs
has
perhaps, in
in
a-Û- JUil
<j-jJ
,^f
<J& j
Defective Verbs.
is this
to
%J
only the
the
This
"May God
sense
also
likely to be."
.'(e.g.,
the coffee)
** *
and
f%i*
come
Plural
of
has
heal him."
OU give or bring
Past
These may be regularly declined thus
Lesson 88.
Conjugation VIII.
I.
UUil
2.
How
does
VIII. differ
from
(a) In VII. the servile letter
VIL
(b) In
is
preceded the
it
placed between the
^^
was nun
radical
first
in VIII.
and second
it is ta.
in VIII. the servile letter
radicals.
"
"
3.
first
VII.
"
\
Conjugate ^>^_I*J
to think.
^0 ^
aj!
tense of
*}*$
x-0
Form
As
JfrU)
with
II., III.
from
etc.
take the Imperfect Tense, remove the servile
>
letter
7.
Can
and
VIII.
s-
he works
to abstain.
using
5.
6.
.*I^1
prefix
Js"*? V'->
J"-^
* thus ^Sx-lA>*
there be a Passive to VIII
^"
Yes, to some verbs, not
all.
>
'"
*-*-^
borne,
it
is
possible,
220
8.
Can
a preposition be used with VIII. as with
Sometimes a preposition materially aids

tion
of
with
Passive, just as
its
I. ?
forma-
VIII. in the
(Revise here 39
I.
6 on
Prepositional Verbs, also learn Vocabulary 39; then see
Top
of page 103, and revise the note on the Passive of Prepositional

--,
.,
Thus
Verb).
J>II*
*Uc-
"It
was abstained from"

^
The use
"She
is
of
it
(will be)
(lit
4-
.<,
be begun l^JUjC**
will
"
means, "I abstained from
l>
then
it;
was abstained from
-ê
\-&^ Similarly
it)
o
.-
x-
L^-i
^S^-la^
thought about"
J>
the
Passive
>
*.**
\"\
I
^*jt.J
formed
?
""
Take
shewn
in
^
^
^&
.
For the use of
a preposition
This matter
looked-into
is
prefix p
-,
possible of occurrence.
and
7
-
thus
J*^
>
*1I*J
I
I
thing abstained from".
'ihe
with Passive Participle compare
Those borne-testimony- to
t
The One worshipped (bowed-to)

'
10.
trusted
Form j* J*ail
Turn back
and X.
in
'*o
>..
woman
The
Uli
of
\~<
to
in
L*I^J
tion before the
its
How
is
the
madar by
of Place
Same measure
inserting an alif of prolonga-
this applies
is
Form
(b)
Write
Js-UH
*J
f-jlii'
of
^'
(63
/,
from
and Jîll
^-l
(88:4).
footnote.)
Derived
alif-kasra.
formed from
as Jj^l'
^Tiil
to those
sounded by
Self -Test 88.

(a)
jL-o.I*.4
"IV. agrees with VII, VIII, IX.
final radical"
Noun
A^Xc-
Conjugations whose Past Tense

11.
o,^^"%
Relied on
Lesson 77': 4
forming
4*11
"
'
221
Exercise
88.
"'
'r
r.
*,v
U 3;b
o-.v
i,
;_
o
<
>
jlT'ol
(r)
l^'i 0>
()
>
UU' '^
(v)
ii jl j
Exercise
88.
V^'^X-^
have abstained from intoxicating drink (wine) and smoke,

"
a period of two years.
Smoking = j^-dl ^>/-> or u~>d\
1.
2.
"We
were [in the habit of] working with trouble and
travail night
3.
L.oJL.15CJ"i
"If there
and day."
be anyone
who does
not wish to work, then
let
him
also not eat."

4.
''Abstain from every likeness (appearance) of evil."
5.
"That they abstain from the defilements of
idols."
7.
"The sleep of the worker is sweet."

".., and commanding (pi.) that foods-be-abstained-from."
"Then
6.
let
all
the perfect ones of ns think this,
thought (think) a thing to the contrary then

this also to
9.
Verily we
notice).
God
and
if
ye
shall reveal
you."
are God's
and unto Him do we return (Obituary
Lesson 89.
1.
What
are the chief significations of verbs in VIII.
(a) VIII. is really the Reflexive
(b)
to
Sometimes the meaning
of I
is
"to do
it
for one's self."
Reciprocal like VI.
to
do
it
one another.")
Occasionally the Reflexive meaning passes into

especially with verbs that do not take Conj. VII.
(c)
2.
These significations are

(a) to
write one's
(f.(j.
name
subscription
list)
ilie
Passive,
classified in the following table
Changes
223
the
in
of VIII.
3.
Explain the form of C-Û*

If
the
to be agitated
radical of the original verb be
first
where
is
the
or
\?
__
(which are
very broad consonants), the thin
all
of
)O
Mil
becomes
is
This
I?.
written, Ex.
may
to
5 \?\
unite with the
be driven
occasionally happens with
Or
4.
Explain
to
?-5j\
The same coalescence
as in
u* and L may remain
the
off.
of the verb, and ia
J*
distinct, as >.xk^l to collide.
throng together (men).
If
or
5.
the
first
This
as
radical be
may
;>
first
the servile
^>ol
radical be
i.
Explain
Look
of
"Uisl
first
is
radical
or
changed
if
that be
to
;>
it
vl>
and forms C> or
as
"^Jl
^~
ô^ (89
Words
under
be stored up.
to
unites with
s>
or j the
unite (coalesce) with the
yol^ or
Suppose the
Then
:>
4).
Difficult to
2.
Explain
Find.
(89
3).
To Arabic
Exercise SO A.
1.
These goods are inflammable
2.
We
work
What
4.
The
is
(liable to catch
for the extension of the
Coptic Church
3.
224
prices of
God
of
in the
(Nation).
that prevents
it
Kingdom
fire).
all
women's work
war time
in
eatables and drinkables have risen, on
account of the war.

5.
6.
What do you think will be

Do not ask the-like-of this
the result of the present
war
knows
question, because no-one
that but (except) God.

/,
Pay no
attention to that
because he only pretends
person
being-religious.
8.
By examination
9.
man
(trial)
is
consider (think reckon) that
judgments and therefore
To English
Exercise 89 B.
honoured or degraded.
girl to
(rash) in her
be hasty
do not depend upon what she says.
J*
4.0,
:.v
zil
>1 Jx-j oG /^jij oSfjf ttl

^1
'
vi dii's
jfiil,
(\)
'
LS >iki
Sf
ji^jl
^;V
c'
0)
jCJ! c.'^
il*
ill dl'i
^,
Jl
C.
(r)
jl,
(0
tfjji
o>ir
Si
(i)
Si
(v)
(A)
i
N.B.
ft
i^
xjj.
ft i
is
Su t.isC.
from
means "man,"
its
'ij&l
fern.
IV.
ol'Jl
to
insult or
and
indef.
degrade;
^l
fern,
\ .J
'
225
EXAMINATION PAPER
A
Translate to Arabic
90.
1.
Have you any goods
2.
"Let not your hearts be agitated, ye believe in God, then
in
your stores that are liable to explode
believe in me,"
was wishing
to
be present with you to-day.
3.
4.
The enemy's army was defeated
5.
Be patient and wait
6.
It is
7.
do not think we have any inflammable goods
8.
do not know what were the subjects of his sermons
9.
in the
What was
for patience
a virtue (handsome).
is
has become a Mohammedan.
woman
said that this
Sunday
yesterday.
at present.
last
Coptic Church.
the subject of Friday's
B. Translate to English
Khutba
in the
mosque
0)
(r)
'
'*,
JO!
JUi
^f
.LU
I
C-
Answer these questions
A
"
**
(o)
IS.)
^
U^ j>^
I
(v)
i
j^
/,\
(A)
1.
Which
is
2.
Which
chiefly expresses the Passive
3.
Which
for Reciprocity
the chief -Derived
Form
Give
for expressing Intensity

?
illustrations.
226
Lesson
91.
EYE, VOICE, & EAR.

Lesson 41, learned selections from the Commandments, the student
Having,
now given the whole section, Exodus 20 1-17 as an optional memory exercise.
in
is
I'l
WI
jjLl
iiUj
,l:)
^ O.^l
a , ^^> V ^ j!
x+3-
l^
Oil
*++A>J ^*.*~
U^^ A:^ V
*+**
Ji
j^J
ox-
^b
Û dill ^
<u*-uiJ ijiûJI
dli^ ejÛ
GLî
(*^
jl
il
<Ji *)UI A^JI Ulj
dll
pU
* dill
<L
jl
227
Lesson 92.
Conjugation IX
1.
For what verbs
is
Conjugation IX. used
For verbs expressing

2.
Memorise
fixed colours
to
become white
white
to
become black
black
to
become red
red
yellow, pale
crooked
become crooked
to
defects. Revise 58 4 (b)
this short vocabulary.
to turn pale
and
to lose
one eye
Inflect
*>
one-eyed
to redden.
i'.
i.
>
-'0
tr
4.
But where do the two
j 's
come from
in
2nd and
1st
persons
Simply from unloosing the two coalesced consonants, so

speak.
This
sukiln, thus
is
only necessary wlien the
doing away with the shadda.
"Doubled Verb" (so-called "Surd"),

?
>
;
fled
ox.
O jj
t
final radical
she touched
5.
The Imperfect (Note
6.
The Imperative (where
the shadda)
feasible)
in
"
*~*
:
We
has
to brar
shall study the
Lesson 102
he fled
^
;
to
thou touchedst >L~~~*
Is there a
7,
Passive to IX
228
Naturally there can be no Passive of practical use, and no
Noun
The
of Object.
other parts are
Reddening j+-
*.*J
on measure j***
pale; T-*** crooked.
jj!UJ
Redness (inflammation)
paleness
8.
How
Use
r-v>-jftj
would you translate

which
II
is
..-
it,
on measure
crookedness.
make
"to
white, to whiten"?
factitive or causative,
>
she blackened
J>'j^
He made
it
white
$'
5 j*
Note that many Arabic colours are simply substantive names

J
of well-known objects thus _yy scarlet, is really the Persian
;
word
(
for cochineal
Lesson 144
o..
-:.-
is
though the Relative Adjective
kermes',
often formed from
*>
Scarlet Fever
it
?*~.Al)
thus;
.-. >
:;
;
by adding
violet
coffee-colour.
Exercise 9 2 A.
1.
When
she heard this news her colour faded (she turned pale)
for fear of their striking her.

2.
As
observed her paleness but they did not
for them, they
know
the reason for
your sins be as
3.
If
4.
Her
[snow.
it.
scarlet,
they will become white like the
was reddening for-shame during-the-time-of her
face
standing (while she stood) before the judge.

Exercise 92B.
*
^>
'0
^ 0^
/\
0-^5-^x-
';
c,
\)
oj
(t)
ir"oj
1^ 'A Su. *>. r/e3 '-jf
Lesson 93.
Conjugation X.
1.
The form
of Conjugation X.
is
prefixing three servile letters to the

2.
The Past Tense

-
of
Â!*
which
'
J*A^*
first
formed by
is
of the radicals.
"to ask to understand", "to inquire"
0^0
.
*4*l-J
(H*:^
o^
>H A.
4* *
3.
Imperfect of
****'' J
"to seek
ask information",
to
knowledge,
"
>
JU^J
I
g v^
00S*
'
>
rJul->
4.
Imperative of
;"
0-0
j*+
The Noun
With
Thus
ask forgiveness".
0^0
f'
jj^-J by*
5.
to
of
Agent
as in IV, VI F., VIII., and with
.AI~* one-asking-pardon
temporary husband
6.
The Madar
00
Alx*
approval;
7.
Can
to legalise return to
divorced wife.
one-who-approves
,>~?cl~
.^00
examples jU*Z
a kasra before final.
inquiry;
there be a Passive
x
i
*l
act of asking forgiveness; ^)l**s*J!>i
-XsI^
employing,
utilisation.
Yes, many verbs of Conj. K. have a transitive signification.

The Passive Past follows the rule of "Penultimate radical
taking a kasra", but, as in IV., V1IL,

damma and in this case, the ta does also.
It
**
>*
y^^.Z^
>
I
was drawn
out, extracted
> '
8.
(he)
><*
.
It
The Passive
of al-Mudari
e
:
-r
the alif takes a
etc.
j>^>
was approved
>
i
'* >
~>*Z~J
Notice the fatha.
230o
The Passive
9.
Compare JJL^J
Exercise 93a.
is
Participle
= that
x-ft^-e
on the form
^>d*w9
which
Uftl*^
be met, hence, the "future".
is to
recapitulatory Exercise.
o3 i
TV jr
Exercise 98b.
"And
will
give thee the request of thy heart.
upon Him, and He
the Lord, and trust
Exercise 93c.
> o
To English
"
o"[
c^;^:^
i

*,
>o)|
1
^.
He
delight thyself (enjoy-thyself) with the Lord, and
^0^0
l~
Is
way
to
will cause-to-act".
"
>\^"\ >^,<<
^
-*fl
jjJc~J
>
"
"
^||-M
o,"
djXf J^^^LJ J* cAxJ
*fSU
tli jj ly
Deliver thy
^
J
(j
0^ 0^
*_jiî
>
-'
I
jûu-J
-^
i-,^0
ULi ijl JU>
^
-^
JLrf
"
}*
\"~*
tj Ui
**||
-ui
(\)
/
Y)
(i)
To Arabic
Exercise 93d.
1.
The king
>
inquired whether they approve (approved) his
thought (idea) but they did not approve

2.
So he
said
approve
3.
it
"If
GOD MOST HIGH
in the future",
"Then know
that there
They
is
will
said
it.
(i.e. I
"If
hope) you will
God
will".
no deity except God, and ask
forgiveness for thy sin and for the believers (m) and the be-
lieving-women".
4
In the
book
of "lOOl Nights" there are
sharp 'rmistahiir
who was married
many
to
stories
divorced
about
girl
on
condition that he would divorce her again next morning,
but
fell
in love
with her (became attracted to her) so did
not divorce her; consequently her

father were enraged.
first
husband and her
231
Lesson 94.
Conjugation X. (Contd.)
1.
2.
What
are the chief
meanings of Conjugation X.
(a)
To
consider the object to be
(b)
To
ask for the action to happen
Memorise the following derived verbs

Meaning of X.
good,
(e.g.
(c)
:
etc.)
(Various).
232
Write the hamza over the kursy (-) then act as

A>
you get
4.
From
93
6 and
^0
jULLJLJ asking-permission,
*l^
in
and
asking-to-be-excused.
or,
j^+
(~-
't
Compare
\[)\ Lessons 77
and 117
7,
An
13.
additional alif
**
not being feasible, compensation
is
made by
^
**.:
uprightness, straightforwardness,
To English
Exercise 94 a.
\>-\
thus
rest, restfulness.
j^+#\
s
/
_>*
-o -
-I.
-.0-5?
-î
vi
*t
^Îj^:^ JUIIj
.1
>. >
^
t
*
"*!
J^
"I
U*-i
>J>>
I
xt
^ "
^ *^
~*
4MJ" J^3
j^-a>-
To
b,
(o)
Arabic.
2.
3.
Inasmuch as
(Since
person referred
attendance
^J
The Sultan gave them (lit. received them) a great

The labourer surely deserves his hire (wage.)
1.
(Y)
<_^*
01,;^^
Exercise 94
"
<lUu*l
it
to,
was
I)
was surprised
at the
reception.
presence of the
have inquired about the reason of his
said to
me
(I
was
told)
that he did not
ask permission to attend.

4.
The judge has commanded
the attendance of the witnesses
to-morrow.
5.
6.
We
are ready for every (any) service.
Don't
make much
trouble.
of this matter,
for
it
is
not worth your
233
Lesson 95.
I.
The Paradigm (Fable)
Derived
of
VII.
Conjugations
X.,
with Examples.
MUDARI
PARTICIPLES
PAST
No.
Imper.
Passive Active
Passive
Uiitj
Active.
Passive
Act.
'U
UA!
Forms
VII.
VIII.
3-.
o;o
-*
UA ***
>
X.
UA*^.
Exs:
VII.
s
- o
JUiS
VIII.
&'9
J^
/*^
\
2.
}X.
O-O
k**A*
'
the following
Study
Newspaper Exercise with
Then
your lexicon.
*,
Jv>
i"
'
X.
A
I
the aid
correct by
page
of
235.
^4U
x*j
--
*\f^
.
J>
"
I'
l^
^4
*
'/SiiVl
l//
**
j r^
234
Lesson 98.
QUADRILITERAL VERB.
\.
We now
The same form
is
used, but the lam
3.
How
is
is it
expressed
We
doubled.
on the form Jx*i

do we get Quadiiliteral Verbs ?
the ordinary Quadriliteral verb

2.
How
take up the Quadriliteral verb.
inserting an extra letter in a triliteral root;
(a)
By
(b)
By repeating
(c)
From nouns
(d)
By expressing "he
Copy and
to roll
is
a bi-literal
of
sound (Onomatopoeia);
more than three
uttered the formula-..
learn the examples
away
letters
"
(Rare),
say that
5.
How
formed
the Imperative
is
Like
the rest on the alif
III,
being replaced here by the rest on thejazmated (sukuned)
^>J
'
6.
translate
"
rj>*
s
roll
*j> prove
The Noun
*
of
Agent
^ "\S^' >
J\'
Similar to that of
>
and
IS^*
^r J^-
(Satan);
Oy*
is
We
c.f.
is
8.
gave
Conj
II.
targumda. corrupted in Egypt to dragoman,

o
Does the
a Derived
last
.
note also
9.
of Triliteral verb (73
employ
to
Form
remark * apply
.
{.
C*Uj
How
can
to the
Noun
iljlj
of Object
3.W
visual
thing
Yes, but
book.
earthquake
we
best find the Quadriliteral
For
Look under
(a)
'*+>
a ta
translation;
marbuta to^^
Verb
(in
Lexicon)
the Triliteral root,
sounds are classified under the
"
for 2
>
'}
JKi j will also be found.
See 2 above.
bi-literal
(see next Lesson).
mumbling, we gather that we add
10.
j*\
But the more
2).
a translated
The Madar. By observing
But the form
'<J*
*s*
tr>-J^*
one ~
explosives (Neut.PL)
Lesson 35 the Passive of u)j thus
in
>
f^-^
7.
'>
one-proving;
~^*
substitute for mutargim
also (j^j-*^* one-
interpreter;
>
<j*
Compare
III.
mumbling. An ex of inanimates,
and
II.
Q "">
whispering
>
letter.
first
two
sparkle (whence
(b)
letters,
The
thus
'
to glitter,
Sj
a pearl), see
Exercise 95b.
ENGLISH
The
The employees
(officials)
of
EXERCISE
M.
dispersed exactly at noon, being interested in the
matter of the fighting, for they had heard

that the
(lit. arrived to them) that morning

two armies, the Turkish and the English, had fought together in the
Sinai peninsula
(///.
so anxious for
it
with
all their effort,
a boy had
like-island).
that they
began
to inquire
ceased, although people
from every authentic source
time passed and they were tired of waiting,
come carrying many
Special edition).
Then news had
were
;
copies of the supplement to the newspaper
They advanced upon him, making
inquiries,
but
when behold
(i.e.
and their faces
reddened with joy at the pleasing news, and they showed (there appeared upon
them) signs of excitement and enthusiasm.
236
Lesson 97.
1.
the Derived
Whatâre
JU^r with
(a)
Forms
of the Quadriliteral
Verb
form (Quad.
ta prefixed to the original
II.),
,---
J^J with kasra prefixed, and the second lam doubled Quad.
(b)
III).
,--0 -0
(c)
2.
JM**
We
with a nun inserted and kasra prefixed.
'
Lesson
said in
compared with
96,
that
Quadriliteral
of Triliteral
II.
Conj.
may be
csn these derived forms be
""
similarly treated ?
""i71
"*."
JwJ is similar to J**r (/>. J**-^
V. of Triliteral
--^0-0
may
3^*J
example
This
3.
last
is
be compared to IX:
it
^J^\
form
(c),
(the
jLi
may now be
a girdle
II.
be shaken, or
to
be shaken, shake
to
(a)
(<2al) J^-J
^
demonstrated
to
solitary
^ ^ 0^^
to be
its
dismissed.
^>---
wear
VII,
crowd) gathered together.
Give some examples of Quadriliteral

to put on, or
to
^
~
^-^
quake
f'j^'j
<* **
^ '
to be translated, interpreted
4.
C'jl^Jl can be worked-out
Thus:
^^V^l
> '
'>S\SS ^
^^^
0*^
it
sparkles, -JâJUJj
But, as in V. Jc-Uil *J\

5.
How
is
the
6.
^ at
intelligent
comparison of V.
ba over the ha, not kasra. Ex:
he wears a girdle.
formed with kasra
is
Madar formed
The Masdar
by
w ^h
*'"
^-^-
of Quadriliteral
II.
would be
Four frequently-used-verbs on the form
wv*
*\\'~
^*AJ
'
(/c\
Examples
Quad
III):
Masdar
N. Agent
Impei
237
Past
Present
Meaning.
come to nought,
cease to exist,
fade away
to
to shudder,
shiver
to be tranquil
to shrink
(with aversion).
7.
What
be specially noted about this table
is lo
(a)
Three things
(b)
Two
tive
"Doubled
^^
P-jUai'
be better understood
will
(or Surd)
Verbal Noun.
Exercise 97
JcUH ^*i
things to be noted only (not memorised)
which
oJ UP
be learned
to
In
Verbs
To English
a.
the Impera-
Lesson 103 on
and the two ways of forming the
the case of
jwUVI mean
and
after
be tranquil, both
to
peace of mind.
tranquility, or,
^
*>" t"
-^
^
*
f-'
^1
^^
f
-?i
'
o-o^, ^
"-^. '
'
j
Exercise 97
The
b.
pupil
began
'
^-
JJ jo j
jj
to wail bitterly as
>
>-m
\*
>+
<5uyj
'
j>-
^\M
V!
though he was
not wishing to prove his diligence by completing his lessons.
Our
friend
(lit.
(shining) girdle,
(probably)
(teacher)
with
it
it
the one mentioned)
had been given
Mohammad.
the other
and boxing.
was wearing
a polished
so he began to sparkle brightly, as though

to
him as
a gift
He commenced
to
from his professor

rival
%
and out-do
(boy) and at last the matter ended in fighting
-238-^
XEADIbG EXERCISE
Removed-his-clothes,
98,
on-a-day-of-snow,
>
black-one once,
And it-was
and-rubbing-with-it-his-body,
said-to-him,
and began-taking-the-snow,
o
.5
JLS
In-the-hope
become-white,
dUs L-"
Why-do-you-i ub-} our
He-said,
that-I,
body-with-the-snow,
Si
Then-a-wise-man-came-and-
O this-one,
Don't-trouble-yourself,
said-to-him,
&
"**
^^
>
^f
^
increases-not-except-in-
that-thy-body-blacken-
and
it
blackness,
the
This (story) The-
that-the-wicked,
is-able-to-conupt,
good,
for-it-is-possible
the-snow,
meaning-of-it-is,
Over-the reforma-
(he cannot,)
and-as-for-the-man
tion-of-the-wicked,
he-has-not-power,
the-good-one,
black
man once removed
to take the
began
said to him.
'That
to
his clothes
snow and rub
"Why
may become
and said
ENGLISH.
his
on a snowy day and
body with
it.
Someone
do you rub your body with the snow

white," he said.
Then
a wise
man came
him, "So-and-so, don't fatigue yourself, for though
thy body blacken the
snow
yet
it
only increases in blackness
itself."
The evil man can corrupt

The meaning is
but the good man cannot reform the evil one.
:
the good
one,
239
Lesson 99.
POPULAR STORY FOR READING EXERCISE.
JUj
;c;
iuî
2-; )
ib
Jac-lj j&cj ^*-X3
VCj/j
<îlj fc-
r Vi
lr
li5*j
"Uô'
JU
JlS
7-î
4>l
J^
jJ^j
f/^ j
ûji Jis
jUai j^ji _*s iju v/j

.
Ijb*
- Jiv
^^li
l?
jUcill
\^
"-^
^ ^
_
V
^rli
j^r-^^l;
,
e_,
-5
A>V *U^ dJl^ j
jr^r
if
JU
^JJI S
UP iJC* j' ^"i ^rJ ^ l* ^ J
popular story, found
Tin's
in all
jM> r|>
Egyptian collections,
carefully studied with the lexicon.
A certain
number
is
to be
of vowels
(only) have been supplied, to gradually accustom the student to
reading the newspaper, which
grammatical notes
Jafrl
^jl
(see 25
^ a
'-*
literally,
unpointed.
give a
IV.
To be
/eztf
studied in 122, 123.
"Hearing and obeying". (Very frequent).
7).
modern Egyptian
silver
coin=one
dollar.
(Explained in Lesson 148
J^/i^ twenty years.

%.
A>
We
These are Conj.
CT*
is
the Imperative of
*>!
(Lesson 104:4).
c.
^-1 Conj. IV. (to be studied in Lesson 107).
1,2).
240
EXAMINATION PAPER
A.
To
English
#0^^,
>\^9
*-A)
100.
#0 x
.P llxû
/t*-**
>
fc
>
"^
^x
x-
'
^^*^
<
w
/W^M
Jj
o-
lû
. i
'
>
^>
'N!<
^^
(^H J^*
11
_,
"*>'>
i
J **31
0.0
VV
"
'
>
)4^x^ ,'^3**î
MJ
rt
UJ)
1.
2.
3.
The
^t
\
j
x-
y
To Arabic
^s
xO -
/^.
-^//'v^
4**
-x
^-.stS- ^J J
- -
AX.IJ ,*^
(v)
were shining
in the sky (heaven).

were plucking the ears (of corn) and
eating, and they were rubbing them with their hands.
I am the Lord thy God who brought thee out of the land of
stars
And
his disciples
Egypt, and out of the house of slavery (bondage) thou shalt

,
4.
have no other gods before Me.

Hallowed be thy Name
Forgive us our
sins, as
we
for-
give those-that-sin against us.
Honour thy
5.
on the
6.
father
and mother,
that thy days
may be long
earth.
But for a misunderstanding between the two parties the

conditions of peace would have been agreed upon before.
/.
8.
g.
The book was translated by one of the best of the translators.

You cannot prove that statement.
He went to the carpenter and said 'Bring (to) me the
bedstead'.
C.
Give the Arabic Singular, Dual and Plural of
dav
week
newspaper
rnule.
month
year
library
Plural of this
book
fathermother
church
brother*
house
word not yet studied (but used once
dog
in
Ex. 56
sister
cow
c),
Lesson
101.
GENERAL INTRODUCTION TO WEAK

1.
how many
Into
The two main
classes are Aiabic verbs divided
JU
classes are A.
VERB.
?
te.
\^ Sound (or "strong")
from defect; and
free
JL>
B.
j^ J*$
A. Consists of verbs (whether
for all of these
B.
(a)
>
or quadriliteral) that
triliteral
Hamza, Doubled Radicals, and Weak
are devoid of
Not-Sound.
have
own
their
Letters,
special rules.
--.
Ju* _A^ (Not-Sound)
sub-divided into
is
which allows hamzas as
?x*>6^ Correct or Regular:
radicals,
v^r,
also doubled-letters, but does not contain
wan
or ua.
>
Under
*>
(a)
we
shall study
j^f Mahmuz
(hamzated verb) and
.>
Muda
c-ac-Ua*
af (doubled) *e. with
2nd and 3rd radicals
alike.
(J/M ta//=weak) consists of verbs containing the
ll*
(b)
and
ya.
Under
we
(b)
shall
have
MW/&
Mithdl (Assimilated wau or ya as 1st radical.

\
>-
'
Qtf^.U
it
2.
Ajwaf (Hollow)
wau
or ya or
Ndqis (Defective)
zta?/.
or
often "drops off",
The above complete

and
to
and
learn, straight off, all
learn
or
//
at the end,
whence
in that sense, is defective,
list is to
be turned back
//c/
in the middle.
//
be used as a general introduction
to for reference.
the
It
is
not essential to
Arabic technical terms; you
will
them, with their meanings, in the course of Lessons
I02I2/.
But the divisions and sub-divisions must be fully
grasped (under the English names, for the present).

3.
Why
not call the
"Irregular"?
Sound Verb "Regular", and
Non-Sound
Because the "Non-Sound" verb also follows
regular laws, though suffering

4.
the
some changes of form.
Let us show these classes more graphically.
242
.sT
fa
*\
>
s
03
'
f^
^
"3
:
'I
-1;
3
O
*N
t
rt
s
o ^
S
Lesson 102.
DOUBLED VERB.
1.
What
A
2.
w^
the origin of the Doubled, or "Surd" Verb.
is
simple
verb with three fathas.
triliteral
When
are the
They
are contracted
when
sign,
but opened out
when
Thus Ju
two radicals contracted, and when separated
Thus
noun-Affix).
JL
the third radical carries a vowel
has a sukun,
it
he extended
before a Pro
(e-y.
I
extended.
^
3,
Inflect the
Preterite of -U
<
4.
What happens
RULE.
the
first
If
01
5.
radical
is
is
3J*j
we
get
^^
to flee,
and
**."."
for
he runs away)
damma)
the second throws
and coalesces with the
"
.
"jA>
vowelled (here by
not-vowelled,
first,
Imperfect Tense of
Present Tense (ex.
the third radical
back upon the

r
in the
,A>
,A>
third.
and
its
but
vowel
Thus instead
> .".Ox
.-*
for
fo think, suppose.
run
j*
x-
'
to bite.
^
UaT
6.
What
difference
Instead of
and
the
is
made
formal
in the Imperative
0/0
}Ju
>
I
^-1 we write ju
and
the fatha, in this case, being a contrivance to avoid
"{jA'
two sukuns coming together.

7.
Why
there no alif-kasra
is
Because
radical,
f-jUail
has thrown back
is
needed
But note that

Is
JÛil
Yes
it
pj
to assist to
is
regular
pronounce
*i
jlU instead
*
jU
instead of
What masdar may be

Various forms
the
there,
no
taken
is
A>^
\i as
*^
jli
".
*r-
instead of
*!"*
.-
opinion, thought
commonest form
fn.
jyU^
Similarly
"i
of "^ IU
".
9.
first
follows the usual rule, except that the second and
radical coalesce.
it
the
"
'jjU
to
sometimes used.
third
vowel on
its
and consequently, there being no sukun
extra alif
8.
Tw"
""l^
*^
*'
!!>
jtj
flight.
Perhaps
Exercise 101
1.
a.
What
is
To Arabic
your
245
Lord of the worlds
about the
thought
(Sad Chapter).
2.
And
3.
And
ye thought an evil thought (see 6 below).

they think about
God
other than the truth (untrue
thoughts) ("Family of Imran").

4.
Then
5.
And
fled
from you when
verily (assuredly)
feared *you (Poets Chapter).
consider
him
to
be one of the liars
("Stories" Chapter).
6.
And
that he punish the hypocrites (m)
and polytheists (m) and polytheists
and hypocrites
GOD
the thinkers of
(f)
(f)
thoughts of evil ("Victory" Chapter).

7.
Say
*:
"Flight will not profit you,
if
ye have fled from death
("Confederates" Chapter).
*
These are Hollow verbs (Lesson
This verb has the particle of asseveration
verily or assuredly,
Exercise
115).
10.S b.
and
To English
is
used after jl
J which means
(see 128
10).
(from Al-Quran).
ujJ I*
I//.
'
VsCiU Ui
'
^
.
Lj
( \ )
/
/
,
(Y)
\
(r)
>-
>
. .
:A>.
i^
7ji
x^
""^*
s.-^ OjjA^
(tj
(o)
Lesson 103.
I.
Form
This
the Subjunctive of the

is
regularly formed
Doubled Verb
e.g.
from J-k J 3
to indicate,
show.
-
Xij
$&
,-,
Ji
2.
Does
the
sukun separate the radicals
Decidedly
radical
so,
when
in the Jussive
the real Jussive is used; for otherwise
would disappear; since
it
is
manifestly
for,
as
we have shownbefore J
one
difficult to
**"
sound J-k
JI
If it
were
o.
I
two sukuns would come together, which
j)
to
happen
o>
in Arabic.
.-
"-V
is
never allowed
247
(b) In the
- 0>
"^
A A
Imperfect
-
-*>
Cz
"to deceive").
248
To Arabic
Exercise 103a.
"And on him I bestowed vast riches".

"And when (if) the earth was spread out".
"And he took hold of the head of his brother dragging
1.
2.
3.
him
to him".
"He
4.
said,
We
will
strengthen
with thy
fore-arm
thy
brother".
6.
"What think ye of Christ?"

"And He withheld men's hands from
7.
"Revile not those
5-
without) God,
enemy)
whom
lest
they call on beside (apart from,
God
they revile
despitefully (as an
in their ignorance".
To English
Exercise 103b.
you".
'
'
7T..JJ
-,,-,-,
>
UO^j
^
"a,
-i>
"
.
IjJLft ^
^XJ
|iT
i
a,
*
I
o^
^-
<W
sr'
t
'
>>>
">
(v)
'>
(t)
',
Or)
til*
jy.^
^ J^-î L"*
.
jj^
>
"'
*'
- ^
" K.K
'^r^
*3
(0)
(V)
ACTIVE VOICE AND PASSIVE VOICE.

1.
"Active Voice"is called by some

verb whose agent (subject)
2.
"Passive Voice"
= the verb whose

3.
is
is
will
= Û
ilxil -the
known. By others
similarly called
Jî^
*^
agent(subject)is unknown.
"Subject" of a Passive Verb
The above
>.Û1I
J^liÛ
==
beunderstood after Lesson
Or J^>cJiJ ^-^
"Deputy
169, etc,
Agent".
on Syntax.
249
Lesson 104.
HAMZATED VERB.
1.
In
It
2.
how many ways may

may have a hamza as
In verbs with
RULE: A
hamza- fa
vowelled hamza
vowel.
}
>
changed
û
to the letter
homogeneous
>>
leaf, for
note that since
\^
belief
is
..-
j~*
l-o
c
^,
Similarly,
written
we
write
alif of
it
to
but
prolongation, to change
then to write madda
is
fo take captive.
(S^
y
jft
is
iVt
*))
to the
Similarly, ya of the Imperatire.
conventional custom.
Conjugate
lH
forjU[
and
H. The advanced student may, however,
the alif of prolongation and
3.
y*\
>
^'^
w
I
_^
&*" becomes
'
the general rule?
when preceded by
and ju|
,-*
'JS"~
is
with sukun)
Examples
'IbeJteve,"
radical) what
(p. 242).
(ie.
I
i
is
second, or third radical
(i.e. first
j;*j
first,
hamza
silent
be hamzated
a verb
lr
^G
l
x
c-
~
4.
there
above rule?
to the
any exception
250
In the Imperative of three verbs the
altogether
5.
take
Form J*UH *J
The one alif is placed
taking; JS
-^
6.
!j-i>- -A>-
What happens
Refer back
weak
the
is
rejected
JS"" eat
ljl>
madda
across the other, forming
one hoping
thus
-vl safe.
with the Passive of the Muclari c ?
RULE of PERMUTATION (63
our
to
Ijy j command!
one eating; J*l
radical
first
harmonise with the vowel
to
letter
5)
"Change
that vowel
if
is
*U.J!
Thus -*>^ He
the distinctive feature required".

,
'0 *
7.
of
Examples
'*i
JÂX!
VU
>
hamzj) Jj*
,%.
Ûl
from the
>
'
"
-M
w*y
r-
initial
(having
jj*f>
M ^"VU
->
hoped-for;
be
j^ the food will be iaten.
AJaJl Jp
Similariy
will
(it)
JjJ
VU
an eatable
'
y
jj^ U
subordinate-official;
8.
Vocabulary
X
"
(a)
to order T*
3-*
damma
Verbs taking
*"
to eat
'
"^
^
"."
ô
Imperfect: to hope
in
*"
to take
(b)
Fatha
^->>
to permit
permitted.
^
I
t:
to
be safe
to regret
^*-
'
*^c
(a)
Kasra
Imperfect: to take captive ^r^
in
To Arabic:
Exercise 104a.
1.
"Then
2.
"And
the
Eden
to dress
cat from what
saying,
is
set-before (brought forward to) you'* (Luke 10
Lord God took
"Of
tree of the
it
all
and keep
Adam
it. And
(the
the
Lord God commanded
knowledge of gocd and
thou shalt not eat of
evil,
~
i
r
x
it
î<-^
1i
5^0
r
^ I'M
>
t>
\^
>
t
i-
-"
s^j
for in the
15-17).
l^ I^LSj (\)
),,.
r
J
Ji
ot 4J.J 'IwjjVil
<l^/tojl
^ ^
Jii
__
':
(Gen
English:
-
'-
Adam (the man)
ihe trees of the garden thou mayest freely eat: but of the
To
8).
man,) and put him into the garden cf
day that thou eatest thereof thou shalt surely die".
Exercise 104a.
>-
'j
(T)
2$t
Lesson 105.
1.
We
may
come now
it
take
to the
Damma
as middle radical.
>
Fatha as
hamza
in
^^
jLJjC<j*j? (J*y.
,,
to inquire
to
^ e Drave
^ LJ
Kasra
2.
The Mudari
,^Jo
to despair
of "to despair"
<jLfc
3.
The Imperative
'JUI
of
UL.
l~>
What vowels
7.
What form
It
Masdar take
will the
depends largely upon the vowel
not
c
verbs mahmuzat-ul-âin (having the ain hamzated).
many
Examples
Oy*
of the verb (But there are
Madar:
of
request
and
J^*
a question',
villainy
despair
C>
i'-iX
4j
8.
IS
depression (or 'dumps*').
Revise Lesson 13
at this stage.
Jl
Important.
B
u*
crj*;
-
^
'
11
dl) Ul
x-
f^ J
r)
'J
li
1'T-i
aV (0
Ul
'
"Ask
and
of me,
(Ps. 2
possession."
"And Saul
And
(l
shall give thee the heathen for thine
Sam. 27
me and
5.
"Ask thy
7.
father,
elders,
(Luke
II
to the
10).
then they will
tell
thee" (Deut
"Ask him, he will speak for himself" (John 9

"Then it said to the woman, 'Has God truly
(Haqqan =
yet
then (so that, Subj.) he will inform thee,
eat of all the trees *of the garden'
me
26).
"For everyone who asketh taketh."
6.
not search for
l).
4.
and thy
for thy
8).
the speech of the desperate (despairing) [goes]
wind" (Job 6
(V)
despair of
will
(any more)."
3.
~"
and the uttermost parts of the earth
inheritance,
2.
cJUi
si*
1.
(^)
>
To Arabic
( \ )
ill
I'LJ (o)
b.
J
X
4 5*0^. ^ J--,^^ ^^t
'
Exercise 105
C-
^.1
x>
*^
7-V 'iUp
'jy
'V
"
?
32
/,
7).
2l).
said,
(Gen 13:1).
Verily, or truly).
This collective will be explained in Lesson 139
Do
not
253
Lesson 106.
I.
Give exs
Meaning
of
hamza
as third radical (marking important verbs)
254
Such special assistance was deliberately given
We
things".
7.
will
What happens
hamza
from
"simplify
able to save our space somewhat.
to the final
derived
is
*^J
now be
to
and
word "prophet"
of the
is
on the form wUi
but the
*
hamza has coalesced with

an-Nabi'u we write
learnt in
8.
Lesson 67
6 with words derived from final
-not
c
Qur an
in
anything, something
^\^\
Tfj-)
plural
(Its
What happens
The
is
is
^n
$-^
'
has been
i/a.
<Uf (Lesson
I
^^
7-
*U^'
a diptote)
^^
r-
~**
with the plural of
form
plural
losing their original harnzi.
with enjoyment ("to your health")

5.
an-Nabiyu. The plural of
^^-Ji
Give examples of words

evil (written
the ya; so instead of writing
pUj prayer -leader

132).
alike (from it to wa/A; ahead) the kasra
As
is
'.'
two radicals are
the
thrown forward, and
J
**
we get
^'"
i
'
Compare
To English
Exercise 106a.
/J
'
to
(^)(3
'^1^3
>,
To Arabic
name
groan
^^
^y.r-*
'
groan.
(From al-Qur'dn).
>
Exercise 106b.
Read
llxj.*
J15 (f )
^
1.
the verb
^
i
--
ô
w,
u,
<****
1^
^
-Z
j'
-
>
in the
of thy
Lord who created.
2.
Eat and drink with enjoyment.
3.
He
said, "Verily
am
appointing you as-a-leader to the
people".
4.
And
5.
Then,
likewise
if
revealed
we appointed
thou
to
art
thee,
in
ask
Scripture before thee.
to every
doubt
those
prophet an enemy.
concerning what we have
who
[were]
reading
the
255
Lesson 107.
1.
to the
Returning
"Surd'' (doubled) Verb, can all the usuai
Derived Conjugations be obtained from
Yes
is
it ?
but IX will seldom be found, (because the third radical
already doubled
if
second and 3rd were alike
The cognate radicals are separated

I.
The Masdars of Conjs. Ill, IV VII.,
trebled}.
just as in
The
would be
before sukun
and X.
VIII.,
separate the two, in order to insert tbe necessary

2.
it
alif.
table of Conjugations with useful examples.
JUJ
2
>
3*1
ii
6
-
o>
'
ui
U;,
3J
8
10
JUI-I
TV English
supply
V. to be verified
be unloosed
3-
To extend
I.
What
is
Take
out
to
VIII. to
be done with so
II.
verify
contact with
III.
VI. to be in mutual contact
extend
IV. to
VJ.
many forms
II.
to
X. to request supplies.
?
and V. and memorise them, because they are
the ordinary strong Conjs.

4.
II.
and V- Note the
like
rest.
and V. so regular ?
Why
Because the effect of doubling one of the two original "Surd"
radicals is to separate those two in all parts of the verb, in
are
II
other words, to regularise this form. Refer to 72 and 83.
Why
are the N. of A.
VII, and VIII.?
and N. of Object
Because their
shown without separating

Exercise 107
"
alike in Conjs.
distinctive
-j.
C.
JSC
b.
6jSn
A-i
xi
joaoi
i,)
jj
(Ztt
sent to ask to be supplied with a
of munitions.
means of
As-far-as
it
all
transport,
(up to)
country
many
of
Then
intense
(lit.
^y
^r
.
"
men and
Command-
a quantity (portion)
War
Office,
they
he asked of soldiers and equipments (accessories such
and other things
(/-,
and so on).
the present there have joined the
Aimy
of Occupation in
reinforcements, aniving from other countries, until (so that)
They have also prepared for them
after their arrival by a
we were
'
i",
L,
has been said that the army extends from sea to sea and
for any thing.
G.O.C. (General Officer
number
--
r"
After investigating the request at the
him with
re-inforced
this
to us) that the
^'
RE -TRANSLATE TO ARABIC
There arrived
;J
oÂ-^JJ
^^
-'
1-
'/ u-
ô
Ui
b.
J^
"
"
''
Exercise 107
u,
s-
<Jlk J-J^"
-^
as
vowels cannot be
'as ju Ji jal
ing)
VI.,
the radicals.
^tiO-
>
>
We hear
III.,
a.
ivi
uiv,
256
a great
is
ready
(prepared)
camp
few days, the war became unexpectedly more
an intensifying non-expected) and a great battle took place, only
preserving Baking upon ourselves)
the policy of defence not that of
The army has several armoured trains and "Maxim guns" (cannon
it has deserved
quick firing), As for the Ministry of Communications,
attack.
great praise.
257
Lesson 108.
DERIVED CONJS:
1.
Let us speak
2.
What
And
3.
is
IV
HAMZATED VERB
of the verb mahmuz-ul-fd.
of
Ill
Conj.
Conj.
How
first
of
of the
^^
<,
"j\ ?-It
same
j*1 from
is
It is
By examining3 wv&Uil
Example
-X>-1
from
_/*<
are these to be distinguished
^ i
/H
II
UlâU* c-y^ll
*.^1
to
reproach
to
cause pain
tin;
-^'^
-*>'
j-
^5v
jtjj^.i
.ll
1 ^>
>
i^ >
0"
r.
J&l
Slif
^j
1-0
j
4.
To
(J^ vI**U^J 3
place in trust
J *^
Learn
C^
Learn also
caller -to -prayer;
^^
a conference,
on the same form as Jîl
^-^^J.
:>*
which
(See 63:
to write a
,>
sufferer;
a
is
7,
Agent
;
~~i~*
10
Noun
footnote,
excused
0+"
'
>
J U
Self -Test 108. Translate these N's of

a believer; asking to be
>
be sociable^^
J'm ^>
+-jl to
>
5.
> ^ 1
bookJI
.^
d j*
painful.
of Place being
andc/ ^*I^}.
^
an author; delayed
a suffering
woman.
~ 258Lesson 109.
I.
MAHMUZ-UL-'AIN verbs use some derived forms
only.
J>iU
VL
c"
-7
&"
Id-
Where
In
aie Conjugations
there
II.
is
a possible
II.,
VH., X.?
example
JU
to
ask much, but
is
it
not
important. Examples from VII, and X. are not in ordinary use.
Why
are there not
more
Because of the awkwardness
in
pronunciation of the inter-
mediate hamza, and the fewness of Conj.
Which
of the above should be memorised
to suit, is
used of food
verbs of this class.
I.
(or climate) suiting a
person;
^
is
used of everybody asking everyone else
JÛr
to
and
wound healing (edges coming
times used of a
^^Jl A~3*
VJI
the annual gathering (of a
augur good,
^*Ut*>
to
bode
*'~
'
to
some-
together) while
society).
to congrat.
written alone
is
prophesy ui>
**
ll* to acquit
to
'
*-:
commence
Also
to be pessimistic.
ill,
after the long alif in Al-Macli, also in VI.
is
'
Note the spelling of these words; the hamza
Vocab:
J*uJ
-5^0
to
Ul)l
reward
(Add
l*t>
to cure
these top. 259).
5-
Verbs Mahmuz-ul-Lam are frequently met with.

c -
to
hide (a thing)
l~>- J
to
accuse of error
&/J
to
inform
to take refuge
UJJ
one
to
be
self
filled
'{.
6.
iv,
U-C^
warmth
to seek
II.
-o
to hide
VIII.
Pay special attention
to
X.
miss aim
to sin,
Conjs
II.,
and
IV.
VIII. in this table.
rj
ui
l>
2.
2.
3.
o >
Lf^
4.
5.
4.
UK.:,
6.
i!l.
o
>
>
li!xi-
l-JI^j^J-J^
10
Exercise 109a.
1.
To Arabic
bility
being-filled
taking-refuge; pessimism
assembling; beginning
congratulation
suita-
acquittal;
he- was-re warded.

2.
Also
suitable
congratulator
one-requited
filled; a beginner; hiding oneself
Exercise 109b.
optimistic.
refugee
one
260
EXAMINATION PAPER
A. Translate to English
10.
aifUHuj
/
x^
~^
-*
AJN_
rfê"
'
\
^Ss^J*
^
*>-. *^
^/0;Û>-Hc^
îJ'O5^
X-
(0
\
(V)
^
f
(0
(
(v)
V.I
/^J
'
l)
^x
j i.
cisC> j
j '*
^^ j
*
csC?>U
*'
'
~* *
4i
j^î
I?
'
(A)
>t
B. Translate to Arabic:
1.
Ask
these two sheikhs where they are from.
2.
The school
3.
believe in
is full
GOD
(has filled); then
let
us begin.
and His Apostle.
[women.
5.
Ask pardon for thy sin, and for the believers and
(Write out The Fifth Commandment).
6.
The
7.
The two women were prophesying about
4.
girls ran
away
(fled)
from
their teacher
8.
Kingdom of God.
Thus (so) God loved the
9.
Those two ladies merit (deserve)
believing
(f).
the extension of
the
10.
C.
As
world.
r
our praise.
thoXigh he were 'engaged (busy),
Give Second Person, Dual,
(a) Preterite,
verbs: to stretch, deserve, be
filled,
and
(b) Present, of the
write a book, abstain, think.
Lesson
111.
AXD
EYE, VOICE,
EAR.
Arabian Wisdom.
(T)
(r)
jl-HSI
s>t
Jll j Ail
i-l /Aa]l a^fr
^J j^
vJiill
(a)
i"^
(l)
(v)
(A)
Translation of aboie
1.
Rest of body
[is
to
be found]
in rarity of
Rest of soul in fewness of sins
food
Rest of heart in scarcity of anxiety
Rest of tongue in paucity of speech.

2.
Knowledge
3.
Two
is
a tree,
and action
are never satisfied,
its fruit.
the seeker of
knowledge and the
seeker of wealth.
4.
In haste
5.
6.
regret,
and
in
slip of the foot is safer
consideration safety.
than a slip of the tongue.
Three things please the heart (we should say the eye)
(i.e.
/.
is
the river)
and greenness
metrical rendering,
license"
jn-lJ!
oj^J?).
(i.e.
water
garden) and a pleasant face.
the terminal sukun being
"Three things
send
away
"Poetical
grief
greenness, and water and a pleasant face."

8.
Paradise
is
under the
feet of
mothers (said oftrtiininy
children).
262
Lesson
112,
THG WEAK VERB.

*
>'
I.
We
come now
By comparing
be
to
îlfrl
to
107
sick,
-v*-'
What
J--*
hence
found
will be
to contain a
are the three possible classes of
those with j
(a)
JLU
(b)
<îj>-\
(c)
<*a5U
~~
or
in the middle.
with j
or
as third radical.
be added
to
weak
third both
2.
Verbs with second and third both weak.

XS>
7 with 75
resemble) takes
its
madar
in
and note
5,
meant by the word JLU
Compare 74
j and
"weak" verbs
Verbs with
is
U%-
1JI
called
letters are
1.
What
as first radical.
There are two supplementary classes
3.
letter
or
and
mean
to be the Participle of
with j
first
does *ll*
The "Sick" (weak)
"letter of sickness."
2.
What
Uill
""LnJI
Jlt
that
Ifd (Conj.
(resemblance,
III.,
to
or assimi-
X*
lation)
so these verbs are called "Assimilated" or "Simile"
verbs because they resemble the Sound Verb.

4.
In verbs
Ya verbs
Verb.
having ya as
first
radical,
what happens
are inflected in almost all their forms like the Strong
For example
Û
,jjo
to
despair
(of), (in
105
2).
40-
ilr
l*
LT
LJ
}Q
5.
The Noun Agent
is
^l
both of which are regular.
and The Noun of Object
/jI :
>
6.
Is
the Passive also regular
Yes, in the Past
from
had been Transitive,
26 3
we should have
^J
matter of
but, as a
^j
got
if
the Past
the few initial ya
fact,
verbs are mostly Intransitive.

7.
In the Imperfect the Passive requires
damma
then what would happen to the second ya
By our
RULE
over-rules the
thus,
8.
j~*y
Jil-
2.
weak consonant, which
is
^J^
Do
a.
To Arabic
Verily after travail
Let us pick the ripe
4.
Our crops
5.
After long
the strong vowel
5)
then changed to wau
"to be dry,"
^j
"to be easy"
are
is
ease.
fruits.
mildewed
trial
this year.
(experience)
The Annual Conference

I
did not find (113
4)
climate suitable.
7.
not despair of the mercy of God.
3.
ya,
the radical)
i.e.,
applies to the Imperative
Vl; "to ripen,"
(63
first
"to be awake."
Exercise 112
1.
PERMUTATION
The same
Vocabulary
of
over the
will
meet
in the city of Cairo.
congratulate you sincerely on your safe return.
Exercise 11?
b.
To English
(r)
,
^4
n
r
i,
l:rtjj>
jyl jiiiYi i;
^V,
/^t,
',
^^^Ji ^>">JI
(t)
(
- 8
,'
'j^-t*
oVJt i.91> i>'i

^-<^
<-
(*\)
(v)
x/
the
264
Lesson
113.
ASSIMILATED VERBS IN
1.
Are Verbs with j regular,
few are regular,
We must
rules.
of the Six Classes on

2.
like those with
Lessons 38 and
page
the others have special
like the ya verbs,
refer to
3 (^jlj Jl:)
and the Revision
39,
under Lesson
104,
Firstly, take the fourth line
>'
(page 104) \Â>
Assimilated Verbs
it ?
j like
in
Ex
very few, and these are regular.
40.
-V.
\^
\{y
'
are there
to
be un-
four,
namely
\($
wholesome.
3-
This form
is
not used in
-
'
"\
What happens
to 'Ui,
L/
"U
^
shewn
in the
'
,
^1
Uj
All iâw verbs on this form reject the

as
That leaves
Ui ai.d
4.
,-
following table
wau
and
in
to promise
to give birth
to find
to be
to connect, arrive
to describe
jj
__
incumbent
>
to arrive,
5.
What
come
to stand, stop
"
did
we say about
UL
That
its
few examples are
in
Lesson 39
s-
to
be found
and that the wan always disappears
in
<
in
Assimilated Verb,
6.
Does
265
-0 -
also reject the
J-AJ ^*3
wau
**
Verbs on
fear
this
-*
form are
to
V^V' %T J
exceptions in
/.
inosff.y
be
(In
regular;
Pa n
i
7.
The following
We
the worn
^Jafl
^0^
eight verbs in
they take fatha in Mudari
J^
e.g.
is
shall
etc.,
J>-^ J>-J
mention
replaced by
J*^ J3 and
to
two
ya).
-0-
UL %i
although
yet drop the initial wau.
266
13,
But a great
by adding
it
of the verbs drop the j and compensate for

j"
j"
jthus 4.i* confidence
i j weight
<L* a gift
many
o
>
U,^ attribute
^
il^ connection
may, how-
these last three
***
A>~.
take the
ever,
Exercise
form
Ui
To English
ll-l a.
'
*>
j jj
'
L^j
O^
eyx j
l'
jr"Q*'ji
î
5^V
fei j
^ 9 t
Ji) j dAt j
4>
\j
j j 4:.
li
i'
j)
UJUJ"
"
-*
j U-U
\)
fo
^f>+
'^l
."ÔtiiO
O/
(T-
o"[^0^0l"o'[
UU
*>
^Jj^j and
v.^1^11
\
)
"
"
"
"
i
Put
His throne
Had
(seat)
U)
Man's nature
all
is
<i)
ju
i^-
"
j^^x.)
( N
'
here.
[earth.
extended (covered) the heavens and the
he been relying on
have given her
'
down your burdens
1.
2.
4.
<^^?
<j
(felt
confidence in) her he would
she asked of him. (A lam follows
lau).
inherited from his fathers.
6.
God did not beget and was not begotten.

[his death.
He did not promise her that she would inherit anything after
7.
It
5.
is
incumbent upon us
confidence
8.
found
9 There
10.
it
is
in
him
accept his word and to have
entirely.
placed on the chair.
no-one
Not every
to
city
is
in the
as
house
it is
at present.
described in the books.
267
Lesson
I.
Derived Forms
What
Neither in j verbs or
of Conjugation
in
114.
verbs
is
II.?
there any difficulty,
to cause to join
"
to deliver (childbirth)
x-
2.
Conjugation
.
vf,^
No
special remark.
Cl'
,- >
jl
|X>
Al^lj^ J**'^ J^'J

X*
Wau
Conjugation IV.?
verbs are regular, except the necess-
madar
ary permutation in the
U-Ua^ ^,^1
|^> "."
>.
jujS
to join to
3.
III.?
make
to
e.rs:
\h
'i
2/l^j"
to necessitate
-*
4-
What
becomes
up,
=*
>
JaiJ
in
IV.
\
'
Conj. Past, but
J**
5).
" '* ^
Conjugation V. and VI.?

to hesitate,
6.
in
'
Conjugation VJI,?
Any
Yes,
^^
^^0
^^
I
to
be found
difficulty in VIII.?
Ju*
verbs on form
Conjugation
(iii
list
care),
'' #
thus
"7^2."
to the
wau
after kasra.
in
to
-*
1
îr
JôT
on page 223, and memorise
What happens
wau
curiously change the j or

^.'*
usual permutation of
to deposit
Jli
with the servile
(Turn back to the special
The
\-&
Arabic we have-î j ko be born,-X>-^
O and then coalesce

8.
difficulty.
depend (upon) ($J^)
In Colloquial
7.
No
wake
- >
JaJ^
lt'l**it'**t*-i
v>Uji^ J^^; -***i'- to have easy circumstances
5.
permu-
to
^ -o ^
^*>-jl
These undergo
(See Rule in 63
f-jUaiJ
cause to exist ^>- j
to
of Conjugation IV. ya verbs
tation of the ya in
'
'
f^j'
^ ^
ô ^
I
Pî
Jr
**
cause to despair ^/ u
to
explain
î
-î
clear,
^^
to leave, deposit
^f 3\
to cause to arrive
it).
al-Masdar?
268
x-6
ask to stop
to
->
to seek to procure (import)

to
awaken
z\
J*~**J
^ J^^-4 ^GjN**
lUUJL*! JaUL^
The only change
is in
IV.
of^
JaiLJLu*
verb,
'
whence we
i.- >
get Ja3j* arousing
>>-j*
U:* agreeing
VIII,
useful
words fif
1
*
necessitating; j~*j* wealthy
jSGu*
*
trusting
and
in
Other
J-A^ connecting.
humble; S^x- j midwife.
10.
Like J*ÛI
but changing, of course, the kasra
j^l
^ 2j* deposited
II.
*-*
Is
Yes
'
that
"*
is
<J.CvliJL
agreed upon
to fatha,
(('..(/."Sound" Tradition).
on the same form as
so with Derived Conjugations
(c. /.
63
/ and 108
5),
>
A>
& 3jl~+* a public depository.
Table of Conjugations of Assimilated Verb
Ûi
x*
>Ul
i.
/,
ai
I
2.
3-
r^-*
*}
4-
*'
5-
6.
8.
>
10
269
Lesson
115.
HOLLO W VERB.
*
1.
lijVVl Ji)l
-"*
2.
Why
so called
and means hollow, or concave.
Because the weak

3.
letter
or^
or
'
"drops out"
Explain the theory of the changes
The
(a)
<.
Ui
on the form
It is
> -"0
does the word ^3j^l mean
What
three classes are
Medial Wau.
named
in the Jussive, etc.
in the Preterite.
after the letter taken in the Present,
Revise Lesson 24
3,
4 and apply
it.
cJC;
S/C;
JC;
JJL;
LJLi
(b)
Medial Ya.
jU*
(to
The same theory
become)
to
be from
We
applies here.
but instead of
j^*0
assume
^ J^f
}
avoid two sukuns together we drop the
ya,
and get
to
A
y
*
(c)
Medial Alif.
cjU- to fear, from
lyli-
4.
But
..
^^
gives C*x>.
UU-
liiU-
do not see any difference between classes

(a) is
but
is
(b)
and
feared.
sliU
5.
What
is
the fundamental
That a weak
RULE deduced
from
3 (a) (b)
and
>
(c)
always drops out when followed by a
letter
jazmated consonant (one bearing sukun).

6.
What happens
with the Passive
The
the original radicals (see also

p-u
passive
would have
but
^-^>
the
permutation
takes place, and the kasra and ya are written
^>
wL5
"^
^_z*-
also
0>
and O-^-
^*-j
7.
being
<j
to sell, similar to jv*0
J^
been
letters
Any change
Yes
the
in
weak
was betrayed.
(Some allow j^li
).
*-*!
J&U11
letter is
replaced by hamza
l>l*
speaker%l?
t
saying (adverbial expression to
becoming
J^ going
introduce
cJÛ- afraid
^"^ sleeping
^>
The feminine
8.
Any change
(a)
regularly formed by
is
in
J^*il^
thus
>
ij)j*A*
vIÛ dying.
r.
û
:
*>
write j^^-4 guarded
(e.g.
chaste); *j^* blamed.

'
*>
(b)
Middle ya verbs change the long wau
measured
(c)
From v^*
'
but 9-j^
to
^ ear
*'
'
is
What form
does the
possible
to ya
OU^r
madar
take
Jy
j^*
^
death; ^3
-..
fear;
<*-
^0.
act of going, or pace
/>-
* articles
a saying; /-> or
^0A>
^-^ sold;
sold.
<\y
^.o-:
Generally J*^ but not always.

;
thus
fearful.
^.-
of selling
we Set VL^f* to-be-feared, venerable
and from oU- ^j^- feared,

9.
j\>:
Uj**
written
is
Ujj**
"*
we
_/l*?
^1
Middle wau verbs drop one wau
speech;
*.
repentance.
^y
act
/\^
^ $*
..
sleep
2;r
Lesson
1.
We
Hollow Verbs range themselves
said in the last lesson thai
in three classes
118.
to the
according
medial
letter of their
Imper-
'
>\
Very well
feet tense.
join
uÂ>"
how
The answer
is
that
the hypothetical form
yaqulu just as
Jji yuqicalu is actually

Show this for the three
written
classes
its
Jli
:
is
becomes
Jj>
ho
so.t/s,
(b)
*_^Jo
he
sells,
JÂJ
yaqwulu
Jj
hypothetical passive
yuqdlii.
Medial wau,
o>
(a)
the form
the sukun of the fa replaced by a vowel
is
but that becomes jî
2.
why do you say jj* when
but
ya, alif.
>t
becomes
'î
JU
Passive
>
he fears,
(c)
3.
one of these only
Inflect
"
(he sells)
Lx!
4.
Why
has the middle
Revise our
RULE
letter
disappeared from the Fern. Plural
"When
then the long vowel before
the third radical receives a sukun
it
is
into a corresponding
changed
short one because a shut syllable cannot admit a long vowel"

(
ie lt two sukuns
Turn back
mav
to 115
not occur together
and very carefully
).
revise.
This prepares
J
.
us for the
most important section of the Hollow Verb,
(jazmated, or jussive).
93 (Lesson 36
really grasped,
6).
One example was worked
There
is
no
out on page
difficulty at all if this
and many examples be analysed,
RULE
be
Inflect
"He did not say"
272
>-
>
**
"
iu
NOTE
Some
on lam yakun, same form as above.
and Al-Qur'an
of the poets
in eight instances
>
<
shorten lam yaliun
only
A^ J
he was not
UVJ
6.
Imperative of the same
7.
Jussive of
"He
(c)
0*
,1
was
still
further,
and write
not.
did not fear."

P
UUf
tit*" J
liUs
jj
J4
il^"
8.
,j^
>
"Fear!"
Imperative
lit
9.
"He
Jussive of (b)
did not
sell."
-.Jo
.v
t^j
r
.^r
^
10.
Imperative
1
i
V
\
."
"Sell."
>
!
U^
11.
^^j
Jussive of Passive
.-j j
"He
(it)
was not
sold."
1^1*) j
r
I>C
"
..
12.
Give a short
to sleep
list
of
273
Hollow Verbs
in frequent
use
274
Leseon
117.
DERIVED CONS, HOLLOW VERB.

1.
Does
Hollow Verb
the
from the strong
differ
in
the
all
conjugations
No, only
in IV., VII., VIII., X.,'i

2,
e.,
-.'V?
-f"-
-,'-
-f. .i
JJ
J**-~J
in
J**l J**
Prove that statement by examples upon the other forms
We
do so by giving examples of both wau and ya verbs
will
upon
VI.
Ill, V.,
II.,
&
which examples must be memorised.
IX.,
-*'-
,*
to straighten out
come
'>
;: >
,*
\. &A>
to cause to be-
AXJ
.*
*9
'>
to outbid another
".
~*
(at auction)
to
oppose
to
marry
t&
^.>..
adorn oneself
to
to be dissimilar
b
LJ
l^)
V UX> V LJ
.
3.
What
(a)
principles
Weak
letters
may
to be black
marked with shadda

(IX.)
by a
(II.
& V.)
or followed
undergo no change
by
undergo no change when preceded
(b) In general, weak. letters
4.
'
be inferred from these examples
consonant with shadda
(or followed)
bounds
,a-.X> /jA^>
to be white
to exceed the
letter of
prolongation
(II1.,VI
& Masdar II.)
Give the jussive of one example each of medial wau on
II.,
in, v,, vi., ix.
''i^
y/?i
j
'
]
'
>!
y,
ô
"I
V,ii_ j
"f
'
t:
5.
Now
give one example of Conj. IV. '^&
(Compare 76
3).
^ t
AS
he raised up, trans.
(or,
he stayed, intrans.
Ul
6.
What
is
observable here
The occurence
of our
fundamental Rule (115
5)
"Weak
drops out when followed by consonant with sukun."
letter
7-
What
does
275
come from
j\j*\\
comes from
? j**,
c.f.
j%.U*>
(76
4 and Il6
2).
>
8-
Watch
^Jri of the same.
'
the effect of the sukun.

""
....
**
>
'
,.
UJir
,1
r"
9-
10.
The Passive
Indicative (he will be raised)
(a)
Aw
MV* U)
uT
r
^
'
'
,
f'jU
uT
> IA>
'.5
(b) Jussive (he
was not
raised).
CUT J
Cv
pi
II.
JÛIl
^1 is
j*
^
^-"
restful
formed froinfjUul thus

;
J^*
prolonging
removing
-^
\
^
I
j*.s.\\
*fj*\
>U>
obeyed
i"/
^M
C^+*
A>
;
fatal;
^j>
j*
>
.
<^&* beneficial.
*%
**/
^ll'-^
raised;
making permanent
>
LTU* insulting; ^~J^- obedient
(L
<-V>
^-I staying
A>
>
J.
(J'3*
brought back.
removed;
\'*
U^f*
insulted;
-2/6 o
13.
Should not the Masdar take the form
JU^
It
should; but
15
not of
AS
**W
from the
&
insult;
Ac-LJÎ
A>^
is
<*1
deleted,
Is
'
obedience
^ ^
and
get ÎS[
to
avoid
and compensation made by

or stay ing;
making permanent;
3^
repetition; 5^'jJ will; S>'^j

14.
we
latter
act-of-raising
lengthening;
4JV*i
15'
the two silent alifs one
adding
t-"-^
and
'jot
of
would be the Masdar of f4*
S>\
cOlal
killing;
4TU|
removing;
4^j>
benefit (to others)
o
&
x-
direction.
management,
there any instance of a verb on this IV. form in which the
weak
Yes;
letter is treated as a strong one (i.e. an

"
*"
-o
j^& (to be lacking to anyone) thus
i
"The Glory of God
is-lacking-to
(Subject of the sentence
Wisdom
accented consonant)?
is
lacking to him
(Subject
is
is
them" (Rom.
is
i"j>ô>'.-o|
f^-JJ>
(=he
is
destitute of
"
it)
*x<
>
o^
^.
"j
the one from
"wanting" (N. of Agent of Conj.
To
23)
-uf)
\S^L\)
This root jj&
Exercise 117.
which we get the
coll
jÛ
l).
English, and vice versa
(N)
J
(Y)
Jlil"J
(r)
^
'
J__
'/
Vui
(c)
277
Lesson
CONJS:
I.
VIII.
(HOLLOW}.
"to
Give as an example of Conjugation VII. Hollow,

oneself be led
...
Supposing a passive of
written
VII.,
bow would
were possible,
it
be
^-0
Since
form
let
".
f JU>
JUJ
2.
&
VII.
118.
.*^
its
takes
passive
(if
its
passive
any) thus
(if
^&>
'
in
any)
-O
>
>
I
ÛJJ would
'
Or even
3.
^0-
3 \JiLj
.A.J
NOTE
There being but few
few taking Conj

trodden
down
(crops).
Ô^
4.
If
the Jussive
is
One
VII.
..
-*^>
transitive
other
hollow verbs, there are
example
is
'
(j*'-^
to be
^0^
..
-X^
etc.,
give the Imperative
ISU
oy*^ ^*'j JPUJi ^' in
What becomes of the
1
5.
6.
this case are alike

alif
of the
verb
ûi*
when
tractable.
inserting the
usual alif before the third radical to form the masdar

It is
i''
...
Thus ->U^
7.
VIII.
because the preceding vowel is kasra.

O
^ r
tractability
u*wJb being trampled upon.
permutated
A>
i
I
to ya
'
to increase,
be augmented (see 89
5)-
- 2780.0
Passive of
jll>-
to choose.
^->-
>
I
1
Give
10.
The
11.
of fjta\l
^^
-^
J)Uai!
C'
r
to
0^0
occasionally heard.
is
*
9.
^
>
be adorned.
what
the Imperative
Why
the shadda in the Feminine Plural of 9 and 10
That
is
Jussive being
(j
etc.
is
caused by the coalescence of the radical nun of the
verb and the nun (affixed pronoun-mark) of feminine plural.

^ >
12.
Give the Passive of
^
I'3-
14.
"r
KWf^
are alike
îu
d! s-UaSJ (Jussive)
^**j
The Masdar
p.
According
jjg-
j^y rr*
to rule.
Exs
comfort;
:
s
A>x-0
jLj>"
'
-*
choice,
option
increase
j>lojl
^x
custom,
279
Lesson 119.
CONJUGATION X. (HOLLOW).
bfcj to
I.
*/-
"
'~
Jl*2.
"..
be upright.
Jjf*J
^Jll
^til
of jLiL-l to
consult.
>
V
(J
.A.**
>
3-
of jUi-l to derive benefit.
jUll
of
v Uil
(J
v j^-l
to scorn
answer (prayer, request,
to
^t-.-.)
(J
(compare with
x-
X-O
"
3 above).
"
I*
of
ÛiJ
to
"
*"*
i
>
answer (prayer, request,
etc.)
etc.)
28o
7.
-.J
Jc-liil
Examples
*>
benefit
8.
Jjiil
>
Examples
p<*\
,>lil~*
9.
the
Is
No
to that of VII.
similar to that
is
it
S\
(j\^^ A
despising.
<S^ answered
i>UeI**
cAkl*^ possible
masdar similar
but
request)
jULJL** one-consulted ("Adviser"
profited
scoffed at
(a
JLjLL* receiving
^^^.Z^* answering
Govt
to
^JUÂ upright
cAkL~*
and VIII
^^ -
Agent of IV, and X. with
of
ness
ojLtJLul consultation
or prayer)
10.
Is
4.c-lLl^
there a verb (as
sound one
VII.
power,
we found
i>
and
Uel**
answer
a request
(to
ability.
in IV.)
treating
an accented consonant)
(i e.
Nouns
t>
iUl*J
uprights
/
VIII).
impossible.
_/v.
(contrast the
IV.
of
prayer
its
weak
(see 117
letter as
14).
Yes; ^j^jPtl^lto catechise
The
root idea
or
examine
answer
that of asking for an
is
enquiry,
(legal
(^1^)
etc.)
Another
example
to
^J^l^>\
o
&C/&c'/2'Q>
~)l
Exercise 119 B.
consider correct.
The masdars
are
A^^M^Û
^)i
A^^^^J
To English
* kt
(\)
(r)
(4, r^jLi
x
^ '^^j, v
\ujc5"
*>
s-
j
t
0-<9
o ;^
--
(See
1^
'^
l^.S
p. 281).
îL Ijîi
^
I"* *
"
'.
jl-x^J
i
I
( t )
/-.\
v^-^ ()
Exercise 119
To Arabic
a.
28 1
(see
page
280).
1.
Be tranquil
2.
How
3.
She made show as though (pretended
(fern
fear not, because thy friends are safe,
are the dead raised
that) she did not find
Note
the weight short (deficient).
verbs like wajada can
take two objects, bolh in Accusative Case).

4.
It is
not in
my
power, nor in the power of others, lo-grant
(the-granting-of) your request.

5.
His Excellency the Adviser did not grant

said that the matter
6.
my
request but
was impossible.
They requested her presence, and interrogated
but she
her,
did not consider-right (approve) their interrogation of her,

so she did not answer them with with a single
EXAMINATION PAPER
A.
To English
.,
'
i
'% j
**
^-
'
iu
>
^^^
x-
(r)
^" S
(0
<
^ C*
jui
>0
o-^
* *
Q^>
ji'
x-
*-
- *
c,
120.
'*
>> ^'
(at all).
>
word
Jii JS
^
U5U i!uy
^5C1
o
^_ jlj'J
s'iW
&/
^
I
l^r
t*
J cJ j j
(A)
J ^J
(V)
j'j^'l
'î
(A)
282
Ox-
0-*-
B.
To Arabic:
1.
She did not
2.
Despair not of the mercy of God, because He
3.
You cannot
find in her father's house
find
more than eight
coins.
very merciful.
is
any person exactly as he
is
described
by
others.
4.
We
blamed thee because thou
It is
said that the house
6.
The
children of Israel were punished because they did not
didst
was sold
at a
masc
:)
not visit us.
small price.
obey God but opposed his prophets.

7.
"Awake thou
that sleepest,
and
arise
from the dead, and
Christ shall give thee light."

8.
We
hear that the G.O.C. (General Officer
the
Army
but,
Q.
We
10. Is
C.
weigh
it
he was badly defeated.
in the balance.
not the plough more useful than the sword
Give the Imperative Plural, Masc
meanings
of
of Occupation sent to ask for re-inforcements,
in spite of all that,
will
Commanding)
of these verbs
and Fern
and the English
Lesson
121.
EYE, VOICE & EAR.

Reply
(Coll
y
(j>'}>
( ,/V-^ ji ) <_)*>
" "
*'
^!
" *
Salutation
>
&S
'
1'"
<^ ^ -^>^
Lesson 122.
1.
Why
is
Naqis
this verb so called
is
and the verb
is
2.
name because
given this
much
name
better
any of
short,
its final
But
off."
it is
tenses being missing.
its
used by some
is
come
to
being weak, has a tendency to "drop
not defective in the sense of
^M
the Active Participle of a verb
be defective
radical,
^>-
"The Verb Weak of Ending." (This constr.

Into what classes can this verb be divided ?
VI
j^JIJ*fl
expl. in 148
16).
Four, according to the classes of verbs given in Lesson 39.
Meaning
>
(c) to run,
Is
* y*
be hidden
there
any on J*jl
Any on
Ji
Give
(b) of
see 39
is
and 113
5.
very seldom met with.
of each of the above verbs
to
j^li j^* "to be magnanimous"
J*ij J*i
lil
No
s*
only example given and that

5.
''
Ico
endeavour
S>
4.
Type-Form
throw
(b) to
3.
o"
&J
(a) to call, invite
(d) to
&!
Example
(a)
^Jo
Uo
throw
**
>
is
the
(c)
of
to
585
there are very few on this form).
run (Note
"
u*
r>."
w~
(d) of
6.
What
4>. to fre
ia
is
hidden.
specially observable about the above tables
That when the weak
(i)
radical
(third)
sukun) on adding the pronominal

alif
maqsiira of both (b) and
viz, (a) to
(ii)
(b)
wau,
and
dropped out altogether, but

(Hi) That in the third fern.
dropped
thus JI^co
sing, of (a) (b)
j J^*^
What form
Always
will the
weak
is
it
is
radical
supplied.
the
weak
the fern,
dual
and
also,
weak
this
damma
in (d) a
being formed direct from the fern sing,

7-
and the
(c) to ya.
is
is
with
return to the original letter,
That before the wau of the masc. plural
radical
jazmated
is
the alif of (a)
affix,
(c) all
(c)
dropped there
also.
radical take in the Derived Conjs.
except in the 3rd. sing
where
past,
it
is
^
t,
(See Lesson 127) but long

8.
Is
(a)
its
the
weak
before an affixed pronoun
Noun
radical dropped in forming the
Indefinite
place
alif
In the
Nom
and Obi
shown by tanwin kasra
cases,
thus
it
is
<_iU-
(b)
Defined
The missing
radical
letter
^l*
(c)
(j U^l
The
,>IUI -y^- ^M-'
Feminine
is
LfU- Lc-L*
Jj
&\
f\
^~-
Ll j Lc-l
restored in the definite
is
:>
**
thus
of
Agent ?
omitted and
f{
But the Accusative retains the weak
'
$*j>
f-
(S^^
fully-declined
the
thus
Redeemer.
<-.cta
<-^b <Pi
286
Lesson
1.
What
The
noteworthy about the passive of the past of
is
fact that the
wau replaced by
it is
2.
weak
ya.
radical ya
The reason
preceded by a kasra (63
Give the passive of
How
(a)
is
From
verbs
coalesces with
we
whose
the
get
restored,
for the latter
and the weak

obvious, for
is
5).
~*\ formed
J^ftill
is
Co and
-.*
3.
123.
radical
final
wau,
is
long wau of the form,

invited,
Also
called.
this
radical
and instead of
>-->
hoped
for;
pardoned.
(b)
From
verbs with final ya the long
to coalesce with the final ya, and the
we
get
**
^jj thrown-down
JO ^
^-^
wau
damma
O
built
^x-
*.
is
to kasra
What
(i)
is
to be noted here
There
is 710
alif after the final
wau
thus
(fruit etc).
4.
5,
ya
{^-^ gathered
>
to
permutated
of the masc. sing.
2nd
In
(//)
fern, sing,
,*
287-
)+
3rd and 2nd masc.
(Hi) In
result that the masc.
of
and
c-j^Jail
7.
What
do you notice here
What
the
^^x.)
weak
pi.
one wau
is
fern, are alike in
omitted, with the
those two cases.
to wci'p (like
6.
^5v._-
becomes
radical
is
2/0
dropped from the 3rd and 2nd
masc. plu, but retained in the feminine.

of
8.
to bs
pleased (like
L:
'
^>&
.
'0
What
Q.
ii
is
J*
obsened here
That the fatha of

That the
fatha,
There
(iv)
En the
diphthong
(
ija
and the
(Hi)
,'
..
./
is
of
alif
2nd
J,*i>
changes
fern. sing,
maqsura drops
forms
to
a
diphthong with the
out.
an exactly similar one in 3rd and 2nd
3rd and 2nd masc. plural the
fern. plu.
wau forms
a wau-
(au).
The student should now spend some time comparing and
contrasting the three types presented

10.
Give the passive (the same for
all
(i.e.
in
...1
and
three classes).
and
,;___).
11.
What do you
We
observe
The reason
is
maqura
very similar to the active of
^j
is
L>
that the
each case.
in
there any special form for the
pardon
the reason
for the similarity of the permutations
No, various forms are taken
is
8 above), but distinguished

by the servile
final letter is alif

Is
What
observe that the passive
fatha verbs,
12.
288
Masdar
vU j
good pleasure.
hope
*Uo
call, petition;
289
Lesson 124.
I.
Give examples of each of these three types
LJ>
2.
By comparing
wau
(i) that the

fatha,
the three types together
or
of
other distinguishing
without any difficulty

(ii) that in the
the dual),
we observe
and the ya of
in the Subjunctive.
(^ )
mark
nun
with the subjunctive
both take
is
fern. sing,
Why
is
Because
maqura
is,
after
carry any vowel (compare I/

4.
in
the vowel of the subjunctive not observable in

(
alif
and
apocopated, as always happens
(Hi) the retention of the nun in fern, plu. agrees with 30

3.
the
of the subjunctive,
masc. plu. (also in the 2nd

the
all,
form of
6 with 52
Give the Jussive of the same three verbs

>
4).
alif,
(c).
-r ) ?
and cannot
ago
.0
5-
What
is
the great distinguishing feature of the Jussive
Ox-
iLJ
" x
6,
~
.
.>.
^*A>
the deletion of the
weak
letter.
*"
Give the Imperative of the same three verbs
(b)
/.
Now
recapitulate Ismul-Fa'il (122

x-
8).
>
A
(a)
'
L,
i>o
8.
Ol.r VI "the coming things" or "the coming ones."
Ol
LTl
rVl
it?"Sli
9.
(c)
Weak Verbs
Exercise 124
used
in Scripture.
Then
40, for
revise 122
examples
124.
a.
Masc, and Fern., of JÛJl

^J
to fear, weep, kneel, be ashamed,
Write the Arabic, Sing, and

of the following verbs
Plu.,
flow, pardon, be pleased, throw, call, build.
Exercise 124
J/^Def:
Missionary students should study Isaiah ch.

of
Indef
b.
Correct 124
a.
by classifying under
7,
a,b,c.
To be
Exercise 124.
i*
} '
*J>S U*
J
<>*
,
>^
*
***
A,
->}
^^
î; iii
4]
o^^
^
~
_ o ^
--
JO
studied with the Lexicon,

'
'
201
oUi^l
i,
i^
1;
^lt
js j^vi
q
^-oo
>^
ivi
\"
CA) ^
j>
\*'>
>
'
\
,A
u,
''
^^
1-
(j
^-e^
>
' '
:,
Jd ^JL--* t
Jit CJjFuZ'J^
\fl
JV
Translation
Sf
^!x;-
..!^
CiJlt Sj
\.M
-K
^1
^,XO
I"
JUJÎ
J*X*?
I
,
\
>
4J
^
<J
a time a lion grew old and weak and had no longer

any power over the wild beasts, and so he wished to scheme
He pretended to be sick and took
for himself in order to live.
refuge in one of the caves. Whenever one of the wild beasts
came to visit him he killed and ate him inside the cave. One
day a fox came to him and he stayed in the door-way and
"
saluted him saying "How are you, O King of the Beasts ?
The Lion said "Why do you not come in 'Father of the little
fortress?'" The Fox said "Sir, that is exactly what Jhad
decided to do until I saw many foot-marks coming into the
cave, but I do not see even one foot-mark coming out again."
The meaning of this story is that a person should hot rush
into a matter without taking time to consider it. (The Arabic
nick-name given to the Fox is an allusion to his sagacity).
Once upon
Exercise 123
b.
(After Lesson 123
U.
U*
page 283),
Jj
d>.
>
t
a
*
>
*
^
I*
*
I
lyj^lJLi
^f
J.O.* <^.j
I
(^JJ
j ^flU- O.'/ij
(
-,
,.
(^Ji
(r)
"
^^ *
I
(Jjil
(t)
^
<jl
;x
si
()
(^)
~ 202
1.
What
Lesson 125.
"DOUBLY WEAK Verbs"?
are
Verbs whose radicals contain two weak
letters
i.
e.,
wau and
few examples of verbs trebly weak,

i. e. consisting of hamza,
wau, and ya, One example will be
given at the end of this lesson),
(There are also a very
a ya.
2.
How
They
(a)
do Arab Grammarians classify these verbs

class
<_Lii (wrapped, or complicated)
^JUA\ (Lafif-joined) i.e.,
jjjl
Exs
them as
to fold
to
ji-il
(b)
Exs
be strong
to guard,
We shall,
126,
hamza and one weak

What,
in brief,
has
Class
(a)
Class
(b) loses its
and also
4.
of
5.
of
its
is
to ya
(3**
having wau and ya apart)
keep
ju
<
**
,> j
,
study the classes of verbs containing
letter.
the
method
of treating classes (a)
ya defective, but
its final
ya
be adjacent, to follow closely
Lesson
in
having wau adjacent
thus
up
(Lafif-Separated
to
wau
wau
"to fold
"to
quite strong
(c
f.
up"
be strong"
Ujjy
(b)
Lesson 113)
Defective verb (124
in the Jussive as a
its
as an. Assimilated verb
and
4).
of
6.
r
U
^l
of
7.
\" U ^*J
"
i
*A>
U *&
8.
l/>
Let us
now
to Class (b) which are Assimilated and

Give the Past, comparing with 122.
turn
also Defective.
X*
Jj>
LJ 3
10.
For the pjUali one example of fj^li will suffice.

Because the lexicon shows that they are formed alike.
Why
LL
LJT
U"
11.
When
the servile letter
deleted to form the Imperative will
is
there be only one letter in the verb
That
so
is
but a ha
sometimes
is
Learn both ways
affixed.
,>-
o*
,0-v
4f
$.
12.
What happens
It is
weak" verb
to the "trebly
^^
inflected exactly as
two
of the present tense the
^j
"to take refuge"?
except that in the
first
form a madda (see 104
alifs
person
:
3).
C/C
UJI
I.
God
the
save the King
Queen
3.
Success
[Long]
our native land
to
the air used to take refuge in
its
it
(this).
7.
who have
ye
and your families [against]

will 'out,'
Exercise 125
and
a fire
branches.
with him, but did not overcome him.

follows
4.
Long live
The birds of
5.
She wrestled
live the King).
6.
2.
Another chapter
believed, guard yourselves
whose
fuel is
men.
8.
will not be suppressed.
b.
'J-'J
SOU
(r)
t'^J
'^3
(v)
^;o
U jU
.ox.
|^
(A)
(t)
^Ju
(A)
&'
r
i.
ljl
Truth
I.
What
295
Lesson 126.
"DOUBLY WEAK"
are the other
Those containing a hamza, and

three types
/a,
(a) like
and are also "hollow"
of lessons 104
(b)
Those
and
like
Those
like
They refused
2,
What
The
(c./.
41
+*->
J^^ J
verb,
What happens
hamzated
4-
*
I
is
C+\
>
^\
1
'
etc.,
^Jt
is
^^
and the Imp: ^>l
similarly treated.
is
and JT
s
weak verbs with hamzated lam
These are of three sub-divisions

;
A-
115).
Agent are
*. middle ya
the second
the jussive
;j
to the
to return
'jj
x-
Lesson
<
*fjj>(j' [pj* 6'
"
"to turn, or return,"
of
>9"
to refuse (jjtf
V-î V^
for ^>jl
to return to their lessons.
masc. being <J
The Nouns
l^jZ
and J^ C
^ T*
Hollow
which have
come
"
w
are-the principal parts of
3rd
are oJ
They
or ya.
they accordingly follow the laws
*>- to
J" t
The present being
3.
to turn
'
wau
115.
(c)
3jji
also a
verbs?
and
*lij i Ci
with
4^*j t\+H
middle
middle wau
alif.
Their chief
parts are
shown
Uli
-If
in this table, to
which
is
added
(see
below)
Li
290
4.
While the above
\^
use,
* [>
more
will
fully
be generally
sufficient,
on account of
and also the tendency
its
give the verb
exceedingly
to error in spelling
it
common
fif
-
r?
>~
This imperative
is ?io^
used,
JUT
(87
5)
being substituted for

w
5.
Is
the passive
Yes
as
it
is
^^ in actual
Thus
i^j>.
use, similarly 10 Jj-J'I
a Prepositional Passive, only understandable
when read with

used.
it,
a preposition, the
She was brought
mas?, sing,
l^
Hell was brought (Qur'an)
^^
they
is
invariably
were brought
297
"
he
"to cover," with
See the passive of
4ê> '^J>
Jc>
,*
r*r
she fainted ( lit. "was covered over her")
fainted
LÛ- ^le-
J>
we may use lAli
or
T^c-
(fJLi dl
c. /.
6.
Is
there
any
Yes, one
really Irregular
and that one
as a matter of fact,
The Imperative
is
it
I).
much used
as
any
in the language.
thus
but,
rejects that alif-hamza altogether, form-
The
instead.
(Indicative)
as
Well done
ought, by the rules, to form
to see,
ng
is
Verb
jji
Preterite
not used
j\&>\
is
similar to
*j
being used instead.
and Passive)
(Subj.
>
(Jussive)
vs.
ks.
k's-
Jfm
(Imp. not used)
'
~.
cXP
I
j
-2 987,
What
It is
It
is
^j
the specially idomatic use of
is
used with I
used
[>
1.
yJ^lr
a.
wonder,"
it
possible
another,
thus,
wonder
e. g.
you wish
Then she
or, Is
Interrogative Sentences
in
J* Have they met one

To Arabic
(Past, c.f. 6 1
said, If
2) to
if
God
will.
come with me.
see her,
you do not bring
do not know what
4.
"I
All these affictions will turn to good,
2. If
3.
mean
principally
Exercise 126
O, to
(lit.
come-with) him you
will
happen to you.
When the servant saw her, he went running, until he
reached the king, and he said to him, O my master, come
and look
at
her
when she
so the king went in to her, and
saw him she screamed and swooned.

5.
Creator of heaven and earth and of
all
things visible and
invisible.
6.
Then bring ye
7.
They
said,
[position]
a sura of the like of
'Hast thou
come
it
to us
which we found our fathers
("It" refers to Qur'an).
to
turn us from that
in ?'
And Pharaoh
...
me every knowing magician

To English
said 'Bring ye to
Exercise 126
b.
(sorcerer)'.
i
1
Jvtl Jl
'$
Ûj!
*i
'p*
(\)
jiôi
0)
(r)
U
tC
Ufr
x
j^j
D Lj
xx u
I>
.y
(Y)
\ /
299
Lesson 127.
DERIVED FORMS OF 'DEFECTIVE*
>ui
**\
2.
3-
vU
H/'
5-
6.
*U!i
7-
8.
JL.
I.
u**
1
What do you
That the past
(b)
This
(c)
The noun
(Jamma
(e)
forms ends
in
maqsfira becomes ya in the present, and
is
and imperative, leaving kasra
having fatha, takes
of object,
indeclinable
of
5), III.
II.
substituting
alif
maqura,
IV., VII., VIII.,
weak
The Madarof V. and
rj" O
weak
letter (c.f.
X. are similar to one another

letter
becomes hamza
VI. apocopates the ya of
></ <Jy and

,<jA
^
of the pseudo-passives are not usable
(e.
x-
^LtiT
x
74
:
7).
after
(revise 77:4,5)
**
Some
(Defective) always takes the form
substitutes alif for the
the servile alif the
apo-
of agent ends in tanwin-kasra, as a substitute
The madar
Madars
(f
is
The noun
(See 73
10.
apocopated ya which should have borne tanwin-
for the
which
of all the Derived
in the jussive
copated
(d)
-.
J*>1
observe ia the above table
(a)
alif
'
g. VII).
300
2.
Useful examples of
jlxJj^J
a prayer-place
7 foot,
and 88
II)
are
etc.)
including words in the table
Vocabulary,
to be transfigured
to eat
63
a school chapel),
bend (railway,
a curve, or
3-
(e. #.
(c.f.
to
noon-meal
pray
to deliver, save
to take supper
to clarify
to mutually agree
to
^c>\
to
comfort
^**
come consecu-
tively
'V
.
-
\*
**
to
pay attention
to
cry aloud
,-
(to)
i
\
\ r
(*->) (Jt-J
to curve
Û>
end
to be decided,
to imitate
to be disclosed
to blandish
to be guided
(by God)
to execute
to be content (with)
^0
to seek to
-0
to fulfil (a
go far
vow)
(research)
^0
"
"
J _j~)
to consider rich,
^
t
-0
~
L> J-^**
I
1
'
to
show
to please
to dispense with
4.
Exercise 127
is
intended to be an exercise
students are not expected to memorise

takes
much
time,
do one paragraph.
all
in
Weak
Verbs;
the words.
If it
(Isaiah 40
Exercise 127.
j^
-""X
<^
i"^
j^
ij
jl
tf^
>
,
Tt
"
*i<^
T. 'r\f
y_ uj jr. ii^
^fir*">
Ju-J by^
*\*\>
-i
^J
V"
'
>
l3^ >
>
'Jfl>
>'.*
c
--
i^*^
*
SV
\:
^^j
4^'fi
'
^'-^
P Lr
"
.^4)1
'''>
oy^
i"I
[}>
>'
>
ii
jVai
.00
Jt
"
ILS-
si
û-
^*"*"J3
t Syj
'J'-
T^jlÔ^.Ulj
l;vJ'(j
'
1-17).
>o
'~
ji^
i^&''^r~
u o^ C^j j& ^g& j
e>j~*^.*
t?^'
jr j
5j
301
M -'
&
.>*
\*~
^^ jJU Jy j
>^ >^-0 7 ,". ->

^^ Ajj^n^y*
>">
.
''
(j^^? o^^X*
*u
>
^X'O
"~
^Ss^
>*
K
u
T.'-'Cr
Us2 j
,x
.^
<îj^j
302
Lesson 128.
NUN OF CORROBORATION.
1.
Having now completed our study of the accidence or inflection

(^s*) of both sound and non-sound verbs, all we have to
study -before completing Syntax (y)
Broken Plurals and of Derived Nouns.
two lessons, the
there remain
first
the remainder of
is
But, before
which
of
doing
this,
will be occupied
with the "Nun of Corroboration," and the second with "Verbs
and Blame."
of Praise
2.
What
It is
is this
Nun
of Corroboration (uT>Jl) ufldl
a letter affixed to the verb to render
jy ?
more emphatic, and
or, if the lam which
it
thus can often be translated by "verily,"
should then be prefixed to the verb
translate
it,
"never," or "not at
translated "verily," the
is
When
nun may be rendered, "surely."
used in the negative,
Lesson 29 2
all." In
this state of the verb the Energetic (or
(c),
called
Emphatic) Mood, that
The
being the usual term employed by European writers.
Arab Grammarians do not speak

study
is
JL$"l:)i
any "mood," but simply

(This Arabic word
as a sub-section of the verb
jy
masdar of
the
of
etymologically
J$T\
Conj.
jS~\:
II.,
to affirm, or corroborate,
but usually written
oJf^r
and
is
).
3.
What
parts of the verb can have
a5^l:il
affixed
jy
Only the
jUll (incl. Jussive of Prohibition) and the Imperative, and only if special emphasis is required, as after the use
of an oath.
4.
What two
It
in
forms
may have
may
this
nun take
"'
shadda and fatha ^y
which case the nun
is
^Jj
"he will surely strike,"
said to be
JflJ?
consist of a single nun with sukun, which
heavy
is
or
called <L&.
it
may
jy
light
nun.
5.
How
is
it
affixed to the verb
The
verb always (except as in 6 and 8) takes fatha before
a.5^:Ji
jy
but the apocopated
weak
before sukun, naturally gets back
verb,
which has
its letter
now
lost a letter
that the
sukun
has yielded to fatha

6.
What happens
If it is
(a)
an
to
alif
thus
it
remains
of plural,
we
etc.,
left,
but an
The
"light
we
get
alif is inserted
dropped before
is
* *
we
write
this
fvlSO because
nun cannot be used
nun
^'
sufficient indication of the plural,
is
all.
before
get
instead of tj**lSClI
(d)
jl
from
^> "
not throw at
.,x
thus from S+2***
The wau
(c)
also
is
O
it,
^ Do
UJU, j"
any barrier between the radical and nun
The feminine nun
(b)
303
and
the
thus
damma
to avoid 2 sukiins.
after the long alif, etc., in
dual, etc.
7.
What vowel
precedes J^jiH
Usually fatha, but in 8

8.
What happens
and
(a)
Jj>
(b)
we
find
damma, and
kasra.
verb taking fatha in p jUll

*- O ~
to the defective
(a)
wau-damma
takes
It
for the plural
j^J
fatha over the second radical.

*
Ya-kasra for 2nd
(b)
on second
9.
How
is
fern,
sing
vowel led
<UJI jjJI
It is
its
is
it is
11.
Learn
12.
And
is
this
these
its
fatha
given kasra in the dual and in the
we have
noticed above.
lam which usually accompanies
the
the lam of
vowel
retaining
feminine plural, both of which
What
"
radical.
Usually with fatha, but
10.
/o
(j^y
its
retaining
(oath) to
qasam
mean
it ?
Observe that
"verily."
fatha, not kasra.
example
(a)
(b)
>
*>
.
^
"
>
V
^/
"
Nj
"^ V*
s-
.-
304
TRANSLATION.
Exercise 128
he got as
words "Thee do we worship," the thought then came
to him that he was worshipping sincerely, but he heard an
It is
related that a worshipper once started to pray
far as the
sounded inside) "You are a liar, you

"
He repented and separated
only worship created beings.
This
himself from other men and once more started to pray.
time when he reached as far as the words "Thee do we worship,"
he
the voice sounded "It is a lie, for you worship your wife"
arose and divorced his wife and once more began to pray.
When he got as far as the words "Thee do we worship," the
voice sounded "You lie, for you only worship your wealth"
he bestowed his wealth (gave it away as voluntary arms) and
"
once more started to pray. When he reached the words Thee
do we worship" the voice sounded "it is a lie, for you worship
he arose and gave it away except that which
your clothing"
was indispensable. Once more he started to pray, and this
inner voice
a voice
(lit.
when he reached
"You are
time
true,
the
are sincerely worshipp-
you
[whether the story be
or not].
iM
<)y
'
**/
"00^.,
iti
îLUl
^^
jj
i^ .1
'
iiCi >
Ji
>S CJi SU
^"^
Ll ^>JO
^
JL*>
ji
right, for
Anyhow God knows best
ing this time."
we worship"
the words "Thee do
voice sounded
o j-*
* s
J
\i
'
>^
J^ >':> U> o
*
(C^*^
^r *
"
..
*U-A>~
>J
JÛ
>} CT pui j
j^
jj tu ju
> o
-x
.vj
ui
^J
li
c.5^^
ft,
4)1
\y
'
\
"-ttU >>
'
305
Lesson 129.
VERBS OF PRAISE & BLAME, AND WONDER.

1.
What
are the
Jli
%JJIj p-!xjl
called in Arabic
first
'* t
'
I.
Now we know
'^~
is
"jo
the masdar of
Only two
are there
of each
feminine O^.j but
good"
r\\*
and the word
meaning
to censure, or blame.
the verb expressing approbation
is
not otherwise inflected.
"how good
(or
is").
is
^.*J
take a
it
may
It
means, "he
second verb with similar
--'
What
word
with the sukun as shown
usually written
3.
*s
*Jij
\
How many
is
the
>>-
2.
which
is ljL>.
quite indeclinable.
is
verb expresses censure
(jJLj
which takes JU~I> but no other
be translated, "how bad

4.
What
RULE
An
is."
occasional alternative
rules govern the use of these verbs
The
I.
This verb
inflection.
may
iC*
is
subject or (agent) of the veib
'2*
or
^Jo
should either have the article or be in construction with a noun
which has
or
it,
This subject
Exs
is,
may be
word U before another word.
the
Nominative Case.
-
of course, in the
A>0
Good
it
is
the slave, Zaid
Jo
>
..
j JuJ
^JX
\
Bad
is
what you have done
*""
^JLi
^Jo
RULE
If
2.
an indefinite noun
Accusative,
and
is
called
This accusative, tamyiz,
One example
Sterling translates
it
"Zaid
is
it
"He
used, this
be
now
is
good as-a-man."
must be put
an understood
Jrv-C to
will
will suffice
is
pronoun.
Lesson
fully explained in
(
^l^j
Jb
good man,
(e,f.
59
j "J>
is
Zaid"
in the
Jb
;
177.
j Û-j
but
"/Ai
render
4, 5).
RULE
3.
fern,
dual or plural
The
subject of
*>
andJo may
*>*' > '
RULE
4.
jj
Juk*j
followed by
itself
be
A>
Jb
Ci
combines with
it
in the masc..
306
5.
What
else
be studied in this lesson
to
is
Verbs of Admiration or Wonder ^>t*l)

6.
How many measures

^ '*
Two
II
\i C
:
7-
Measure
Most
are there
Ui
4>
can any verb take this form
I,
verbs can
active
triliteral
those
certainly
'Li
in
expressing qualities, but not those signifying colours, because

the form for colour
8.
What
is
function
of this measure, c./

jJz>-\ j+>-\
is
by the word
is fulfilled
This word
an indefinite noun which takes the place of subject, for
the verb
the following noun in the accusative.
Jil governs
How
generous
is
Zaid
How
beautiful
is
the view
How
good (goodly) he
L)u
j ^ p
is
'<uJ>.
^-
9.
How
gentle (kind) she
How
excellent his father
How
is
Measure
is
L^L)
is
used
II.
generous she
is
That
thing-wondered-at 41^:>clil
How
&[>
is
is
Lî
and the
Imperative,
L,
v
good (goodly) he
How
wise they are
How
excellent Zaid
is
put in the genitive after
How
L/
5^
<,
*.J*>.
j^ .y
*Li
ry
I
is
How
10.
Can
strong his father
inserting
'
__
jl5
in the past
-
in
Form
*0 ^
excellent
wonder express wonder
the verb of
-
is
was Zaid
between
^^
-i!
C.
and
î
<L,
l>
<x
^Jiil
Yes
by
-f.
Thus
How
307
Exercise 129
1.
O JEHOVAH
name
O
2.
To Arabic
a.
of
the
Hosts
Lord
up
(i. e.
And how
3.
How
5.
God
will save
them
Thy
He
day, as a
in that
crown
as the stone (jewel) of the
rather,
beautiful
is
(Zech. 9
How
good He
is
16, I/).
had he
his lot (luck)
died,
Alexander the great had.
glory as
Al-Hariri said in praise of the dinar
'How
who have been
not count those

(i. e.
is
happy would have been
And do
of God
glorious
sweet are thy dwelling places,
as a standard) over his land.
having as much
4.
How
their
flock his people,

lifted
how
(Lord) our Lord (God)
in all the earth
Lord
And
it is
precious
!'
killed in the path
"Holy War") as dead, rather [they
are] alive
with their Lord.

6.
The Professor was

tutors
Exercise 129
crowd of
invited to a banquet which a
and guests a'tended.
To English
b.
xx-
r~
-#
"
^>
--
0^--
jU"^j| ^>r !u J ^^
"
x
I
**^
^1^
>^
kj 3li (t)
"x
I
-^
tf-
tkf
/
J,
^ Jx ^
^^ vH
.
"
>
(o)
/
s.
NOTES on (i)
(a) ^.1 "O," can only be used
(b) We have before remarked that the vocative
:
when
it is
the antecedent of the Construct.
before the definite article <J

is
See 180
placed in the Accusative

3 (6).
308-
EXAMINATION PAPER
A.
To Arabic
1.
Said the Khalifa
2.
Repent
3.
You must
4.
It is
6.
When
me
to visit the city.'
and ask forgiveness of God.
me
take supper with
pay attention
How
"Get up and go with
man
true that the
5.
130.
to
did not
it.
excellent that
the girl
to-night.
related the story to me, but
man
is
heard Hasan's story,
she cried out and
swooned.
7-
She came
8.
Sell
as for him, he did not come.
what thou
hast,
and give
to the poor, then
come and
follow me.
B.
To English
C.C,
O
\
(t)
(r)
Ju
'
i
u.
olTG
(o)
i^
(X)
"
(7.
Give the Noun of Agent

(sing,
and
plural)
0-0
Ûll
i,
(A)
both masc. and
fern.
and meaning, from the following verbs

si.
-9
309
PART
VII.
-Lesson
131.
ORIENTAL PROVERBS.
1.
Knowledge
man
to a
is
in the breast
like a
2.
The testimony
3.
Man
crown
sun
in the sky,
and trains'
to a king.
of actions
(consists) of his
like the
is
better than the testimony of men.
is
two smaller [organs], his heart and
his
tongue.
people acted justly the judge would
4.
If
Actions are only [reckoned] by intentions (= "Take the will
rest.
for the deed").

6.
Do
(
/.
8.
not level the high with the low, but the low with the high
down
"Don't level
promise
is
but level up").
a debt to the freeman.
Cut your coat according
to
your cloth,
(lit.
According
to
the size of your bed stretch your foot).

9.
10.
"Impossible with
Most
fire
men
is
possible with God."
comes from small sparks ("Despise not small
aus
iji
things").
;,
l^
(Y)
(0
JUl
liiji
i\
(e)
jU V
(A)
^îj^jftjii
(Y)
J.1^11 .,L J. J.I jll,

jj;
ft
(A)
JUI
3io
Lesson 132.
MORE BROKEN PLURALS.

1.
In
Lessons 132138, which may be sub-divided
student's time,
we
shall study the rest of the
by the "Broken Plural."

four measures
<&*$
J*3
We
JUi
of Paucity," because they
measures taken
said in Lesson 49
and
Ûi
to suit the
are called "Plurals
be used for things numbering
may
three to ten, provided that a second form exists for
above
2.
Which
Jl*5
3.
ten.
Learn
If
no second form, then the
of these has been studied
in
Lesson 50
first
numbers
one does for both.
that leaves us
this vocabulary, Singular
that the
^l*i
<i.*9
and
<L3
and Plural
together.
Form
l*i
3"
>
6.
How
do you explain
The second and
Li-5
(palms)
third radicals being alike,
takes place and
<*Jw-j
"doubling"
^
I
I
becomes
ILi-j
*>'*
7.
What
is
the next measure to be learnt
There are very few nouns using

could (and often do) take (VA*i
youth
ii.i
this plural,
instead.
and
all
of these
312
Lesson 133.
I.
Our
next measure
Because
Ud
Why
easily learnt.
is
consists entirely of nouns of colour and defect (or

ô^
> ê
it
adornment) whose masc. sing,
Turn
to 58
Then
learn the following
is
on
(i
and
fern.
4 (b) and]revise the examples given.

:
313
A>-
But
to
mean
The
is
an exception
\y
to the rule.
a "^ or a turn
^.
manner
service
in
of life
4.3
is
Is
this
word,
now used
JjjJl
The Great
There are a few others
->.:*'
(S^f 7T
Ui
^ ^50
,>
next plural form
singulars
No
(#. #.
v.-:
->.
^>y r
5.
>
<L3
of the measure
nation or "power"
Powers)
>
A>-
3j^
is
it
^".
Ui
usually take
**
j*
a village.
analogous
for plural.
to
J*$
Yes
3M
3.
But
J"
Yes, but
l>
(seller)
it is
JuL
plural of Jo
4.
has a hamza
permutated ya, from

JU-*
(written jl*
Study these examples of
adulterer
<L*i
Jo
~ VV pl>
a chief) is o
Similarly,
the
315
2.
Examples
ruler
of
316
Lesson 136.
1.
We
come
to plural
^-e;
and
jÛd
jÛd
A> > O
measures affixing
alif
What
That the four words
is
the
learnt
first
in
JÔ
plural
2.
in
iUi
all
take
another
large fish
These are
^^0
thing to note about j^L*
Lesson 132 as forming one

J
in
Give examples of these and of others.

wall (inclosing)
and nun.
6.
We
317
conclude this lesson with <JU$ which
What
syllable plural.
The shadda upon
is
observable
is
a form of quadri-
the ya in both singular
and
plural.
Exs
5.
What is known
It
appears to be a variation of <JCi for the two words
and jl^SCL' intoxicated
lazy,
6-
o1
used for
a "distributive
one,"
unique.
What
or,
which may take
numeral"
in the
fe
*l
letter for
(6)
and one or two others
jWU
which the tanwin kasra
Three very common
triliteral
is
all
Examples
collar-bone
is
(j&5
and of
of these have a
-0\*i
weak
a substitute.
nouns
\*
also adopt this plural without any obvious reason.

7.
It
(a) Certain words of the measure ,l*i as
as
either.
case of (j'slji "one by
jUi
singulars form their plural in
and
319
Lesson 138.
SUP PL. TO QUADEI8YLLABIC.
I.
What words
use the measure

>
(a)
originally, even
Many words which came
J- ô
if
centuries ago,
%,
from foreign sources, as

the Persian
(b) substantives
more than four
more than four

Caesar
^L^
letters
letters.
(c)
a professor, or teacher,
and adjectives generally,
many
relative adjectives,
from
if
when
of
of
320
4.
What
It is
is
the
called
''measure/'
When
name
name
of the final form
&j^^,j+* i~^ Now 4i^ means

and f-^-J^
</*-"*
"form" or
mearis "the last of the plurals.
*'
applied to the real "Plural of Plural," the reason for the

is
obvious
it
is
now
however, used
in a
general
way
denote what Europeans call the Quadrisyllable

Plural, whether
"
^
5.
Can
Yes
the "Plural of Plural" have a regular ending

;
the regular feminine one.
way, road CAS ^

6.
f,
Mention
7-
7-
Thus
7-
few quite irregular plurals (from obsolete sings. ,etc.)
Plural
321
READING EXERCISE.
fr>*a>-i
jw
T /^ aftove was set
fit
London Univ
TRANSLATION.
Exercise 138
Al-Rashid's was one of the best of reigns and the fullest of

events
and
the most
covering the greatest extent.

part of
regents.
and
the world
No
legists
writers,
history
levied taxes
and the owner
of
(doctors of canon law)
boon-companions
Be used
most abundant
also he
He
gift
was himself
to
savants, poets
Quran-readers, judges,
and
door
bestow upon every one of them

lift
him up
a distinguished
classes
many
of his
andi singers as gathered at the
and poetry and sound of
was respected by
upon the greater,
Egypt was one
other Khalifa gathered so
of Al-Rashid.
the
and beneficent, besides
magnificent
taste
and masses
to the highest rank
man, a
poet, relator of
and discrimination, and

alike.
(*Soin Original
!)
Lesson 139,
THE COLLECTIVE.
1.
What
is
the
of the expression
meaning
*+>.
~*J
X~
'
"noun of plural"
means
there
another
is
"like-plural" (semi-plural)
name ^>.
which
<u
each of these expressions
denotes a "collective," but the latter one
used for express-
is
ions from which a "noun of unity" can be formed (see 7 below).

2.
What
forms
the collective take
may
A/*
There are three principal ones
?
A,'
"
"
*}
Uiand Li
l*i
Some gram-
marians (not the best) even classify these among the "Broken
Plurals."
of
3.
them
Take
(Possibly
in
the
some students have noticed my omission
Lessons 132
first
But see 133
137.
A>.-
sheep.
j
A? 8
Ui
we
find
*C*
Ul
,,
Now
6).
two.
Upon measure
Upon
a deputation
J^j
*>>.
"One
arriving" as an envoy, but any
of single arrivals will not
which has altogether
make up
a deputation
a collective idea
about
and
these cannot honestly be called plurals
JUMj signifies
*".
servants, retinue
jkA>-
,,
people
y>
True,
number
(delegation),
Also v^jT j
ir<
is
0^^
a single
mounted person
the collective sense.
or passenger, but
Similarly
oU-
'^
j caravan, has
a servant,
has several
,.
forms of plural, but *j.
not one of them.
is
This word
is
reserved for the collective idea of "household staff," or "retinue."

-
A>
4.
The measure
J~*^
A>
or fine powder,
^J-J^ flour,
form were
examples
is
5.
is
adding
But even
classified as a plural form, there are only

:
Ju^c- slaves
and
s-
But
a collective.
there not
j\.+.>~
if
this
two useful
donkeys.
s>
to singular
sort of
?
Yes
collective (or plural)

;
this
formed by
applies principally
to
the
-3*3
*>4'
J.,*'
Noun
Intensity (Lesson
of
i!U>-^-JU^> camel-driver;
form
6.
is
What
<OUi
146)
U*i *-
JUi workman
r-
JW*
This
radish-seller.
often used in the colloquial dialects.
the ending in
is
as in
"<&
booksellers
Ml
This
the collective plural of the attributive in
IG
be studied in 144. Suffice

is
long word
adding
Ljyi
7.
What
it
7-
is
to the
it
j*
that
say here that
the
when
"Noun
Thus
attributive.
to
Moors
*^fcu,
^-
trees,
fruit,
vegetables,
no plural but have a collective ?+>kind be required
is
Single
is
the attributive
of Unity," or Individuality"
insects,
a single article of that
collective.
which
usual to form a "collective" plural by
watchmakers io U-U-
birds,
generally require
if
to
ya-shadda of the
meant by
means
is
it
This singular
is
called o-b-
J'
^^
'
etc.
4-Ji
affixed to the
324
READING LESSON,
(
TRANSLATION.
Exercise UO.
The
1.
^ JO
nights are pregnant, they bring forth wonders (The usual
form of
proverb is
"bring forth every sort of wonder").
Previous Sultans have had a splendid record (lit, have been
2.
this
owners of white hands) in encouraging benevolent enterprises.

There are many examples, e. g. they
God have mercy upon
them
took to visiting the hospitals and refuges in their king-
dom
distributing valuable presents
and orphans.
among
the sick,
wounded
were extremely sad at

their deaths for they were an example to all kings and rulers.
The whole of the students struck work and left the institutions
3.
In truth, their subjects
and joined themselves to the mob in the streets,

booksellers, labourers and unemployed workmen, etc.
of learning
pedlars,
the head-masters of the schools issued orders to return
When
.
they refused to return and passed a resolution,

was necessary to continue the strike, and
was incumbent to send a deputation of the
to their lessons,
firstly,
that
it
secondly, it
inhabitants to have the honour of interviewing the ministers
in their offices.
32$--
EXAMINAT10N PAPER
A.
Translation to Arabic
Two women had
140.
each a child but one died, and the mothers
then quarrelled (disputed) over the remaining one.
who decided
(upon him be peace)
the prophet David
to
(sentence) for the elder
woman, but
(greater)
They came
as they
still
disputed he sent them to his son Sulaiman (upon him be peace)

to
whom
me
they related their story.
was brought
to
to
But the younger (smaller) one cried
out,
but give the other
woman my
"Take him
is
for he
To English
j OU.
ijlli
(7.
knife
"Cut the living boy into two halves,
(The above
B.
a knife."
Sulaiman then
is
share."
said,
"Bring
him and then he
said,
each mother one half."
"Do not
So he said
cut
him
at all,
to the smaller,
thine."
one of the various oriental versions of a well-known story).
Jj&j
ii*
What do you know
CSlîî^SCjiy
of the following
(t)
(r)
326
Lesson
141.
EYE, VOICE & EAR.
Suratul-Fatiha (the Opening)

In the
name
of God, the Very-Merciful, the Merciful.*
Praise to God, Lord of the
worship, and Thee do
The path
path
Worlds
Ruler (King) of the
Merciful
we beg
Day
to
The Very-Merciful,
of
help
-Guide
whom Thou
of those
Nor
Not those angered with
Judgment
the
Thee do we
us to the straight
hast been gracious to
the erring ones.
,r*
Suratun-Nas (People).
(This
In the
Say,
people
is
Chapter 114 of Al-Qar'an,
name
the last one).
of God, the Very-Merciful, the Merciful.
take refuge in the Lord of the people
The God
of the people
whisperer, the withdrawer
And from
*
/. r.
the jinn
Note that Rahman
Al-ûr'an
+ The whisperer
is
From
The king
the mischief of the
Who whispers
in people's breasts
and men.
rather stronger than llahecm, a point overlooked in
is
of the
Satan,
who withdraws at
the mention of God).
327
Lesson 142.
OTHER DERIVED NOUNS.

I.
Which
(a)
(b)
Nouns have we
of the Derived
jJu^JI
Noun
JÛII
^1 Noun
of
Jûjl p.J Noun
(d)
jUlJj
(e)
o^CSol ^1 Noun
found
62
Ml
of
of Place
and Time (Lesson
(Sufficient
marked with
examples were given
of Instrument (Lesson 63).
A)
(g)
JÂX)! .^J Noun of Superiority (Lesson

-
(h)
JpUII
p.
in
asterisks).
(0
pj
62).
Abundance = Place where an object
abundance
Noun
23).
of Patient, or Object (Lesson 23).
see the words
Agent (Lesson
lSdill Nouns
in
of Action (Lesson 68).
(c)
is
so far studied
59).
>
A i^JLji
ilâll
''Adjective assimilated to the Parti-
This includes among
ciple" (Lesson 58
its
measures that
,-**
of
(i)
2.
(b)
for colour
Noun
oJ^-^jl ^^1
What
(a)
Ui
other Derived
,**J
SjJI
pîl
of Unity
Nouns
"Noun
/#.
/zY.
it,*!
and defect 58 4
"Noun
b).
a single object (139
are yet to be studied
of Once,"
i.
e.
7),
doing the action once.
of Kind, or (Species)," expresses
manner
of doing the action,

(c)
Îc-ÎI^J
this
noun
/Y.
"Noun
of Vessel"
included in the
is
being the same (Revise 63

(d)
JLA^
(e)
<LJJ1
+\
^J
(Lesson
lit.
lit.
144).
Noun
:
'
^J^-
milkpail.
of Instrument,
its
But
measures
2).
"the Diminished
"Noun
Ex
Noun" (Lesson
143).
of Attribution" or Relative Adjective
328
:
Noun
/#.
'
I*-*'
this is the real Abstract. (Lesson

145
j
Note that
(d)
"Form
/#.
and
(e)
~J
first,
freedom
57.
>'
JUILJI iu**
(g)
of How-ness, e.g.
of Exaggeration"
Intensive (146).
are derived from other nouns, not directly
from verbs.
3-
Taking S^J'
*>
W*
means
its
you get
"act of striking"
use.
affix
to
4>^J>
a single flight
oî
dying once
not universal
"act of
one draught
<LJ.^ one session.
RULE
general
\^
A>-
Is that a
masdar and
'act of striking once." Similarly
^0 ^
*C^-*
this
*>
sitting-down once"
It is
"
"i-.
4.
give an illustration of
'"
to affix *
to the
l"^\ ~*\ from the
masdar
tri-literal
verb
is
always
^-0^
on the form
U*i
but
from the derived conjugations
formed by adding Z to the madar, whatever its measure

'
"L"
^
from oUll act of turning round A>"Ull a single turn.
" ^
- x
it
is
thus
".
5.
But suppose the masdar already has
o ?
^>
In
that case,
>-
A>-
SJb-'j <U15J
6.
What
To
oJîj (one),
may be
(a
c-yjl
^1
killed in a
bad way,"
What formO does

*}
Always ^*? no
Arabic name
(in
e.g.
used for?
o^
thing
written
single stay).
express the manner of doing the action * *?*!
was
7.
is
word
the
this
/^.
"Noun
^JLxJ
^L
'Il5
"he
u
"he was killed an evil killing."

of
Kind" (Manner) take

^
^*
other.
is a little
Thus
confusing
*^* manner of dying.

;
it
The
does not refer to a kind of
the sense of "a sort") but to a ''manner of action."
We
will kill
you by the worst form of murder.
329
Lesson 143.
THE DIMINUTIVE
1.
How
is
formed
the Arabic Diminutive
By adding
ya-sukun after the second
word and
letter of the
vowelling that second letter with fatha, and the first with
^x>
J* '
cjamma. Example J->-J a little man, is on the measure 'J-.-i
If
2.
there are four radicals, a kasra
How
is
(a) to
the Diminutive used
is
>'*+
j^^>
insignificance
-
(c)
nearness
,,
XJ
J>till
the diminutives
These are respectively

4.
What
J>
etc
5.
except
the
name
(a)
of
* ,
<-jG>&>^
and LA>
and
remain as they were, and sub-
wau) are changed back
before forming the diminutive.
What nouns may

All,
^J^
(Sj*-^
stituted letters (such as alif in place of

to the original
j&j(j\** ^ jw-^ ^J^
That feminine endings,
just before the dawn.
deduced from these examples
is
few coins
a petty poet
ofy&j
o
>
>
3.
~OL. )5
express smallness or fewness
(b)
Form
taken by the third and so on.
be thus "diminished"
indeclinables, such as personal pronouns
God
(b)
words already accidentally on the
(c)
'
û*
form
6.
^~
How
is
compounds formed
the diminutive of
Follow the rule with the

i
thus the diminutive of
<U)I
first
ai
JL.C-
is
How
from
a quadriiiteral singular
As shown above.
8.
Suppose there are

Cut
off the last.
From
From
^^t
get
^-ûn
Vj-^ we
five letters
4J01
7.
and leave the other alone
half
}0 '
we
get
^j^
330
Q.
What
done
is
in the case of a
The diminutive
formed
is
broken plural
direct
from
the singular
of the diminutive be desired, the rational beings
regular masculine plural,
take, the
thf>
are defective words
Go back
to omit the alif,
should be learnt
my
11.
little
Words
it
tive of
in the
my
*-*>'
son
little
little sister
<jf\
we have
The following
^
;
little girl
my
'
J^j>-
thus
of prolongation
letter
<-^>
;
^> o
diminutive of
a rival newspaper-writer
'
':.
a small sun.
<~^++
ya of
Do
the diminu-
not confuse this with
(a favourite
His paper
is
v-^-X-S
is
way
of sneering at
similarly called,
/J" -""O
& JJ
contempt,
To
*
"little
leaflet").
English, then back to Arabic

" *
~'\
'
~-
''
^"
(Last two words=Society).

'5-
((
j ^*
-^-0^
Lc-d^Vi i^l
0x^0^-
Ul
The
J~\
little sister.
occurs after the
Thus
in contempt).
v-jU-J (used
Exercise 143<
coalesces with that ya.
^Ju y
case of
"
with the diminutive
diminutive
Then
to the original
metaphorically feminine
Suppose
as well as to restore the wau.
brother
These take
12.
while the females, and also
and Ou.^j.2 also Ouxl-j (small books).
Nouns which
RULE
males)
(if
take the regular feminine plural. Examples
non-rationals,
Oy~~>- j
1-0.
the plural
if
00^
lam-alif in the last
word
is
the end of a line of poetry.
in
Lesson
The Relative
1.
What
s>
is
144.
Adjective,
Û~il) **!)
the Relative Adjective called in Arabic?

O ^
tw
4-Lill
JU
(Noun of
Attribution),
also
-*
t-j^-JLjl
relative noun.
2.
How
is it
formed
v-^^x* from *-->âl)
(N. B. Distinguish
the
|%-*V1
'
;
."
01
Ya-shadda
(_
affixed
to
the
special relationship to
Egypt.
3.
as
it,
primal
Suppose the original word has
remove the
[$ is
Meaning
of Relative
from j~**
always kasra.
nine relative adjective be wished, re-affix the
Study the following table
before affixing
show some
to
(S^r^ an Egyptian
Note that the vowel before the
In that case,
noun
tl<
but
if
a femi-
after the
&
4.
Looking
(the
at the table,
two holy
The mark
cities of
what has happened
Mecca and Medina)
of the dual (or of the plural)
ing the relative adjective.

attributes derived
5.
is
dropped before form-
cf. Zaidaniy, Midaniy.
Suppose the original word has
lost a letter
That must be restored
5,
in all the
manual
This must not be confused with
from names of places
(c.f.
to the
48
6) or
replaced by wau, which,
following examples, makes up the third radical.
m-
* '
">
*t>
or 4th
but in long words

JL* youth, 1$ j~*}
(thus from
letter,
r>
8.
From nouns ending

The hamza
9.
*U~V' giving
Noun ending
we
t^JI
^^15
or
jij
10.
How
is
it
prophetical
>
From
4).
Is^j**-
very
but <j*13 a judge,
may
"
-^
secondary (compare
t$Û
" "
get
5 ^
[j^
from
final,
the fifth or sixth letter
from plural nouns
Ji^
the second or third letter, thus
*t
Restore the noun to
from
48
(r./.
j[^^
primary) but ^J\^

If it is
wau
to
second, we
";"
v*
From
it
r"
to wau, if
A>
or
<5jU* heavenly.
get [$ j^
***.*
take
in in
These change ya
from
i"' 4i
is
and from ^j*>-I Alham(b)ra
&j** iWj***
similar
changed
usually
is
tf
alif-madda ^
in
>
Thus from ^^-^* we get ^2.***
apocopated altogether.
is
its
"^
'jS religious rites,
it is
end, limit.
apocopated.
and form from
singular,
^G*
ignorant ones,
M''
^lf~*
from JbÛ**
that
I^^Â
Thus
from
x'
^^j*
Note that
in really old, classical
Arabic the Relative Adjective was always formed from the

singular.
(N. B.
In
Modern Colloquial Arabic, exactly the
reverse is the case).
11.
If,
however, the plural had become a
proper name
(e g.
from
j\**J
(Companions
Two
interesting exceptions to the above
from
of a tribe, etc.) of course
*Ultf (the city)
of
and
Mohammed)
HJUj.
v-
fro
it
had
to stand, thus
j^jUaS
rules
'
are
(the
^J^***
province),
both in South- West Arabia.

12.
This Relative Adjective
is
of books, patronymics, etc.
of extremely frequent use for titles
Exercise 144
334
a.
ULJ"
.
..
<wik
"*"
**
J3 ji
^ "
yjj
4* ^
"^
ij
>
*'
JLL"^3
>
f-^-i
4-yx J
>
..
UJ^
ji^
>
t* '*
>
j>JlJ
~*~
j
~
Oîxil
* *\''\**? \\.\*\"*-*\'
dju J 4
:^^
'
-^
'
+.
45b Ji
j_
Exercise 144
I.
.2.
b.
To Arabic
Abbasid Dynasty the scope of

Arabic Literature (lit. Arabic morals, or polite books)
extended very greatly, and various sciences were propagated,
such as (lit. of) religious, moral (or, literary), linguistic,
mathematical, medical, philosophical, historical, and so on,
[both] those which the savants (doctors) of Islam originated,
and those which they translated from foreign languages..
In (During) the rule of the
Abraham
left the pagan religion in which he had been born

and brought up and embraced the true, divine religion,; and,
after him by centuries, there appeared Jesus of Nazareth (lit.
who is (was) the founder of the Christian
the Nazarene
religion and who explained to us in the prophetical books
all the references to the Messiah who was to come.
Then,
after other 600 years, the Arabian Prophet arose and instituted
)
the Islamic religion.
NOTE
Arabic Books
<Lol "Moral
the language,
is
often called
when
or polite,"
i.e.
whence
literature.
4-yJJ
not religious
are
4ÎOU>J>I
"The History
of
often
called
polite-books of
Arabic Literature"
335
Lesson 145.
I.
How
is
the Relative Adj.
formed from z&mpound expressions
Usually from the former half of the word
we
2.
3.
The following
Bakr,
(seel)
Medinan
(or-ite)
**>
Medina
spiritual
Spirit
l^S
What
names
It is
is
very
(tribe)
T-JJ
L-
commonly used
in
the
colloquial,
li
is
upper, lower.
a fruiterer
the termination
in the
so
frequently
more native quarters of
a collective of the relative in
heard
oriental cities
^ and
as well as colloquially for trades, etc,

Coll.
Abu Hanifa
Quraish
"Jjl
"paternal"
note for future reference.
Quraish-ite
Note that
^>Ji
former half of
will not give us Bakr-ite but
are exceptional
Hanifite
4.
Abu
>>
from
but use commonsense, for the
get
!<
is
in
bazaar-
often used for sects
(See 139
6).
- 336^
or special,
>
>.
From
4~^*a>- particularity.
U What
^j>
is
it
*>*
substance or essence (but colloquially, salary
<L*C
!)
>$
6.
What
is
really the
meaning
of
<L^*IJ1
x"
S>
Christianity, (as a system, not a collective to denote adherents)

*2
similarly ijlôiJl
7.
(Moslem word
Other expressions useful

from
l>-
,,
4O^jl
Lord
Judaism.
or
get
divinity
Lordship
>
man
jLJl human being
manhood
humanity
ijC-Jl
^
fjf-a*
it)
to philosophers, etc.
we
a deity,
0l
for
*2
2T
understood
j."
^'^
A/*
understand ableness
1 intelligibility
plural
plurality
one
<;J^
x"
unity
uniqueness
A>5T
l
being possible
possibility
,,
freedom
wealth
finance
4.JU
/balance-sheet,
balance
8.
Is
there
Many
\budget
any other way of forming the abstract
centuries ago the ending
Oj
came
from the Hebrew Ojl or the Aramaic
a few much-used words having this ending

Deity,
.fS
Godhead
priesthood,
mightiness,
Oj*
C^-l^
humanity
into Arabic either
There are now
among them O**V
O^5OL kingdom
crucifixion (a ("optic term)
These words are masculine
in Arabic.
Oj^ry>-
337
Lesson 148.
INTENSIVE FORMS W^-J \
I
1.
What
is
the origin of the Intensive
Participle) but,
shadda over
added
2.
What
originally, from the verbal adjective
They come,
Forms
e.g.,
it,
with an
alif
after the
second radical and
the idea of (a) intensive ness, or (b) habit,
to the primitive signification, as will

is
Jpli (Active
the type-form of the
Noun
is
be seen below.
of Intensity
fclUjI
ii^)
There are several. Jui (the common one referred to above)

>
*>- Sf^ -.
4 \^ etc. Then there are the forms <iUi etc. (having
**
an extra
3.
Taking
added
the form
to the
)&
ordinary form).
Also
give examples of the two uses

s
(b)
baker
Habit (Profession)
(a) Intensive
Ji
J&
(only applied to Deity)
338
of the second there are the following
"
useful words
^> ^
*
i a great drinker;
very truthful, veracious (Joseph's

6.
Give examples of the
e:rf>Y7 I
j^^C*
drunkard
(intensive)
*>-
great traveller i)l!>j
a learned
man
^
Here we have the

found affixed
7.
to
affixed to the
some
*>
Ju loquacious
<*
JUki* honourable
s-
Exercise 146. A.
it
of the other forms given in
Give examples of the forms with mini

/
but
SJ
may
also be
2-
poor, miserable.
cnSC_~*
*
Fully vowel the following passages:
-r^WlB
Answer
to the
above
AlbU. j
to
be carefully studied
(7.
(r)
jUaiV j
I
-u^lc-
writer)
(e.g.
x
Ji
form
A>
Jl
X*
,L
^^9 S f
(Distinguish from
title).
J'
**
Jly
I'-
,^!
tf "jt
Translate the above with the aid of the lexicon.
>n
CliS
(r)
-339 -
Lesson 147.
,THE NUMERAL
NOTE
I.
147 and 148 are difficult lessons
students
Write the cardinal numbers from one

Fern:
may
to ten
take extra time.
"
>-
!x"v >
>
JiTj
j&&
340
'
^JcJ
/The number
is
the opposite
[gender] of
(But this does not apply to one and
the thing-numbered."
nor to eleven and twelve which are compounds of them).
wo,
Many
*N.B.
students
make
numbered" means opposite
"The opposite gender of the
a slip here.
to
it
thing-
(In Broken Plurals
in its original Singular.
ask yourself of what gender was the original singular).

4.
How
is
when
declined
jUr
construction
in
'
Nom. and Gen.

5.
How may
By
6.
this rule
illustrative
How may
LJ
is
Memorise
examples.
''several" be translated
a special
word
for this
numerals
^>- ^ -
(Note that
i*)l*
/.
important
to
û
^
<Wa> *
which means "a
it is
o
in construction
placed
'-a
..
o
-"
/v^-
"
^',
ijll* are sometimes written

^s
It is
j>
men," and "8 women."
"4
^j ij"
..-o
*LJ
few," namely, "from three to ten"

just as the
Ex
be best remembered
ev
There
Accus. <j U>
remember
that jlli*
s-O
^,
All*
'
jU*l follow the rules
of the Dual (Lessons 47, 48).

8,
Write the Cardinals from
II to IQ.
15
u:
II
Gifl
6
~
Ic.
'
:.
'
-~
U*l
12
17
9.
How
Xr
18
13
*<uJ
19
14
can these compounds (1319) be memorised
By remembering
that while
the
^
first
^
CO
half
of the
^j
word
is
>j.ujl ^SCc- as in 3, yet the oî^ is :>jJu"jl

(agreeing
with the thing-numbered), But note that II and 12 are otherwise.
Why
Because
and
2 are.
34i
These compounds are greatly contracted

'
for
10,
j^Lc.
How
The
U*
they say
in
units are written before the tens,

-
11.
and united by the word
"
/
~JMA>
jj^rtcjjLol
''several,"
X-
j^^lc-jlb-l j c/.
can be similarly treated
Give the tens from 20

*
*M
^wl
'
"and''
but in Algeria
Egypt îmlTi
do we write 21 (one and twenty)
in the colloquials, eg.
to 100, etc.
7O
"One and twenty,"

;
thus
etc.
342
Lesson 148.
1.
What
(a)
is
peculiar to the syntax of the numerals
Numerals
10 place their
and are therefore

(b) II
(c)
2.
But what
in
3.
it
cf. again
99 take the indefinite singular accusative
100 to 1000 place
in the
Narm (Syntax)
but
177, 178,
,>jJuJi
3\.*
We
shall
illustrative sentences
^fc
God
He
created the world in six days
leaves the 99 sheep (lambs)
The century
is
Write the ordinal numbers from

sixth
*C
<*oU*.
(j-oL-*
it
it
in 59
* J >\
A'*!
<j
UJLJJ j iLx!
4, 5.
'
4.1*
\\z~
s
U)
"first" to "tenth."
9
-*
-"
" V
-S
4JO
\*jj>-
fully
3>
5x**
\~*>
study
of
jl
j^L&Jb-l
100 years
200 camels and 2000 donkeys

4.
99
we have already had one form
Memorise the following
}\>-
of II
4*)
JU-j
singular genitive
the accusative of 3jJUJI
is
called in
It is
the plural genitive,
;>j.X*Jl in
"in construction" to
e'
6 j^
l*>- lxl
<*J
6.
But what of
There
the
another form ClAl* which
is
first
343
one
is
most used (though
is
on the regular form, but
we may say
in coll.
j,
>
In
7.
What
are the ordinals from llth. to 2lst., etc.
Fern
Masc
Fern
from
W*A*
forming fractions, we take "one-sixth"
^J
Masc
^li
**
Û
",
"^
llth
'
^lf
s
^\J
jC* I2th
XJL*
i8th
-
O r*~
igth
4th
2ist
*
8.
How
are
ordinals higher than 22nd formed
all
Iotl1
--
As 22nd
e.
"the-
"the third-and-twentieth"
CJl Note that ordinals are
seven-and-fortieth"
usually defined, and then they are declinable. Those given in

19 only) are indeclinable because undefined.
(II
9.
But <j)j~&
Yes
is
there
it is
But look out for the
article.
its
twice,
adverbs, are written in the accusative.

is
etc.
"one time," cnT
"twice"
etc.
adjective.
These, being
The most
'^
"
to write o"*
û^ an
classes of numerals are there
Numeral adverbs, such as once,

**
djJU
not regarded as :>J^ a number, but
What supplementary
(a)
no difference between the cardinal and ordinal
Does the ordinal numeral agree with

Yes,
11.
the cardinal for "twenty"
is
of 20, 30, etc,

10.
usual
way*
But sVJi 'JLi
344
-f
^-
(142
may be used
3)
Another numeral -adverb much used
(b)
ments, proclamations, discourses

accusative of the ordinal thus
UH*
(c)
*T>
two
in the dual, e>xlxS
thirdly;
The
.*
~J\ of Conj.
Jjioll
fourfold, square
Nj!
(Compare
five-sided, et seq.
^L*
triangular;
triple,
I2thly.
I*
Triliteral verb =
The
*x!l
Also
- i
roughly spelt in English
Cl>U^l> Jl
Omar Khayyam,"
thus, "Riibaiydt of
tl
the Quadriliteral verb
Ilthly ;^Lc-
*ljU octagonal.
Ul* secondly
firstly;
gives us
II.
in public annour.ce-
expressed by the indefinite
Îc^lV
tenthly;
l^-tlc-
is
killings.
Quatrains of
^)
*lLiil
i
12.
How
FRACTIONS formed
are
with
Fractions
a fourth
jl-l&l
f(> j
Thus jju
iL> nine-tenths.
kasra or
needed)
a third
4*M* three-fourths
are on
denominators
small
with plural on JCi
half
a fifth
cJiâi
is
vLiCUJ
the former being

1
z.
^J-*-
a sixth
j
;
either with
e.
^^
,x
damma,
J*i
jlil* two-thirds;
^^
is
form
the
more used.
Its
plural
(if
But for large denominators, the expression

*
tj* 'i'j*
"part
(s)
of"
is
used
= three
parts out of twenty.
thus
^^r^
\tj>-
Tithes
f?
0"*
=
^
13.
In Arithmetic
ÛJ-I 'LU
X
units, tens
and hundreds are :>U!
"Percent" = ilJL.
}
i>
)(c>^jjZ
the plural of
"per mille"
annum" cJlj
JLS
jVlj
'^
JpLil); "per
j^J
*~^
Fractions are called 'jjlo

fractions
90%
and decimal
"per
mensem"
r*'*
Triangles 13 uL>.
Trigonometry
>
Computation of Triangles
OliUj ^~>-
Squares
<
14-
How
345
the numeral defined
is
The numeral becomes defined
When
(a)
same ways
nouns
as other
adjectivally, in apposition to its noun,
is,
to
>-
as
the numeral
in the
it is
iujVl ^JlVjl
defined by
*-
(b)
numeral may precede a definite noun in the construct
and be defined by construction
state
men =
the
men
j' tne
*"J
ur
Sometimes the numeral and

>9
J*
^"
etf
(c)
JC^jl
its
noun
both
have the
article
"*
CJjCx:kJI (oCliJl
The following
(d)
(i.e.
is
JL) Jl ** with the seven chosen maidens.

'' *
-0^ -OS?
the modern usage ( Ol JA->- VI*
.!>
Jl
)
article prefixed to the
numeral only).
But Wright
(II
244)
suggests that this arose from the case-endings being omitted

in
modern
which
writing,
usually unvowelled.
is
the article outside a bracket, to imply that the
have put
words within are
looked upon as a single expression.

(jo jJJ 4$CL)JI
15.
This usage
the
"Chemin de
Per,"
similarly explained.
similar to the compounding of phrases such as
is
the capital invested (from
JU1IJI
is
JCJl^lj)
#
rose-water (from J>j^H
*U
and ^JJLa^li
also
the tamarind
(lit.
the Indian date
16.
VERBAL CONSTRUCTION.
>Z
grasp the syntax of

.
SJaiJl!
(^JXI ^î) J
iiQ>Vl verbal construction, as

^
the-strange-of-race
0-0
noble-of-disposition
-J.
S"
s*
(J>^VlXiSC')Jl
What
is
to
'^011
the youth-little~of-experience.
be noted in these examples of iJai

*x
That the "construction"
to-the-
- >0 ^
\L3l
"^
the
^ / ^
5?
17.
'(.<>
^^L3l ^CxJ^l! ^JÛ blessedness

^-0
pnre-of-heart jCx^-Vl
able to
S'
O*
The student should now be

5
is
verbal, not real,
S&l?
the
antecedent
346
being, in every case, an adjective, and the article prefixed to
it
being placed there after the annexation has been constructed,
Think
so to speak.
18.
of the phrase as a
compound,
Quadrisyllable plurals are formed for the following
The
early part of the
The middle
The
15).
(c.f.
month
month
part of the
latter part of the
month
>-\
Exercise 148.
Copy
it,
the following without vowels, then insert the vowels in red ink, correct
then translate to English
finally translate
*'
,.
?cJl ~
s
^sls-
A>
.,
/-
^
J
jjA+zz
JJ
Â.^
back to A rabic.
'
'"
&
--
t'^l A
>
&
"x-*
^
-t....
>..
<tt
j^J JiJ JU
1
(1~
(Jlyi
j
t^>
ii'
JU3 oÛli-
>
^^J^
:3bJ
I
I
as
^t
JJ
i>
"x
>
i^r;,
*^
tf
^^J
&
\ vf >*
^*
<J
'
"
"4
?(
JLJ
LU
L>
dA*
347
Lesson 149.
THE PARTICLE
I.
We
particles, but
have already learned many of the
more
We
be studied.
to
there are
had, perhaps, better revise in orde
as the recapitulation will be beneficial.
Prepositions are
(a)
Inseparable
in,
Separable.
(b)
to (sometimes,
O ^
with.
by,
for).
or
of oaths) <i!j
(all particles
as
like,
Inseparable
i]
(a)
By God
jilT
a man.
like)
(or,
jCJjSâs
#=
(b)
Separable
jj
into,
in,
concerning,
*,-
S>
of,
from, (see Lesson 34
to,
unto
s**
Jl
from, from, on behalf
away
2!
J^>-
up
to,
of.
'3-5
for
and
^.*
L5-^).
as far as.
except.
over,
above, upon,
against, etc.
*>'
jjJ with, or before
or
(i.e.
in front of).
V
JLL
(in
some books Ju
since.
i or
"^
LP
construction
with.
L-.
(c)
Accusatives of nouns, used in

"jkCi
68.
î Ju>
We may
subject
sign
^8-
is
in
as
prepositions
etc.
For further examples revise the table on page
add
<!L>j
which governs the noun (which
the genitive
S jllc-
iC
jll
Oj
more eloquent than an expression" Jî

(i. e.
Someone may
the
"Many
,P
^s
"Perhaps a questioner may say"
is
>'
ask)
2.
348
Adverbial Particles. The number of these

tion the really important ones, omitting
not at
all
^\S"^
is
great
we
will
men-
some already studied
349
at that time
then
at that time,
after that, afterwards
JlLJ
before that, previously

.
at that
day
at that
hour
few miscellaneous adverbial accusatives
not at
all
(with neg
4lJ
gratuitously
except, but
4J&- z
decidedly (no escape)
'O
(he) alone
perhaps
(they) alone
one time (occasion)
(she) alone
(another) time, occasion
and
are thus used to
mean "one time. ..another
means, on the contrary,
time...".
or, vice versa.
00
Cairo to Alex, and wee versa.

8.
The Conjunctions
Name
ing to the order of -Arabic

K
-X^'t
V
|
J,
We
the principal conjunctions, accord-
grammars.
0.
have used
these
all
difference between
"
5C.l
l>
^SC*!
jl
but the student should nodce the
j which
and
simply "and",
is
_i
which
denotes order, and has often the meaning of "then."
Since both conjunctions and adverbs are classified as

in Arabic,
the other.
it is
difficult
In fact,
while others call

9.
is
:>[
o
a Quranic
y
>
ij
**"*
it
z\
Since
we have been
(and un-Arabic)
Wright
classifies
J>
pctrticles
one from
to distinguish
as usually an adverb,
a conjunction.
word meaning "when",

have seen them. jlc V
*^
justified
by
used before verbs, but
faith,"
A jV
I
etc.
l>
or since
jû^
*
_^
Note that j
before nouns.
I^J
(Conj.)
"Since
>[
7"
jV
etc.
are
350
*"
means
U^
"either,"
lj
L;l
and
man
past tense and always
jlT"
and
j!
j!
are
had
it
fv"
-
4"^
>*
state
the
"had
jl
or else
or,
j thus
or his wife".
the hypothetical particle
jf is
_>
"either he or thou";
yt
''either the
followed by
is
it
generally used with the
is
it
supposes
non-existent
condition
been, then"; but jlS^l i[ "if (when)
compounds
of
it.
mimimum
Begging
^j
with
request
= "but for".
V^l
not been thus".
it is".
letters
"even"
^J
usually
(as little as).
**0""^*>
(j
10.
j) :>3
The
X^
wJjS "I was wishing that
Interjections:
nouns
/v
->^
r
b
it
had been possible
The commonest
O Mohammed,
interjection
even"...
^ before
is
sometimes shortened,
is
>'
$.
j\ as
particularly before
\^
Q my
must be used before the Definite

takes
is
T'
erl
after the
noun which
called 4>-U)l "lament".
and *V
i^ have been
"
"
come!
from
is
u
jlx^.
how
which
is in
"come
to
far!
as
A
CJI
flown away
^
and
".
or
Ut
"
"
meaning
the atrocity
in
God
prayer"!
jlli
C^JLxj
"
^J
that
forbid
"
Of*
*
"How
had been a
(or,
lips)
colloquial corruption of this
is
Also
"
that...
"
!
"ugh"! 4^ (with finger on
The Egyptian
alas
the "call to prayer" by
wide
as in
bird, then
Never
).
r-\
'*
peMm \^\
Lesson 87; we may add
S^Li JJ* i^l.^ ^JLJ "Would

I
!j>
precedes. This form of speech
the difference between them".

o >
-e^
- tt
had
[^
inflected in
the special use of
it
Article.
Ex: elîjailj
&/*
far
it
son>
Silence
351
II.
Then
there
2*#
isC/pail
a stone falling
(onomatopoeia)
of Sound.
a crow's croak.
JjU-
Noun
Exs
J^L sound of
These Nouns of Sounds
are, of course, not subject to rule.
READING LESSON
150.
4JI
j>xL i
C-U?
Lj
'
Jlls d\\l> dJliil
((
Û
Jail
^ cnîl ^ (>jl
liU <!Li
*^^-J
Âi J^
1'
-ji:!
^.^.Ij J^-J^
-JI
U <->Ul J*
<Jt^'
*-U
4-JlP
J^-^
ULi
>
((
NOTES
Ai
ftU
OX*
))
1.
Abu Nawas was
2.
His
first effort
a witty poet of Rashid's reign.
read
"My
poetry
is lost
on you as a necklace on
(black) Khalisa".
3.
His second attempt read,
"My
poetry shines on
(is
adorned by)
you as a necklace shines on Khalisa".

4.
There
is
that this
a smart 'play on words' in the remark of the bystander
was poetry which "saw (shone) best when
(letter 'ain)
were plucked out".
its
eyes
352
EXAMINATION PAPER
A.
Vowel the following and Translate
150.
(t)
4,1
Ûll Jju
'
>U jl
(r)
<s
(t)
(o)
5^ sCl
5.
Translate to Arabic
1.
you, but perhaps
it
will
days of next (coming) month,

2.
We
do not wish
^j^^y\
be possible for
come on one
God
(%)
me
of the early
pay the amount of the subscription
your monthly magazine
'
4X^-) because
*x
does not arrive; the last number
(.5-te- )
is
here (found)
but the tenth and the eleventh did not turn up (reach
3.
us).
That poor fellah has not yet sold more than three-fourths
A>
of his cotton
4.
to
will.
j$
to
4*.x3
*"*
it
to
if
will
- >-
Jc2)
cannot say exactly when
visit
J& igjA .U
Û?
The Messiah
said to his
twelve disciples at that time
Freely (gratuitously) ye have received (taken), freely give.
He
5.
also said "Repent ye,
There
will
and believe the Gospel".
be more joy among the angels of God over
one sinner repenting than over 99 righteous who
no repentance.
C.
Translate, to English, Exercise 146.
need
353
NAHU
ARABIC
FIFTY LESSONS.
IN
Lesson
1.
what two parts
Into
The nominal
Inflexion,
word
is
(SYNTAX)
151.
Arabic Grammar nominally divided
is
division
into
is
^j~* which
means,
very
_^ pronounced Nahu, or Syntax. But this latter

often used to denote GRAMMAR, in general, and
ARABIC SIMPLIFIED has followed
O^
orientalists in declining to totally isolate
practical study.
Hence
master the remainder, and, above

into
the
from
best
in
the student has already studied some
of the most important rules of syntax in Lessons
fall
literally,
and
the author of
to
all
But,
150.
that those studied should
their correct relative position,
Syntax must now be
systematically studied as a whole, and in the Arabic order.

2.
But
why need we study
in
order?
Oriental
example, did not write his second volume

True, but that
was very
The
If
my aim
is
may be
best
shown by
Cambridge, who says on
we analyse Arabic sentences by
syntax we
quite different
of
want
a quotation from
Lord Almoner's Reader and Professor of
Prof. E. H. Palmer,
at
German
for
THINK ORIENTALLY.
necessity for this
Arabic
Oriental order
largely translated from the
Caspari, and, in any case,

the student to
in
Wright,
shall find
them
full
p.
287 of his
the
grammar
rules of
of anomalies.
But
if
European
we
discard
our preconceived notions as to the concord of substantive and

adjective, nominative case
from an
and
3.
ARABIC
and
verb, etc,
point of view,
we
and look
shall find
at the question
them consistent
logical".
What
is
the special Oriental order of Lessons 151
200
354
DEFINITION OF
NAHU
THE SENTENCE AND
PARTS
ITS
INDECLINABLE AND DECLINABLE

OR UNINFLECTED AND INFLECTED
INDEFINITE
j >
4i* w
^*
u.
Xoo
AND DEFINITE
NOMINATIVES
o>*a:
ACCUSATIVES
GENITIVES, ETC.
APPOSITIVES
SEQUENTS)
(OR,
NY
NAo
*lyJI
IMPERFECTLY DECLINED NOUNS

SUBJUNCTIVE AND JUSSIVE PARTICLES
VERBS OF WONDER ETC
^'j
JUil
^-dlj ^>,<)l
CLASSIFICATION OF THE PARTICLES
(EXAMPLES OF PARSING
4.
The above
table should
^l^c-J
now be memorised
Ui^l
in order to give
a "bird's eye view" of the order of the subjects dealt with.
has been prepared, with great care, from oi)U
It
famous of
Arabic grammarians) jU*jJl and
all
of the most capable
commentary
modern Syrian
of *li>
^1
on di(U
,j\
How
is
*
definition,
two
writers) with reference to the
^1 and more recent works.
do Arab grammarians define Sarf and Nahu
The following
>-jlJI
N. B. Memorise the Arabic terms rather than the English
5.
(most
quoted from
my ARABIC AMPLIFIED,*
essentially a "native" definition.

have here quoted many of the examples which
had already given
ARABIC AMPLIFIED, which had been previously written though not
in
published.
jijl I,,
initial,
Nahu
medial or
j/ jpi
Sarf
Literal translation
355
final characters of
the Rules by which are
is
known
the Rules by which are
is
the
words, as single words.
known
characters of words, when compounded
the states of the final
(i.e.
when
in sentences
or phrases).
may
(This example of exposition
From Sarf we
hamsa
learn that the
of
Accusative,
*jf
J>
is
(not wasla)
ra with kasra while the
learn
why
u'
and
*!
are
from the influence of the Transitive verb.
e.
To be
Exercise lol.
(see
i.
Nahu we
But from
has a sukun.
i!l>
V*
and must be marked by fatha and the
mim
be memorised)cLU j
\
e>^t
-j.
4-,
6.
translated to English, then back to Arabic
READER).
Lesson 152.
THE SENTENCE AND
^ -XX
{
I.
What
It
is
is
meant by <Jo
words
What
and
/jl
*^
is
ô
^l>.
and
Jb
*.
or
>^
e. g.
each of the
'
<^- (sentence)
compound expression
conveying complete information,
^
>
the sentence Jb j
3.
a single expression indicating meaning,

o
2.
PARTS
L.J
word)
(a
ITS
t:l>-
Of what may an Arabic sentence be formed

Of two words
or
as
more
e.g.
of
two nouns, as
U^- j^*$\ or of a
"
->
verb and
noun, as
Jb j
r
n>- and
as
the verb
and implied
356
(understood) pronoun in *Ji>-l

as
4.
There are three parts of speech
5.
What
verb
that
j-<2>-
->5
Verb, Noun, Particle.
the Arabic definition of a verb
is
and two nouns
and noun, as j\j*i
or particle, verb
J~^ Û) j^
is
or of a particle
which indicates meaning independently
in
(i. e.
itself) and in relation to

4 oI o
and
6.
What
A
and
\j6i
time (Past, Present or Future) as
\Ji
1^5
are the distinctive features of a verb
verb can receive
(i.e.
be affected by) certain special particles
such as the Subjunctive (Nasb-ating) and Jussive (Jazm-ating)

also
particles,
take affixes such as

O
j and
What
the definition of a
noun
is
or
that
What
and the feminine
can
+
the
of 2nd. fern,
noun
which indicates independent meaning without
relation to time, as
8.
of the Agents,
it
j;
also the
is
and CJl* also
can take J? and
it
-^
J^- and <$C
are the distinctive
marks
and
of a
JlJ
noun
It
can take the prepositional particles, also Jl also the tanwin
it
can also be "annexed" (placed
in
Construct State) and can
be a 4ji JLL.* Subject of a sentence,
that-which-is-predi-
lit.
cated-to).
9.
Translate the Arabic definition of a particle
particle indicates
meaning but not
in itself (i.e.
used independently of verb or noun) Exs
Û and
it
cannot be
It is
dis-
tinguished by the absence of the distinctive features of verb
and noun.
Exercise 152.
(See
READER).
357
Lesson
153.
^TENSES OF VERBS
1.
How many
Three
distinct tenses (or states) has the verb
^W
J.JI
Past
(///.
c-;U*U
resembler) and
the
^\
^MV
Imperative.
2.
Then
.>Vl
not called a
is
Certainly not
moods and
Mood
Arabic knows nothing of the European idea of
In fact, the three so-called
tenses,
moods
(Indica.
tive,
Subjunctive and Jussive) are called "States"
while the chapter
Even
is
often used.
The Arabic
How
is
By the
O
4.
It
distinguished
111
"Tenses of the Verb,"
^ J^l
Verb"
of the agent (doer)
.l>-
+~>-
+~>- also the
of feminine J^*,L^
said that
is
indicates
,^111
may be used
î?ui
"actions actually
either
The
historic past
to
denote
(c.f.
when
They
it
Give
details.
the Greek Aorist
which represents an act completed
at
and English
Preterite)
some past time
as to
was completed must be determined by the context.
sat
down
God spoke
(b)
not
completed, or mentally conceived as completed."
(a)
is
calls these "Divisions of the
^yjl j^>-
(in respect to time)
3.
Declension of the Verb
headed J*xiUÎ
the expression
Ji]l 41*jl
t.
Wll JI^>1
Jittl
<J& ^Jl>'i
to
The English
moment
to table
Moses
"perfect"
($"J
}&
representing an act
of speaking, has been completed.
which,
at
the
Those
whom
to
thou hast shown favour
You have honoured
us by your presence
iijâ^
U-,*J$
O,-
N.B.
-^ as a particle of <J*^ (assurance) assures the perfect.
(l)
^J>>
.V
Î*J
Verily
N B.
we have placed
(2) Jti
plus
jo
(c)
An
optative
Jll
the line of prophecy in the seed of Jacob.
gives the sense of the English pluperfect
"But
to the preterite.
llU>
o*-JI
/J
**
^.
had slipped them
it
therefore future
meaning
...
in
jl5j
<
prayers, curses,
benedictions and the like*

>\
God have mercy on
her
*lu
God
ikU>
perpetuate your existence
The Sultan
God
him
preserve
<U)1
jl^
<^*>-
,>,
May God
^'
curse you!
May God
they
be exalted above whatl

with Him J
associate
N.B. This optative tense
(d)
negated by
is
may God
^,j
not
^^
If
you were
continuous meaning; as in sayings of current value.
to die
The commentators have

The sheikh
(e)
4}
An
...
<i)i
^++
agreed
action performed by the very act of speaking.
you
this (on the instant)
sell
[agree, now, to]
Wright suggests
God
...
said (says)
(are)
forbid
,lH
it
to
that the use of
has already done
of this use of
give
it
to him,
you
!>
^lil here may signify "If
o;-
for him.
it
be as
wish,
Athanasius and Gairdner speak
as the action being "mentally conceived as completed".
5.
Why
is
Man
usually called
p-jliU
Because
it
359
English) the Imperfect?
(in
generally indicates an uncompleted action.
arranges,
God
j&
disposes
<ttl
j^
jl~y
'
'I
>
God knows
6.
What
distinguishes
>
:
l
<WI
pj^Jai'
e.
7.
(a)
It
always commences with one
it
should be capable of receiving the negative particle
pjlii!
may be used
By
can
it
*^
be restricted
the use of
are passing
one knows
or,
as
CJ^ as
as
Oy:
is
It
mean
Jkjjjdl
what land he
in
Future Tense.
or
of
to
as
(c)
<j*jl
the
<_>
future
^*
LA
U^
And no
by the use of
CJ-
(ii)
The
Your Lord
will
particles of
or U)
,****!
did not hear what
( no t yet) is
with the ordinary one
The Greek and Latin
not
much used
j^. U
to
when
(Jazmated)=he's not yet come).

(d)
<C>J
o"^^
you said iU^lj
it
ô
^l>
<j
Pas^ Tense when preceded by
(N.B. This vj
will die.
J^
o"
and
J.
^xi "AVl jj Truly the days
give to you and ye shall be satisfied,

*
C*J-M also
the present only?
limited to
Present Tense, as
How
(b)
denote
to
of these four letters
Imperfect, with
day do not confuse

;
he
comes.
360
He (upon him be
It
8.
Q.
used to be there
What
It
does the Imperative denote
denotes a request for the performance of an action.
Has
It
prayers and peace) used to say
any distinctive mark
it
must be able
meaning
Imp
to take
often does take
To
Exercise 153.
-XpyJI
command
of a
and
jj>
or request.
-V>^l
contain
the
does not follow that the
(It
Oj> but
must
it
must be able
it
to
do
so).
English, then back to Arabic.
Lesson 154.
INTERACTIONAL VERB. j*JUJ
1.
If
word has the meaning
distinctive signs of a verb,

It is
\&
called
which
f\
of a verb but shews none of the
what
is it
some
called
have
proposed
English "Nominal verb", but Sterling calls
agree with the latter; some call
"Quasi-verb", but we ought to call
name only
2.
(a)
What
Ism
classes
i
(j^b
*\
Examples
it
call in
"Adverb with the
it
by
it
"Semi-verb" or
its
proper Arabic
fi'l.
is it
divided into
has a past-tense signification.
Far be
to
and Wright, "Interjection with verbal
function of a verb",
force".
it
(from me)
">
God
forbid that
Great
How
is
î^
is
be said
the difference
wide
it
is
villi
jU
a technical abbreviation of
be God's benedictions and peace.
JLj
them
A.ic <i)l
Or, roughly,
him
Jw Upon
"God
bless him."
(the prophet)
(b)
Oh
(_j Wonderful
^1
'V
ugh
has a present signification
*-l
f-)\i*
36t
jli
dear
e>\
"e
(<-)
yl
So
U*
let
has an imperative signification Exs
/**"
be
it
Be quiet
Cfl*\
s'
-*
Cj
3.
jj
Are the above iÛ-* (by usage) or
V*.s
(by rule)
The above
formed on
t.
4*U**
are all
a definite
J'V
this
but there
is
one kind of
triliteral
j>\
After him
Examples upon
model from the regular
verb can be formed a
Mind
J*i
^'
on the form
J^ Catch
form are said
to
him
JU
j>\
J*i
^-**1
declinable
Exs
be
NOUN OF SOUND
4.
What
is
the connection
Merely that the
latter is
between
'^)l
^1
and Oj*a)l
,f^l
considered as a sub-section of the
former, for treatment.

5.
(a)
Give examples of the two classes of Oâil
Sounds addressed
/%.*!
to animals, etc.
To sheep
To camels
(b)
Imitations of various noises (onomatopoeia).
Sound made by
a falling stone
Sound. made by
These are
Exercise 154.
all
L^L^
crow
being subject
To English and back
to
no
rule.
to Arabic.
Unimportant,
.562
Lesson 155.
DECLENSION AND INDECLENSION
1.
How
do you define
vowel of
word
2.
(or
the
or governing
then said to be
is
^j**
the opposite of i^Lc^f! viz, the retention
is
particle
is
then
is
Uninflected.
"!$->*
Can the verb be declined
The
in the
change
a regent,
J*U
The word
is
unchangeableness) of the ending of a word, which
is,
where as the noun
as well as the
in origin,
is,
J.^
in general,
noun
but parts of
it
^j** but parts of
it
are
are
^*A
.
^.~A
always quite ^-^
State what parts of the verb are indeclinable.
^W
to
is
"J.-^ also
JLJÎ)!
otherwise
5.
^_
-llJ!
is
The Arabic verb
4.
and
word caused by
(Indeclension)
said to be
3.
(as, e.g. a particle).
Then what
frbJI
-^
(declension or case-inflection)
<J^c.Vl
final
Jjp^VI
What
is
jy
jVl
fautpjliil
V
Lesson
is
PjUail
the literal
meaning
Thus
in
whereas
u)l
N.B.
only JL : * whenattached
128), or to the
Vj*^
Arab grammarians
Â}\
"Built on fatha."
is
(see
"Firmly-built."
nun of feminine
declinable.
of
^^
translating the expression of the
^ ^*
we may roughly render
The Arabic ^1* means
means the
state of
which
*?*.**
is
it
the sign fatha

a
symbol.
6.
Upon what
"built" (what does
ûl
is
363
take)
it
'
x
(<t)
TtZAJl^Jc- ^.-u*
(6)
|*aH Jfc j^--*
(c)
/.
(a)
"^
(takes fatha) ordinarily as i->SJ
when attached
to the
wau
of the plural as
Jj^**Jl Jf^^*
attached to a nom. vowelled pronoun, as
Upon what
_,Vl
jjSCJl Jp
is
^*
"built"
(6)
^XAJl^Jp ,^+A
(c)
Ojfi\ O-V>-
when attached
sound verb) and also when
to
totally
when attached
to a
nun of feminine
case of the alif dual, or
wau
the
(in
unattached as
nun of corroboration as
(upon the suppression of the nun)
J& ^Â
^z
of plural, or ya of
in the
2nd person,
as
(d)
*j*
c-^
^.
(upon the suppression of
its
[weak] ending)
>
case of a
in the
8.
What
about
weak verb
as
*y j^'
^jlâil
"*^\ll^*l'!l
til* when attached to feminine

Jlc-...*
when attached
9-
Turning
to the
NOUN,
The indeclinable nouns

strative,
(3) relative,
(6) interjection
sound,
10.
Is
there
They
(8)
>
j^^^yij âj/u^'i
as
to -A-^xn j^J
which noun
is
4JoâJ
" ?
are (l) the personal pronoun, (2)
(4)
noun of condition,
with verbal force (Lesson
some adverbs,
(9)
demon-
(5) interrogative,
154),
numerals from 13
(/)
noun of
to 19.
any assignable reason why these nouns are mabny
are said (by
Arab grammarians)
to
be
^.-^
like
'.'
the
particle because of strong similarity to the particle.*

*
The alleged similarity varies in each case, and \\ould be considered by

at this stage
young student
"far-fetched," but when he studies ARABIC
AMPLIFIED, in Arabic, he may see as the Arab mind sees,
N.B.
the
364
Lesson 156.
THE DECLINABLE
1.
What
2.
How many
CASES
are
called in Arabic
t*j Nominative;
clamma
.'___
pressed.
(J^*-*-
sign
3.
What
4.
Which words
(a)
or
Genitive;
The
but not
^/-l )
when
These are
as
U^^
and
v!/j
letters
'^
j^L^
Is
there
still
The verb
^ by
1
of
in
lord
of
4**)!
^^
j>-
VI
brother
first
;^>54).
the
worlds.
L^*^
j^%"
Jl*il J*A)|
(j^ j
is
^^J>- (suppression of the
they did not weep,
of
o f the Imperfect of the verb
any other "sign of inflexion"

weak-ending
Attached to this are
But more particularly the decades (j j?~> O5j*~s'
5.
Jl>U^\p
cnl^c-
Also ujJWl*
The Five Forms <LJJ 4j^VI
possessor (see Lesson
several similarly constructed words, as
(c/)
its
are a ^ vowels.
î father:
Regular Masculine Plural c>J,^
possessors of minds.
ex-
..."..
(*j^' Jussive,
in construction to
expressed
sign
<_
JjcOM
> mouth; and j^
^^
their signs
an
is
original
sign
the original signs of
The Five Nouns,
The Dual
its
its
take letters for their
father-in-law;
(e)
*j>-
Â-
sign
Accusative
fl^'
and what are
are there,
original
are the other signs
person (as <J
(6)
its
^*a>
Thus
...*.
VvH
kinds of
vlX^'
said to
weak
show
letter) as
he did not consent.
its
in
365
Lesson 157.
(INDEFINITE AND DEFINITE
1.
What
Taken
(c)
in
3.
classes of
these are
words
o^Sol means ignorance or indefiniteness
knowledge,
How many
Seven
of these
meaning
quite literally
lit.
iij-il
2.
the
is
Â j
(a)
used for the
is
definite.
are there
43jJu
Personal Pronoun, (b) Proper Name,
Demonstrative, (d) Relative
Noun
(e)
defined by Jl
construction with one of the above, (g) Specified Vocative.
The Pronoun
ju^Jai! into
two main classes
Into
That which
jjU!
^n-LjJ
is
the implied
is
how many
4.
jjUl
5.
How
It is
is
apparent,
-âsi
is
classified,
divided
according
to
ui
whereas
be understood
annexed, and J*aAl
to
case (parsing) into:
Pronouns of nominative case only, as
Pronouns common
L^V
(r)
'
J^
and
That common
to accusative
to
in
&
^- \-
and
in
û^
6.
Into
(a)
Nominative as vnandCJl and j* and branches
(6)
Accusative as
Û
is
^-a.'
and iJU and
S*
and genitive
^jJ
j
+
*Z+
cases, as
4-oU-
sub-divided
(see
and branches
in
U/1
nominative accusate and genitive, as
what two classes
in
separate.
(b)
^&3
sub-divided
j^+*i
is it
expressed, as
i.e.
pronoun supposed
^^
divided into
classes
j^^~~ j jjo
past tense, 3rd person, as
(a)
Noun
(f)
in
Lesson
25)
(see 68 :I2)
The j
and
in
common
it is
most of jj
called iUjJl jj>
is
^-\j^
366
to the verb, as
O^l
^\j^
^.^So and
as
nun of precaution
the
i^-T*
îJ
elc
an d to
but not to
for
Q*i
we say pî'^J
and construe &> Ul
Self-test 157. Translate
8.
U*'V
U>j
Lesson 158.
PROPER NOUN
^
iJ.l is a
1.
-U>-l
name placed
and
How may
Into
it
>p
^^
(a)
it indicating an
indicating the whole genus.
be classified as regards derivation
four classes,
declined, unless
being used as
(c)
given) to denote a specified thing, as
be either
may
It
individual, or (b) ^5
2.
(or,
i'Jl
Compound
Simple, which
SjA*
is
usually
ex
-Xa-l (b)
Compound
(in construction)
<jU^
^j
^5j- as Csj*j^>-
as
i^jSj*
^ -^^
(d)
^*^
dicated
3.
How
may
it
show
a verb
be classified
As regards meaning
it is
and
surname
the antecedent
divided into
or epithet; this
is ^>
'
or
/!
subject, as <jjil ^l>-
its
is
^^
title,
-^J'
in
(a)
either respect or disrespect as
(b) <-^-5
Pre-
Û*I ^j>
else
fully
was imperfectly declined with fatha before
it
>-
(a)
a construct
(c) /*"*'
as-X^j^)'.
which must
1
-^"J -îJjjU
noun of which
which includes
all
not covered by the foregoing, as -^ j

4.
As
*
to
precedence Â)l must follow
Compare
during the
its
noun, as
-*~^j
the extraordinary expressions by which children were labelled
Commonwealth
in
England;
e.g.
"Praise-God Barebones".
367
Lesson 159.
{DEMONSTRATIVE
1.
What
The demonstrative
How many
b
masr
s.
and
jv>
forms has
CrtT
noun of sign)
(lit.
which denotes
as
sign,
I-X*
and iJo
it ?
<o or <J
or
that
is
by means of a peceptible
a certain thing
2.
ojLi >l /*-J
the definition of
is
dual fem
and <JO dual masc
v>
(common), also
for plural
*V$I
jb
fern':
s.
for place.
3.
How
i!
do we get the word <^lb
J may
with or without
be affixed to
or
<J
or
v>
if
it
**
is
desired to denote that which
while
forms, as
4.
What
It is
may
afar off as ^lli and ii!l>
be used with the other
&^j\
the
is
alone (without
^J
is
called
* found
^^'
^*
in
and
'4*
is
commonly
used,
as in
aJ^>
l^>
\
(In colloquial
is
5.
going
Can
Yes,
it is
used with the verb
or
^^^^ hayigy, he
to come).
be used instead of
i! ^
when more than one person
examples
Exercise 159.
Û
in
As
is
being addressed, (see
j^)l
usual
the
Exercise back to Arabic.
student
is
required to translate the
Lesson 160.
THE RELATIVE
1.
u^y
a
that which
How
it
is
Into
this
sentence
connected)
a noun used to denote
is
<L^?
called a
and tjj^L* common.
special,
The former has

-jil/cill
Sr
is
Jp*j*1 divided
IJA^
is
by means of a connecting sentence mentioned
specified object
after
2.
(lit.
numbers and genders, as
special forms for
singjjbUl
j^jlll and, their other case, dual, <J>Alt(>-iJI
plural.
3.
Mention ^JJ\^M "common"

x
*
to
relatives.
u*
is
common
either,
rationals
to all
f^^
ever one rises. Jl
c5-r^*i
I*
;
admire
to
non-rationals
all
(or,
it
pleases me) which-
also reckoned as a relative
is
*>-j>\
'1
/J
means
4.
What
are the rules of
The connecting
i.e.
clause must be \J^>-
^-^
(narrative
clause,
informing) and must contain a pronoun which agrees in
number,
gender,
etc.
with the relative.
This
pronoun
called jfUl
5.
Give examples of the use of
-XflJI
iJLU^Jillj (r) dxj^jllj
dU,
(Y)
dil^JJl
(o)
1.60.
Arabic
to English,
and back
V^.-JJ'
cJuT U
Exercise
to Arabic.
Jiu-l
(i)
is
369
Lesson
161.
DEFINED BY THE ARTICLE. J^

1.
How
does Jl define a noun
**
**
\\
2.
Can
To
3.
s>
this article
"
"
Does
J^ ever
or previously mentioned,
be prefixed
:
proper names
to
(j*L*H there
no
is
rule.
have the meaning of "the whole genus"
jLJ
^-ju*^y
known
"
few only jL*JI
Yes
prefixed to a noun already
It is
<
*\
is
understood to mean <J^*^? jLJl Jp
BY CONSTRUCTION.
4.
"
noun
^J\Â
Jj^jll
defined by
is
construction
nouns
one of the defined
to
Jl; eJ^*ll
annexation
^WiiaJl
becomes defined
it
iJl
"
by
being
annexed
above-mentioned,
:
itself,
ojUVl
^J
viz.
by which
as,
VOCATIVE,
5.
The mere
act of addressing a definite person
otherwise undefined noun,

frte\
^Jx.
^ or
which then loses
To
its
define an
tanwin as
evident that some definite person
intended here.
Exercise 161.
may
English, then back to Arabic.
is
370
Lesson 182.
NOMINATIVES.
(
We
here
Subject and Predicate
commence
new and
which really follows Lesson
programme
1.
What
It
2.
in 151
Which
(N.B. Continually refer to the
156.
noun
or c-j^^X* or <j0j*- ( JJj^)
Ol^ji/ we deal with
are the principal
its
we take up consecutively
(a)
is
v^JJ/%^1
3).
.A^lj S-&JJ with
First
Iju
very important section
are the possible cases of a
may be f^j*
j^\j
(governing words) of which
^j
jo
and
its
sisters;
(b) verbs of
u>
being-about-to;
ijtell
3.
After that long interlude
Jc-lill
the agent, and Third,

JpU)l
How
It is
^vi1
Can
sisters; (d)
jk
shall return to
^^
and
its
Second,
the Deputy Agent.
do you define Â-^^j I&JJ

is
a predicated
defined as
is its
'
noun not affected by any
<^ O^>di
predicate, or
that
is
very
composed of .A^J lJ*U
What
*\
O^^dl
I,JLIJI
common
is
are the conditions of
6 or
what-is-related about
in
called
Arabic.
'U^-^l ^L?-
and
Sl^l
it.
Such
a sentence,
Nounal Sentence.
it
may be
indefinite only
an adverb or prepositional phrase, thus preceding
^**'j5
L&ll
should be a definite noun

is
J^'J^
the-spoken-about.
these two nouns, alone, form a sentence
ês, indeed
5.
its
we
sisters.
1-^-1!
4.
uj and
(c)
JjUl J;
Îj^ frb
J^l)
there's a
if its
l^s**'
remedy
for every disease; or if
preceded by an interrogative as
is
>
j 3j
in JjCll
it
tfl
f.
6.
What
is
the
meaning
The word means
the
in
A>
a described-noun,
originally a substantive
It is
it.
but in the instance
given above
A3 ^-Uc-
/.
head of the sentence.
nominative case on account of the
absence of any word governing
^j&jA
or
"the beginning,"
always put
is
It
Ij&il
of
What
it
is
a <W?
O^^
are the conditions of .A*-'
(l) j^^-\
a singular, dual or plural noun, which should,
may be
way, agree with Uiil
in the ordinary
There
not a
of course, be sentences
will,
meaning, as
as in
in
"The age
of a slightly
two days"
(consists of only)
different
(jv*jj>
*
(2) j-Ui)
may
be
The king prays

The
(3)
(is
^>^l
When
may be
is
j-JJ
must contain
a phrase, as
called Jajl j
sentence,
pronoun
in the
9.
jil
in
breasts jjJwal! <j
LJl
what special condition must be
to link
sentence
pronoun
dlUI
remorse
(contained)
is
praying)
invariably observed
It
sentence
result of laziness is
Knowledge
8.
<l^- a
Must .ASM be single
it
to the subject; this link is
oJ>-\
^Jaill the
Ja>lj
is
the
No:
may
it
consist of several
etc; as
attributes,
<*'
10.
Must
U"-l!
always precede
j^\
Not invariably; but the subject must precede

cases
(a)
If
(b}
If
any ambiguity,
is
one of the
is
naturally
as
If
Â*1
are definite,
J?*^**^
-X*
*v
-V>
reverse order be
the
if
(for
which J^j
of
^^
becomes
11.
If
-A*1
'
restricted by
is
When may
(d)
When
it
precede
//zz^s^
gatives, etc.) as
its
'
iJjH
(jf\
its
subject
When
^' ^^
When
as
1-XxJu
j* jal\
t
I.
y\
JU
stumble and every
man
a mistake
for
it is
evident that
:
if
^>\^
we
of
said jl-^!<
what
either the subject or the predicate be omitted
1-XxJj
^1
I t
contains a pronoun referring to something in
\~ft>\*0 jlj)!
May
**
**Jv
the hearer would not understand

12.
(interro-
^-^
a prepositional phrase, as
Every steed makes

(c)
'
it is
subject in these cases
(6)
verbal
*.,,
one of the "commencing" words,
is
(jj-ir.)
>
r^^'
JJM
the Predicate precede
The Predicate
Jt
J^J
<!>
wl^ as
4wf-
the agent JpUJI
is
(c)
nouns of
T*
verb as
*!*
those which
e.
i.
(interrogatives, or
the sentence obviously
observed,
sentence
when both
a sentence
j|jj| <J
is a
'
as
"commencing" words,
commence
condition),
(c)
following
there
it
in the
must be suppressed
in the
.'
following cases.
^tl
and
(a)
after
(6)
When
(c)
It
Jj as
LP
<tt
373
X.J
^
j-W*
used to allude
is
to
as
it,
->
it
4P-Uj
A>
MAY
be omitted
of (J& j>
II.
The
Had
lil
if
may
predicate
the context
(or,
clear,
be the reply to CJl
is
thus
instead
i*-ij*
omitted after 2ji
is
Zeid not been
perished
is
that
,*.**
l^So.^
But for Zeid,
jJ>U)
^ j ^^
had perished).
present,
Also
in
had
one or two
other un-important places (See a more advanced grammar).
Lesson 163.
^GOVERNING PARTICLES
1.
What do you mean by

**i^JI
(from^-J
Îj
IJL"JJ
~\j>
^4*1^JI
to abrogate, or cancel) are verbs
which change the declension, or
affect the
and
particles
meaning
of the
subject and predicate.

2.
Why
We
do we study them here

leave Olpy^ll
for a
little,
to
study such sentences
be*-
cause they are bast d upon the original j^->j
Ux-,,*
Examples
3.
(a)
(b)
Of what
we
three kinds are
Verbs which
(Lessons
shall ring the
make
>
?^!^
first
noun f^j* and the second
163, 164).
Particles which
(Lessons
the
changes upon
sentence.
make
165, 166),
the
first
^jâl* and the second
(c)
4.
Verbs which turn both nouns into Direct Objects, (Lesson
The verbs
(1)
^f'j>"lj
(2) 4>
5.
374-
of (a) are of two kinds,
jlSlCina,
what are they
167).
and'sisters.
jUil JUi! to be dealt with in Lesson 164.
Name
the verbs which are jv>
Oi^l
he was, or acted, in the morning (modern meaning,
7<~0\
he became).
he was, or acted, at noontide (he became).
,,
Ou
Jlj
T~J
,,
,,
in the
shady time (he remained).
in the
evening (he became).
at
,,
night (he stayed the night).
he ceased not.
I*
he
left
not
off.
tj
cLUm* he desisted not irom.
:>
6.
he relinquished not.
he became.
whilst he remained.
he
Are not these verbs called
and
jl5
and
their
its sisters
4*a5u)l
is
not.
jUiVI Defective Verbs
are called <*A*U in the sense that with
nominative alone
them
complete sentence cannot, usually,
be made.
7.
Can they
Yes
ever be used as 4*w Ju3l
here are examples
the heaven
and
<J*)*\3
OI^^JI
the earth remained,
i.e.
J^b
existed.
u
JAA
as long as
jo
There
j^jj
-r*^*
was
8.
Do
If
375
there be
any
praise.
be was.
to
the other tenses of these .verbs act
same way
as the past tense
lo ^^JL^
in the
C*-^ /v &] Cf Be whose son thou
Ij
Certainly
upon the nouns
wilt,
but get
politeness.
Q.
What
is
,jjJ has none but past tense (though
(1)
past at
(2)
there special about ^jijJ
all
your Lord
Does God not

Are
V^
>b and
^jjJ
rj
What
is
NOT
is
very often changed from Accusaas in
<~>
J'j etc. always
etc.
(*-*
suffice his servant
ai*
I*
^r^
'
I* ?
>~
j ^-^
<Uil
c^l^j
accompanied by
always preceded by
s
-J
=aslongas)^
preceded by the negative of preterite or
^>
imperfect
is
(of this group) is
J'j and
11.
of
by the use of
tive to oblique
10.
meaning
).
The predicate
Am I not
its
J'jrj
^>^
meant by
are four parts
work done by ^^jJ

,
I*
meaning
itself
which occasionally perform the

these are
C/Vj. ^3 ^J
U%
as
-376 -
Lesson
164.
VERBS OF APPROXIMATION ijUHjUJ-)

(OR,
1.
What
II
*-VJ
^*
Then why
When
"about to happen";
express hope of
its
taking place
two or more things are

is
sort of
"government by the majority"
transferred to both (I) this usage

,
more numerous than the
Mention some
Class
of
the
His breathing was about
The woman was about

Class
II.
May God
Class
frUjI
May
heal him
III.
Noah began
of
called
is
Âixll
the verbs of the
third,
first
but more used.
verbs of these classes.
dlijlj^
ijUll
I.
chief
name
classified together the
the one
The
are they all called SjjUU JUil
class are not

3.
under
&3jZy\ JUil express an actual beginning.
III:
2.
collected together
JUil express approximation (or near approach) to the
i.e. it is
action,
are
jUU
4,
I:
of verbs
three classes
this title
IMMINENCE)
to cease
to die
it
be
jl
O^c
<UUI JLOO
jl
^
V^-l
Uol
to build
;*L^
jl
JLÎ
an ark
poet began to chant
1>^_X3
^.AJ
?--y
-^Jo ^c-UJi -U
-i.
Moses began
(I)
c.f.
to
jlJi)l for,
address the people
il)l
and
^*-t)l
Ll^
j*
Li>
377
4.
But
do not understand
verbs which
where
The
is
make
if
all
U
5.
Are
4>l
these are
these verbs
in the case of
is
a verb in
pja
which
The same phenomenon may

J^Cx>
y'^>-lj jl$*e.g.
these verbs confined to
all
be used
of them, of
jLj
which the chief are
->u
and ^LSjl may
in
The guest
will scarcely arrive
What
is
there particular about
~&
is
occasionally used with a pronoun, since
closely
resembles
3)
Jl;,,
No: four
6.
ji/ and the predicate
takes the place of the second noun.
be observed
in 163
you say
(as
the subject
the predicate
predicate of
hope he
will
come
U
!
thus
its
meaning
îTîJL*^
(^r^
Lessons 165166.
PARTICLES RESEMBLING VERBS
r.
We
come now
known
to us as
to Class B, this
If^lj o[
consists of particles already
but also called

J*^l> A^Jill ^Jj^-'
because they have the meaning and government of verbs.
They
from
are said,
by native grammarians,
verbs by reversing their government",
i.
."instead of _l.If this be a fair explanation,

it
to
e.
be "distinguished
their subject
and not
has
far-fetched,
solves the curious Arabic problem of the reversal of cases
in the
following typical sentences.
2.
Mention
'J
<jj truly,
^5o
or verily
but, yet;
C^J would
3.
378
What
is
They
if
jJ
that,
as
l^
though
haply, perchance,
*
that...!;
no
may
it
be
facfr'J
the action of these particles
act
upon the original -A>j ux^
sentence,
making
the
01
noun <^>Â^
first
of inna)
4.
then called j\
(it is
and the second

pj*/ which
^\
is
noun or subject
the
called jj Â>-
Give other examples.

i
dlftr.
j^JI
lo
4il
Jj
4JL>-
^.1
JU
*i* LU o
^;U
"j*
5.
How
do you distinguish j' from jj
That
is
a technical point
are usually given.
The
(first
2 examples)
upon which long detailed instructions
chief points are:
ol
/.
used
<J\
is
(a)
After the word
JS
The accused says he

(b)
When
the
or
is
meaning
its
derivatives
innocent ^jr
is,
>J
*fUl Jj^
"Verily", truly, or certainly.

s>
i.e. (i)
at
commencement
of a sentence,
as
^5T
(It
will
be observed that LJj
^3 jjiptf bj
<
5?
is
shortened to
IJ
^ bî
5
b'
clause
a subordinate
to introduce
(ii)
379
asked him, being convinced of his
By God, he
(iii)
my
is
brother!
4^
<j>-l
**
//.
(vi
O is wsec?
When it (with
<Wlj
'
its
nouns) can be replaced by a masdar.
JÊ. dt
.///.
Either jl or
j^
(b) After
jj Olj>It
allowable:
(not
?^
'^
Ex
U 3 C^^
thought Zeid absent, behold he was approaching.
SJ
6.
J ^
After ^J as the answer to a condition (<-^j>-l ^^
(a)
is
tf
"
^5
^JSAÎ
means
what does
that these particles
that in that case they
is
point
therefore retain the
will
Thus the
sentence.
JtJ
JU 1^-
j^SCl
> >
be lightened of their
*
nun-
^ u jJ But the important

do NOT govern the noun, which
case
original
mean
may
^
^^J
shadda and written thus
this
it
'
had
of
^>-j IJC^
but with the
the original
in
noun
J*U y\ becomes
nyn
mukhaffafa
rt
reads
7.
Suppose U
action
The
is
affixed to the particle,
is
there then
?)
action of the particle
is
suspended
UJ
N,B,
any governing
is
restrictive as well as suspensive.
if
I*
be suffixed.
Ojll Jl
jyL.
UV
38o
LiUll
8.
What
the
is
V is
This
word
called
whole genus,
and
i.e.
khabar
its
which was given as the
AJlJi
the
la
the absolute negative.
It
^^-UJJ
but
<rj?j>
last of
which negates the
makes
thus
ever
9.
Why is
this,
and indeclinable
^ No
^'
man
deity what-
Suppose the noun of

in either
action
is
case
*i 3 V,
jlaT Yj
lesson
May
the
Yes,
we
it
^^ V
there
is
j^-
<j
3^
J>ll
J>--^ j
separated
has to be repeated,
Vj
no sword
is
iJLI
and
its
special
.V
JV
tl
V,
^^t^^j^jl^jV Neither Aly nor Zaid
The
write
^>is not indefinite, or is
J&
J^J ^
+^\
^ll^JI^ ^^\"j^^>
*^>
suspended
<J
at all is in the house."
Jj.!
sharper than Truth
Then,
îr^
Jj
negates the whole genus "man"
>
Other examples
11.
"*y>-j*
O^-J
impossible to say
it
means, "no
tacitly
Jii
ismv-Jj^;*
is existent.
Because
10.
V means
^\ "4\
<il
its
has more drastic action than
it
for its *-*' is not only accusative but singular
C-r*)
jj O'j^'
J>.ll
is in
J^
the house.
neither difficult nor long.

of
often omit
<j"^.^-
be omitted
^^
Compare
written on cheques.
from the sentence
^-^ ij*
J^^ "no more,"
or "only," usually
"
jf
and
12.
What
the
is
meaning of
The
derivation of
now
to
mean
pleased
me
AA^
may
which
*^ "no
it is
equal," from
*-*
"especially." **-**
f-
whence
it
comes
L^** The tribe
but especially their prince.
be parsed in more than one way, knowledge of
not required of the elementary student.
is
Lesson 167.
1.
We
said that there were three
the
first
affecting
7t*>y
being two classes of verbs
i.e.
other the verbs of approximation, etc
lf>lj>-1j
jo
and the
the second kind
was the
'i*r
particles
assimilated to verbs *f^j>-ij jj
the third
and
last
Y^J>-J
verbs, transmute ^ryi^j

2.
But
why do
the native
Cj
t-XxJ,!
we now come
to
which, being doubly transitive

into
two direct objects.
grammarians
The name has no connection with
call these verbs

-^*J3! jUil
"hearts" but merely with
"thinking"; most of the verbs of this class have to do with

considering, thinking, estimating, supposing,
be called "VERBS OF
Thre are
They may
MENTAL ACTION."
really three sub-classes, of
based upon j^-^3
etc.
which the
1-XlJJ
(a)
Verbs of probability jl-Jl
(b)
Verbs of certainty
(c)
Verbs of change J^^J
O\L.}\
^^^
Lj
-Xc-j
.cjj
first
two are
-3823.
Examples
of their governing action.
Original
JU*j>U)l from
this
comes
U)U*
Orig:
Orig:
N.
one of these verbs
If
B.
used in a sense different from the
is
(.
usual one,
it
way only need one
was convinced
Abu Hanifa
held,
(doctrinally).
held
be allowable to
4.
Thus with^lj he
object.
it
to
make
Give examples of
*tt
^)j?l
i-ji^JI
î^
3'j>
^'
cSl)
ablution with rose-water.
J^j 6-^)
5*
Jj**"jl
Ju*l verbs of change.

#
We
He
$.
made
the clay into pottery
used the
What
staff as
Cwl
li-*>-
IjlSG UaJl
a crutch
of the verbs
These are said
to
be verbs "requiring two objects which were

0.
^VOT originally
was
a direct,
(^ e
-A>-J ^-r*
and one an
should say, in English, one
indirect object).
**
gave
The
6.
(to) the
winner a
sultan presented the sheikh)

with an [official] robe./
As
Three-object verbs.
e>U~
prize.
fr
_>U)I
J^ : !ac.!
^ CH O^^^
*-i
'.
AM
>.
IM
supplement
to this section
we
will
mention some verbs taking three objects.
These are
Examples
We
God
Uku
|Jbj
showed Mohammed
will
show them
[that]
Zaid was going away.
their actions [to be] objects of remorse

*"
to them.
Ac-
Olv*^
Lcl
*i
<il
383
<f
was informed
my
that
friend
L>lP
[was]
5;
may be
absent. (Note that this

for jl
and
its
may
/%-J
N.B. See Lesson 169

of a verb
now
take the place of one object).

for the "retained object"
Je-UJI ^JS\j
^lp î.-^ O
written
in the passive.
Lesson 168.
THE AGENT
1.
We
It
will be
remembered
The second
J-c-UJI
like,
2.
Oy
now resume
is
is
"
that the
What
J*U)\
The Agent,
the
is
is
first
Noun
of
'
These are
like"
j^>-
<j^-'
'"e
Agent JpUll ^-t (Active
madar may
Participle)
precede
-x>
N.B.
JÛll
action, as -A-**'
or assimilated adjective, or even a

as in the following
was
denoted by
meant by the phrase "or the
In certain cases a
class
"
noun preceded by an active verb, or the
and denotes the doer of the
What
Nominatives.
3 '*&
tricky sentences
leave them and pass on.
and favourite "problems,"
3.
(a)
Summarise (and
learn) the six rules of JfrUll
The Agent may be
JfcUJI
be a personal pronoun
be masc. or
(6)
the
If
O
(c)
(d)
If
Agent
as
fj>
the
and
(as in C*>\j^>
),
and
CÛ
and fj>
its
only a metaphorical feminine,
the Agent
case
may
may
by one word or more,
verb,
If
If
in either
it
^LJ
separated from
is
or
OJi>
verb.
dual or plural.
sing,,
may
is
its
either an expressed noun, or
the verb
it
and
feminine, the verb normally takes the feminine
is
Agent
(j~-l)}
(e)
fern.,
384-
may
not take the
fern. sign.
either
allowed, as
is
or (j~*-^Jl *lk
is
a "broken plural" either
is
allowed, as
JUj l^
or
(/)
If
the
Agent
is
dual or plural the verb must be singular
jÛil
N,B.
Distinguish from
I.
jli
jlsiUcJL-sJI
Hebrew usage
as
oÛ ^1
1*
in this case.
.
N.B.
in
Distinguish from that "nounal sentence" -A>J l-^^4
2.
which
j^l
is
a verb
'jjVl
j^Xju!' But, in this latter case,

c.
jy>UI
is
not called a Js-U at
verb; in other
jjX>UI
jli
is
all
words the sentence

a verbal sentence.
but a l-te^ whose j^>is
is
a noun sentence, whereas
Many young
students
fail to
get this cleared up.

4.
What
its
(a)
is
the rule about the position of JÛll with
JJ*A* (Accusative)
The Agent precedes
its
object, as
ÎxjT
-LJ.x!l
<3^
regard
to
(b)
But
if
there
is
385
affixed to the agent a
pronoun relating
to the
object, then the object precedes the agent, thus
(c)
Similarly
Û
if
is
noun and JAA*
merely a conjunctive
is
pronoun, the pronoun precedes the agent (merely becanse

'
cannot be separated from the verb) as
-to
j (S~\j^
fJ^
it
^r
Lesson 169.
DEPUTY-AGENT
I.
What
is
the difference
The deputy agent
is
voice, or the like.
It is
place of J*U)I as in
2.
What
is
between the agent and deputy agent?
a noun preceded by a verb in the passive
s-^
called
^J
meant by "or the
The verb may
J*UI1
because
it
takes the
f
like"
(occasionally) be replaced by a
masdar
or
by a
noun of object (passive participle) JjJiL-J as
j+^^\ <j*
**&**'
from which we gather that j^Jl J^
which means
3
^j
What was J-UH

Originally
also
*UÛ-
^Tlj originally
an object, thus '-J\ l^y
Give the rules of

JÛII
JÎAM
^>U
and gender;
LJ?
from which we get
Sljll
>
we get
^J"lJ
follows the rules of

Jplili
as,
- >
(i)
Jb
^f> ^j~^
from "-5UI
4.
^jûa*
C,A>.
ÛKji.i.
with respect to number

:
jUiiJ!
^j^> jl
^rlr^
(ii)
JfruJuÛ may
.
386
(occasionally) be a masdar, as 4Lj?-4l.:L5 C^-*
a ,
or an adverb, as <JV
or a prepositional phrase, as
was seen
(iii) If
there
to
was
'
^'j
j*
j*
{*>
J^
^
the matter
Zaid was passed by.

(originally)
more than one
object, the first of such
objects becomes the deputy-agent; then what becomes of the
others
In Arabic,
they were.
we say
4lU-
<J*
j*
The
rest
remain as
But English grammarians call the second "retained
object."
I
S!
5.
N.B.
Îdl
>
- -
is
called
<Ai
"JU!
tu
oU ^Vl
4^*7
Lesson
{
Give
l> o
sentence composed of verb and agent, or of verb and
deputy agent,
I.
170.
ACCUSATIVES Ol.^JJ)
a list of the Accusatives in the order in
which we propose
to treat them.
The Direct Object

Absolute (or Cognate) Accusative
Accusative of Cause or Reason
Accusative of Time or Place
Accusative of Association
V
A**
Accusative of "Exception"
Accusative of "State"
Accusative of "Specification"
Vocative,
tfte
etc.
(jM
Specialisation
2.
Are there any others
There are two already studied

in
and J& ^>- and words
^J
<j[
See Lessons 185-8
apposition to accusatives (sequents).
on
j31 All the above are nouns but
governed by subjunctive particles
we must
v.^ljlll for
not omit the verb

it
also is said to
be ^J*A+*
3.
Define
A)
A.
Jj*i!J
is
JjwAXl
the Objective.
noun denoting the person
(or thing)
upon which
the action has fallen (the verb being in the active voice) as
iJJI J**\
<~>j~*
same thing
passive
4.
Is
A>
It
may
In regard to
J*U!1 Î"l; denoting the
^\j^
""
v-ÛI
^.
W*^
the verb
but in the case of
yu
4j
changed from active
is
JM!^
the verb remains
always an expressed noun
to
active
^^
as
be a j*lU
^.1
as in
<*-->u>Ji
j$ or an attached pronoun,
Xw/^ or a disjunctive pronoun, as t^!,
He
sent none but
me
mean him
'
'!
J^j^ \
himself, or,
(**
ft
"'
refer to that
very thing.
5.
If
the verb takes two objects,
the usual procedure
thus
is
to
and both are attached pronouns,
detach one and
make
it
disjunctive,
6.
(a)
Should the object precede or follow the agent
The
If
may
object
*f+j\
(6)
"s^xJI
JUJI
or
jT
one of them
(d)
The agent must precede
is
^-1 *j
to
7,
as
it,
May an
Yes
the object in
we must
come
first if
tell
by the
object precede
in the latter
but j*>-j
'-C.*
its
verb
Why
its
(a)
The
verb
but an agent or
case they would not be verb
&
agent at
and the sentence would be turned into^-*^
all
11*7
171.
is
masdar written
strengthen
Exs
order.
ÂBSOLUTE ACCUSATIVE
is
agent from
Lesson
It
is
-U* ^*ir^
3*"^
Because
What
which
the agent has a pronoun referring
deputy -agent cannot do so
I.
as,
any case of ambiguity
tell
an object may precede even
must precede the
must precede,
it
Since we cannot
the form of the word,

object must
Ul
restricted by
If
The
it
"v-A5JI L*$i
as
iJu>
^! j,
an attached pronoun
is
(c)
as
often either precede or follow, as,
one of the two
other,
(e)
388
it
(it
may
after a verb
from a cognate
also be used to express kind, or number)

'
first
kind
is
"
root, to
called (strengthening
J*)
as in
-389(b)
That which expresses kind or number

tive) as
2.
Can
the
uf jj ^ 1/*J^ JJ-^"
madar be replaced by
Yes; by
(a)
its
<i->^
(b)
Vjll
(c)
O^
(d)
dûi
its
(e)
What
denotes
its
its
its
(f)
its
(h)
by
JS"
explica-
"^li
I
manner
APji
j^w-JU
as^*
crosslegged
o^
number
5**
instrument^ lasl^j^CÎ struck him with-a-whip.

or
^>
in construction
with the
:
3.
else
(u^*
a^* lf^
r^
(g)
any thing
[$ '$
pronoun,
its
called
synonym
demonstrative,
adjective,
is
J:
Give some examples of isolated

has been omitted, or
madar,
as
11
the
of
which
lost sight of
Steady
7C.-
ill
ft
ii
^,.,"1 Jl
Lesson 172
ACCUSATIVE OF CAUSE
I.
What
does
4^* Jj^'
(which
is
denote
sometimes called J JjuU with the same
meaning) denotes the cause
(i.e.
the motive)
of the ac*i'on, as
390
&
JUy*
lij.
A LolT
fled for fear.
my
C*\j**\ chastised
^J
son for correction (training).

2.
What
It
are the conditions of
must be placed
4^ Jj*^
in the accusative
following two conditions are

the
same
verb,
being accusative
and be
fulfilled,
when
indefinite,
(i)
the
J-*A* not of
^^
agreeing with the verb as to agent and time
(ii)
tf
of action, as
3.
But what
It
is
\~>-
being the one
4>jj (the visitor
meant by
means "a madar
who
loved).
Û j^*
such as love, fear and other
of emotion,"
motives which determine men's action.

4.
Why
should
Because,
if
jUa* JjJu
5.
But,
if
it
it
as
madar
be a
were from the same verb,

3
Sjli
which
in the genitive.
"I
came
to
time and agent,
4J
water.
4"jJ
JjdJ cannot be
WJ^
is
When
it
is
accusative,
^v
*vJ)
He
^01
tl*
quite indefinite,
Cf*>-
its
vJO
came
jOI
he went to
* as
it is
put
make
iu.xj|
<j-A*
wealth.
without either J' or construct case,
placed in the accusative, as
*&&
O*>-
to the well to [get]
knowledge
being indefinite
i. e.
placed
is
it
not agreeing with
travelled to get
Jlil
the rule as to
out-of-charity.
*U being an exterior object,
i.e.
^
him
to the well for water,"
he sat down to write.
(a)
would be called
Thus, since you cannot say
in the genitive thus
What
it
the conditions of question 2 are not fulfilled
In cases in
6.
"not of the same verb"
<>
s*
\*y
rared in-honour of the visitors.
wLu*-'
<a.xU
Oi^j
llJap'
we gave
to
the city
was deco-
(b) If
J' without construction, the genitive
defined by
"more usual"
The
391
(/'.
accusative
preferred) as
e.
is
In the construct
used, as
Jl31
to please
state,
j-^
^^)
U?j
(4)1
Oj\f*^*
seldom used, one solitary instance
duced by most of the books

(c)
ancl
^! j*
-i^J[,
said to be
is
4)1
is
either accusative or genitive
^* j*
repro-
or
C*>j*
<J>j>-
Jlill
may be
s*
j^f/^*%' J^J-W
gave alms from desire
God.
Lesson 173.
ÂCCUSATIVE OF TIME & PLACE
1.
What
It
is
ClJîll
noun used
is
to denote the time or place in

#
was performed,
action
O Jîli )
as
which the
^Jt*
^J
prayed
at
night
&
!A-*
^>XA
Jji* may also be called
e^
^J
2.
walked a mile.
This
N. B.
=*=
Adverb,
^J>jU
being a jUj cJjU while
îj!ill
may
(jA^-l
be either (j^"^
means
"specified,"
^L
is
or^vWhat
as
called jlSC*
is
O^k
meant by these terms
A>-jUI J^t>-
came yesterday
whereas
^^
means "vague,"
as
c-t*
dÛ
travelled for a
period.
(j*^-' of place is a defined area,
whereas
*i!
as -X>~i' in
consists of the six directions
Oj
-W-xl^J
^j
3-
What
the rule as to
is
392
being accusative or genitive
cJÎall
(a)
All adverbs of time can be accusative;
(b)
Of
the adverbs of place only
OU^JJ
the "vague" ones can be
accusative, as
(c)
The (j*<- adverb
of place must
(d)
Quantities
joUU
4.
What may
take the place of c-iill
j-XÛ as
(6)
SjUNl
inthe genitive,
as
are placed in accusative, as
>JI fjU
as
put
J O~
(a)
be
Jb*
jJiiLL.1
C,^
^.1
meaning j
and
(c)
AAA)| as
^J.^* CyiSJi
meaning
as ^
*'
5.
Is
Ojiall
Some
or
are
declinable or indeclinable,
(*J>j*sl*
non-adverbs,
i.e.
O/^t*
or
these are those that can be used as adverbs
e.g.
you may
say
Others are ^Jj^sl* j& indeclinable, being only used as adverbs

or the like
i U
(i.e.
with
also
L*-^-J
as
as
^^-
J
lil
loj*
vl^
while
was
-^*>
sitting.
N.B. Note the use of the accusative, and of the genitive after
6.
Revise vocabulary
26,
page
68.
-^^ as
393
Lesson 174.
ACCUSATIVE OF ASSOCIATION
1.
What
It is
is <
noun preceded by
shows
in
Ex: 'j*^\j
AÛal'
Irvil!
j'j the
wau
Leave the
]j\
Under what conditions can

It is
(wau) meaning,
when
only accusative
conjunction
to
<**
-^'-%'
is
it
called
fool to his fate. Literally
be accusative
Jîl
it
it
(to) fate.
cannot be joined
it
what precedes
(ie. in) the morning.
This j
done.
is
zuzYA
of association.
Leave the deluded one with
reads,
(a)
a special j
what association the action
or
iâil jlj
2.
***
â)ij
pjuLMj
by a copulative
OîL
-^J^^
travelled with
Zaid walked
along the new road.
Now
it is
in -U^-j
quite evident that
^JL?""* ^ a ^ ar>d
did not walk with Zaid, as
pju
Mohammed walked
together, ^=Zaid
walked with Mohammed.

**
.
In
^j>JulA-î there
is
no copulation,
for,
attached pronoun must be repeated, thus

s
Zaid walked; whereas

(b)
When
1-^ j^
-h
to copulate,
j>j
wj
the
C^J^* land
î^^
the form of the verb requires
rea ^,
walked with Zaid.
more than one
doer, the
ordinary conjunction must be used and both agents take the

^>
nominative, as
(c)
In certain cases
is
j^c-j
J> j
J-x5l
with conjunctive meaning
either of the
two
allowable (but the accusative here would be rather weak-)
3.
Is
4*
much used
(J}*li
In the poets,
example occurs
in the
Strange to say,
it
Aruh-waiyak,
seldom found, and only one rather doubtful
is
it
394
Quran 5*\Sîj
re-appears in Egyptian colloquial ûjj r3;i
go with thee=Z#.
5^*1 Iji**-
go and thee (disjunctive
pronoun).
Lesson 175.
EXCEPTION
1.
.^.iLiil
it is
written in
some books -uU*
noun mentioned after one of
the most
common
is
2l
the act of excepting;
five or six particles (of
VI) excepting
this
judgment on what has preceded, asOîl
noun from the general
aMj^bJxJTo
'
disease there
The
2.
When
raws/
meaning
examples,
(b)
remedy except death. *^>
ÎJLAl be accusative
^1
every.
*
*^
j>c-l)l
Ojd
then
also,
has three separate classes:
The preceding sentence
all
trees fruited except a figtree.
ÎXJJ by
(a)
is
which
is
must be accusative, as
^-tLJJ
&
&
l-kj
both affirmative and complete in
j%\*
^Jj*
in the
above
passed by the people,
but Zaid.

then
jJ-iLal
may be
is
negative and complete in meaning,
put in the accusative, or be
made
a cM>
Appositive (see Lesson 188) and take the case of the preceding
word, as
uUj-U
3iJ^^[ Of 1
-395
(tf)

lined according
to
is
what
then
incomplete
dec-
required by the preceding clause,
is
whether nominative, accusative or genitive
were not present
is
^xîl
jt
though
(as
).
iU
Vi
4U\i VI
L.
U U
^JiV> J*JI
- ^
* rJ
3.
What
particles other than
Two classes
(l)
Either
j^
Since both
or
(_^j**
are there
&
tfj^-^
(l)
LiUj
(2)
may be put
l-te-
into construction with
either one
are nouns,
'
^.tU.1
takes that case that would
have been taken by ^.lLJ.1 after Vj as
ISO
P
What
Jl
has happened here
The
special case of
(or
(f)
by
A^
-A--
^-lL*il
(2)
UjUf
itself
the usage
jU-
is
may
^c- U
"
has been
being now
(which may be
i-Xpj
*j^l
^Jl
p2>
^j
^xJJ
adverbial preposition.
<d.pl*
in the genitive
very roughly
See
transferred
to
governed
looked upon as an
p. 65).
be regarded as prepositions, in which case
similar to that in the case of
j^-
as
^j
^j')l Iji
Or, as verbs, governing in the accusative, as

If
preceded by
".Ji Uc-
u juvi,
1-^3 '-^ (*^^ (/
(an "extra") the accusative
ii
û
is
necessary:
~~
396
Lesson 176.
STATE
-
I.
noun which denotes the
is
of the agent (or the
state
object) at the time of the occurrence, as
<
The prince came
riding
Quote the information correctly

In the first
example JU~'
the
is
cribed)
object jL>2.
It is
-jL>. jl
A^C^^J
^^ w>
above examples.
oJ&~j
3.
(a)
It
>
may be
Occasionally
it is
God
believe in
a primitive
when denoting
,,
price
^
noun
adjective) as in the
(i.e.
,,
(e)
4.
^J-^j
alone.
\^
**
Wj^
when
^*j
u^J*J
arrangement Lu
qualified
by
and
Jj
Ui
U-^j JA.Î O*^-^!
?*?
<xU.j
b\>
i^-^-
Uj5 j>ji J*j*$
^ 0^5'
a descriptive adj
Does JU-1 occur as a sentence

Yes, often
*C*>
metaphor
(d)
yourself.
in certain special cases
reciprocity
(c)
defined by annexation to a
(/;)
des-
"I"'
C^>i
41) I*
is
second example, the
pronoun (construct. state) as iu>j ^*:>1 go by

>
JJl
3i
usually an indefinite derived noun
one whose state
(the
but, in the
agent J^**\
\ii
.A**'
Ij
definite or indefinite, primitive or derived
Jli-1
Is
\'\
this use of
it
is
Lj
very
good idiomatic Arabic.
- 397~
occurs as a narrative sentence
It
nected with Jli-^
i )
^>(^
Zaid came to
me
^?
but
of
hal," as
iJlU
^JJIj
(ii)
An
(m)
Jvi-l j'j
J^
"1 j
while the sun was rising.
arrived whilst people were asleep
must be con
it
by a copula i*l> This la'j may be
wau
Jlil jlj The special
\J^>
^LJ <j*vJlj
"understood" pronoun in a verb of

as
^jUail
with an attached (or other) pronoun,
as,
Aly came with
hand on
learned that while
The
or,
rose
left their
they went
*-
(iv)
head
when
was young
j**^>
ur
away from home by

and
had
the sun
Jli-1
Û
Yes, they must agree
risen
W
-**-*
*r^r
the thousand.
(j**JI J^*!!? J3j
J^*5
or,
as (JJ~$^J jlTjMMl
name given
to a
of a preceding
of Jl>-l
O*U
177.
SPECIFICATION
commonly
number and gender
Lesson
a preterite verb, as,
there any relation between the
_^.-
sun having already risen.
and that of
I.
A**lj
home, thousands of
jj with ^
rose, the
Is
his
orator spoke whilst sitting
They
5.
his
>.^
called in English "Specification,"
is
the
noun which discloses the more exact meaning
noun or phrase having more than one meaning.
398
*
ti
That preceding noun or phrase
ott Mohammed was
-U^-
called -A-**' For
is
example
may have more than one
happy,
word
inference, but the
matter
59
(c.f.
\<*&
clears
in-respect-of-soul,
the
4. 5)-
'
Mohammed was happy
of-soul
Mohammed was happy
of-origin
LA> A*^- CÛ*

#
2.
What two
(a)
kinds of ,X~c are there
may he
,/.
(a)
of weight, measure, area,
called Oi-AJI
number,
This
etc.
understood.
-j^
applied to nouns
is
This kind of _Xt c
Examples
(substance).
Jr*-~c
-U
jjjS
5b
lineage)
expressed, or (b)
Instead of -UÂ* some say
(=
have the weight of a mithqa.ll

in-respect-to gold (- of gold)/
We
bought
tv;o kailas,
corn
i!a-
~*'/s
AO
is
measure of capacity
distinguish from Fr.

?
They purchased
We
The
other kind
earth
it
is
made
5l> jj^-ic. 4
called 4-uJJIjA-a: of relation
in
Question
was planted with
Zaid is richer than I

Zaid is greater than
(///.
We
of land
twenty she-camels
examples of
The
qaaba
have thirty horses
He owns
3.
Mo.
I.
Other examples
trees
^^
-^
"*
iches)
the earth break out in-springs
we gave two
:
(J*^ ^^J^
IjUc-il
1
I in-i
^~*
l'^*
^"^j
^^
How
I
399
brave was Napoleon as-a-man
uWji^
<A-J
was the youngest of them \

the least of them in-age)J
>
U^
\.
ff
(lit.
4.
But
is
^5
not more usual to say
it
^^
<> ^-^
\-\
Â
L-
^^<^
.
rather than
&
*s
Yes
OlJul _/^
truction
4*U>Vli
is
often expressed either by placing in cons
or
by the use of tf
Lesson 178.
^SPECIFICATION OF NUMBER
1.
This sub-section
is
students) that
takes a separate lesson.
it
so important
studitd in Lesson 147.

with Lesson 177
for
4,
(and so tricky to inattentive

But most of
we show
Here,
it is
^Ju!i
its
form of iUJI
it
was
close connection
JA.-X
but j* can
not be used with the numerals.

2.
Sunmarise the rules as

(a)
Nos.
310
and
required;
*^>
(several) put their
j^
plural, as
(b) In the
to A3U?VI construction, etc.
4*Ja, .A,
1199
J^-j
Û
genitive
JU-j i*>
jl
place their Jr^-C
illustrative
is
?Ux
^1&}\
in the
have been expected from 177
An
^LJ
in
two instances of 100 and 1000 genitive singular

> .*
V*
#
(c)
j\-
example, given
accusative singular, as might
2.
in
f*& ^JJ^'\
and
other
400
books, might well be memorised here
Or
3.
the following
The above covers from

"One'*
is
dual
(a)
and
and
where we say J>-j
te-ij
and
man)
except
for
the
used.
is
What
where are
1000, but
only used as an adj. (following not preceding,
in colloquial
4.
are the Rules as to
Gender?
2 agree with the thing
applies
and
II
to
numbered.
also
12,
Note that
the
to
units
this equally
of
figure
21,
A>
22 etc,
Examples
3~9will
jUjlj^-J
be, in gender,
&
5*
(c)
10
is
JU
:>j-U)J
^tc-
^jJ^
when
:
^.Ic-
^2J' iu)l
What
exs
-XJj
single
JUj
not
Le.
IjLs,
but
it
compounded
is
when compounded,
5.
cr
ojk~*
&
*=
(c?)
-^>!j
,^^=1^
Û
is
'
as
Multiples
\ jl>
of
10,
o^-e- ^-*-
show no gender
distinction
the rule as to
Since 4*J^ means "a few, not less than three, nor more than
nine/'
it
follows the rules of the numerals
Ua> r tP 4Ja}j
JU
"
*a>_j
*
v^,
39.
AVI
<Waj
"
*\
C-'-S-
401
Lesson 179.
ÔRDINAL NUMBER
I.
What
is
the special form taken
**\
That of the Noun of Agent
by the ordinal
as
JM*
a descriptive adjective,
it is
x-
in
agreeing
gender with
noun.
its
iJU US ^jJ
The
^3lj ^JLII jL
moons"
(sun
and moon) have no
Those who say
that
God
"2
is
third.
a third of three [gods] are infidels.
4
2.
On what measure
is
(j^l
the first?
fully explained in 148

3.
Does the ordinal agree with

Naturally
it
does, as
What
is
is
its
noun
an adj
in
being defined by
^\-5OI
c.f.
the rule as to the compounds, and the decades

--
(a)
The compounds
1119
take
1}
The decades and
N. B.
Jj^-
is
'j& m
(
the units are declinable (see 148
(6)
with
ûfsji
Exs. tl3
4.
it
5.
>-
their units are united
the cardinal,
or oj-^f-
(f)
if
defined,
8).
^^ U
^
'
C*
by
jj-1^1 the
_?
'*
ic
as
ordinal,
&.
5.
considered to be an addendum to the section on number
is
why do we
say
L^y
instead of
"How many
question,
(a)
402
has two uses
kinds"
the
9-j
when we ask
the
called
first is
interrogative,
<-ot^4l**l
**
and requires
How many
to
dirhams have you
chase this
of
is
(informative) and
(&& *(j^j^ v
it
has to be genitive, as
The second use
Exs
not interrogative at
means
"several, or
have several horses
used to possess
colloquial
How
is (b)
Very
easily
\'Jf~*
is
dist
from
-Ltlfû/VI
annexed
This
servants.
vjae-/jsfj*
j^>-
called
many."
^5s._L
jui.
*
many
(jV
is
it
all,
-X"
in the accusative ii-UP \*Pj2
For how many piastres did you pur-
-)
(b)
be put
preceded by a preposition,
if
But,
noun
its
He
is
(a)
puts
is
common
poor, give
him
in
%
\
Egyptian
few
piastres.
<
its
noun
in accusative,
(in construction) to its
noun which
but
is,
therefore, in the genitive,

,
6.
'
'
In
0^\
It
means
is
a word (j
"lots
of," or
W*JJ J-*2^
^ 5^
provide
own
its
U*
food.
somewhat
^*
similar to
"how manya"--.
(J*>
^J Many
a beast [of burden] cannot
403
Lesson 180.
VOCATIVE
1.
such as
noun mentioned
is
(_^^l
to attract the
l>
after a special vocative particle
owner's attention as
-X-.
AÛ-
l>
t.
2.
The vocative
3.
What
is
of eight classes
Proper name
(l)
d 'JJ
^H^'J
the Rule for each class of vocative
is
ii
particles are
>
>
it
c-9 ^t*J x
-J
~,
this takes a single
damma
as
3^>
Indefinite but intended (specified)
ye lovers of justice
j^jl^
jLn
as
l>
s>
(3)
Ûa>
<
In
~,U)lU
I-
(^)
oZjtAA*
construction
^JIUI
J
this takes fat-ha, as
4SI JLC-
j^& ojj
Indefinite
1;
and unspecified, as
(the cry of a
<>
(5)
blind
man) ^-U)
This
is
cJUaU>
!x^j I
-X>.
some man take my hand.
indefinite accusative.
Owi
Semi-construction
this also is placed in indef.
&
accusative.
(6')
f>-\ <j
^^ ^
Voc. of the Defined by Ji
word (\
or
'
with Ailll
(any) well-doer.
if
is
the
noun has the
used, as
article the
404
>
***
(7)
The Sacred Name may be

and
(8) <-J
J>
FOR
^CALL
One
it
of the sub-sections of
What
(1)
are
its
three forms
^ or aloj I and
181.
HELP
VI
<^l^
is
VUl*Vl
Call for
is
Sometimes
(3)
Sometimes
to distinguish the
one called upon from the
as
U^S
I
>
\
only, as
<^
^y
^>idl
a form (similar to the above) to express admiration, as
is
It
is
by J as
called to the aid of, as
(2)
What
help;
>
uiJ
generous ones [give alms].
Preposition
one he
3.
Either C-j
can be best remembered as marked by \ followed
J.SoJ
2.
u but more usually *^
or .fcl I
Lesson
1.
I**
<U)'
have special forms.
*l
I,
written
or at
its
i-Jill
is
what water
colour,
to express
its
sweetness,
^>cxli = the one admired.
<^
etc.
admiration at
lamentation, and has a special form the original par"

i
ticle
as
being
d'jJj
^j
>_?
with
9\
usually affixed to the
poor boy
But u
is
name apostrophised
also used,
in that case
405
there
(CJLif
5.
(a)
no special
is
What
O my
(c)
It
may
may end
retain
in
may end
Hebrew
the
its
slain
idea of bowels = emotions).
name lamented
original form as
and ^-^ I
UJ-l^j
in
(to imitate
the
the long-drawn wail) as
of pause (also imitative) as
allX
grandson of Mohammed,
Note
In colloquial,
What
out,"
UJ
we say
O dear, O
dear
**$
is
is
î-^ll
the opposite of
whereas
^->-
jOI
is
Fatima Jf^^
for
which
^-^J!
chopping
more especially the vocative.

for
eye
Husain, lamented on the Feast of Muharram, was the
N.B.
6.
(c.f.
my
[the light of]
SJii I
^JLJ
It
^-f ^ O
three forms are possible to the
s-^Jcil
(6)
liver
as
suffix,
For
is
off of the
^>l^
a "broadening
end of a word,
we say
7-1^
L>
Ibrahim we say
Lesson 182.
l<
What
s-LpVi
ing.
is
(incitement to action)
is
*\J?*\
and ^>tlJl
the opposite to jr;-***^
warn-
Both are examples of the Arabic accusative dependent
406
on an unwritten verb. Ex
of
<U-XlUo$JI
(l)
Keep covenant and guard conscience

means, Beware of the
In
(l)
(#)
(.j?)
(honour).
fJlJl
how many ways can
means, jJb
the warning be uttered
By mentioning only
the one warned, as
dlUj = ciJ(L,J
oriLlj = cUjjiiJ
The thing warned
against, as ^X*.Vl
The one cautioned and

Beware of
also the thing
Beware
How
is
is
warned
and
against, as
1
Ol?JbeJtj l!U
student need not learn
this.
The
'official'
Jl>'<
It is
11,1
>X>.I
the case explained in the last two examples
explanation
What
iJbj
C-jiSCJIj ill
lies
of innovations
The elementary
I.
= JL*Vljjb-l
3.
(2)
warn.
2.
jQ
lion.
means <Jl!lj
equals
âx^
is
the official explanation of the
phenomenon
of an accusative
occurring where one might have expected a nominative in

apposition, etc.
Vi;*"
upon
O5
^Jl
Ex
but an
-U/
i??2/?/zerf
Vj^'cr^ we might have expected

verb (either
^-âJI
or
(
governing
it
in the accusative.
J-^1
acts
The sentence then
reads
>
lJ^ ( Vj"'
-^
'
407
VVe ~~
u^'
~~ are
the Arabs
mean
generous.
2.
This
called (j^Lax>-2
is
^y V
>LjjVl ^tU.o
specialisation.
(j^l) j*i We,
(= All God's prophets are

3.
Other examples
We,
the Arabs,
are the
(i.e.
poor).
Thess. 4
any who spend
of
nothing to be inherited from us
of prophets, have
company
specialise (refer to) the
most
t>S\J!
15
liberal
on their guests)
End
of
Jj,
t^jl j^
^ J ^J (JA^
,J
ot^:ii)
Lesson 183.
oUy^
GENITIVES
1.
Nouns
the Genitive Case
in
of two kinds
( i )
(ii)
The
is
are
(preps, are called j>-L3>jj>-
the genitive indicated
OUÛI
are
tJUail
of
two
usual kasra,
reg. fern, plj, as
The
letter
five
nouns.
when
the
noun
r-"
(ii)
in construction.
signs
signs
^'jJ>j.
Those which form the complement
By what
The
Those governed by prepositions
nouns
2.
or
(oL^^ti'
4jili
\^\
is
singular, (and
in (a) the dual,
O\1*^JJ
(b) reg.
Exs. of these are found
when
it is
>
>
[J3
masc. plural,
in this
sentence
(c)
the
408
J^ljU -W
relatives,
(iii)
Fatha
He
and
( ji-i
parents,
nearer
the needy.
JA*
<j
dwells in Egypt.
resumed
is
Jiil y
u-L'l
4*
3.
to
imperfectly declined nouns, as
in
But kasra
Give
if
Jl
is
added,
as
etc.,
JiiVlsi^-
4*
X"
What
<~ijj>- )
are the chief prepositions
Jl
Also UU-j I^PJ
Lesson 175
4.
Lesson
149)
Instead of
This
is
uses of the above are familiar to the student
the following:
may
also be
memorised
him
&
God
from
Get away from
me
(Endorsement of cheques) [Pay] Sayidl j^lj^J)

Ahmed and charge to my account
)
'
\\
-
e,
Have
Sit
they asked about
down
at
my
right
me
^Û
hand
^-c
One
soul shall not make)

satisfaction for another J
On
[A
tradition]
of
Abu Huraira
the authority
thank God for His mercy
At the time of Abu Bekr
"
c.
xi
A^\
For the soul of the departed
We
in
3.
The most ordinary

(see
which we dealt with
!^>-
J J^
-
<">J
^ u&
,|
409
And we
preferred
Of very
great importance
They were
There
this
is
some
'U^WI^*
'
man among
V Yj^JW
and)
21 IJ* <j
^.
cH
s
tT*
created the worlds)

from everlasting
/
slept until the
ô ^
like a lion
He
I
s^b-
neither a learned nor a great
people
is
Jac4\
killed for their crime
An eye for an eye

a tooth for a tooth
He
to others
t-\h
X*
Jj>!
morning
See also Lessons 197
198 on the Particle.
Lesson 184.
ANNEXATION
1.
What
are
"Nouns
The antecedent
What
^JUail the annexed, and the consequent
are the
3.
tJJiU 4iUVl Real

<JaA\Jl
How
(i)
construction, as
îliVI Verbal construction,
are these
two kinds distinguished
^T-J*
>
<^*-*
as^j^jU?
?
4jLJi.l A$U?V! has the force of an implied preposition, thus
r-y XÂ**
may
be taken to
mean
"Tj^
^^^
^\
cJuJI
"
Those residing
is
two kinds of <Û?Vl

>
(ii)
(ascription) of the one to the other.
S^J
(i)
Arabic
ÛaJJ the one annexed-to. Arab grammarians speak of
*Ji
2.
is
in Construction" called, in
watch of gold
Cairo
DÛ)l^jS
l*
SûJI
410
In ^Jaill
(ii)
'A** as
<uU)l
Jj
old,
HiviVI
usually, <-*Ual1
tall
Jijb
V->^
the one
j^jl f
of stature,
who
is
derived adjective
in the
ij
is
no implied
and that
of dual, as
There
struck Zaid.
days of
preposition in this form of construction.

4.
What
(i)
are the rules of <JLii-l
iîlill
Verbal Construction
5.
What
(i)
(ii)
are the
plural
note the distinction from
Jl (but
LJall
in this point).
same
&
*1 ^-j
but
oUai' here
SiUVt
are the rules of IJaAll
and
<M1
nun of masc.
must be deprived of
It
(iii)
tanwin, as
its
also loses the
It
(ii)
loses
Sli
as <LJLi>-i *iiU?2i
is
a derived adjective.
cJUall may, in verbal construction only, retain Jl in certain
(iii)
cases, viz (a)
if it is
dual or reg. masc.
The
dwellers in Egypt are safe
noun
itself
already defined by
or
Jl,
pi.
as
as in (Jjî j*** j^-S LJI
(b) if
it
annexed
is
^^-^ ViJ*^
to a
the strange
<r
of race
6.
(i.e.
the alien)
noun
nexed
to a
3>i^ JtUl
as,
N.B.
itself
J&\ ^>JJ
annexed
to a third
J>> Ûl
which
is
fully.
though
not,
C
few others require
jLjl J>
tjjl
while
defined
p. 68.
(Vocab-
Oy:
26).
J^ means
>-^, (j*
ma Y mean^/h)i{ji*j
JLp|
an-
by
The most
Revise care-
to be <in construction in
always, in form;
(c) if
(Revise page 345).
Certain nouns only occur in construction.
important of these are given on
or
the benevolent, or
meaning
C^s Jo
means
or rtâ*j
J-^l
or
^^\(J2*
1*3.1
{
7.
What
the
there peculiar to i^-lil *LJ 5iU* 31 the annexation to
is
./irs
personal pronoun
'
Examine
the following
at
He
is
one of
my two
my
These are they
From
danghters
difficult,
my
How
own
is like
rule
jf>
10-12 on p, 88
Ûa^
for
we
easily seen
it is
like hudai.
say that C>(5ji-l the vowels, are
about that ending
say that
Truly
(J^JLrÔ;
<^Jy2/i
<
in
ojJul
my
it is
What
to
honour
is
my
life.
as in
<
kj^j.A*x)
oj-X&*
the
OlS^^-l
vowels are
alif.
about ^Ûll and (jUJ
say
owing
annexed
implied or under-
implied owing to the difficulty of vowelling the
N.B.
do we parse the ordinary noun when
What
We
judge
-J*
^5"^"
and from Lesson 34
guidance,
something
stood, as in
10.
my
euphony requires the avoidance of ^'-** which would be
that
We
I*
-b-i
^X^
me
that love
these examples
hudaya,
9.
teachers
leave the student to deduce his
We
^
.
stick
(J-^'^-î one of
8.
'
V"
ÛoP my
^L)i
*& JUjJLJjS^Ju^ Ol5î-\
to the lack of
euphony
(lit.
the vowels are implied
heaviness)
This "implied vowel" parsing
is
if
called
ya take damma.
412
Lesson 185.
APPOSITIVES (SEQUENTS)
1.
Is
the Appositive a
word
the
Precisely; *jU)l
"in apposition" to a preceding
declension to that of the noun which precedes
Note that the

2.
What
meaning
literal
are the four kinds of
of *jljT
is
tive,
-^
substitute.
by adding U*J'
find
f*'^'
3.
Commencing with
(i)
(jyi.!
M
<Ja
conjunction,
<<
^y
corrobora-
Some grammarians, however, make

explicative appositive, which
iJalafr
under cUJl
it.
followers, sequentia.
descriptive adjective,
with a similar
declined
is
appositive,
word
we
five
shall
do not agree with them.

C**JI
vI^Jl real
of
what two kinds
attribute,
is it?
the
qualifies
noun which
it
follows; as in the following examples:
We
were introduced to two noble men (j.
(ii)
^x
"causal"
v!>
attribute,
denotes
quality
something having connection with the noun which

(observe that
Exs Oj\
it
^ f>
follows
it
does not qualify the preceding noun
J>ji-X&
This
is
man whose
itself).
affair is strange.
These two boys whose
motherwas han d S o m e.
I
entered
whose form
We
the
is
garden
beautiful
saw the youth whose 1

face is comely J
^3
^
>'
'-
,
|
in
^,
^^
,,
.j,
cs-
>
4.
What
J>JI usually
is
Usually
is
it
may
it
J!te
^jf-i
as
a derived noun,
Object ^J^+A*
But
413
Noun
or Attribute as J~?-
or
masdar (used
also be a
of
a descr.
into
as, a descriptive adj.) as
as
adj.
demonstr. qualifying a definite noun, as
word ji owner,
or the
5.
good pious man
What
A>
^D 7dU>
or of
J?*** **\ as J*-l
trustworthy witnesses (but only
of being turned
came
Agent ^jU*
when
it
is
jjbU S^Z
l-A*
Js>jl
capable
or a
*U- this
man
or possessor (j*
3* ^\**
J>-j
^,
j>-j)
are the rules of
agrees with
(a)
vl**l)l
or
indefiniteness,
(b)
in
gender,
(c)
in
number, as
which
C^ll
it
follows, in definiteness
as,
.
..
generals;
What
cnUU j^-jf li ^^*
passed by two noble
..
JjjV^
(d) in case,
6.
as
Oj** 5*
as j^Lili
f They are real believers.
olj>l>
are the rules of
^.xJI C^J1 agrees with
its
or indefiniteness, but
qualifies the
agrees with
it
it
preceding noun as to definiteness
as to gender, as
FOLLOWING
noun, and
414
These two boys whose

are
faults
Remember,
many
meaning of a
Other examples of
This
man whose
passed a
>
Wj**
that
in this connection,
practically the
7.
has the
jl
relative pronoun.
>
girl is
man whose
honourable
>
>
4xi*l
Remember
4JUiU)l
U-j!
s-U-
ancestors were honourable
J/^l
J^>
that a
rjT
ijlT
#>
N. B.
and
^-^-^ ^*JI
( o jljT
8.
status
#'
is
also a
i;
iS
4i^
attribute.
Lesson 186.
CONJUNCTION
I.
What
which we
v-bj
is
treat here,
and the so-called (j^\ â.^

This
Jac-
uence and
is
is
often called
well-known
whereas
i*)UJ' ^JzLc- will
There
very
is
The Arabic
little in
(J-*xll
the connexion of seq-
to us, in English, as the
Conjunction,
be treated under the heading of J-VJi
common between
definition of <J~JJ! <^JiLw
between which and the noun

particle,"
cJjSac-
it
the two.
is
that
follows
is
Ja*M
a
is a
/w"
"conjunctive
or conjunct/on.
Note that some of these are disjunctive, others copulative.
2.
Name
415
the conjunctions.
II
Disjunctive.
Copulative,
t.
and
or
(in
general)
^'
either (one of two)
and then (order)
but
then (after interval)
but rather
even, until (limit)
not
3.
Examples, for careful study,
to
show the
use of the above
particles.
Success [comes] from knowledge and manners^-O^lj
jjT-
Zaid and
He
Mohammed
insulted
me and
Zaid arose, then
The savants
b j
f
arose
- *
struck him
Mohammed
>r
(doctors of law)
entered and then the princes.

All
men
We
stayed a day or so
die,
even prophets
Did you, or your

raise the
This or that
l;U
fathers,
heavens
^
f
(This, or rather that)
dJli
Either this one or that one
Khalid did not come
but his brother
is
here
Fear not thy enemy but rather thy brother
Take
the bow, not the sword
-IU-I
Jj iJ jJte-vJtf
4.
Mention the chief

(l)
rules of the use of conjunction
Noun should be coupled

Exs
sentence.
God's
If
the
is
to noun, verb to verb, sentence to
Kingdom
of heaven
<^
^-
will give
an
with
you your
"
/î Jl
f'JjPr
conjunction
and earth
He
ye believe and fear [God]
To make
rewards.
(2)
416
- -
1^3
l I
'^**^ O^3
pronoun
implied
^
J^"~*A
(3)
jê
or with the attached pronoun, as
the suitable detached pronoun must
first
We
Lxs-U-j
To
and our company
left
This
be added, as
^ Wj
5*"
is
between me and thee
ciOo j ^Jo
In the case of
as,
dlU-Vj
"neither
...
I-X*
**
For me and thee
etc.
couple a pronoun with one governed by a preposi-
tion, repeat the preposition, as
(4)
s^
J^V
nor," the second^* requires
Neither this nor that
cilJi
Vj li*
Lesson 187.
CORROBORATION
I.
What
is
-Vj- and what
J.5jl)l is a
word.
It is
*>lT
of
are
its
two classes
which confirms or corroborates the preceding
two kinds, Jai) -\^y verbal corroboration, and
corroboration of meaning.
2.
^jjai)
JLj^r
is
417
merely a repetition of the
first
word whether
verb,
noun, particle or sentence.
Zaid has come, has come.
A>
"
j^
**
%.
Or
the second
He
cast
How
3.
By
is
down
+*
-i
word may be
synonym
he threw
the pen,
s>
it
of the
down
elj
first,
as
J.A)!
an "implied" or an attached pronoun corroborated
a detached pronoun, as
t^l5
myself came
Thou wast the watcher over them

-Lj jXJl
x)l
4 (_*X! Xj
words, put
consists in the use of one of the following seven
in construction
with the pronoun of the noun to which

s>u,
\
it
refers:
The Hinds themselves

The army came,
S.
Are 5v
They
6.
(jt~*>\
of
it.
Colj
and
ufc>
Both the men came

ever declined
are only declined
when
saw
passed the women, both of them
passed both the
the two men, both of
may have
Each of
the
men
C>A>-JI
in construction to the
Jb
..
f.
cn>rii utt
5.
all
A>
*-.
pronoun
them
women
Ofty
lxi5C il
a predicate in the singular, not the dual, as

is
Each of the women
smart
is
smart
AkJLi (j
418
Lesson 188.
SUBSTITUTION
1.
LMJI
is
*jl"
which
substituted
is
which was not intended by

prepare the way for
2.
J-XJi
is
J.A,
jt
^ (j^V'
J-^J
to
The moon was

JU-Ji}(!
this is otherwise called
to
whom
Ex:
thou hast favoured.
me
it
eclipsed, a part of
it
comprehensive substitution,
J.A>
substitution of part for the whole, as
ate the loaf, a third of
(3)
being mentioned only
substitution of the whole for the whole
straight path, the path of those
J>
preceding noun,
J-*Ji
Omar, thy brother, came

(2)
itself,
Identical substitution,
The
for the
of four kinds.
Jj\k
(l)
JlJI }
i.e.
of something
inherently connected with the preceding word, as

>*
his
name,
filled
Zaid,
i.e.
They
will ask thee about
the sacred month,

(4)
jL^jJlj
in
^^
Ol.
/.e.
me
J^
about fighting in
differing substitution,
iWl JJ)
*>
with admiration
flA'
it.
which
otherwise called
is
the substitution for error or forgetfulness,
which the substituted word merely corrects a

**
Give the beggar three, four

I
shall be
away two
mounted
the horse, or rather the camel
or 3 minutes
4|ji
slip,
as
'^^ JjU!
3.
What
the condition which must be observed in
is
and
a,
to the
it,
4.
419
(2)
and
(3)
JUiVlJjj*
must be
construction with the pronoun corresponding
in
preceding noun
\*jj>- fj+2J\
OA~$
The
sun, part of
was eclipsed.
N.B. Most reliable grammarians hold that

is
plicative appositive
merely a form of
<aP
JjjUall J-AJl
have dealt with above, while others hold that
the ex-
which we
it is
a fifth class of appositive.
The point
5.
to note is that here
(ju-JI cJzSac-
may
consist of
**\$\
is better -known
than
p<j2J
"
(1)
title
after a
of worshippers,
(2)
z.
name, as
the
e.
A described name
A&\ ^r =)
^^
gÛI
jr j
3^ A
'
ornament
model worshipper.
after the descriptive (or
_L<JI
ÎJiiil
nickname) as
Ibrahim (friend
of God).
(3)
Noun
after demonstr. adj. as
Note that demonstr.

Exercise 188.
ûtxjlu*
this
book(Al-Quran)
adjs, are in apposition to their nouns.
Read aloud and
End
of
translate as usual.
420
Lesson 189.
ÎMPERFECTLY DECLINED NOUNS
1.
We have already
into
is
^-^
shewn (in Lesson
sub-divided into
divided
is
and cJâ^
declined,
In this lesson (189)
Cj^}\ and
of full declension
noun
U)
declinable, but
^~>j**
fully
^JâÂ
imperfectly declined.
155) that the
and
totally indeclinable,
Jj^V
we study
the sign
in 190 the obstacles to full declen-
sion
2.
What
is
the mistake often
They think
"devoid of
is
that
all
O^Jl
Is
Complete declension, cJâl*
students here
9>j~+*
declension." Such
is
j&
cJâ^
means
j*J* )
not the case, for sincecJâli

or
ûa* Egypt.
"imperfectly declined";
3.
made by
U^-aJl
In
<j*
means
fj***
Egypt
j~a+ (J
there any special connection between a noun being "imper-
fectly declined"
There
is vital
and
its
ability or inability to take
fact,
connection between the two, for the capacity of
the noun to receive tanwin,
construction
tanwin
when not defined by
the sure indication of
is
its
full
Jl
or
declension.
some native grammarians discuss the division
by
In
into full
and imperfect declension under the heading of J
Nunated and Non-nunated.

4.
The explanation
stage, but
what
of
is
Byjy>j*they mean
^s)l in 6 6
:
(p. 16)
the official definition?
was
sufficient for that
4 2I
**
Uai)
''Tanwin
is
C-
a quiescent
Ua>- ^J-i
nun omitted
in writing"
(z.e.
not written
as a consonant letter) "but retained in pronunciation"
reading Al-Qur'an,
etc),
the pause."
at cJdj^Jl
"except
(At the
*t
pause,
or
z'.e.
the end of the sentence, either one of

is
/^-^
".
^-^
O-u'
pronounced madina; similarly
in
(i.e.
or
4Jj-X
jj is (there)
pronounced fil-madina.
5.
Is
every tanwin of the
No
(l)
C^X-uJl^jJj
7)-
the most usual
first is
tanwin *-*VI jS^; that
Lesson
is, it
instead
is
makes
it
190);
gives "compensation" for the omission of a
as <jMi
6,
this
(see
uO*Ôl>^
letter,
137
there are four kinds, of which the
(j>++z*
(2)
same kind
of
<J>U and
also given to the
time are put in construction with
word
it
for
jl^>-
(c./.
when adverbs
3'
for
<^j^
weak
UJ>-
S[
of
at that time,
we
write
(3)
iLUll
^J^
and
for
il^
^5j
J^yT (resemblance)
marians to be given
is
Jlxij
also -XlsfrU etc.
supposed by native gram-
to the reg.fem. plural that
the nun of reg. masc. plural (sic)
as
it
may
resemble
(4) ÂSsJ-xJl (jf^yA

It is
is
422
not important to us-here.
used to distinguish the author Sibawaihi from some other
Sibawaihi*
*
one of the earliest Arabic grammarians, was of Persian

origin
(Sibawaihi,
So was
Firftzabadi, the early lexicographer),
Lesson 190.
I.
What
the other
is
.xxi
i.e.
Hence
2.
What
Since
the
is
<~*j*^
*-^
become
is
said to
declinable.
is
called
meaning of
^fi^*.**
for
From
to
that kind of tanwin
declinable
nym
it
to
declined noun, and the tanwin
i/l
causes
name given
means
it is
declinable,
^^^ (*+& means
more
applied to the fully declined noun as a syno-
O^î*
189
we learned
that such a
noun
when
indefinite
receives tanwin.
3.
THE TABLE
*-^l
DECLINABLE
IMPERFECTLY DECL
Quad
PI
INDECLINABLE
FULLY DECLINED
(2 sorts) (3 conds:) (6 conds:)
4.
423
After copying the important table at foot of page 422, learn

the following details of
4jlJJ -U^ VI
O^-a)! y*
There are
four classes but these have sub-divisions or conditions.

1.
pXJl
.
(a)
Noun when
Proper
^> 5*
fern
......
(i.e.
triliteral
bearing sukun)
is
name
foreign
i^*
Arabic name with
middle
a silent
allowed tanwin, as Hind, a
(i.e.
guage) as vy*i-9 UP**'J
N B. A
i-
by form, or meaning, or both, as AÛ^j^Ju jj<UJ*l
But note that a
(b)
it is
proper
name
in
girl's
name
original lan-
its
*-t'
proper name with quiescent middle
triliteral
letter
letter
must
>
>
be nunated, as
and 7-^
i>j!
(c)
^j* "^j*
niixed
of
compound,
Hadramaut
(d)
(S.
Having ao^^ j
at
all,
Arabia)
^>
as
t:
O^^J^
(extra) of j'
Ij
which the second part only
can be declined
l>j^ C*>
r>^ ^J^'J
(*.e.
and JZalz&
passed by
Oj^>
these two letters are additional
to the original radicals, as
iji*^ and (ju-X^.
On
-kH and -^ _]/ and j-k
(e)
a measure of a verb, as
said to
pjUail
tense
Palmyra,
(f)
^1^
be^rua)i^
is
because they resemble the parts of
Yazid was a Khalifa
now
(These are
a ruin in the
Changed from another form
at
Damascus
North Syrian
(so they say)
Tadmor, or
desert).
j+
is
asserted to be
a variation of
^*U
Other examples are T-y* (the rainbow
>^
called
7-^5
>
L/y) J^3
Saturn,
etc.
is
To sum
up, the
424
4^*1)1 (fact of being
that
grammarians say
a proper name), plus one of these conditions, prevents tanwin.

/JT
>
(a}
AttributeUdescr.
<U*a)l
where
adj.),
it is
C^
x-
*>
cM** UJJ ik
"
Carefully note that
not on the form
is
it
/v>-
which
nunated and the fem, of which
is
the fem. of which

^0
drunken
^^
<'
7ÛJ
is
as
>
cj>^
<
/"
jl^la^
U*
<J
O-
4>Hi but on
is
'i
<_-* ^
thirsty.
>'**
î
(b)
jj^
This
p*
is
of superiority (Lesson 59) or of
the J*ii
>
colour
(c)
etc.
(L: 58).
Changed from
a previous form, as
These words mean, respectively,
^^-3
2,
4 or
3,
^^*J
f'MJJ
5
at
^^
time,
as
or
///.
t^jvj Mw
Note that
feminine.
it
*l
It
but
(a)
it
always
is
iti(5y^
'-(j*** N-B. these,
f>^ J^Si* ^*:^ Quadrisyllable

:
said to be
upon
Plural
form gets a
If this
^-
N.B.
which marks the
alif,
most not be original but additional;
has two forms
Important note
5.
this alif
added
as in
(b) (^ as
IV.
in the
does not always mark the fem. under
additional.
(a)
Ending
in^
asÔ^
for
are not diptotes.

:
l^W
some
cn^^
plurals
it
is
X-
iUUi which
is
fully inflected (Revise L: 138).
Having learned these twelve
classes of nouns forbidden
complete inflexion, the student should now carefully re-study
Lessons 52
610;
54
6; 58
64
4, 5
65
67
7, etc.
425
Lesson
191.
INFLEXION OF VERBS JDI vl^
J)
***
Which
1.
part of the verb
^-^ and which
is
This was fully answered in 155
The Arabic
2.
What
puts
are these two nuns
without which
it is
Lesson 128) as
3.
Now
revise 29
^j**
3, 4.
is
UJJ/JI
The nun
(l)
and
(2)
the
nun
What
possible to the
of study
simple that
4.
What
Noun
is
firstly
of
(revise
y*\\
of feminine as in
Verb
in
are the three
j>-j
^*ai)l then
can be disposed of
it
^-^ and
What
are the three possible to the
Our order
be
to
and note the resemblances and differences
between the declension of verb and noun.

"states"
see.
which cause PjUail
Ji J
in
48 which
of verbs
that v-^JJ
it
is
for **J\
(*j^
(ii)
are ^*a-L)' Ol^\.c- the signs of the verb being
In the singular (and in 1st. plural)
In
<~*W
4X..L*
the five forms
which end
Learn the
N.B.
five
in
) it is
forms
Note that
That applies
it is
it
(i.e.
e
^jâi*
is
4^xi as
the five forms of

as
fj?A*A>
(JLA*A>
inaccurate to give a third
to *g-\
not to
Â> jl
Oj^\ ^^>cflLuu
so
few words.
is
^*alJi
{jjbJii
Uk-
for
This third one
(given,
426
some books)
inaccurately, in
weak
of the
In the
example
4JI
not
but
letter,
\y0j L
it
'
L-*-A>-
^j>-
only applies
really
<_-X>- for the
ui^
4X*)i
is
the *u}\& of
weak
to
^*aJl
suppression
f j>-'
is
below.
jjiJ'O-te*
disappeared even
letter
in
,>
be studied under
to
5.
What
are the original nasb-ating
four 'original' ones are
is
said to be
JAol *2
It
may
also,
^j
be used without
^SCj
When J
is
for the others given in
** the lam
lam of
the
U^ though even
<jlj
'
how do you account
But
^yj j^'.J
*.
formed from
is
^!
particles
The
6.
15 and therefore
due to permutation
the Indicative <j^*~>
of
(but
Lesson 30
it is
also called
motive).
or together with
it,
or even with
in order not. IjlS^ I
preceded by a negative
C^-S
lam of
denial, as -teyl (^JiU-^
(N. B.
Distinguish these lams from
it is
called
djwJ *V
the
j>*\ **
which
is
^J^-
not
&
^^t
Ex
Let him eat
^JS"
simply a compound
5L)
is
find
jl occurring.
-j-
of.
V6
'
so that
even here we
The same
427
applies to ^j>- which

t
precedes an implied
really a preposition
is
> "
jj
which
* *
OVîJ?*"
o
gets distinct.
-~l
y.S"
Jf>-
?*r~i
1
/.
there any difference between
Is
None
**.
and
J3I
either introduces a rep/?/, as 4-i"! J>-^J> l>|

"
^
(The student must distinguish
li'
idlian,
from
jWu vJ^î
î'
idha,
which
>j
has a different meaning).

o
8.
What
o
is
the most important function of
<jl
is
<j'
not only
^^ ^J^*-
with
but also,
and has the meaning of
place of
therefore called <jjJ*A* cJ,*-
It
is
its
the
also
verb, takes the
masdar and
is
it
commonly spoken
of
as
ij^^ll jl =
'an
which
like
is
Lesson 192.
THE SUBJUNCTIVE
(Contd.)
o t
-j,
I.
To
No
continue the subject of
*,*
it
may be
4j-X
is
suppressed,
lj*Jo* hidden, implied.
o
or,
'
always o^lU' expressed

as
it
is
sometimes called,
428
2.
When may
one case
(b) in
instances
five
_$> after
It is
When
3.
jh>> l^-*>-
is its
is
it
its
as
permissible
<j*j.>^[
JI^>-
suppression ^-^-'j ^
>
**
after the
->*>
not God's
in five cases
not expressed
implied
is
^pci-l
It's
way
to
lam of
After
Wait
until
torment the goodcni-Uall
a preposition
until
Chastise the thieves
After
j^
UJ4jM jlfU
t.
meaning^j^ (thus
return to you
Eat and drink
(iii)
denial, as,
(ii)
or
O\
essential.
s_*>lj
*V
JA*:)I
is
suppression
though
it
affect the declension of the Imperfect)
unexpressed
(a) In
when does
be ^j-X^- (In other words,
it
ye are satisfied
till
they repent
which has the meaning of
<j^
or
of
JJI i
I
make
Sit
(iv)
light of difficulty
down, or
After
reach
my
aim.
else the prince will rise
4^x*Ji
But this
till I
*\f
the causal
(that
which expresses
effect).
follows either (a),JcJ! negation, or (b)^JJa) request

I
Exs
(a)
429
Do
not hurry or you will repent
He
attempted
(b) Visit
me and
not, so
will
-W3
found not
-o '.
j\
/\.13
<~\*j)
honour you
J^T
^Xli
^jj
^
Are you listening?

N.B. "Request," here,
is
am
telling
you Îb-li^^r J*
wide term; see under 4 below.

Ml
wau
(v) After the
of association
4^1
by a negative or request as under
They did not command [others]
to
What
^LDl
(a)
(6)
(c)
is
produce the like[yourself].
Be generous and you
Do
will
will
bite
you
<
(e)
Incitement, or threatening
Wilt thou not believe and be safe
:
come, that
*
This, to
Hope our friend will

we may honour him.
a Western
a conjunction.
student
of
'
&*
|
!
:-
>-*'? #J
"
1
? J
that thou wert a teacher, to teach us
Hoping:
>
-*i-
s\
Exhortation:
Wilt thou not study,)
in order to please thy teacher ?
i
(0)
prosper
"I
Wish, or desire
Where goest
Interrogation:
thou ? that I may follow thee. /
(v)
not strike
(d)
(/)
and
in (iv)
Request, comprises seven things
Prohibition :the dog or he
preceded
do good and forget themselves
comprised under ijLk)l
Command:
_j'j
(iv)*
Do not forbid a trait(^.e.manners)and

4.
or <L-UaU
jlj
LJUJ
'
*\
*
I**
f
"*
|
J
Arabic,
< 5di * S Ulu>- Û

x
t/
seems obvious, since wau
is
430
Lesson 193
THE JUSSIVE
I.
Our next
lesson concerns the Jussive
part of the verb can

particles
2.
This
d>U}U
*j:U
is
be
Mood
the action
f3j^ by
answered
in 191
+j>.
J*A)!
Which
of governing
2.
L.
^X*
i
is
jj,>^Jl
AU/zi
4~*ill
(ii)
five
(iii)
4U)>
For
exs,
also
the original
forms (see IQI
^j>
Suppression of the nun
weak
^1
Jx.H
result of
its
3.
weak
J*i!l
V^-l
(Les
he was not agreeable, but
by
True,
rise.
122126)
means a
but
upon ^f>~*\ J **''

1
^.J'
^J>-
it is
also,
c.f.
the
<*-**>
last letter in
well to note also the
i.e.
suppression
of
letter.
What do we mean by
f-A^
in the
letter.
grammarians usually mean the suppression of the

j>.
4>^J?I
4).
<j* j i
he did not
sign, as in
^J^>- Suppression of the
see not only
pi
cJ_x>-
jjj|
<J
and usual
îe
pl ura ^
particle
fj'>r'
^J^
an<3 llow
or of
which apocopates
many
^jU- which,
are there
in
either case,
(c.f.
There are sixteen apocopating words which we must classify

under two heads.
4,
I.
Apocopating:
particles
ONE
^j Jj
verb only.
Uij
These four words are
all
(a)
<i
and
is
to
is
meaning
may compare
difference between these
as
JS"
(J
x
and
c-jUall
two
from present
to
the action of vav conversto past time,
is
particles
that
etc.).
means
U.)
CJj cJuiul *v The guest has arisen but not
l>
yet eaten. j**\ JJLw ulj C-I>(6)
two particles
wan which converts from present
the
not yet
but this LJ not yet.
not,
change the time of
past (Hebrew students
The
the special peculiarity of these
Their property
ive
U)
(not the ordinary adverb of time, but another
both negate the verb,
What
431
came before dawn
ad appeared
give the Imperfect a future signification
for
they
give directions about an action not yet accomplished.
J which
is
commands and
used for
also for prayers,
J *yuz and should be readily distinguishable from
and from
Ex
^4-1
Let every
(W
6 and 192
How
3).
man know
is
called
J^J'
{<*
jLJ
*
Let the murderer die
jTlill J,:LJ
*r
o
May God
is
tjd\
bless us
(c)
Does
When
o'j
preceded by
or j
it
'
Oj~*
J ever take any other form
may drop
its
"
place
Then
let
him do
it
l:5jUJ
oUl'V
the la of prohibition, not
Note the difference.

1
<U)l
îl)S
kasra, taking in
its
432
Lesson 194.
5-
U-
TWO
apocopating
fJ'jP*
Are they particles or nouns
The
6.
Do
first
all
two are
so,
it is
iÛI *U*J
sometimes only one;
colloquial way, these
is
none
This
!!
may
But
non-existent.
it
(to
put
do not apocopate
pjj?
number.
the rest are
particles,
twelve in
of these invariably apocopate two verbs
Not invariably
there
verbs, are
it
in a
simple
second verb
save searching for a second verb,
may sometimes
if
if
be discovered as in
^^lil See below.)
What
The
distinctive
first
is
Those fond
names
called
are given to the
-*î'
J*$
two verbs
and the second
of Latin terms call the
first
J^-ll'
verb of the conditional
clause the "protasis" and the second the "apodosis".

7.
Examples of
the use of the
two particles
8.
If
ye be lazy, ye
If
ye shew mercy ye shall be shewn mercy
fail
Whenever ye study ye advance

Examples
"
LcT
A-U:*"
of the ten
>
Whoever shews mercy
Who
is
doth evil shall \

be recompensed for it /
vl^"
shewn mercy
-*
|
^"-
'
Whatever good you do

God knoweth it
^\
you perfect your work you)

your aim/
will achieve (reach)
^j|j
|
'
Whenever you come

meet good
(i.e.
to us you will\
good reception)./
Wherever ye
be, death
j
will overtake you.i. j
Whenever ye go ye
will sit
will
be
just as
honoured U^S^.r
but
(j~
you are
said under
c-jUall
shall be
strike
honoured
wherever you do.
Whomsoever you
We
jj
>^
^~*5
shall be
Wherever ye two go ye
9.
I
|
shall find
Whatsoever ye ask ye
When
433
a Jro
u^"^
SCr
strike
6 that sometimes one of the verbs
^^w
this
Amplify
is
not in
statement now.
9
There are four theoretically possible ways of using jj
Example
J^tllÛ.
-
-I
91
L/JI J.
r
Y
r
i
Note that the

this lesson,
first
and
case, No.
the
most
I, is
usual.
the one
which
is
the subject of
10.
What
effect
upon
Which
it,
are the
Cases
in the other
always ^+* and therefore the
is
^111
^W
observed about
is
434
they only govern verbs in frjliil
more common usages
Of one
^li'
may even be
have no
-U-J
i^r-J)
Either to use two verbs in the Apocopated,

in
in
$f
pjlixl
and then one frjUaU
^'i-
from government by the
released
or
two
the latter
particle,
as
slx*3
f^'
j[
Rules for J^JDt J*9
grammars; but the

11.
Account
for
be found
will
Â^
(L. 32
\ê-J\
higher
USAGE.
criterion for the student is
*.SCj
in
6).
Arabic, lending itself to epigram, often substitutes the im**
perative for the verb governed
may be
is
replaced by
M e
rcO
12.
Can
It
-X^x>-l
i/JI Ji be
may
May
Yes,
c-5
if
'J'
^.
omitted
else
be used
the
be
ye love God,
here,
c./.
also
silent
and
j-
doubled in
C^-^>
li
!'*
^> Ij
^^
i^-jil
j^
) thus,
i^-*'
answer w'j>-i
is
,A*J
be omitted after O\
some other way

If
"i
and Ij^^J
Speak good, or
13.
rcri
replaced by
thus
j)
So
J^
by
is
a ver
denoting a demand or in
not suitable to be a condition, as
then follow me. <J^*7>"^
^ O^^ **% O\
THE INDICATIVE
14.
What
did
we say were
Of
aM
15.
the 3 kinds of
these
we have
TJ^ there only remains
When
is
a verb
is
C'jUall
&j?j
Ji)l
J*a)!
J^l vL^'
dealt with J-iJI
^&
and
^j
f-y^
when no preceded by any
of the governing
regents already mentioned.

16.
What
are
Damma,
as v.^Ju or the nun in the
examples as
LT[J
^^^T jjjyJa
Lesson 195.
^DEFECTIVE VERBS
1.
What
is
the definition of
Jî
is
that
JuUU
which keeps
J.i)l
to
one form, either the past as
and ^-c- or the imperative as *Ji These
jJ
defective verbs;
whereas
O^d*
which can express various
that
J*ill
is
are
the
real
the inflected verb,
i.e.
tenses.
N.B, Use the Arabic name, to avoid confusion of'English terms.
JUi?H page
2.
<>.X*\i-l
3-
By jxi-
218,
we mean
the two forms or models.
These have been given

129
510)
should be revised and memorised.
in sufficient detail on
revise, also re-write Ex. 129
page 306 (Lesson
A and
B.
*-
4-
Is
there any other
436
of expressing admiration
Way
Yes
flow
common
his as
is
expression
an orator.
L^>
is
fi
'
^ ^
j^
^ o<^ what
Originally j^ meant the flow of milk
from the udder.
5.
Name
the
Blame
four verbs of Praise or
>>
These should be re-studied
in
Lesson
I.
of verbs,
i.e.
4 (page 305).
196.
governing the object
Are there many such
The grammarians
cases,
it
is
If
give ten, but as the action
>W*
first
is
obscure in some
two).
governing like a verb.
God pushing back
God had
the Accusative.
sufficient to note the following four (learning
Examples of
But for
in
example of each of the
(a)
By "Nouns with Verbal Action" we mean Nouns doing the

work
2.
Lesson 129
the people
(j-"^'
not pushed the people back (^wl
(6)
was surprised
(c)
was surprised at Zaid's being-beaten
at his killing
Zaid
l^
-
<W
4ttl
*i:>
ij
an
3.
What
is
In (a)
and
(b)
but in
(c)
with
Is
a verb
RULE
II
jJUdll
What
is
on
the former
is
Agent,
more frequent than the
as to
when
madar may
govern like
its
equivalent verb as in 2
j-Ua-*
(a)
it
capable
above.
said by the grammarians to
is
because of being defective
without Compensation.
it is
^**l
a quasi-masdar;
is
when
like a verb
have the same meaning as the masdar but not

j-X*a*
its
p. 176).
can only govern
meant by
~*\
jJ*s.A
(c)
of being replaced by
5.
and
(b)
placed in construction with
Object
its
RULE
there any
between
is
jXall
(Revise 68
latter.
4.
the difference
43?
in
to be called
one or more missing
Thus from j^'
the
masdar
letters,
is
o
"
and o
is
called >X*2* +**\
But from
also 4>j both masdars, for the

for the lost j
6.
Examples
(1)
/^'governing
is
get
compensation
'jJkf'<*Jjf\
in 4, for
it
equals
oj-^3
cJ/u
IA^|
He
is
the bestower of good.
Exercise 196.
"
j jj and
like a verb.
his value
This follows the rule

(2)
of the latter
we
of Js-Ull
You know
<jj>j
Read aloud
as usual.
(See Reader).
C**\
J^Jl
* 438
Lesson
197.
PARTICLE
Lesson 197 we take c3jj- u>u>
In
I.
particles, then in 198 the

is a
meaning
(i.e. it
J?-
particles,
and they are
made between
all
~ijji-l
meaning alphabe-
characters and ^-bjAI meaning particles.
The
first
The
<-ijj>-
particles
may
Into 3 classes,
a.
(2)
^j>-
Letters of building, and the
Particles of meaning.
be classified in various ways

(l)
(3)
common
*
:
pertaining to the noun, as prepositions
pertaining to the verb, as i^^l^Jl
studied
b.
are called jjLiI
(}W
u* ^ JÂ-i
indeclinable 4^~*
tical
latter
3.
^**
But what
cannot stand alone).
a distinction
is
particles.
which does not indicate independent
that
There are about 80
How
*.
particle is:
the different kinds of
meanings of the
particle
The
2.
to
noun and
Into governing particles, as
and
d^
already
verb, as cJaaJl ^-*_$j>- conj
^*'jJl and
^j'j>-'
By meaning they
are sub-divided into 24 sections, of which
the student has studied,
Prepositions
conjunctions, particles of vocative

subjunctive,
fj'jr
There remain some

*
jussive,
(incl. particles
of oath),
and exception,
etc.
15 other classes to be learnt.
have not troubled to mention the ludicrous
two-letter, etc.
and f 'j>-'JuL
and into non-governing, as J*

c.
classification into one-letter,
(l)
Particles of Reply
The
(2)
two
last
<M
V'J^'
oV
ic-L
There
no hour for
is
has gone).
(i.e. it
repentance
<J
*&*
cl*J.'-9
'j
seldom used.
<J
much used
not
is
are
oj
Negation:
oV
U^Jv-Vj J^
j^>-
439
SJ
\bjl
We
jl^
(3)
Condition
(4)
Interrogation
(5)
Incitement
intended naught but good.
and J* but sometimes
'
U^lj
(6)
Future
Ûj
V'_j!j
jl j j
W
^ -^- ^^
V
(7)
Masdar
particles
5?
^j j
"t
^j
Demonstrative particles
(9)
Corroboration
(10) Pleonastic
(^ j) J
(i.e.
extras)
^3 ( JJ^
Vlj
j Ij
J^j
jl
^) J U ( Ht ^(j-^)
^J?Uo
(12) Explication'-
He nodded
(13)
Wj
"C-
i'
o U-Uil
Is
*
"*-.
but occasionally ^
'Yes/
withÛi
(14) Stringent
(15)
^JV
-^
LJ IP eUilU
Gl Îj
Expectation (Probability)
(but
/j-J
s#:
(11) Surprise
s<
51
j_j
Ij
a*
Jj jj
jij
'j
t.
(8)
^^
^-'W
Vl
"Vlj
t-
it is
Denial
<J-^
Adversative particle
5js)l
cJ^
^3_^
z.e.
This
is -^>
with P-jU
actual happening).
440
Lesson 198,
I.
^J^
Taking vlr'
is
He
iv e
used after an
inter,
may be
^yJl cJj>-l
prefixed to
We
(a)
(c)
<w)j
SI
<J JIS
said, Certainly.
From
this
is
a^J
as in Syria, ***}
have seen that
and
He
begat not, nor was he begotten
The
are "Conversive,"
il
*tiy
never speak the truth.
liar will
U meaning
J^J
<j*J
a past meaning, as
giving pjUail
(6)
,**'
USE.
illl;
J> jjj>
Yes by God
used with an oath,
is
contracted the colloquial
2.
neg
their
said to me, Are you not the king's son
(^J
(^1
examples of
^^-jJ
For
I*
to
mean
ij
^w
^j-X5Ol jXa^ ^1
the order of >->-j 1-A:^
^j-jJ
s*
\^ U
must be observed and be unrestricted. \j*

3.
J^l)l
tJj>-l
Some grammarians
say that the only 2 particles of
and
condition are jt
thus ruling out
US[ and they say
that
and
^>
,
is
as
and
I*
much
of
_y
compound
and U
and U as
of j|
is
of
j^
J>
is
called cu2>j/ Ûl>i ^j>-
ê.,
non-existence
^'"
through non-fulfilment of condition.
God's conversion of
tion
w AX^
(But he did die
all
men never
was never
0^*^'
of
event
"i
w'^JAJfll
^Z
occurred, because the condi-
fulfilled.
thou wast not here)
>
L>
'
Jl^
^^
J^lj
'jj
and lj! are
jJ
441
particles of >j>-j\
pUxJ prevention
rence through observance of condition (contrast with
USCJî
up
4jil
had
^j>j Vj)
->Jj**
as
^~ ->o
of use of
Example
*l^xx^2)
perished.
s.
with
*\
*
~
Note that there are many words for interrogation as
wJw
5.
etc.,
Jl-ix^VI
7.
ijAî!
may be used
God
believe in
6.
C^JUl
<ttlj
<^-^l
o^Vl
w3j>-l
l}^}\
iUVl
j)l
-A-SyJ! cJ^-l
slip
form of rebuke.
fJUj j^ji
the phrase,
to act
J\ jJJ
:
said,
^^*)l
==
-So
4,
jv>
^J
J^^- U;
dl;l
are said to be
for they
Lo
Jtl
jl di)l,
dll^
J.il
Truly
Don't you
here
am
I.
Behold we look into your matter.
dliA^
as
from your mind that your friend
JÛi
and
Vl
p5o ^^^.SCL^j
commence
-v* (J UJj^^ (j^

g.
as a
These were dealt with under
4,
8.
J>*
but they are not particles.
cJr^l
jjAMia^ttlll
as
\^ ^TV-J
*
4.
But for you turning
God we had
But for the existence of
died.
requires
>>
D^LS*^
of occur-
Jl?
aw, acting.
is
Let
it
a robber.
He
said,
Be so good as
442
Lesson 199.
p
4 PARSING vl- l
>
H'A3v>
'
V_r^
Jc-UII
j>-
J^-J jjSCjl
Jc.
p^
^'
\l-\
^l)
lj^x
(N)
JL>- j^pt
(r)
AJI
jlT
^^ J
n.>-
(etc.
).
TcSI
4x
UjS
-^
rci!
4^
4^0^ <^>j^
JU
"^
(t)
443
EXAM, PAPER
SET AT
200.
Matriculation Exam. (Univ. of London).

I.
(a)
Translate the following easy story
bU
*
>
***
jjj
'$
*
x-^
.I'"
U jj
1^
U)U
a; -
s
-,
x^
I*
-^
0>
**
^^ a*
c.
'"-5;".
'<
"
l
x ^
>
^J^l
Ji\
)".
4!
**
"
U*
^
I
lil
*"
'
.
-Jr',
o^
.-
UM! J
ar
Qi
<LAIM.| ojl^
dlji
J[ "*>-j
- ^
^
t
^1- ^,
>
<u)
"
-
^'
JU
Jui
It
<^X)
(The extract already given
see
page
1.
(b)
2.
Translate the following passage, and rewrite
321).
vowel-points and other orthographic signs
it,
adding the
*;
3.
Give (with
may
4.
full
be, of six only of the following
Give the
1st
J-^J
words:
person singular and the 2nd person plural feminine
of the perfect
vowel-points) the singular or plural, as the case
(Hl) and the
"^'J
imperfect (VjUil) indicative of
J an d the 2nd person singular masculine

***!
5*'-*'
(Owfi\
j *';
5.
of
-^
^j
'
**
\*
jU*
**
"" **
^^ j
Write out the following sentences, with the vowel-points, and

state the rule followed in
each case
444
Al
Ui
f+\j\
<,
^w
ilV
dl VI
p.
^.jul! JUii
- Al,
VI
1}
SJ_,
J^. V
6.
State the rule for the construction of numerals, with examples.
7.
Give the rules for the agreement of the verb and

gender and number,
8.
and
subject, in
in the case of a verbal sentence (^-U*
Translate into Arabic (with full vowel-points):

On the following day we reached the city, which
the sea-shore,
its
is
is
w)
situated on
both well-watered and well wooded,
Prince Frederick, the heir apparent, came to receive the queen;

and the inhabitants also
men, women, and children
poured
out of the city to see the show,
some on horseback, others on
foot.
We made our entry into the city about mid-day, along
with the queen and her attendants. But when we reached the
gate of the palace we were stopped by the guard, who said
that we could not go in without the permission of the King
(Answer
in
full,
and send up).
Numerical Values.
Hebrew
44$
INDEX.
(Students should
use (he proper
ARABIC
Terms).
(The nos. refer to the pages).
Abgadiya
letters, 42,
Call for help, 404,
Absolute accusative, 172, 388.

Abstract noun, 335, 336.
Cardinal numbers, 339, 399.
Accent, Rules
Causal attribute, 412.
for, 9.
Accusatives, 386-407.
Case, 74, 132-4, 370, 383, 386, 407.
Changes
in VIII, 223.
of warning, 405.
Causative, 199.
cause, 389.
Characters, 40.
state 396.
Clause, Nounal, or Verbal, 384.
time and place, 391.
Coalescence,
specification, 397,
Collectives, 313, 322, 335.
association, 393.
Colours and defects, 148, 227.
,,
,,
88, 215.
Active voice, 248.
Command, 81.
Adjective, 143-8.
Commandments, Ten,
Admiration, (see Wonder) also 404,435.
Common
Adverbs,
,,
Comparative, 150-2.
of time or place, 68.
Compound
phrases 81, 97, 348, 349.

Affixed pronouns 35-8,87.
Agent, 383-5
Noun
of, 58.
Agreement of
Concave
Tenses, 95.
(see
Hollow
Conditional sentences 432.

Conditional verb, 432.
Conjunction, 349, 414.
Alif Maqsiira, 43.
Consequent,
ALLAH,
Consonants, 40.
53.
49,
143.
Construction, Verbal, 345, 409.

135.
Annexation, (see Construct State).
Antecedent,
verb).
Condition (see State).
Conjugations, Derived, 184.
Adjectives, 143-4.
Alphabet, 18, 40.

Ancient declension,
106, 226.
III.
57.
Adverbial prepositions, 68.
Agent,
Gender,
49, 143.
Apposition, 144.
Construct State,
39,
150,369.
Conversation Exercise, 104.

Copula, 62.
Corroboration, 302, 416.
Appositive, 412,
Particles of, 379.
Article, 20, 25.
Assimilated adjectives, 145.

verbs 264, 267.
Attribute, 412.
B
BVsa and Ni^ma, 305.
Broken plurals, 126-9,164-70,310.
Quadl., 164,319.
of week, 163.
Declension of nouns, 132-5, 362, 364.
of verbs, 74, 362.
Days
Ancient, 135.
Defective verbs, 2l8.
Definite, 16, 20, 365.
Definitions of verb, noun, etc. 356.
446
Definition of Nahu, 355.
Demonstrative adjectives,
I
138.
Imperative, 74, 81.
pronouns, 138, 367.
Denominative verbs,
Deputy agent,
209.
385.
Derived conjugations,
nouns, 132, 420.

184.
Indefinite, 16.
of assimilated, 267.
.,
of defective, 299.
of doubled, 255.
.,
..
of hamzated, 257.
,,
of hollow, 274. 277.
Derived nouns,
156, 327.
Indicative, 74.
Noun
Individuality.
of 323-
Infinitive, 172.
Inna, 89, 378.

Intensive meaning, 188.
Intensity,
Diminutive, 324, 329.
Diphthongs,
Imperfectly declined, 132, 161, 170, 420.

Indeclinable verbs, 362,
Noun
of, 323,
337.
Interjections, 350.
23.
Interrogative pronouns, 64.
Diptotes, 132, 170.

particles. 12, 439.
,,
Disjunctive pronouns, 176.
Doubled verb, 243, 255,

Doubly weak verbs, 292,
Irregular plurals, 320.

Islam,
Meaning
Jazma,
41, 8l.
of, 196.
295.
Dual, 46, 69, 121, 124.
E
Emphasis
(see Corroboration),
Jussive, 74, 8l, 85, 430.
Exception, 394.
Examination papers,
19, 34,
;>2,
65, 79,
,,
of doubled verb, 246.
,.
Particles
of, 82,
105, 130, 154. 182, 204, 225, 233, 235,

240, 260, 28l, 308, 325, 333, 352, 443.
Eye, Voice and Ear,
53,
80,
106, 130.
84 430.
K
Kor'an, (see Qur'an).
155, 183. 205, 226, 261, 283, 309,326.
Exercises (see Lessons).
Letters, Solar and Lunar. 25.
Numerical value
Factitive, 199.
Feminine,
43,
107.
Figures. 19, 42.
Five nouns, The,
135, 364.
Madda,
33, 41.
Fractions, 344.
Forms of verb, 98, 101, 104.
Masculine, 107.
Future, 66,71.
Masdar,
151, 172,
Particles of, 439, 441.
Use
107-
88, 389.
Mimi, 175.
of emotion
,,
Gender,
of, 444.
Lexicon, Use of, 178.

Lord's prayer, 205.
Fatiha, (Sura I) 326.
Measures of
390.
of, 176.
plurals, 126-7, 161-170,
Genitive, 49, 74, 407.
310-20.
Gerundial
infinitive. 172.
Mental Action, verbs
Governing
particles, 373. 438.
Model form,
H
Hamza, 30, 32.
Hamzatul Qat c and Wasl, 198.
Hamzated verb (initial), 240, 257.
(medial)
251, 258.
(final). 253,
Hollow verb, 269, 274, 277,

Homogeneous letters, 24.
259.
279.
of, 381.
55.
Moods, 74. 357.

Mudari e Meaning
,
of, 74.
N
Nahu,
353. Definition of, 355.
Negation, Particles
Ni*ma and
Nominative,
J5i'.y/7,
of,
305.
370, 383.
12,13,75,82,439.
447
Noun
Particles of corroboration, 439.
of agent, 58.
jussive, 79, 80, 82, 430, 432.
(Derived), 187.
,,
abundance, 157.
,,
action, 172-175,
l8&
,,
colour, or defect, 148.

,,
.,
.,
diminutive, 329.
,,
excess, (întensity), 323, 337.
.,
Inna, 378.
,,
masclar. 439.
resembling verbs 377.
(Retained). 383, 386.

Past tense (see Preterite).
Noun
.,
instrument, 159.
Patient,
,,
kind, 327,
Paucity, Plural of. 126, 310.

Perfect tense, 95.
relation, 331, 335.
place and time, 156,

sound 361.
,,
160, 220.
Pluperfect. 95.
Plural of foreign words, 319.
species, 327.
.,
superiority 150.
Masc., 112.
object, 58.
Fern., Il8.
Broken, 126-9, 164-70, 310.
(derived), 187.
.,
,.
of paucity 126, 310.

of plurals, 319.
,.
Irregular. 320.
unity (individuality) 323.
verb (Nounal verb), 360.
.,
of, 58, 187.
Perfectly declined. 132-4, 362 4.

Permutation, 162, 164, 250, 251, 263.
Personal pronouns. 64.
"once," 327.
patient (object), 58, 187.
vessel, 327.
with verbal action, 436.

Nounal (Noun) sentence 370.
Poetical license, 261.

Praise and blame, 305.
.,
Number, 339345-399Numerals 19, 42.

Numeral adverbs, 344.
Numerals, Syntax
Nun
reply, 439.
Passive, 90, 248.

of derived conj., 187.
individuality, 323.
.,
.,
,,
intensity. 323, 328, 337-
,.
subjunctive, 73? 426.
,,
Precaution,
of, 342, 399.
of corroboration, 302.
Nunation,
Nun
of,
36^.
Predicate, 370.
Predicate of Inna, 378.
of liana, 62, 89, 93, 374.
Prepositions, 342, 407-9.
15, 420.
Prefixed, 87.
Prepositional Verbs 102-3, 220, 296.
Present-future, 66, 71, 93, 96, 98, 359.
Objective (see Case).
Preterite, (Past), 357.
Object, 387.
Primitive nouns, 156.
Oblique case,
"One
Pronouns, Attached,
49.
another," 21 1.
35, 37, 87.
Separate, 64.
Onomatopoeia, 234.
Disjunctive, 176.
Ordinals, 342,401.
Oriental proverbs, 183, 261, 309.
Suffixed, 35, 37, 87.
,.
Personal, 64.
Relative, 140, 368.
,,
Demonstrative,
Participles, Active, 58, 105, 187, 377.
138, 367.
Interrogative, 64,
Passive, 58, 187.
Prohibition, 85.
Paradigms, 201, 211. 233, 237, 253, 255,
Prolongation, 23, 44.
257, 258, 259, 268, 295, 299.
Proper noun,
Parsing, Examples of, 442.

Particles of future, 71. 439.
Proverbs,
366.
183, 261, 309.
incitement, 439.
interrogation. 12.
Quadriliteral verb, 90, 234. 236. 339.
.,
condition, 430. 432.
Quadrisyliabic
.,
negation. 12,13, 75,82,439.
,.
plural,
167, 319.
133,
161,
164,
Quinqueliterals, Plural of, 162.
Transliteration,
Qur'an, 33.
Triptotes, 132.
R
exercises,
Tri-syllabic plural, 169.

84,
104, 142,
146,
49, 1/7, i8r, 200, 202, 233,

238,
239, 256, 291, 301, 304, 321,
324,
334- 351, and 1-36
(Arabic
Reader), also ''Eye, Voice,Ear"

Reciprocal, 2i2 222.
Reflexive, 2o8, 222.
Relative adjectives 1 16,
331, 335.
Relative pronouns 140,
Type-root, 55.
Tenses. 66,357.
Ten commandments,
Verb, Agent
,,
of
liana, 62, 93.
Verbs of Admiration, 306, 436.

of Approximation, 376.
,,
Assimilated, 262, 267.

of Certainty, 381.
Salutations, 283.
Defective, 218, 374.
";,
Denominative, 209.
Denoting mental process, 381
Sarf, Definition of, 355.

.,
Sequents, 412.
Derived, 184, 236.
Servile letters, 90, 178.
Doubled, 243, 255.
20, 41.
Hamzated,
Sisters of inna, 89, 377.
Hollow,
of liana, 93, 374.
Interjectional. 360.
Irregular, 297.
Specialisation, 407.
Lafif, 292.
342. 397.
of Mental Action 381.
Substitution, 418.
Subject and predicate, 370.

Subjunctive, 76, 425.
of weak verb, 289.
of doubled verb, 246.
Sukun,
249, 251, 257.
269, 274, 277, 279.
of Imminence 376.
plural (see Plural).
State or condition, 396.

Specification
agent, 69, 384, 885.
Verb, Prepositional, 102-3, 220, 296.

Verb, Inflexion of, 66, 74.
Verb To BE, 61.
Sound
383.
its
Verb, Interjectional, 360.

143.
of regular plural,
112, 118.
of syntax, 62, 69, 76, etc.
Shadda,
of,
p^cedes
Verbal sentence, 372, 384,

Verbal construction, 345.
of accent, 9.
of dual, 121.
,.
196.
Unity. Noun of, 323.

Use of lexicon, 178.
368.
Retained object, 386.

Retained passive, 383, 386.
Retained preposition 103.
Rules for agreement of adjs,
,,
1 1.
Triliteral, 14, 344.
Selections from, 326.
Reading
448
of Probability, 381.
Six classes of. 98, 104.
,.
of Praise and Blame, 305,436
,,
of
Wonder,
Weak,
7, 41.
158,
306, 436.
241,262,284.
Superlative, 150.
Doubly Weak,
292, 295.
Surd verb, 243.
Trebly Weak,
292, 295.
Syntax, 353,
Sound (Strong),
et seq.
241.
with Three Objects. 382.

Vocative, 205, 369, 403.
Tables, (see Paradigms).
Vowels,
10, 18, 41,
Tashdid, 20.
Tanwin, 15,
Ta marbuta,
16,
41, 420.
43, 108.
Wasla,
Weak
28, 41.
verbs,
158, 241, 262, 284.
Trades, Special form, 335, 337.
Wonder, Verbs
Transitive, 382, 387.
Words
of, 306, 436.
difficult to find, 223.
jil
jl
J
JU
jl
o <;U
Ui j
jl j
l5Ci! JU A3
1
;>-l
^l
l^J-L
JUJ
v^
1
^j.^î
>^
jJI
> ij
Jl ^Jl^ll **-j
ly^pAJl J
fr
JUi dt
<**U
s3
lid
LJ
jl
cAx^
.
43^*11
/-u;J
**
UU
liLJj
LsL*
U^S
Ujfl.,
la*
Ul/l
>.2:
ro
ju
Jl
l,
!A,
J li
!A)
^ JUr
4jil
i
juJljj.
ji-viil
jj^ll
lu"
*.* l)ll
c-ll
4!
JUJ
UP Li^.
JUj
ooy
!AIP
Ijjl
lf.1
1^.1
Jl
c-3
o
ji
^S
^^ J jl
"l^
Â
c>
;,
Jip!
yfc
U d!
JP c^j
^s
jl
î
Ml c^lj
^j OjJ
I'l
jlel
I'i
(j.^ Uj
^J <>J-^* If ÂJ" jl
U15
J*
.JUill
oîlj
dU^ ^^
!!>UI
dJiSS
2j^
.A*|
cJlj
A*)j Oilj
Jli lib. -iJl ^JJI
Ul
O^.AJ
I'I
Lj ^Jll J JUi
<i
Jj
J5
j*
;UJ|
LI
jl
<:Jlcj
JlClt
rr
<j*
44
(J^
Vr'Jk-fl
IjTli jJLl Jc
<j-*
^' J-*^ 5**
A,
lp *^Ji3jJ
*~
<I^j*
A^J â!l *U
&** (3 c*iJ
^.*jS
A-.it
dlli Ai*d ijt*L\
&
<AA-1
<AO J^lj Aj^-j

JP
Â^ *
J*tJl
U^j jLi-1 AA
1
*^ o*sj Jl <wil
J^
^ dlrU L JP
^,-l^Vi
^p
<-3 dl!
Ojij
Jl j^ <*U
^-^
jl
dlAîTj
^Wl
^y
J^ M ÂjJ JU JUI
JP
J:i)l
ol*^lj cJ^*" jl J
JliJ llÛjf"
vo Jl
jl
<ii
:i
A!
Ûill Jlli J:5
ojÂJ-l
ju *
^rJi J
li^ JU-I
jUj
jA^Vj
A-O
A^-
0^ c^l tf
^_AJ
SA?U ^3
îi
l ^JtU
dL~A;
If
jl j
Â^d
LI
^Jl*^l
<!
JUi
dUl^ptj dlîi j^ OAPJ U
JP
AijAj
A*JUJ| ^/
;I> C>U:C.
<TA^5 ^Jll
j!
0*0-^^
jsl
Jj
jlj l^
J J&>\ 3 Â^'l
jak\ ^>*
li
^C-^1^3 jAx'l
^j ^JJ
If
'"*"*
iivip
JiJ^ jl vUJ!
4,ii-l
/j ^LiJl Jis
?.UUI cJlS
Uj
dJi!
I'l
U*A^
dl!
^?Jll
^*
111*
j.-k*!
^\
d\!y Ulj JIx" c*ij jl A^-JI
Ôi
o
JU
tf$\
Jiill
K^ f JU
oliil
^ JA*,| Uj
s*V\
J^
s^l jU
dl! Is
dLiJ
<^;il
^Ûii
j UP o^
rj
A^|
jj/*
I)A A:
Is
dlîj j.^3 J.^
ct
i ?
d^^ ^
diiA.'T
^jj|
j^ ^
(I)
L J.LI
j. j.i^j
^- dlS o^r S jÛI
^û) JÎJl
jj
ji
îj
= Keep smilingl
45|
1^,1
IP
d, j
>
d\!
UU
oilj J^^îlj
JUill
^n3
^^^>rJI A<^
l~ * and u.t are each
JTN.C
JU
^'
dlbUI JuT
dUslJ- *^
j.:^^l
A*
/*%
JAP
L$
tUlj
dV>l JAP
4
^11
^yuiilj
j,-
U5U
dl: t
dU^j
iJL-JI dl,
o^ Jufj*-Vl
Jl
^ AA!
jv^lj jyij

cJ> j'Vl j
j-ull
Ûl
JU*
^5di j ii^
dl;U>.i
dllu
*
*"
J ^xJj
(J
Ir
L'l
o^j
f-^^
i jl
jUI
AP|J
j.^ Jl
Ai! ,Jui)l
^^ ^xL. L.
jUI
i i
<j
^*J ^5*1
5j
JJ
^fl
Jl j
SjlÛ
Si
-JI
î. Vl <5Û
JUi JUaSI
dL,iJ Sl
^4
ÂJ
J.^ ^j-
^3
Ôtj
oil jrlj
^^ L
i
*jf- di!
dl^Dl^-
J e^
jA;il
Ji;^ JP
Vj i J^l
^ ^y jT^îl ^
Jl
LI L
Jl
AAJ lIÛI
y*
Uo Û
J J/jj* ^1 ^l* ^j <^^C; j.lXll.1 jU ^Lil

^ j^lf oJl jSibUI Jl
U ^3
0>l j
Vj
Jl^Vl
^*^
^ûj
*-^^J j'^JI Jl J+A>
lKli ULÎ ^-j ULÎ
A*
*b
<UJ *.5j
v >j
JliJ 5-^^
LJ15 V*-*
4
JUll \+
<J
iil
I*
-r**"
^.
^-iC
O'
^
4
V*^'
>il J
**u
txJ
>|
Vj
(*^
Jl^B ^Jl JUi Vjl
Jl*AJl
jl
0^
^fj
^,
^^
L-kL-
Lo
J OJ
J
J)
U
Ml
<*^^ j^
di
<>
*il
^r
jUJl JIU jlj
c^
f-
JLJI
j5
J"
cj\ j
iJjxj
Vj ja!l
II
c-iJ
JL4!
:1
Lr
ÛII
Ij
/111
4T
L*
f Jll
Jlii
Jl j
JJju.
^Jl rj JLdl
l
A!
-J
JlS
JL:
-U
-UJl j JUJl
$\
JUS
Ul
.)li
^\ dU,
Jy J
Jldl
jU^l
**yi e^ A3j
Ûdl
Jl jiol
J* v>l j
VAiJl
A!
Jl ^-fol J**- A*3
JU Udl
jl^-^l
U"
il
Jl ^rJl
^-
J^j jli-JI
.^
Akc k^jT Ud A^VJI Jl
J^-Jll
J>)
I"
J
sîtl
*
Jld
jwtl
II I
^
O*^)
*AL;
?.
Jl 4~lj ^Jll
Cu
;>LI
'i
*^ j dU^
dJIUl Jl cî.1
Jlii
<;
_;
JJ
^^
<Axj|
î;lj
.i;
!|
^1
jc.
jl ^<.j
jl
P *Jaj|
jl
.U^ Mj
SjLL.!)!
^Ji^;
Jdiil Jl
jA-l jl
Ib
l3
LiJj
f-lkp
IfJp
Îjj fjWl
^rJl L^jAP
(^JJl
1^^
Ulc
Lo
d\^t^j
JuJ!
(>
if>3
osj ---
JJ
<J
x*
L^
^^-jJl 1^0 -UâJ
*Ai
O ^
J
^^> ^Jl
x-
Jl
L?
---
^jtj
l3
jl
IS
Û
A3
L-llL
A*)
<;>,
^ ^" >
^
i.
Ail
jl Jlij
Jil
LJ
j
[^
^13
ûs
C'L.
A3
^rJI Jl
J^j ^^
d î3 dlo
^rJi JU3 ;A
^9\^
U^^
jikl
o^ ^ ^3 Ui
^ ^ IA^J ^ M, ^Gl Jl j^Vl d!
^ x, ^.ij
OA^-j.3
^XJl Jl ^*^NJ| Jl
YY
J (OKDl
dl ifcU
<J
jUj
a!t
<^j
LJ
jut
,0-**"
LA* 4*1*
ijl
Ji
JiUlj <!y ^JJI JJu

'
s#
u^ L^ ^ iuj
.
.y
cjusji
^ i^-^-j
*^
U
J>*f
l;U
Â; M U JI ^f
<JI
dl;
jt
^lUj
'U
^!j <:P
-J
L,
JU
lii
dL; Ai L JI
A)V JUj l^v
^Lu)l jl
<î;
il^l ^^
l
U^ JLdl
!"A\S
JU
jl
>r
oU^fl j
'^
sl
it'
xP-
J j^^ u
J
J^3- L
jld
^*J!
U*Up U
A3
C-jIS
jl j
Jj
J oj
-oil
lLl
rJi
uru
11
.AAJ
c->
J\
PROCLAMATION
UNDER MARTIAL LAW.
Whereas
expedient to prevent unauthorized trafficking in

ammunition, equipment, Naval and Military stores, and
animals, the property of His Britannic Majesty and held on His
Majesty's behalf by the Naval and Military authorities in Egypt
Now therefore, I, Archibald James Murray, General Officer
Com man ding-in- chief His Britannic Majesty's Forces in Egypt, in
virtue of the power conferred on me do hereby direct and
it is
arms,
Order as follows:
Art. I. Any person purchasing, or attempting to purchase or
otherwise obtain or found in possession of any arms, ammunition,
equipment, clothing, bedding, blankets, provisions, forage, naval
or military stores of whatsoever kind or description
and whereso-
ever situate, or any animal the property of His Britannic Majesty,

shall, unless he proves that the same was sold to him, or has otherwise come into his possession, by order of some competent naval
or military authority, be guilty of an offence under Martial Law.
Provided that no substantive sentence of imprisonment with
two years and no substantive

sentence or fine exceeding L. E. 100, shall be passed in respect of
a conviction for an offence under this proclamation.
Art. 2. The Martial Law Proclamation of July 9, 1915, dealing
with this subject is hereby cancelled.
or without hard labour exceeding
A.
<J|
JP
jU
JLdl
jl
jtj
jiTli
J.
Murray, General.
iV-jjj UU
Ty>U
Û!
Lfij L
J; Jll
jf
-5 -^
If ft
^X^
jl
î
ijvJ
4,**^ jl
IP
/*-*
(t
d:>u
ilaLJ'l
o'.-o-^j
4j>Ju1
^^1 ^
Jo-
Jj
Ll.:^,-.
JL*,
lîp
]|
jl
^
A)
**
LI
U^
j
Ui
iAJlit
U^Vl A^
JÎAJI
U* jo
;.;lii|
2u;liJI
;>ui
Uil <Up
JI
^l^Ml
jUll
^ J^lj jf
jJI
aj;7
1J11I
(Y)
jl
jjj JP
A,^
il
L^
J^
oLJjJl fUJl
lî:
U*
Sl^lj jÛJI
^xo
rt
j.\A^
jj^-*^-
Jl
-fiPc^y
Ip
t^^.
4^
<,A:î
<:)l>
ll
^^.
L,
(3
^ j|
'
-uj^J
^^j
jU^ O^T jl
^-1:11
c,5jll
<JI
-gJ.
^J| J J J J|
L.
J
C^xJI <
C---\^
<^
&y iujT
AP!
<rjA3
\
Jl
$
<<^l^ ^^
^^J ^J
<3 jj Lo
^j
jAi3 J
lr
îi
111
îllj
"
jl
jl
<^
ij
^^Ll
JP s^lc lÂ;
IP
JP
j-^
l^s UAxpl^
*j),
J*
OAJI ;,j
?.
4)1^1
^^1
Uj
J, dili
^1^ J--
(3) Rel,
Adj from <j^-
lj~*~
J AA.3
^"-
'
(I) Steps,
(4)
Family.
M. decisions
(5)
(2)
A clear
The next sowing.
register.
(6)
Harvest,
livelihoocl'
#jS>
^ ^W
l^l
<u-
J^l
J^3
JP
/
Jl <^jr
UP!^
?.
Û
A**"
jKlJ!
(A)
L.
jp
l)l
JS
-j
i
jr j^-Hlj
lj-l^^l
ÎJUiJl
J^J
ili;l
j^
\p\\ Tîj'j
JJ
v-ilL jl
li^l
(I)
Census
Law
(4) Census, or Statistics.
(2)
(5)
^^-^k) jl
l
 J;^ Jp
Name
We
of the Official Gazette-
have decreed.
(8) Article.
Directions (PO(II) Irreg. PL of sanaf, taxcollector.

(10) State (Adj).
PI. of 'Omda. Major of town,
(12)
(13) One pi. of Shaikh, or rather, of Mathyakha.
(15) Figures.
(16) Penalty, fine, (17) Pound, lit. guinea.
(14) The one referred to.
(9)
A*
jfc'ljAi
(r)
fUl
U* <^3
(>)
<plj3
(T)
j^Jl olAL
jlXjl
'
.
oV<
jl aî-l
oUU ^"
xll
0^^1*11
^^
AT
dUj
JU-jl
(0)
Olc^y^j
Jl-Ji
jl^Vl
^^ J
Jll
JJJI
U iiJ ^^^11 JJ
all
j.
^S *}
j^JS
i i-ra ll
jv'î)! j
'(cll^j
-(
SAÎ jJI <*Jall
jic-'l
J^
j|
jl
(1)
J^
A*Lj lij
Decided upon manuring.
Ammonia.
(4)
Depots.
(6)
Oriental Publicity
(9)
P.O. Box.
(5)
Company.
(10) Cairo.
j^H
(2)
Jl
-o^p
all
Chemical Manure.
Limited
(3)
Sulphate of
(Eg)
(7) Trades, or Professions.
(8)
Addresses.
TN
J^
(0)
'
\
(1)
o^dlj
L:H
u I**)
II
oL-
'
J ^ ÛA^^l
J^*A)
^j
(v)
l^l
il
.l
^j ^
J-^,
l^
J^j >,)! ibj
jl
j^*l!
-ojb^fl
Jlj^'l
(I) Messrs.
knowledge).
quantities.
(8)
Thabit Basta
&
Co.
Cootten-ginning mill.
(7) On God be the trust
College
Catalogue,
(15) Graduates.
(12)
(2)
(4)
(//'/.
(lit.
/;H ^ U>-
^ ^
L-A^J'
(5)
Inform
his partners). (3)
vapeur)
jlj
(///.
Situate near.
1?
surround
(6)
Large
(A common way of closing an advt).

(10) Those who failed.
(n) Entrance-form
(9) Evangelical.
or Curriculum. (13) Laboratories.
(16)
Efficient.
(17) Miss
Ruth Work.
(14)
Baccalaureate
(18)
McClenahan.
(Lat.)
<9*,4 î
!jii.| a
(I)
Coming and going
PI.
N.B. I am greatly in sympathy with the demand for Arabic to be the vehicle
for teaching school subjects. Its resourcefulness in such matters as naval warfare
etc. etc., is quite astonshing: the accompanying table gives a few instances. A.T.U.
Derivation.
3)
^/x.f'UJ.J
oA
cj-^"l SjuAl J! Ol*\JI
A-VjO
C_3 ÛXJI
i*>Ull
ij
jl
j^ J ^^.U
Sux;^!
jjS
*i; js.
JjAî
<i^tl)l e-y,
4-JiAi
JjJl >)
Ij-Lui
jL'JI
j.':^\
JlAJ
Si
Jl
olilll
^1^ j
^f J^
^jjl
A-
/t-Âil
Likll
Uj
ol
j ^ A;
1
rr j.- ^
*i
O^-^jl J J^^^J
t^^LJ o^l
J V L^^
*r^j
(^3
(l)
J,
'W
Jl j c.->Ux_]|
LVJj l^.j^
/fjpX)
jJI
io^JI oUljl! JÂ) jkJI
/.*
jO
j oA)A?-
<^JI ^^
JJL:JI
Û
jl i
Jl <jP)i
t-
u
U* j^
rt î
.WJ!
^^^
i j
LJU(I)
Egypt.
Theory, hypothesis.
(4) (J/
makes the
(2)
"None can
tell
you
indefinite more indef.)
like
an expert ". (3)

European.
(5) Frank,
i.e.
Young
NA
He
number of the band to 24 persons, and a school was

opened for them at the Barracks in which they were taught for
eight hours a day. Before the end of the month of Rabi'-aPAwal,
they had become as proficient in their art as one of the best bands
raised the
this
being due to their intelligence, their
desire to excel
(lit-
to imitate).
Names
of the
strict attention
their
(From Al-Qibla).
Lunar Months:
J^
!|
and
?J
j^
Lr
WA
ii)
J*!l
l^Jl*>
Jl
jlj Ûl
^
l^
Jt
bl.jil
Â*
lUu^lj
S
"
^^1
J! JâT
,^^%
 ^li^
r-
iil*
Uîl
kll
,V>
(I)
Be
far from.
(7)
Gazette.
(2)
Physical.
(8) Past.
(9)
A,
jJl
^ v^> jJ
^]|
J Ol'Ul^l
riU;
A;
LLkJI
jlû t^î: j!
Banks.
^"U:il
Jjj-Klll
all
^^
lil
lî
^^
(6)
-UT
j^
jîJ
\J
(o)
(3) Chemical.
R.C. Freres.
l!ll
îl .A^
(4)
Botanical.
(5)
Abyss
NY
WV
^.SjjjJI-ijC-Jl^îl.-j
*
I
a>-
^'
If'J
L^
**
i
*\*^"l
(*ft>
^*>
I
7tf-
^W*
?..
Îj3l J.>>
oly^
r*f-**
jJrl ÂJl
~)
^'^ Vj- 3 J ^f
% '4A
'
U^ Jp j>dl J
3^
1"
^'^^"
Ut^t. Yt J^ <9Û
.
J^
^y $*
xA
'*^*
/frj
j^
4,)^JI
JU A^ll
olcU
Jî
Jl Lx-^-lyj
^^
{j+
<j.J
ftAjft
jli' 1^,9
2*
eS
Ail J^liil
oUj
t^J^
^^ î^ ^^1
,U
A-*
J_y'
0^*
Jj
<iWI
f.
5^" Â*-M*i'
Old
>-i
TRANSLATION:- ARABIC MILITARY
'.*^>- D
1^)0
/c-
MUSIC.
The inhabitants of Mecca ("the honoured") were greatly astonished last Friday afternoon as they saw an Arabic Military Band
of Music passing suddenly through some of the streets of the
Metropolis playing the merriest and the most elaborate tunes, all its
members being from among the natives of this country who have
like
become in spite of their youth, and short time of learning
the members of bands in other countries who have spent many years
in practising this fine art.
The distinguished and noble *Mahmud El-Qaisuni, Sub-Commandant, wrote informing us that when he proposed to form a
band for the Merca garrison from young volunteers, he had no
teacher to carry it out. So he began in mid-Safar to teach them
how to read the notes, untill a teacher arrived from Taif and took
charge of this affair in the middle of the month of Rabi'-al-'Awal.
*
Better omit most honorific
titles in
translating to English.
&
s*
.?
~vr;*'
^. l***j
sr
L*U. k~*t
..
t>
'^-^
_**>-
^.ki)
OA|J ^*k
(r)
jl
(f>
L^nil liÛ^L
cXÎ j
P
U^ljJI cJÎ^-l
JL,jd.|
OÛil
J_
o^ki> j VV*TI
4.3
^.ir
o ) ^w* Â \
i
c*;^
<
**'
^"- 3
o*w?j
JUMl
J<lll Jl
(j Jjla*"
J^
J^l
jl
J^
^Âk]
J;
t
*
j
îJl
yji.1
oli
<rUj jj;^ Jl Wll dul
r*
-~
<
(I)
of Furniture.
direction, ie G. P. O. (5)
(2)
Pi.
of Machine.
Improvements.
(6)
2th
month of
is
uûî
Telegraph wires,
Our contemporary.
(always used of contemporary papers..) Masc.

(8) Unionists. (9)
(3)
ojûii
_,<*!
year. See List Riven.
(/)
11
^..i
(4)
The
General
illustrious
NO
Ul
.OUI
J^>.
^ ^L
Ui
lj
;&
^>JI
L;L
L ûLJil
^*JL, U
liilj.^-1
<^<i)
I-**
lid.
^-
Si^
wo jJ
j>
A,
1^3
(I)
1^1
jj| jljJI
v
.
Material and moral.
ious and national entity.
(2)
Apostates. (3) Calumniators. (4)
Take away our
relig
u
ÛI
U^
0)
JJ
jLJI
JU^J J^-J jJI V UMI
j^L-l
rUjj *UJI
4*11
JLf" bl
JSv-
oljj^j SlJ-l
^jl
j)
^>
jLl
dili
<y
p^sl j
!j Jl
Al>l
l^Jî.
f^>. Jj
c^Jll
JJl*r
Jl
4SI
*
3
Jl
^fjJI
^^Vlj
^JI^Ni Jl
31U.I
^
(I)
(4)
By implication.
Constitutional.
common
(II)
purpose.
(5)
And
(15)
-u
and
after
is
(i.e.
j*
Jê
(2) Political
^Jl J^>-
representatives.
Enforcing laws.
Conventional language
Ji3
JÎJI liîL-l JP
(8) Official
(12) Strengthening.
^^L;ll *iLll
(6)
acknowledg
(3)
Society (see Ex.
jli
PI.
of *>j
34).
(7)
district.
Aiming
at
mei.t. (9) Utilisation. (10) In addition to.
(or, practice)
(13)
Ties
(14)
Acknowledgment of favours
after the preliminary remarks.)
always followed by
v_j
It is
i.e.
Gratitude.
often written, in letters.
introducing the business.)
Send
for inspection.
:<J Ml
UP
Cjl
U
j^^ Ûl A^JJ JI^Vl j^W; j jÛVl î^J Ml
si
Cji j
Mi
^j d\w ;kJ j ^ r ^ju s>*Mi j L; Ji

v^^j yÛÎ
ji-l
<3
Û
*;l
jliil
*iir
AÛI
^^Vjt
JUj
Jl
OA^ j Lj Ulr
0)
oj^-
j,
"
oUU
(j
>-"jl j
A.^j.
Ml s\x
l^CT;
jM
JA^ jl Ml
U
(I)
U)Ul
UJI
(Note the duals, but translate "happiness," only).
worthy ancestry.
JjjJI jl ^^.1 l;JU.

(2)
Worthy
posterity of
NY
< r)
>u
Jl
*
*****
JLJ
4il
IJjL
U^Li Oilj^j
y^p
_,
^yi
*"
4"
^-**
...
li./ Ijru
^^Ju
Sjr^r-
^j
AJ
^.yi;
U >Jj
<
L,
^j\i^j
cîJ
^j\x)
llrUj
J>!jil
;i.*Ll)
oU>j.*Jl ij^*'
>l
Jit
Ux
iA
Vl
Uiuiiij
J-UI JP l^bd
I^Vll^l
o^lx^j
^3'MÎ
LV' jp
^
U-l
(l)
Pasha.
(7)
Jp
Decree, order).
(3) No-t limit praise. (4) Required.

to.
^P Uilj^j ^J
L
Ujf- L'jAAi jl j-JuJl
Iiade (much used in Turkey
Referred
lilAip S^ljj
(5)
Governors.
Uil -il
(2)
(6)
JLJ
I'l
Highest grade of
Going and coming.
NN
v,
**^1
jlil
TO j
c^
jl
L/J^> jl
I*"
^1
4U^
ilu-Vl ^wi)l
^^^JI
L*
J--9
LU
!UL.
Ml
^
^
,.:
JJI
->
|jL
-^-*
^7"^"
^"A^
JUÎ J
x-*
/y
:
L^ v
(1)
(3)
(r)
/p
Suniia
l^^^
L.SII
/*/.
oljl
ij
^J
f-
..
x^l;ll
Ajjil
S-
JL.I ^>jl <Û, Jl
yr
(Uil)
uA>
U-
J*.^
J^3l
lii)
(4)
(jÂil kill
j<
course 0ethod).
Hijaz Railway.
l;Uy i
c /.
(2)
Application.
<UXf ice -chest
V^-
telephone receiver,
hearing trumpet; <>jL- automobile; ol^fr submarine.

(5)
Agency
for the Interior.
etter, circular.
(9)
(6)
Communique.
Owner-of-Majesty.
(7)
Chemin de
(10) Hashimite
(c./.
Per.
(8)
Official
History of Arabia).
V_3A^
i
.^>
<:^-i
Û)l
ju*l
<j| cJL
:>"
tf jr*^'Al**
S5L.AJB j-^^JI
<î>
<I*Jl
^'^3^1 ^-)l ^s
L^ JJlj
p^
'
.lir
j! Ojj.9
A:
'Ojl*ll
jl j SyÛJl
ojl
jj jl
<Ju*)l
^j-Jl
el'j^-î
IjiT
Â
s-lîJl
JP
4,^^11 pjlJaT <>j

*
U3l
jl
UP
(T)
pJl
iiitj <j fiiiy
JbAj,
- >'
j~ j
vfA
:
U^tjb li OÛ
^jlj
>>
^;
(I) Education, 7rf.pl: of
knowledge.
j^C- i^JI
(2)
>
^>*^*
J Jj^l k^l
Muharram Bey Quarter.
jl
Jv
(I)
4*1^ ^/O*
SaHc,
Eng.
European
French
-Fr,
Sala
//.
Written
(Û^l)
f^/f
Coll. Advts., etc.
<Jil
Eng.
JlUl
/* <J3
>('+9~
Written
J*
Coll. Advts. etc.
j,
J* AiO**
Ail^L-
ii
>
n iu-
Ji u^.:<s^j
<
4,UI Aij
((
^Jl r
*,-* J ^>j\
JM*U j^-i
Jipi
J j^l j jV)
jyô
^j
JT
jr
yi
Jr>JI c^Jl j Ji
&
'
^*5t
!
Jl
A^ ^ j*
L^ 7"j 5
JS"J*
'
^^
iC-*"
s.li,
ii,
(I)
jli
beg to
,^J
."
>^3
jliAl j
v r
;JÛ1I JL.JI
(2) I pray,
(3)
3^*11 -UP
^^
jj.X._)
<)j.*4.*^]|
4*^1
AP!
jl
JU-ll
S^ll ^ll >^J
J^
C**Jî!
e?
Those honoured.
the English "

sincere
(6)
iîJl U
^
.
SA^^JI JL
*J^*'^ i^j-*-
U_-
jl j
Complete.
l;
Sic
Jl
.S
1^4 bjl^,4
hope (an inaccurate translation of

I am deeply touched.
(5) Most
(4)
>r
>
L.
Jl
oÛj ^Jl
i*,IJI
}\ji\
(0
H>mJ
LJ
0,0 SAÎ jJI <plJI
>
j idld!
jr
oUJJl
<A
iLJlAi
^Sl^t A)|
U,
4.ljac. l
T)
l
jl
jl
<I^li
(l)
(5) 'On.
(10)
Was intensely dark.

behalf
(6) Civilians.
On
'.-
behalf of himself.
(2)
(7)
(I I)
The
lil^p
>.i^jp
Interior.
Notables.
Salutations.
^^ 1?L^
IP-
(3) Dispersed, cleared
(8)
(12)
Honours, Decorations.
Loyalty,.
L^.
(4) Sirdar,
(9)
Medal.
c^
Jill Sîill
J>k
jl
dUi
f>jl L&- J.liî j.
O)
^.,111 j!j
iLwa5
\Q $
il,
-u,
ojj->
\yS
UjLf
1.3
j.,-
1^3
^^
^P
s.
^>
i-^- -.<
^>Li*Jl ojU- <U^\1J
JJ
fiAj
Jl
j^J
ejl>i)
'
f.
(I)
Rods.
of Estate.
(7) Clerics.
of St.
L)
(8)
Mena.
4>.~jll
(2)
(5)
Farm.
News
(3)
Owner
of his decease.
of Felicity
(6)
title
of 3rd class Pasha.
(4)
Agent
His Lordship the Bishop of Minia.
Was eulogised. (9) Was hidden, deposited. (10) At the Monastery

To his family. (12) Egypt is divided into ij*J\ *>-J\ Delta; and
(il)
Upper "Egypt
(13) Hailstones
(14)
Dhura -Maize.
<-^L! olj jj
ail
Jl
oljLJIj ol^JI vj-^J
'
x>
V jl^j^ U. <^l^
UxL>
.kill
a>Al-!
^jp i*t|jj|
|
Li
JT l^f j oUS^ll
^1, jlLs
jîV)
Jp Ol5îl A^t J
I
îAi
Jli-l
^/jj^.^
bJfeô Jl
ÛlAJl C-iA'Ad (^^1 Jjl)
j>^
O0
r
jjjtl
LI
^4
(I)
(3)
L i^5i>- ^
|T
cA-JI
Ministry of Finance. (2) PI. of A*La^ Department,
(Here means) public
(6) Authority.
[known
U"l
(7)
duties. (4)
Inhabitants.
(5) PI.
or
Administration
of Turkish for bridge-
To be shot. (10) The engine

"
"
(n) Surrounding them. (12) Al Moqattam
(8) British troops. (9)
colloquially as the vaceur 1]
of Saturday.
The tram
<~U oA^
-P
ftJlîjJl
llx)
jj
jllxP ^Jj^-Jj
"
(\!
Â^lJl
i.A.M.ftJ
<*A^
"
jUUj jl A> j jU^j jlcl jSj jl A>3j A>-lj
P-!J
^
^âP Jo
tJiil
Ua*l
dUj
j eA^-l j A^sP-
LUlif- ^.lU Jl5

"
Jî
di!
Â-i^j (*Jj*J J-î oA>-lj
o o
AÛ
.IJLJI
(I)
(5)
Geography.
Source.
(2)
Astronomy.
(6) Especially.
(3)
0)
Came
to
it
(4)
Strong men,
/i7.
stallions.
c/>U
jl
~:>cir
jl
f*i
A^
j^ J jV
^^**
.
dl;i
iJi
*"
J* (S^->
cT
J*
^'^
<
/Ui Jl
A
jfi
'
J^ A
Ill
__^
jA-J
a,
,j
p-
^^
Sj^^l
^* cJ'
(^
O*J
^*3>- Jl
JU
L; Jl
jO
U)
JA <*a>3
4,^-1
j 6î}
Vanities. (2) Vaunting. (3) Equals. (4)
Soul that
commands
Sermon on
to
do evil"
the Mount, St. Matt, v)
woe
to you. (5) Mortification of
Quranic quotation.
(6)
"The
Blessedness to you
(c.f.
HOW. TO USE THIS "READER."

1.
The "Reader" must be
studied from the time the student reaches Lesson 150.
After Lesson 151 work Exercise

2.
Use the lexicon
151, after 152
freely, but enter all
do Exercise
new information
152,
in the
and so on.
rough "Day book",
thence (after verification) post to the "Ledger" vocabulary book. Read aloud
(to a sheikh,
3.
late
4.
if
possible).
After translating to English and studying the notes,

back
to
Arabic.
Read aloud
etc.,
the student should trans-
again.
If at all possible, write the exercises
from dictation by an Eastern.
AN ARABIC READER.
a)M
CLASSIFICATION OF SELECTIONS:
School Reader Exercises.
General News.
Specimens of Correspondence.
new Mecca
Extracts from the
language of Arabia
Advertisements, etc
Extracts from
in 1917
Official
sJJI
<UH being
the
written
A.D.
(including the
^Jj &J
Organ
new "Census Law")
being part of a passage set for an Egyptian
Government "Advanced" Exam.

Poetical Extracts, etc. Examination Paper.
PRIVATE
to
Arabic
Key
Simplified
2nd. Edition
Copy No
PRIVATE
THE SCHOOL OF SIMPLIFIED STUDY

19 LUDGATE HILL, LONDON, E.G. 4.
KEY
to
"Arabic Simplified."
PAPER
7 (A), p.
19.
(r)
(t)
(o)
COT
(B.)
A man
She
Have
ate.
killed a
A man
man.
struck a camel.
Did a man kill a man ?

Hast thou (m) struck a man
EXAM
She believed
king killed a camel.
Did she mount
camel
Have you read
book
The
The
not read a book
13 (p. 34).
Christ.
in
L'/rj;
apostle wrote to me.

base (vile) man.
vile
boy.
took the sword from the man.
He
broke the door.
o
.
c.
EXAM: PAPER
1.
The
tribe
2.
The
Prophet's daughter
3.
Have they
4.
We
5.
Didst thou
20, p. 52.
believed in the religion
Sultan
in
of Islam.
the judge's town.
have the bread of

(f)
is
see the
life.
man and
the
boy
'.
c.
6.
Didst thou
7.
Hast thou
8.
9-
(f)
not eat the bread
(f)
sister
They have a king and prince.

Are the-people-of-the-scripture in Egypt
11.
The King of
Did the king
12.
Has the king a son
10.
the
Heavens,
write a
letter
>:
A>-
^x5
(JUJI),J>JI
^
o
'"
C,
EXAM PAPER
:
25, p. 65.
(A)
1.
My
2.
3.
The owner
4.
He
5.
They
6.
We
book was here
where
is it ?
was with so-and-so.
is
(giver) of the
handsome man
are the
men
of
Quran
(he
God
is
is
the apostle of God.
handsome).
(God's men).
dwelt in the prophet's
city.
(B.)
L -U
(C.)
SEE 24
9,
page
62.
EXAM PAPER
:
SO, p. 79.
(A.)
1.
In the
2.
This
3.
4.
name
is
of
They do
The girl
5.
What
6.
We
of God, the Compassionate, the Merciful.
my
Lord's favour
are
shall
you writing (dost thou
9.
Why
The
write)
on the book
everything.
from the Quran.
They took it
They (f) do not understand
10.
God's goodness).
know
8.
7.
(i. e.
not offer prayer to God.

will go to her mother.
that
do they not prevent her from entering the school
clerk
came
to (in order to) write the letter.
(B.)
>e-'-c
^3
C.
i.
SEE LESSON
2.
Active Participle
23
'.i/
C.>1 (N-)
EXAM: PAPER
I.
and
*
*~
Â*,J
3.
40, p. 105.
2.
*i -r
I
I
l*>
I
I
-*>
SEE LESSON 20
>
jOJ
2, 3, 4,
JL-
&
i
1
7- .>
A9c*'
i
I
V>-
i
'
8.
*^j
)>lii
niQ
(r)
3 G
V-
"-
Sî^l
(v)
in.
(1)
He
(2)
There
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
did not and never will succeed in his work.

is no deity but GOD.
Why
Was
did you not worship God

she not ill yesterday ?
After an hour, the pupil
(f) will have learnt the lesson.

understood the meaning of the psalm ?
Let the above-mentioned murderer be killed.
No matter (Never mind).
Have they
(f)
EXAM: PAPER
50, p. 130.
SEE PAGE
40.
____
-,
___
II.
As regards
(1)
the two
women, one of them
and the other
sick
is
is well.
(2)
The two wives
(3)
Worship
(4)
Praise be to God, the
(5)
They
(6)
My hand
(7)
(8)
The
of the prince entered one of his castles.
(serve)
are the
is
God
did you not understand
Lord
who He
is
of the worlds.
good people.
long and
my
foot
is
small.
shall understand the tongue of the Angels, bit
by
bit.
pupils (f) were in the habit of learning their lessons by
night, but their teachers forbade them.
(r)
'
oj. iAp
r,
"^
EXAM PAPER
:
;/
(r)
~~
60, p. 154.
(A.)
(1)
Peace be upon you.
Upon you be peace and
the mercy and
blessing of God.
(2)
God
(3)
Those have guidance from
(4)
(5)
My
created heaven and earth in eight days.
studied in
brother
many
is
(are
guided by) their Lord.
schools.
an inspector, but
my
father
is
a peasant.
6
(6)
He
(/)
The King's speech
(8)
These are more excellent than those.
(9)
He
is
the
owner of houses and

is
stores.
the best of speech.
is more industrious than, she

The peasants of Egypt know their work.
(10)
(B)
j
sri-
orV,V
jlil
^-
ly-r'j
>tjf
JLr 'CJ
JLxj iuJj
-V
j^ Jj'JA-
UU
*!
^j'^'o^
C.
SEE LESSON 42 5,
LESSON 57 13.
i.
2.
(v)
(A)
6.
"The path of those
(2)
Those people are believers
(3)
As
(4)
Cairo
(5)
(6)
The Lord
(7)
"He whom thou
(8)
There
to
70, p. 182.
whom Thou
(1)
in
(A.)
hast been gracious".
God.
thy days [may] thy rest [be].

is
the greatest of the capitals of the East.
have no friend but the grave.
is
lift
The
[peace.
up His countenance upon
thee,
and give thee
lovest is sick."
no deity but God (Allah).
no power save
(10)
()
EXAM: PAPER
(9)
( t)
in
There
God.
proprietors of newspapers are
All churches have creeds.
no strength and
is
[of
among
Egypt and
India.
the richest
men
C.
2.
Root
"
I
'
c, SEE ,
>
>j
û
o.> jCJ
(t)
"JSJ (v)
4 o.
EXAM: PAPER
80, p. 204.
(A.)
(1)
"Worship me, myself.
(2)
Teach me
(3)
"It is
(4)
"They were
(5)
What
(6)
Hearing
(7)
May God
bless the benefactor.
(8)
Are the
rules
(fern.
PL)
not lawful for [any] to eat
is
sore afraid".
it
(They feared a great
the greatest event of the

is
except the priests".
week
fear).
not like seeing.
of the
dictionaries (lexicons)
Noun
of
Agent mentioned
in
the
(9)
God
help you (bestow upon you).
(10)
God
is
gracious (generous).
(o
(0
>
oUJ
>
LJlL
fe*Tli
(o)
"^
(v)
o
I
'_,&
*
Url>
l)
i^>j$j
JjS
-4.
(A)
IJÂ.
be answered).
to
(Ten
C.
C.
80
Madar
''Honouring".
He
honorific phrase)
(a
'
of
measure
*j
"His presence."
lit.
s;^
Masdar
of
II
Conj
a
Plural
>wl'
of
to give a
name
to.
j^-~**>
of the verb
explanation,
commentary
being
(to explain).
j*~*
Missionary (one sent); passive participle of J-*J' to send.

'
Active participle
fem
of jfi
conquer)
(to
'
"Cairo".
* *
3
rc*xî j-Xôi'
lA^-ai!
of
verb 7*^*
the
of the verb
measure JU^J
^1-^
The
to
praise
J-*-^
to surrender to
local
meaning
God
Mohammedanism.
is
" " *
>
of the verb
*"
of the
verb
7^^
of the verb î*>t
upon the
f>
I
to
'
do good
\\*'

x
*
Jt
i-
_,x.
li ii)
ly.*
>
s.
l>
>*t
e
~>
.
J^JL*^)
"
,^v.<al
i1-\i^tV
J
**
)-*>
^ ^Jaô)
5s.->
.*
^jUî cJî
<l.>li
^J ^tîlî
*f-
'
Ûw
jîi
y^ î> V?^^ i^^
iî!|
iJli
*^
ji ^sC-xi'
j
Sr
il
'
xxxx^^
^~
Si
l>i*c.
x
Vf
^^l
^ks> Ij
i* oj
('JJ)
0^.
^r
x^j
>^.
.x^>
^t
'
^ A
i.j
(B.)
1.
Let us thank
God
that
two men and
woman have
joined
the church.
2.
By examination
man
is
either
honoured or dishonoured.
4.
The two armies fought together and one of them was

The allies gained a decisive victory over the enemy.
5.
Speak
6.
Bad company corrupts good character (manners,
/.
After putting trust in
8.
3.
as
you
like,
defeated.
then proceed to work.
God
morals).
turned (paid attention) to
my
work.
received a certain amount of benefit from meeting him.
(C.)
2)
Ex:
(See 72*: 2)
Ex:
(See 72: 2)
Ex:
(See 72
1.
j^'
*
3.
f^t
To be
cut off.
" "X
**-
3^"
up.
^ xO
xxO
2.
To smash
3*"^*
To
fight to S ether
li
EXAM: PAPER,
100, p. 240.
(A.)
1.
was surprised
at his killing her,
because
had not heard
anything about that before (previously).

2.
Let not your hearts be agitated, because
3.
Ask pardon from God
for thy earlier
ceded and what followed

4.
We
do not approve (care
find his talk boring
him
5.
Do
6.
The
to
Do
and
am
with you.
later sin
[the call to prophetship]
(what pre).
for) his presence with us, because
however
(in
any
case),
we
we
did not ask
come.
who become
not shrink from those
learned
men
naturalised Arabs.
discussed the matter of the passing
everything (the destruction of matter)

/.
not shudder (tremble)
when
if
that
is
away
of
possible or not.
the earth quakes.
'
*
j_
i^!o j
jû
G'j
(T--;
Lkj
,î
juJ
US
L)
*o
U)
,AC
'i J'l
Jlij jl^ll jj
^*i
12
C. English.
13
(5)
(6)
(7)
She was not
ill.
The Assembly (Conference) of the Presbytery (Board of

Sheikhs) will be held on the first of next month.
GOD,
there
is
no deity but He.
have believed) in God and His Angels and His

I believe (lit.
Apostles and His Scriptures and in the Last Day.
The woman delayed until the sun grew (should grow) hot.
I
(8)
(9)
(10)
The carpenter
said
B.
"I
do not
like to hurry
my
work".
>
(X
(r)
>fe-i
*-
(0
(o)
(v)
(A)
C.
To
stretch
deserve
be
filled
write (a book)
abstain
think
14
EXAM: PAPER
120, p. 281.
A.
(1)
Death
(2)
Have you asked pardon from God and repented with
nothing but sleep.
is
repentance
(3)
We
inform you that
who were brought
all
out (turned out)
of the cities dwelt (settled down) safely in the

(4)
The two
true
sticks
new
place.
upon which you have written are
be in
to
your hand before their eyes.
you are right
(5)
Bring your proof,
(6)
You have been weighed
(7)
There
(8)
Let the king's
(9)
We chose
is
if
no benefit
will
in the
If
be done.
to reside in
this
your city
second time, because
upon him these two (few) days
week.
will be better next
'
1;
"
\+
si
'j j-
we
time.
first
the fever does not increase
he
balances and found wanting.
in repetition.
were very comfortable the

(lO)
(honest).
~'_\
*\
î J^" j
"L>/-'/4 y> IjT U\'J
(t)
(>
*
/It
-'I
dl)
i*
>
>SJ-\f
- ^
**&, J *f ^ J^'>*jJ>*! ^*^p

.-
>
>^
**
'^Vll*x
Jy
s
j* di's
'
>l;)
J^J
lfc
>1"J1 jfUll
y~p CV/ <j
(V)
i* (U-.) UJi;
(A)
'
'
*^
ij ytj*V ^ O^^'ifctivi*.****
^ r %^-J
'
J- jl
*" "
jîyi
j
.Jill '^
il>Jl l?\
(V.)
C.
To
consult
To
eat
To
put
To
raise
To
be led
To
sell
To
let
To
take
up
-j
U*
>
!*
To approve
To
'
repent
EXAM: PAPER
A.
i
;iiii
Ju
(\)
Uf.
"
x
(r)
(0
g vjj
^V
(v)
(A)
16
B.
(1)
The
(2)
promise
Paradise is under the feet of mothers. [A "tradition*'].
I will certainly beat them.
How excellent was Zaid
Be content with what money you have.
(3)
(4)
(5)
(7)
is
(6)
(8)
Bring me a dollar.
"Not long to wait"
"Every coming thing
(9)
(or,
is
"Tomorrow
will
soon be here"
Do
in all the earth
as dead,
N. A. Fern
C.
is
N. A. Masc
Verb.
J'J
<*u.
>
EXAM PAPER
:
A.
140, p. 325.
.s
^
I*
li
Thy
who fought in the Path of God (i.e. "Holy

because they are alive in Paradise.
Uli
..
lit.
not count those
War")
near").
Jehovah (LORD) our Lord (God) how glorious
name
(10)
occupy the city completely.

a debt to the freeman.
Allies did not
.> *'.
'-'
,
*
-
--I
.-
'<&& *i
i;
B.
It
(1)
was said
one of the philosophers, "What
to
which may not be
said, even
if it is
true
He
is .the
said,
thing
"A man's
praise of himself."
Know
(2)
in the
(you must know) that angels are kept like holy gems
upper chambers of heaven
God and do
they obey
what they are ordered.

During the time of the Pharaohs, a virgin wished
(3)
her nights in the deserts and wildernesses,
spent some time thus
hut
some of
to
spend
and actually
the savages (barbarians,
Berbers) forbade her, from fear of the tribes of negroes.

C.
plural of
Nations; plural of
<*
Palsied
/*>'
oUj
j
-
upon the measure
'
upon the measure
'
Shepherds; plural of ^'j upon the measure

Its
oo
c>
-i".*
"i*.
verb
^j
is
Almsgiving;
to pasture a flock.
oDJ
legal alms, i5-U
A>
Sick ones
Desert.
Its
upon the measure
(J^j
or
jUC*
is
plural
plural of
voluntary charity.
^jU*^
JU
It is
People.
a plural of
Wise maxims:
Stone:
its
Judge:
its
3lj
Valley
^5
Deities
4*J
its
its
plural
plural
plural
it is
singular
is
is
is
Its
is
<*Ss~>-
upon measure
oj\*e>-
oUa5 upon the measure

i>
^_jl
the plural of
Flock; subjects.
plural
upon the measure

^J upon the measure
is
Gli-j upon the measure (JU*
18
Deacons: plural of ^
Hands.
the "plural of plural" of

J^
It is
whose simple
Ways,
roads.
plural
It is
is Jk
"hand",
the "plural of plural" of
whose simple plural
is
ijjk
4.
**
i
'
Mothers
it is
the plural of the
word
^"
'
The
This
nights.
is
the defined plural of the
EXERCISE
1.
2.
148, p. 846.
God is one, He has no second.

The Arabic proverb says
"A
:
word <Ll
bird in the
hand
is
better than
ten on the tree."

3.
one
Thus there
will be more joy in heaven over

sinner repenting than over ninetynine righteous ones
need no repentance".
Christ said
4.
who
"And we
5.
A woman who
6.
sent
him
to a hundred thousand or more".

has ten coins, of which one has got
God
8.
created the world in six days and rested on

seventh day.
This matter is a hundred times worse than the first one.
9.
The second matter
7.
10.
declare that
your
is
will
ten times more important than the
give
1.
3.
4.
$.
6.
(pay)
the
first.
you back double for
all
sins*
EXAM: PAPER
2.
does
lost,
she not light a lamp (light) and search for it ?

Of the ten virgins there were five wise and five foolish the
five wise ones entered with the bridegroom, but to the foolish
ones the Master said, "I do not know you".
Great
is
150,
p.
352.
A.
the difference between the ignorant and the wise.
Would that she had been a bird, then she might have flown
away from us so that we should not see her again.
"Had your Lord pleased, He would have made mankind of
one religion" (Quran).
"Freely (gratuitously) ye have received (taken), freely give".
"Thee only do we worship, and of Thee do we ask help
guide Thou us in the right path".
My poetry shines on yourdoor as a necklace shines onKhalisa.
19
.x
61;
U U ^j* i.
U CT*JCi C
*
x-
>'
Or)
1>
^'
lti$ *!?.. tUlfc
^^j.i^j Uj*i
-
"pSC
+
1,
}>
i)i?r3
o^
Ji
dej
*U
\l
'
"
(t)
^ '
j3
(o)
(-\)
'
B.
f,
*1
Ln<Ljl'
^jl >i'l
VL*Y
^M
Vl
uu-
ilia
Si
^
"
fcJj
',J
JLJ
(r)
(0
^'^
-
A>
EXERCISE
"
'jy .^:)
--x
>
-i
Jl
L.CJ
.;
JJ Ojr^:
172
(p.
THE SPEECH OF KINGS
IS
\f
-'
r r
".
Uv
cn*^ j
-o.o
A*-J
13 Arabic Reader).
THE KING OF
SPEECH."
When these pupils had finished their soug, His Majesty the
King drew them near to him (lit to his thresholds) and gave
(delivered) them the following golden advice.
:
"My children, although you are to-day but babes, yet you will
become men to-morrow, and the future is in need of upright men
20
who
make
good job of the work which
is committed to them,
whiten their face) by their
good deeds. This can only be by cultivating morals first and
Learning only exists for refining morals and
knowledge second.
will
and who
will benefit their people
purifying the race (lit

people to good conduct
and the
more.
Now
if
life
walk) towards the

(science)
means
to that, nothing
And you
you the path of
will repeat
felicity
your history, which
(i.e.
here
is full
of
things to boast about) and noble deeds. Truly your

in need of hands which benefit the world (lit. creation)
(lit.
God (The
treasures, its minerals,
new
you understand the rudiments of your religion and

and your literature you will find in
hereafter).
excellencies
country is
with what
is
accustoming)
felicity of this world
(lit
of your ancestors
that a lighthouse to lighten for
and
and teaching
origins)
(lit
Thus learning
next.
study the
(lit
bestowed upon them of the earth's

and its elements. Then take
Truth)
and
its
waters,
(make a new departure) in agriculture, manufacture and

commerce, for we are of those whose religion orders them to work
hard. Then be active and try to be worthy posterity of worthy
a
step
ancestry (good sons of good parents).

I shall seize, if God will, the (first) opportunity to visit you in
and financial grants will be provided for all
your class-rooms
;
a scientific
schools to unable them to realise these prospects
the
to
consider
means of promotsociety has already been formed
;
there only
ing education according to the needs of our country
remains for you to endeavour to be men. (From Al-Qibla).
;
EXAM: PAPER
I.
200, page
443.
THE MONEY-BAG.
A.
person went out with a money-bag to the market to buy

A man met him in the road and said to him "Where
a donkey.
to ?"
(Where
are you going
He
?)
said,
"To the market
to
buy
He said, "Say, If God Most High will." He said, "This

not the place for 'if God will'
the money is in my pocket and
the donkey is at the market." When he arrived at the market,
donkey."
is
and took the bag. When he returned

home, that man met him and said to him, "Where from ?" He
'if
God will,' and I did not buy the
said, "From .the market,
'if
and
lo
I
am a bankrupt, 'if God will,' and
God
donkey,
will,'
a thief struck his pocket
the curse
I-
B.
is
upon you,
'if
God
will."
See page 321 for translation of "Al-Rashid."
21
2.
Historians (traditionists) have related that
(a)
first
Noah was
prophet sent, and that his people worshipped idols
Noah was
instead of God.
them and called them to

him and ridicule him. God
sent to
God, but they used to assault
revealed to him that he should build the ark
vealed to him
He
drowned.
300 cubits long

2.
*"
Z ^
Û
3.
(lit.
God
re-
"Build the ark") because they were to be

constructed it from teak wood, making it
and 50 cubits wide.
(b)
^1
the
<W
>
dU.il
ji 5TU
>
>
-a
*^?
Ci^'il*
o-
j jUJ
I
A(Û
-.
JJ ^*U-^ ry
>i
^1
J^ j
>
J>-J
<W
^^
J^j
7-U
<,
Âi.
>
r.
> e^
^ I^^JL^ jl j
-i
jîli 3 ^ j^^r
^j^>
-u:^*
Six only of these to be answered.

Plural.
'
>u>
Singular.
i*
j^^
Word.
Oy j
22
4-
2nd. PI. fern.
1st.
2nd, PI. fern
Sing.
1st.
Verb.
Sing.
A
Verb.
2nd. Sing. Imp.
Verb.
2nd. Sing, Imp.
'i!
/j
^ is
"negative of the genus,"
it
negates
all
its
Ism
is
v-â^
but
its
Khabar
*"
Jt*"
tanwin
Allah
&
by
is
1)
x^J*'
%,
VI in Neg. Sent,
Ibrahim (standing alone)
the vocative
in
the exception after
f^j*
is
Khabar.
like the
^'
is
is
p^j* without
but Khalil being in Construct State to
<
>j*al
2J
Sy V j J^ V
J^>-
and Sy are both c-â^ negated
which negates the whole species.

J^Jo
correct.
Bait-ul-Muqaddasi
for Jerusalem.
is
Bait-ul-Maqdisi would
weak, but
Al-Bait-ul-Muqaddasi
House," whereas the others

City) of the Sanctuary."
may
it is
be more
the old Muslim
would mean
be rendered.
title
"The Holy
"The House
(or
6.
See Lesson 14;
7.
3, 4,
Verbal Sentence <-ii
the
and 148
4x*- is
Revise Lesson 2?
PP- 383-6.
Jb:4J
" ji^j
'
..>
1
I- -3.
one
in
which the verb precedes
See the rules of Agent and Deputy Agent on
noun.
0-9
23
3j
~
dl ji>
6, etc.
*.*
>-.-
-o^
..
o ~
J
'^0^
^Vl 1
1
"
i,jjl
'
.jj
^^
"
University of Toronto
Library
DO NOT
REMOVE
THE
CARD
FROM
THIS
POCKET
Acme
Library Card Pocket
LOWE-MARTIN CO. LIMITED
'
"-.
I1ON

Arabic Simplified 200 Lessons With Key

Enviado por

Dados do documento

Direitos autorais

Formatos disponíveis

Compartilhar este documento

Compartilhar ou incorporar documento

Opções de compartilhamento

Você considera este documento útil?

Este conteúdo é inapropriado?

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

Arabic Simplified 200 Lessons With Key

Enviado por

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

PRINCIPAL

The Arabic Verb, Past

Letters of Prolongation and

Regular Plural, Masc.

Ditto in Construction, etc.

Regular Plural, Fern.

characters, vowels, signs

Eye, Voice, and Ear Ex.

Hamza, Madda, etc.

of Less >n 200).

58. Assimilated Adjective.

Some Derived Nouns with Broken

Derived Conj. (Surd).

"3. Simile Verb

Defective (Subj. and Juss.)

Derived Conjs. (Defective).

119. Conj, X. (Hollow).

Broken Plurals JfU and

All Broken Plurals.

All the plural forms.

All Derived Nouns.

Derived Nouns, Pen-tides,

50 (paged from other end, Arabic style).

NEW ARABIC TEXTBOOK

(Extracts from a Review by Professor R.S. MCCLENA.HAN M.A., LL.D., Principal of

a knowledge of usable Arabic.

"The make-up of the book is such as to please the eye and

for over 20 years a resident in Cairo.

Azhar University, and with that

familiar with the Arabic of the

recognized as an authority on the subject".

the Rev. Prof.

Semitic Languages in the University of Glasgow.

"Mr. Upson has undertaken a difficult bask, as anyone who has

makes good the claim. It is practicable, in the sense that it

" The lessons are

overcoming them. They also show an accurate acquaintance with

with confidence be said that, if the student will

With Exercises, Test-Papers and Reading-Book,

Literary Superintendent Nile Mission Press,

and Publisher of over 350 Arabic Books and Pamphlets

upon the system of

Author of "Hebrew Simplified."

School of Simplified Study,

(of first nine lessons only)

(five lessons only)

Edition,, revised throughout

37 SHARIA MANAKH, CAIRO.

Foreword to First Edition.

Meantime the School of Simplified Study, Ltd., had produced

than a thousand students had been registered.

and was glad

England on medical advice,

1915 the writer

lessons, at the suggestion of the author of the original system.

should be clearly understood that my collaborator, Mr. Wilcox

Friendly critics of this new order of arrangement are invited

educationist, as is the author, recapitulation is the chief of the

Vowels, Figures etc, Lesson 16; others should content themselves

Since this course

intended to be a practical one, the subject

"Modern Written Arabic,"

who have made

This course is absolutely "COPYRIGHT," and may not be used